You are on page 1of 444

Title Page

g
G60 Revision: 4.9x

GE Industrial Systems

G60 Generator Management Relay


UR Series Instruction Manual

Manual P/N: 1601-0110-M2 (GEK-113208A) Copyright 2006 GE Multilin

830715A1.CDR

RE

T GIS ERE

GE Multilin 215 Anderson Avenue, Markham, Ontario Canada L6E 1B3 Tel: (905) 294-6222 Fax: (905) 201-2098 Internet: http://www.GEindustrial.com/multilin

ISO9001:2000
EM

U LT I L

GE Multilin's Quality Management System is registered to ISO9001:2000 QMI # 005094 UL # A3775

Addendum

g
ADDENDUM

GE Industrial Systems

This Addendum contains information that relates to the G60 Generator Management Relay relay, version 4.9x. This addendum lists a number of information items that appear in the instruction manual GEK-113208A (revision M2) but are not included in the current G60 operations. The following functions/items are not yet available with the current version of the G60 relay: Signal Sources SRC 5 and SRC 6 Version 4.0x and higher releases of the G60 relay includes new hardware (CPU and CT/VT modules). The new CPU modules are specified with the following order codes: 9E, 9G, 9H, 9J, 9K, 9L, 9M, 9N, 9P, and 9R. The new CT/VT modules are specified with the following order codes: 8F, 8G, 8H, 8J. The following table maps the relationship between the old CPU and CT/VT modules to the newer versions:
MODULE CPU OLD 9A 9C 9D -------CT/VT 8A 8B 8C 8D NEW 9E 9G 9H 9J 9K 9L 9M 9N 9P 9R 8F 8G 8H 8J DESCRIPTION RS485 and RS485 (Modbus RTU, DNP) RS485 and 10Base-F (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP) RS485 and redundant 10Base-F (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP) RS485 and multi-mode ST 100Base-FX RS485 and multi-mode ST redundant 100Base-FX RS485 and single mode SC 100Base-FX RS485 and single mode SC redundant 100Base-FX RS485 and 10/100Base-T RS485 and single mode ST 100Base-FX RS485 and single mode ST redundant 100Base-FX Standard 4CT/4VT Sensitive Ground 4CT/4VT Standard 8CT Sensitive Ground 8CT/8VT

The new CT/VT modules can only be used with the new CPUs (9E, 9G, 9H, 9J, 9K, 9L, 9M, 9N, 9P, 9R), and the old CT/ VT modules can only be used with the old CPU modules (9A, 9C, 9D). To prevent any hardware mismatches, the new CPU and CT/VT modules have blue labels and a warning sticker stating Attn.: Ensure CPU and DSP module label colors are the same!. In the event that there is a mismatch between the CPU and CT/VT module, the relay will not function and a DSP ERROR or HARDWARE MISMATCH error will be displayed. All other input/output modules are compatible with the new hardware. With respect to the firmware, firmware versions 4.0x and higher are only compatible with the new CPU and CT/VT modules. Previous versions of the firmware (3.4x and earlier) are only compatible with the older CPU and CT/VT modules.

Table of Contents

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. GETTING STARTED

1.1 IMPORTANT PROCEDURES


1.1.1 1.1.2 1.2.1 1.2.2 1.2.3 1.2.4 1.3.1 1.3.2 1.3.3 1.4.1 1.4.2 1.4.3 1.5.1 1.5.2 1.5.3 1.5.4 1.5.5 1.5.6 1.5.7 CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS ........................................................................... 1-1 INSPECTION CHECKLIST ................................................................................ 1-1 INTRODUCTION TO THE UR ........................................................................... 1-2 HARDWARE ARCHITECTURE ......................................................................... 1-3 SOFTWARE ARCHITECTURE.......................................................................... 1-4 IMPORTANT CONCEPTS ................................................................................. 1-4 PC REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................................ 1-5 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................. 1-5 CONNECTING ENERVISTA UR SETUP WITH THE G60 ................................ 1-7 MOUNTING AND WIRING............................................................................... 1-10 COMMUNICATIONS........................................................................................ 1-10 FACEPLATE DISPLAY .................................................................................... 1-10 FACEPLATE KEYPAD..................................................................................... 1-11 MENU NAVIGATION ....................................................................................... 1-11 MENU HIERARCHY ........................................................................................ 1-11 RELAY ACTIVATION....................................................................................... 1-12 RELAY PASSWORDS ..................................................................................... 1-12 FLEXLOGIC CUSTOMIZATION................................................................... 1-12 COMMISSIONING ........................................................................................... 1-13

1.2 UR OVERVIEW

1.3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE

1.4 UR HARDWARE

1.5 USING THE RELAY

2. PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

2.1 INTRODUCTION
2.1.1 2.1.2 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.2.4 2.2.5 2.2.6 2.2.7 2.2.8 2.2.9 2.2.10 2.2.11 2.2.12 2.2.13 2.2.14 OVERVIEW........................................................................................................ 2-1 ORDERING........................................................................................................ 2-2 PROTECTION ELEMENTS ............................................................................... 2-6 USER-PROGRAMMABLE ELEMENTS ........................................................... 2-10 MONITORING .................................................................................................. 2-11 METERING ...................................................................................................... 2-11 INPUTS ............................................................................................................ 2-12 POWER SUPPLY ............................................................................................ 2-13 OUTPUTS ........................................................................................................ 2-13 COMMUNICATIONS........................................................................................ 2-14 INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS ............................................................... 2-15 ENVIRONMENTAL .......................................................................................... 2-15 TYPE TESTS ................................................................................................... 2-16 PRODUCTION TESTS .................................................................................... 2-16 APPROVALS ................................................................................................... 2-16 MAINTENANCE ............................................................................................... 2-16

2.2 SPECIFICATIONS

3. HARDWARE

3.1 DESCRIPTION
3.1.1 3.1.2 3.1.3 3.2.1 3.2.2 3.2.3 3.2.4 3.2.5 3.2.6 3.2.7 3.2.8 3.2.9 PANEL CUTOUT ............................................................................................... 3-1 MODULE WITHDRAWAL AND INSERTION ..................................................... 3-4 REAR TERMINAL LAYOUT............................................................................... 3-5 TYPICAL WIRING.............................................................................................. 3-6 DIELECTRIC STRENGTH ................................................................................. 3-7 CONTROL POWER ........................................................................................... 3-7 CT/VT MODULES .............................................................................................. 3-8 CONTACT INPUTS/OUTPUTS ....................................................................... 3-10 TRANSDUCER INPUTS/OUTPUTS ................................................................ 3-17 RS232 FACEPLATE PORT ............................................................................. 3-18 CPU COMMUNICATIONS PORTS.................................................................. 3-18 IRIG-B .............................................................................................................. 3-21

3.2 WIRING

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

TABLE OF CONTENTS 3.3 DIRECT INPUT/OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS


3.3.1 3.3.2 3.3.3 3.3.4 3.3.5 3.3.6 3.3.7 3.3.8 3.3.9 DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................3-22 FIBER: LED AND ELED TRANSMITTERS ......................................................3-24 FIBER-LASER TRANSMITTERS .....................................................................3-24 G.703 INTERFACE...........................................................................................3-25 RS422 INTERFACE .........................................................................................3-28 RS422 AND FIBER INTERFACE .....................................................................3-30 G.703 AND FIBER INTERFACE ......................................................................3-30 IEEE C37.94 INTERFACE................................................................................3-31 C37.94SM INTERFACE ...................................................................................3-33

4. HUMAN INTERFACES

4.1 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE INTERFACE


4.1.1 4.1.2 4.1.3 4.1.4 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.3 4.2.4 4.2.5 4.2.6 GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE.......................................................................4-1 CREATING A SITE LIST ....................................................................................4-1 SOFTWARE OVERVIEW ...................................................................................4-1 ENERVISTA UR SETUP MAIN WINDOW..........................................................4-3 FACEPLATE .......................................................................................................4-4 LED INDICATORS..............................................................................................4-5 DISPLAY.............................................................................................................4-8 KEYPAD .............................................................................................................4-8 MENUS ...............................................................................................................4-8 CHANGING SETTINGS ...................................................................................4-10

4.2 FACEPLATE INTERFACE

5. SETTINGS

5.1 OVERVIEW
5.1.1 5.1.2 5.1.3 5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.3 5.2.4 5.2.5 5.2.6 5.2.7 5.2.8 5.2.9 5.2.10 5.2.11 5.2.12 5.2.13 5.2.14 5.2.15 5.2.16 5.2.17 5.2.18 5.3.1 5.3.2 5.3.3 5.3.4 5.4.1 5.4.2 5.4.3 5.4.4 5.4.5 5.4.6 5.4.7 SETTINGS MAIN MENU ....................................................................................5-1 INTRODUCTION TO ELEMENTS ......................................................................5-4 INTRODUCTION TO AC SOURCES..................................................................5-5 PASSWORD SECURITY....................................................................................5-8 DISPLAY PROPERTIES ....................................................................................5-9 CLEAR RELAY RECORDS ..............................................................................5-11 COMMUNICATIONS ........................................................................................5-12 MODBUS USER MAP ......................................................................................5-23 REAL TIME CLOCK .........................................................................................5-24 USER-PROGRAMMABLE FAULT REPORT....................................................5-24 OSCILLOGRAPHY ...........................................................................................5-25 DATA LOGGER ................................................................................................5-27 USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS .....................................................................5-28 USER-PROGRAMMABLE SELF TESTS .........................................................5-31 CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS ............................................................................5-32 USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS....................................................5-33 FLEX STATE PARAMETERS ..........................................................................5-34 USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS ........................................................................5-35 DIRECT INPUTS/OUTPUTS ............................................................................5-37 TELEPROTECTION .........................................................................................5-42 INSTALLATION ................................................................................................5-43 AC INPUTS.......................................................................................................5-44 POWER SYSTEM ............................................................................................5-45 SIGNAL SOURCES ..........................................................................................5-46 FLEXCURVES ..................................................................................................5-48 INTRODUCTION TO FLEXLOGIC................................................................5-55 FLEXLOGIC RULES .....................................................................................5-63 FLEXLOGIC EVALUATION ..........................................................................5-63 FLEXLOGIC EXAMPLE ................................................................................5-64 FLEXLOGIC EQUATION EDITOR................................................................5-68 FLEXLOGIC TIMERS ...................................................................................5-68 FLEXELEMENTS ..........................................................................................5-69

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

5.3 SYSTEM SETUP

5.4 FLEXLOGIC

vi

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

TABLE OF CONTENTS
5.4.8 5.5.1 5.5.2 5.5.3 5.5.4 5.5.5 5.5.6 5.5.7 5.5.8 5.5.9 5.5.10 5.5.11 5.5.12 5.5.13 5.5.14 5.5.15 5.5.16 5.6.1 5.6.2 5.6.3 5.6.4 5.6.5 5.6.6 5.6.7 5.6.8 5.6.9 5.6.10 5.7.1 5.7.2 5.7.3 5.7.4 5.7.5 5.7.6 5.7.7 5.7.8 5.7.9 5.7.10 5.8.1 5.8.2 5.8.3 5.9.1 5.9.2 5.9.3 NON-VOLATILE LATCHES ............................................................................. 5-73 OVERVIEW...................................................................................................... 5-74 SETTING GROUP ........................................................................................... 5-74 DISTANCE ....................................................................................................... 5-75 POWER SWING DETECT ............................................................................... 5-82 STATOR DIFFERENTIAL ................................................................................ 5-90 PHASE CURRENT .......................................................................................... 5-93 NEUTRAL CURRENT.................................................................................... 5-103 GROUND CURRENT..................................................................................... 5-110 NEGATIVE SEQUENCE CURRENT ............................................................. 5-117 GENERATOR UNBALANCE ......................................................................... 5-120 SPLIT PHASE PROTECTION ....................................................................... 5-122 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS .................................................................................. 5-126 LOSS OF EXCITATION ................................................................................. 5-136 ACCIDENTAL ENERGIZATION .................................................................... 5-138 SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER............................................................. 5-140 STATOR GROUND........................................................................................ 5-143 OVERVIEW.................................................................................................... 5-149 SETTING GROUPS ....................................................................................... 5-149 SELECTOR SWITCH..................................................................................... 5-150 UNDERFREQUENCY.................................................................................... 5-156 OVERFREQUENCY ...................................................................................... 5-157 FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE................................................................ 5-158 SYNCHROCHECK......................................................................................... 5-160 DIGITAL ELEMENTS..................................................................................... 5-164 DIGITAL COUNTERS .................................................................................... 5-167 MONITORING ELEMENTS ........................................................................... 5-169 CONTACT INPUTS........................................................................................ 5-170 VIRTUAL INPUTS.......................................................................................... 5-172 CONTACT OUTPUTS.................................................................................... 5-173 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS ...................................................................................... 5-175 REMOTE DEVICES ....................................................................................... 5-176 REMOTE INPUTS.......................................................................................... 5-177 REMOTE OUTPUTS...................................................................................... 5-178 RESETTING................................................................................................... 5-179 DIRECT INPUTS/OUTPUTS ......................................................................... 5-179 TELEPROTECTION INPUTS/OUTPUTS ...................................................... 5-183 DCMA INPUTS .............................................................................................. 5-185 RTD INPUTS.................................................................................................. 5-186 DCMA OUTPUTS .......................................................................................... 5-186 TEST MODE .................................................................................................. 5-190 FORCE CONTACT INPUTS .......................................................................... 5-190 FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS ...................................................................... 5-191

5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS

5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS

5.7 INPUTS/OUTPUTS

5.8 TRANSDUCER INPUTS/OUTPUTS

5.9 TESTING

6. ACTUAL VALUES

6.1 OVERVIEW
6.1.1 6.2.1 6.2.2 6.2.3 6.2.4 6.2.5 6.2.6 6.2.7 6.2.8 6.2.9 6.2.10 ACTUAL VALUES MAIN MENU ........................................................................ 6-1 CONTACT INPUTS............................................................................................ 6-3 VIRTUAL INPUTS.............................................................................................. 6-3 REMOTE INPUTS.............................................................................................. 6-3 TELEPROTECTION INPUTS ............................................................................ 6-4 CONTACT OUTPUTS........................................................................................ 6-4 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS .......................................................................................... 6-4 REMOTE DEVICES ........................................................................................... 6-5 DIGITAL COUNTERS ........................................................................................ 6-5 SELECTOR SWITCHES.................................................................................... 6-6 FLEX STATES ................................................................................................... 6-6

6.2 STATUS

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

vii

TABLE OF CONTENTS
6.2.11 6.2.12 6.2.13 6.2.14 6.2.15 6.3.1 6.3.2 6.3.3 6.3.4 6.3.5 6.3.6 6.3.7 6.3.8 6.3.9 6.3.10 6.3.11 6.3.12 6.4.1 6.4.2 6.4.3 6.4.4 6.5.1 6.5.2 ETHERNET ........................................................................................................6-6 DIRECT INPUTS ................................................................................................6-7 DIRECT DEVICES STATUS ..............................................................................6-7 EGD PROTOCOL STATUS................................................................................6-8 TELEPROTECTION CHANNEL TESTS.............................................................6-8 METERING CONVENTIONS .............................................................................6-9 STATOR DIFFERENTIAL.................................................................................6-12 SOURCES ........................................................................................................6-12 SYNCHROCHECK ...........................................................................................6-15 TRACKING FREQUENCY................................................................................6-15 FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE ..................................................................6-15 FLEXELEMENTS ..........................................................................................6-16 SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER ...............................................................6-16 STATOR GROUND ..........................................................................................6-17 VOLTS PER HERTZ.........................................................................................6-17 RESTRICTED GROUND FAULT......................................................................6-17 TRANSDUCER INPUTS/OUTPUTS.................................................................6-17 USER-PROGRAMMABLE FAULT REPORTS .................................................6-18 EVENT RECORDS ...........................................................................................6-18 OSCILLOGRAPHY ...........................................................................................6-18 DATA LOGGER ................................................................................................6-19 MODEL INFORMATION ...................................................................................6-20 FIRMWARE REVISIONS..................................................................................6-20

6.3 METERING

6.4 RECORDS

6.5 PRODUCT INFORMATION

7. COMMANDS AND TARGETS

7.1 COMMANDS
7.1.1 7.1.2 7.1.3 7.1.4 7.1.5 7.2.1 7.2.2 7.2.3 COMMANDS MENU ...........................................................................................7-1 VIRTUAL INPUTS ..............................................................................................7-1 CLEAR RECORDS .............................................................................................7-2 SET DATE AND TIME ........................................................................................7-2 RELAY MAINTENANCE .....................................................................................7-2 TARGETS MENU ...............................................................................................7-4 TARGET MESSAGES ........................................................................................7-4 RELAY SELF-TESTS .........................................................................................7-4

7.2 TARGETS

8. THEORY OF OPERATION

8.1 PHASE DISTANCE THROUGH POWER TRANSFORMERS


8.1.1 8.1.2 DESCRIPTION ...................................................................................................8-1 EXAMPLE ...........................................................................................................8-4

9. APPLICATION OF SETTINGS

9.1 SETTING EXAMPLE


9.1.1 9.1.2 9.1.3 9.1.4 9.1.5 9.1.6 9.1.7 9.1.8 9.1.9 9.1.10 9.1.11 9.1.12 9.1.13 9.1.14 DESCRIPTION ...................................................................................................9-1 SYSTEM SETUP ................................................................................................9-1 POWER SYSTEM ..............................................................................................9-2 SIGNAL SOURCES ............................................................................................9-2 STATOR DIFFERENTIAL...................................................................................9-3 GENERATOR UNBALANCE ..............................................................................9-3 LOSS OF EXCITATION......................................................................................9-4 REVERSE POWER ............................................................................................9-4 SYSTEM BACKUP OVERCURRENT.................................................................9-5 BACKUP DISTANCE ..........................................................................................9-6 STATOR GROUND FAULT ................................................................................9-7 OVEREXCITATION ..........................................................................................9-10 FREQUENCY ...................................................................................................9-11 ACCIDENTAL ENERGIZATION .......................................................................9-11

viii

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

TABLE OF CONTENTS
9.1.15 9.1.16 9.2.1 9.2.2 INPUTS/OUTPUTS.......................................................................................... 9-12 FLEXLOGIC ................................................................................................. 9-13 OVERVIEW...................................................................................................... 9-14 EXAMPLE ........................................................................................................ 9-15

9.2 PHASE DISTANCE THROUGH POWER TRANSFORMERS

A. FLEXANALOG PARAMETERS

A.1 PARAMETER LIST

B. MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS

B.1 MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL


B.1.1 B.1.2 B.1.3 B.1.4 B.2.1 B.2.2 B.2.3 B.2.4 B.2.5 B.2.6 B.3.1 B.3.2 B.4.1 B.4.2 INTRODUCTION................................................................................................B-1 PHYSICAL LAYER.............................................................................................B-1 DATA LINK LAYER............................................................................................B-1 CRC-16 ALGORITHM........................................................................................B-2 SUPPORTED FUNCTION CODES ...................................................................B-3 READ ACTUAL VALUES OR SETTINGS (FUNCTION CODE 03/04H) ...........B-3 EXECUTE OPERATION (FUNCTION CODE 05H) ...........................................B-4 STORE SINGLE SETTING (FUNCTION CODE 06H) .......................................B-4 STORE MULTIPLE SETTINGS (FUNCTION CODE 10H) ................................B-5 EXCEPTION RESPONSES ...............................................................................B-5 OBTAINING RELAY FILES VIA MODBUS ........................................................B-6 MODBUS PASSWORD OPERATION ...............................................................B-7 MODBUS MEMORY MAP .................................................................................B-8 DATA FORMATS .............................................................................................B-52

B.2 MODBUS FUNCTION CODES

B.3 FILE TRANSFERS

B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

C. IEC 61850 COMMUNICATIONS

C.1 INTRODUCTION
C.1.1 C.1.2 C.1.3 C.1.4 C.1.5 C.1.6 C.1.7 C.1.8 C.1.9 C.1.10 C.1.11 C.2.1 C.2.2 C.2.3 C.3.1 OVERVIEW........................................................................................................C-1 COMMUNICATION PROFILES .........................................................................C-1 MMS PROTOCOL..............................................................................................C-1 PEER-TO-PEER COMMUNICATION ................................................................C-1 FILE SERVICES ................................................................................................C-1 COMMUNICATION SOFTWARE UTILITIES .....................................................C-2 NON-IEC 61850 DATA ......................................................................................C-2 TCP CONNECTION TIMING .............................................................................C-2 LOGICAL NODE MMXU DATA MAPPING ........................................................C-2 LOGICAL NODE GGIO DATA MAPPING..........................................................C-2 OTHER LOGICAL NODE MAPPING .................................................................C-2 ACSI BASIC CONFORMANCE STATEMENT...................................................C-3 ACSI MODELS CONFORMANCE STATEMENT ..............................................C-3 ACSI SERVICES CONFORMANCE STATEMENT ...........................................C-4 LOGICAL NODES TABLE .................................................................................C-7

C.2 ACSI CONFORMANCE

C.3 LOGICAL NODES

D. IEC 60870-5-104 COMMUNICATIONS

D.1 IEC 60870-5-104


D.1.1 D.1.2 INTEROPERABILITY DOCUMENT ...................................................................D-1 IEC 60870-5-104 POINT LIST ...........................................................................D-9

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

ix

TABLE OF CONTENTS

E. DNP COMMUNICATIONS

E.1 DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT


E.1.1 E.1.2 E.2.1 E.2.2 E.2.3 E.2.4 DNP V3.00 DEVICE PROFILE .......................................................................... E-1 IMPLEMENTATION TABLE .............................................................................. E-4 BINARY INPUT POINTS ................................................................................... E-8 BINARY AND CONTROL RELAY OUTPUT...................................................... E-9 COUNTERS..................................................................................................... E-10 ANALOG INPUTS............................................................................................ E-11

E.2 DNP POINT LISTS

F. MISCELLANEOUS

F.1 CHANGE NOTES


F.1.1 F.1.2 F.2.1 F.3.1 REVISION HISTORY......................................................................................... F-1 CHANGES TO THE G60 MANUAL ................................................................... F-1 STANDARD ABBREVIATIONS ......................................................................... F-4 GE MULTILIN WARRANTY............................................................................... F-6

F.2 ABBREVIATIONS F.3 WARRANTY

INDEX

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

1 GETTING STARTED 1 GETTING STARTED 1.1IMPORTANT PROCEDURES Please read this chapter to help guide you through the initial setup of your new relay.

1.1 IMPORTANT PROCEDURES

1
1.1.1 CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS

WARNING

CAUTION

Before attempting to install or use the relay, it is imperative that all WARNINGS and CAUTIONS in this manual are reviewed to help prevent personal injury, equipment damage, and/ or downtime. 1.1.2 INSPECTION CHECKLIST

Open the relay packaging and inspect the unit for physical damage. View the rear nameplate and verify that the correct model has been ordered.

G60 Generator Management Relay


GE Power Management
Technical Support: Tel: (905) 294-6222 Fax: (905) 201-2098
http://www.GEindustrial.com/multilin

RATINGS:
Control Power: 88-300V DC @ 35W / 77-265V AC @ 35VA Contact Inputs: 300V DC Max 10mA Contact Outputs: Standard Pilot Duty / 250V AC 7.5A 360V A Resistive / 125V DC Break 4A @ L/R = 40mS / 300W
Made in Canada

Model: Mods: Wiring Diagram: Inst. Manual: Serial Number: Firmware: Mfg. Date:

G60H00HCHF8FH6AM6BP8GX7A 000 830721 D MAZB98000029 D 1998/01/05

Figure 11: REAR NAMEPLATE (EXAMPLE) Ensure that the following items are included: Instruction Manual GE enerVista CD (includes the EnerVista UR Setup software and manuals in PDF format) mounting screws registration card (attached as the last page of the manual) Fill out the registration form and return to GE Multilin (include the serial number located on the rear nameplate). For product information, instruction manual updates, and the latest software updates, please visit the GE Multilin website at http://www.GEindustrial.com/multilin. If there is any noticeable physical damage, or any of the contents listed are missing, please contact GE Multilin immediately.
NOTE

GE MULTILIN CONTACT INFORMATION AND CALL CENTER FOR PRODUCT SUPPORT: GE Multilin 215 Anderson Avenue Markham, Ontario Canada L6E 1B3 TELEPHONE: FAX: E-MAIL: HOME PAGE: (905) 294-6222, 1-800-547-8629 (North America only) (905) 201-2098 gemultilin@indsys.ge.com http://www.GEindustrial.com/multilin

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

1-1

1.2 UR OVERVIEW 1.2UR OVERVIEW

1 GETTING STARTED 1.2.1 INTRODUCTION TO THE UR

Historically, substation protection, control, and metering functions were performed with electromechanical equipment. This first generation of equipment was gradually replaced by analog electronic equipment, most of which emulated the singlefunction approach of their electromechanical precursors. Both of these technologies required expensive cabling and auxiliary equipment to produce functioning systems. Recently, digital electronic equipment has begun to provide protection, control, and metering functions. Initially, this equipment was either single function or had very limited multi-function capability, and did not significantly reduce the cabling and auxiliary equipment required. However, recent digital relays have become quite multi-functional, reducing cabling and auxiliaries significantly. These devices also transfer data to central control facilities and Human Machine Interfaces using electronic communications. The functions performed by these products have become so broad that many users now prefer the term IED (Intelligent Electronic Device). It is obvious to station designers that the amount of cabling and auxiliary equipment installed in stations can be even further reduced, to 20% to 70% of the levels common in 1990, to achieve large cost reductions. This requires placing even more functions within the IEDs. Users of power equipment are also interested in reducing cost by improving power quality and personnel productivity, and as always, in increasing system reliability and efficiency. These objectives are realized through software which is used to perform functions at both the station and supervisory levels. The use of these systems is growing rapidly. High speed communications are required to meet the data transfer rates required by modern automatic control and monitoring systems. In the near future, very high speed communications will be required to perform protection signaling with a performance target response time for a command signal between two IEDs, from transmission to reception, of less than 3 milliseconds. This has been established by the IEC 61850 standard. IEDs with the capabilities outlined above will also provide significantly more power system data than is presently available, enhance operations and maintenance, and permit the use of adaptive system configuration for protection and control systems. This new generation of equipment must also be easily incorporated into automation systems, at both the station and enterprise levels. The GE Multilin Universal Relay (UR) has been developed to meet these goals.

1-2

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

1 GETTING STARTED

1.2 UR OVERVIEW 1.2.2 HARDWARE ARCHITECTURE

a) UR BASIC DESIGN The UR is a digital-based device containing a central processing unit (CPU) that handles multiple types of input and output signals. The UR can communicate over a local area network (LAN) with an operator interface, a programming device, or another UR device.

Input Elements
Contact Inputs Virtual Inputs Analog Inputs CT Inputs VT Inputs Remote Inputs Direct Inputs
Input Status Table

CPU Module
Protective Elements Pickup Dropout Output Operate
Status

Output Elements
Contact Outputs Virtual Outputs Analog Outputs Remote Outputs -DNA -USER Direct Outputs

Logic Gates

Table

LAN Programming Device Operator Interface


827822A2.CDR

Figure 12: UR CONCEPT BLOCK DIAGRAM The CPU module contains firmware that provides protection elements in the form of logic algorithms, as well as programmable logic gates, timers, and latches for control features. Input elements accept a variety of analog or digital signals from the field. The UR isolates and converts these signals into logic signals used by the relay. Output elements convert and isolate the logic signals generated by the relay into digital or analog signals that can be used to control field devices. b) UR SIGNAL TYPES The contact inputs and outputs are digital signals associated with connections to hard-wired contacts. Both wet and dry contacts are supported. The virtual inputs and outputs are digital signals associated with UR-series internal logic signals. Virtual inputs include signals generated by the local user interface. The virtual outputs are outputs of FlexLogic equations used to customize the device. Virtual outputs can also serve as virtual inputs to FlexLogic equations. The analog inputs and outputs are signals that are associated with transducers, such as Resistance Temperature Detectors (RTDs). The CT and VT inputs refer to analog current transformer and voltage transformer signals used to monitor AC power lines. The UR-series relays support 1 A and 5 A CTs. The remote inputs and outputs provide a means of sharing digital point state information between remote UR-series devices. The remote outputs interface to the remote inputs of other UR-series devices. Remote outputs are FlexLogic operands inserted into IEC 61850 GSSE and GOOSE messages. The direct inputs and outputs provide a means of sharing digital point states between a number of UR-series IEDs over a dedicated fiber (single or multimode), RS422, or G.703 interface. No switching equipment is required as the IEDs are connected directly in a ring or redundant (dual) ring configuration. This feature is optimized for speed and intended for pilotaided schemes, distributed logic applications, or the extension of the input/output capabilities of a single relay chassis.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

1-3

1.2 UR OVERVIEW c) UR SCAN OPERATION

1 GETTING STARTED

The UR-series devices operate in a cyclic scan fashion. The device reads the inputs into an input status table, solves the logic program (FlexLogic equation), and then sets each output to the appropriate state in an output status table. Any resulting task execution is priority interrupt-driven.

Read Inputs
Protection elements serviced by sub-scan

Protective Elements

Solve Logic

PKP DPO OP

Set Outputs
827823A1.CDR

Figure 13: UR-SERIES SCAN OPERATION 1.2.3 SOFTWARE ARCHITECTURE The firmware (software embedded in the relay) is designed in functional modules which can be installed in any relay as required. This is achieved with Object-Oriented Design and Programming (OOD/OOP) techniques. Object-Oriented techniques involve the use of objects and classes. An object is defined as a logical entity that contains both data and code that manipulates that data. A class is the generalized form of similar objects. By using this concept, one can create a Protection Class with the Protection Elements as objects of the class such as Time Overcurrent, Instantaneous Overcurrent, Current Differential, Undervoltage, Overvoltage, Underfrequency, and Distance. These objects represent completely self-contained software modules. The same object-class concept can be used for Metering, Input/Output Control, HMI, Communications, or any functional entity in the system. Employing OOD/OOP in the software architecture of the Universal Relay achieves the same features as the hardware architecture: modularity, scalability, and flexibility. The application software for any Universal Relay (e.g. Feeder Protection, Transformer Protection, Distance Protection) is constructed by combining objects from the various functionality classes. This results in a common look and feel across the entire family of UR-series platform-based applications. 1.2.4 IMPORTANT CONCEPTS As described above, the architecture of the UR-series relays differ from previous devices. To achieve a general understanding of this device, some sections of Chapter 5 are quite helpful. The most important functions of the relay are contained in elements. A description of the UR-series elements can be found in the Introduction to Elements section in Chapter 5. An example of a simple element, and some of the organization of this manual, can be found in the Digital Elements section. An explanation of the use of inputs from CTs and VTs is in the Introduction to AC Sources section in Chapter 5. A description of how digital signals are used and routed within the relay is contained in the Introduction to FlexLogic section in Chapter 5.

1-4

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

1 GETTING STARTED 1.3ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE

1.3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE 1.3.1 PC REQUIREMENTS

The faceplate keypad and display or the EnerVista UR Setup software interface can be used to communicate with the relay. The EnerVista UR Setup software interface is the preferred method to edit settings and view actual values because the PC monitor can display more information in a simple comprehensible format. The following minimum requirements must be met for the EnerVista UR Setup software to properly operate on a PC. Pentium class or higher processor (Pentium II 300 MHz or higher recommended) Windows 95, 98, 98SE, ME, NT 4.0 (Service Pack 4 or higher), 2000, XP Internet Explorer 4.0 or higher 128 MB of RAM (256 MB recommended) 200 MB of available space on system drive and 200 MB of available space on installation drive Video capable of displaying 800 x 600 or higher in high-color mode (16-bit color) RS232 and/or Ethernet port for communications to the relay US Robotics external 56K FaxModem 5686 US Robotics external Sportster 56K X2 PCTEL 2304WT V.92 MDC internal modem 1.3.2 INSTALLATION After ensuring the minimum requirements for using EnerVista UR Setup are met (see previous section), use the following procedure to install the EnerVista UR Setup from the enclosed GE enerVista CD. 1. 2. 3. 4. Insert the GE enerVista CD into your CD-ROM drive. Click the Install Now button and follow the installation instructions to install the no-charge enerVista software. When installation is complete, start the enerVista Launchpad application. Click the IED Setup section of the Launch Pad window.

The following qualified modems have been tested to be compliant with the G60 and the EnerVista UR Setup software.

5.

In the enerVista Launch Pad window, click the Install Software button and select the G60 Generator Management Relay from the Install Software window as shown below. Select the Web option to ensure the most recent software

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

1-5

1.3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE

1 GETTING STARTED

release, or select CD if you do not have a web connection, then click the Check Now button to list software items for the G60.

6.

Select the G60 software program and release notes (if desired) from the list and click the Download Now button to obtain the installation program.

7. 8. 9.

enerVista Launchpad will obtain the installation program from the Web or CD. Once the download is complete, doubleclick the installation program to install the EnerVista UR Setup software. Select the complete path, including the new directory name, where the EnerVista UR Setup will be installed. Click on Next to begin the installation. The files will be installed in the directory indicated and the installation program will automatically create icons and add EnerVista UR Setup to the Windows start menu.

1-6

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

1 GETTING STARTED

1.3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE

10. Click Finish to end the installation. The G60 device will be added to the list of installed IEDs in the enerVista Launchpad window, as shown below.

1.3.3 CONNECTING ENERVISTA UR SETUP WITH THE G60 This section is intended as a quick start guide to using the EnerVista UR Setup software. Please refer to the EnerVista UR Setup Help File and Chapter 4 of this manual for more information. a) CONFIGURING AN ETHERNET CONNECTION Before starting, verify that the Ethernet network cable is properly connected to the Ethernet port on the back of the relay. To setup the relay for Ethernet communications, it will be necessary to define a Site, then add the relay as a Device at that site. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Install and start the latest version of the EnerVista UR Setup software (available from the GE enerVista CD or online from http://www.GEindustrial.com/multilin (see previous section for installation instructions). Select the UR device from the enerVista Launchpad to start EnerVista UR Setup. Click the Device Setup button to open the Device Setup window, then click the Add Site button to define a new site. Enter the desired site name in the Site Name field. If desired, a short description of site can also be entered along with the display order of devices defined for the site. Click the OK button when complete. The new site will appear in the upper-left list in the EnerVista UR Setup window. Click on the new site name and then click the Device Setup button to re-open the Device Setup window. Click the Add Device button to define the new device. Enter the desired name in the Device Name field and a description (optional) of the site. Select Ethernet from the Interface drop-down list. This will display a number of interface parameters that must be entered for proper Ethernet functionality. 9. Enter the relay IP address (from SETTINGS in the IP Address field.
PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS COMMUNICATIONS COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK IP ADDRESS) MOD-

Enter the relay Modbus address (from the PRODUCT SETUP BUS SLAVE ADDRESS setting) in the Slave Address field. Enter the Modbus port address (from the PRODUCT SETUP MODBUS TCP PORT NUMBER setting) in the Modbus Port field.

MODBUS PROTOCOL

MODBUS PROTOCOL

Click the Read Order Code button to connect to the G60 device and upload the order code. If an communications error occurs, ensure that the three EnerVista UR Setup values entered in the previous step correspond to the relay setting values.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

1-7

1.3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE

1 GETTING STARTED

10. Click OK when the relay order code has been received. The new device will be added to the Site List window (or Online window) located in the top left corner of the main EnerVista UR Setup window. The Site Device has now been configured for Ethernet communications. Proceed to Section c) below to begin communications. b) CONFIGURING AN RS232 CONNECTION Before starting, verify that the RS232 serial cable is properly connected to the RS232 port on the front panel of the relay. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Install and start the latest version of the EnerVista UR Setup software (available from the GE enerVista CD or online from http://www.GEindustrial.com/multilin. Select the Device Setup button to open the Device Setup window and click the Add Site button to define a new site. Enter the desired site name in the Site Name field. If desired, a short description of site can also be entered along with the display order of devices defined for the site. Click the OK button when complete. The new site will appear in the upper-left list in the EnerVista UR Setup window. Click on the new site name and then click the Device Setup button to re-open the Device Setup window. Click the Add Device button to define the new device. Enter the desired name in the Device Name field and a description (optional) of the site. Select Serial from the Interface drop-down list. This will display a number of interface parameters that must be entered for proper serial communications. 8. Enter the relay slave address and COM port values (from the SETTINGS SERIAL PORTS menu) in the Slave Address and COM Port fields.
PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS

Enter the physical communications parameters (baud rate and parity settings) in their respective fields.

Click the Read Order Code button to connect to the G60 device and upload the order code. If an communications error occurs, ensure that the EnerVista UR Setup serial communications values entered in the previous step correspond to the relay setting values. Click OK when the relay order code has been received. The new device will be added to the Site List window (or Online window) located in the top left corner of the main EnerVista UR Setup window.

9.

The Site Device has now been configured for RS232 communications. Proceed to Section c) Connecting to the Relay below to begin communications. c) CONNECTING TO THE RELAY 1. Open the Display Properties window through the Site List tree as shown below:

1-8

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

1 GETTING STARTED

1.3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE

Expand the Site List by double-clicking or by selecting the [+] box

Communications Status Indicator Green LED = OK, Red LED = No Communications UR icon = report open

842743A1.CDR

2. 3.

The Display Properties window will open with a status indicator on the lower left of the EnerVista UR Setup window. If the status indicator is red, verify that the Ethernet network cable is properly connected to the Ethernet port on the back of the relay and that the relay has been properly setup for communications (steps A and B earlier). If a relay icon appears in place of the status indicator, than a report (such as an oscillography or event record) is open. Close the report to re-display the green status indicator.

4.

The Display Properties settings can now be edited, printed, or changed according to user specifications. Refer to Chapter 4 in this manual and the EnerVista UR Setup Help File for more information about the using the EnerVista UR Setup software interface.

NOTE

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

1-9

1.4 UR HARDWARE 1.4UR HARDWARE

1 GETTING STARTED 1.4.1 MOUNTING AND WIRING

Please refer to Chapter 3: Hardware for detailed mounting and wiring instructions. Review all WARNINGS and CAUTIONS carefully. 1.4.2 COMMUNICATIONS The EnerVista UR Setup software communicates to the relay via the faceplate RS232 port or the rear panel RS485 / Ethernet ports. To communicate via the faceplate RS232 port, a standard straight-through serial cable is used. The DB-9 male end is connected to the relay and the DB-9 or DB-25 female end is connected to the PC COM1 or COM2 port as described in the CPU Communications Ports section of Chapter 3.

Figure 14: RELAY COMMUNICATIONS OPTIONS To communicate through the G60 rear RS485 port from a PC RS232 port, the GE Multilin RS232/RS485 converter box is required. This device (catalog number F485) connects to the computer using a straight-through serial cable. A shielded twisted-pair (20, 22, or 24 AWG) connects the F485 converter to the G60 rear communications port. The converter terminals (+, , GND) are connected to the G60 communication module (+, , COM) terminals. Refer to the CPU Communications Ports section in Chapter 3 for option details. The line should be terminated with an R-C network (i.e. 120 , 1 nF) as described in the Chapter 3. 1.4.3 FACEPLATE DISPLAY All messages are displayed on a 2 20 character vacuum fluorescent display to make them visible under poor lighting conditions. An optional liquid crystal display (LCD) is also available. Messages are displayed in English and do not require the aid of an instruction manual for deciphering. While the keypad and display are not actively being used, the display will default to defined messages. Any high priority event driven message will automatically override the default message and appear on the display.

1-10

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

1 GETTING STARTED 1.5USING THE RELAY

1.5 USING THE RELAY 1.5.1 FACEPLATE KEYPAD

Display messages are organized into pages under the following headings: Actual Values, Settings, Commands, and Targets. The key navigates through these pages. Each heading page is broken down further into logical subgroups. The MESSAGE keys navigate through the subgroups. The VALUE keys scroll increment or decrement numerical setting values when in programming mode. These keys also scroll through alphanumeric values in the text edit mode. Alternatively, values may also be entered with the numeric keypad. The key initiates and advance to the next character in text edit mode or enters a decimal point. The pressed at any time for context sensitive help messages. The key stores altered setting values. key may be

1.5.2 MENU NAVIGATION Press the key to select the desired header display page (top-level menu). The header title appears momentarily followed by a header display page menu item. Each press of the key advances through the main heading pages as illustrated below.

ACTUAL VALUES

SETTINGS

COMMANDS

TARGETS

ACTUAL VALUES STATUS

SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP

COMMANDS VIRTUAL INPUTS

No Active Targets

USER DISPLAYS (when in use)

User Display 1

1.5.3 MENU HIERARCHY The setting and actual value messages are arranged hierarchically. The header display pages are indicated by double scroll bar characters ( ), while sub-header pages are indicated by single scroll bar characters ( ). The header display pages represent the highest level of the hierarchy and the sub-header display pages fall below this level. The MESSAGE and keys move within a group of headers, sub-headers, setting values, or actual values. Continually pressing the MESSAGE key from a header display displays specific information for the header category. Conversely, continually pressing the MESSAGE key from a setting value or actual value display returns to the header display.
HIGHEST LEVEL LOWEST LEVEL (SETTING VALUE)

SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP

PASSWORD SECURITY

ACCESS LEVEL: Restricted

SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

1-11

1.5 USING THE RELAY

1 GETTING STARTED 1.5.4 RELAY ACTIVATION

The relay is defaulted to the Not Programmed state when it leaves the factory. This safeguards against the installation of a relay whose settings have not been entered. When powered up successfully, the Trouble LED will be on and the In Service LED off. The relay in the Not Programmed state will block signaling of any output relay. These conditions will remain until the relay is explicitly put in the Programmed state. Select the menu message SETTINGS RELAY SETTINGS: Not Programmed To put the relay in the Programmed state, press either of the VALUE keys once and then press . The faceplate Trouble LED will turn off and the In Service LED will turn on. The settings for the relay can be programmed manually (refer to Chapter 5) via the faceplate keypad or remotely (refer to the EnerVista UR Setup Help file) via the EnerVista UR Setup software interface. 1.5.5 RELAY PASSWORDS It is recommended that passwords be set up for each security level and assigned to specific personnel. There are two user password security access levels, COMMAND and SETTING: 1. COMMAND The COMMAND access level restricts the user from making any settings changes, but allows the user to perform the following operations: change state of virtual inputs clear event records clear oscillography records operate user-programmable pushbuttons
PRODUCT SETUP INSTALLATION RELAY SETTINGS

2. SETTING The SETTING access level allows the user to make any changes to any of the setting values. Refer to the Changing Settings section in Chapter 4 for complete instructions on setting up security level passwords.
NOTE

1.5.6 FLEXLOGIC CUSTOMIZATION FlexLogic equation editing is required for setting up user-defined logic for customizing the relay operations. See the FlexLogic section in Chapter 5 for additional details.

1-12

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

1 GETTING STARTED

1.5 USING THE RELAY 1.5.7 COMMISSIONING

Templated tables for charting all the required settings before entering them via the keypad are available from the GE Multilin website at http://www.GEindustrial.com/multilin. The G60 requires a minimum amount of maintenance when it is commissioned into service. The G60 is a microprocessorbased relay and its characteristics do not change over time. As such no further functional tests are required. Furthermore the G60 performs a number of ongoing self-tests and takes the necessary action in case of any major errors (see the Relay Self-Test section in Chapter 7 for details). However, it is recommended that maintenance on the G60 be scheduled with other system maintenance. This maintenance may involve the following. In-service maintenance: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 1. Visual verification of the analog values integrity such as voltage and current (in comparison to other devices on the corresponding system). Visual verification of active alarms, relay display messages, and LED indications. LED test. Visual inspection for any damage, corrosion, dust, or loose wires. Event recorder file download with further events analysis. Check wiring connections for firmness. Analog values (currents, voltages, RTDs, analog inputs) injection test and metering accuracy verification. Calibrated test equipment is required. Protection elements setpoints verification (analog values injection or visual verification of setting file entries against relay settings schedule). Contact inputs and outputs verification. This test can be conducted by direct change of state forcing or as part of the system functional testing. Visual inspection for any damage, corrosion, or dust. Event recorder file download with further events analysis. LED Test and pushbutton continuity check. View the event recorder and oscillography or fault report for correct operation of inputs, outputs, and elements.

Out-of-service maintenance:

Unscheduled maintenance such as during a disturbance causing system interruption: If it is concluded that the relay or one of its modules is of concern, contact GE Multilin or one of its representatives for prompt service.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

1-13

1.5 USING THE RELAY

1 GETTING STARTED

1-14

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.1INTRODUCTION

2.1 INTRODUCTION 2.1.1 OVERVIEW

The G60 Generator Management Relay is a microprocessor based relay that provides protection, monitoring, control, and recording functions for AC generators driven by steam, gas, or hydraulic turbine. Current, voltage and frequency protection are provided along with fault diagnostics. Voltage, current, and power metering is built into the relay as a standard feature. Current parameters are available as total waveform RMS magnitude, or as fundamental frequency only RMS magnitude and angle (phasor). The internal clock used for time-tagging can be synchronized with an IRIG-B signal or via the SNTP protocol over the Ethernet port. This precise time stamping allows the sequence of events to be determined throughout the system. Events can also be programmed (via FlexLogic equations) to trigger oscillography data capture which may be set to record the measured parameters before and after the event for viewing on a personal computer (PC). These tools significantly reduce troubleshooting time and simplify report generation in the event of a system fault. A faceplate RS232 port may be used to connect to a PC for the programming of settings and the monitoring of actual values. A variety of communications modules are available. Two rear RS485 ports allow independent access by operating and engineering staff. All serial ports use the Modbus RTU protocol. The RS485 ports may be connected to system computers with baud rates up to 115.2 kbps. The RS232 port has a fixed baud rate of 19.2 kbps. Optional communications modules include a 10BaseF Ethernet interface which can be used to provide fast, reliable communications in noisy environments. Another option provides two 10BaseF fiber optic ports for redundancy. The Ethernet port supports IEC 61850, Modbus/ TCP, and TFTP protocols, and allows access to the relay via any standard web browser (G60 web pages). The IEC 608705-104 protocol is supported on the Ethernet port. DNP 3.0 and IEC 60870-5-104 cannot be enabled at the same time. The G60 IEDs use flash memory technology which allows field upgrading as new features are added. The following Single Line Diagram illustrates the relay functionality using ANSI (American National Standards Institute) device numbers. Table 21: ANSI DEVICE NUMBERS AND FUNCTIONS
DEVICE NUMBER 21P 24 25 27P 27TN 27X 32 40 46 50G 50N 50P 50SP 50/27 51G FUNCTION Phase Distance Backup Volts Per Hertz Synchrocheck Phase Undervoltage Third Harmonic Neutral Undervoltage Auxiliary Undervoltage Sensitive Directional Power Loss of Excitation Generator Unbalance Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent Split Phase Protection Accidental Energization Ground Time Overcurrent DEVICE NUMBER 51P 59N 59P 59X 59_2 64TN 67_2 67N 67P 68/78 81O 81R 81U 87G 87S FUNCTION Phase Time Overcurrent Neutral Overvoltage Phase Overvoltage Auxiliary Overvoltage Negative Sequence Overvoltage 100% Stator Ground Negative Sequence Directional Overcurrent Neutral Directional Overcurrent Phase Directional Overcurrent Power Swing Detection Overfrequency Rate of Change of Frequency Underfrequency Restricted Ground Fault Stator Differential

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

2-1

2.1 INTRODUCTION

2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

52

CLOSE TRIP
24 27P 59P 59_2 59N 81O 81U 81R 25

32

40

50/27 21P

50P

50N

51P

51N

46

67P

67_2

67N

68

78

87S

Metering

87G

50G

51G
27TN 27Aux 59Aux

64TN

G60 Generator Management Relay


830710A9.CDR

Figure 21: SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM Table 22: OTHER DEVICE FUNCTIONS
FUNCTION Contact Inputs (up to 96) Contact Outputs (up to 96) Control Pushbuttons Data Logger Digital Counters (8) Digital Elements (48) Direct Inputs/Outputs (32) DNP 3.0 or IEC 60870-5-104 Communications Ethernet Global Data Protocol (optional) Event Recorder FUNCTION FlexLogic Equations FlexElements (16) Generator Unbalance IEC 61850 Communications (optional) Metering: Current, Voltage, Power, Freq. Oscillography Modbus Communications Modbus User Map Non-Volatile Latches Non-Volatile Selector Switch Setting Groups (6) FUNCTION Stator Differential Time Synchronization over SNTP Transducer Inputs/Outputs User Definable Displays User Programmable Fault Reports User Programmable LEDs User Programmable Pushbuttons User Programmable Self Tests Virtual Inputs (64) Virtual Outputs (96) VT Fuse Failure

2.1.2 ORDERING The relay is available as a 19-inch rack horizontal mount unit or a reduced size () vertical mount unit, and consists of the following modules: power supply, CPU, CT/VT, digital input/output, transducer input/output. Each of these modules can be supplied in a number of configurations specified at the time of ordering. The information required to completely specify the relay is provided in the following tables (see Chapter 3 for full details of relay modules).

2-2

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

2.1 INTRODUCTION

Table 23: G60 ORDER CODES (HORIZONTAL UNITS)


BASE UNIT CPU ** - * * * - F ** - H ** - M ** - P | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | SOFTWARE 00 | | | | | | 01 | | | | | | 03 | | | | | | 04 | | | | | | MOUNT/COATING H | | | | | A | | | | | FACEPLATE/ DISPLAY C | | | | P | | | | A | | | | B | | | | D | | | | G | | | | R | | | | S | | | | POWER SUPPLY H | | | (redundant supply must H | | | be same type as main supply) L | | | L | | | CT/VT MODULES 8F | 8F 8G | 8G 8H | 8H 8J | 8J DIGITAL INPUTS/OUTPUTS XX | 4A 4A 4B 4B 4C 4C 4D 4D 4L 4L 67 67 6A 6A 6B 6B 6C 6C 6D 6D 6E 6E 6F 6F 6G 6G 6H 6H 6K 6K 6L 6L 6M 6M 6N 6N 6P 6P 6R 6R 6S 6S 6T 6T 6U 6U TRANSDUCER 5A 5A INPUTS/OUTPUTS 5C 5C (select a maximum of 3 per unit) 5D 5D 5E 5E 5F 5F INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS (select a maximum of 1 per unit) G60 - * G60 | E G H J K L M N P R ** - U | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | XX 4A 4B 4C 4D 4L 67 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 6G 6H 6K 6L 6M 6N 6P 6R 6S 6T 6U 5A 5C 5D 5E 5F ** - W/X ** Full Size Horizontal Mount | | Base Unit | | RS485 and RS485 | | RS485 and multi-mode ST 10Base-F | | RS485 and multi-mode ST redundant 10Base-F | | RS485 and multi-mode ST 100Base-FX | | RS485 and multi-mode ST redundant 100Base-FX | | RS485 and single mode SC 100Base-FX | | RS485 and single mode SC redundant 100Base-FX | | RS485 and 10/100Base-T | | RS485 and single mode ST 100Base-FX | | RS485 and single mode ST redundant 100Base-FX | | No Software Options | | Ethernet Global Data (EGD); not available for Type E CPUs | | IEC 61850; not available for Type E CPUs | | Ethernet Global Data (EGD) and IEC 61850; not available for Type E CPUs | | Horizontal (19 rack) | | Horizontal (19 rack) with harsh environmental coating | | English display | | English display with 4 small and 12 large programmable pushbuttons | | Chinese display | | Chinese display with 4 small and 12 large programmable pushbuttons | | French display | | French display with 4 small and 12 large programmable pushbuttons | | Russian display | | Russian display with 4 small and 12 large programmable pushbuttons | | 125 / 250 V AC/DC power supply | RH 125 / 250 V AC/DC with redundant 125 / 250 V AC/DC power supply | | 24 to 48 V (DC only) power supply | RL 24 to 48 V (DC only) with redundant 24 to 48 V DC power supply | | Standard 4CT/4VT | | Sensitive Ground 4CT/4VT | | Standard 8CT | | Sensitive Ground 8CT XX XX No Module 4A 4A 4 Solid-State (no monitoring) MOSFET outputs 4B 4B 4 Solid-State (voltage with optional current) MOSFET outputs 4C 4C 4 Solid-State (current with optional voltage) MOSFET outputs 4D 4D 16 digital inputs with Auto-Burnishing 4L 4L 14 Form-A (no monitoring) Latching outputs 67 67 8 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs 6A 6A 2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs 6B 6B 2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 digital inputs 6C 6C 8 Form-C outputs 6D 6D 16 digital inputs 6E 6E 4 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs 6F 6F 8 Fast Form-C outputs 6G 6G 4 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 8 digital inputs 6H 6H 6 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 4 digital inputs 6K 6K 4 Form-C and 4 Fast Form-C outputs 6L 6L 2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs 6M 6M 2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 digital inputs 6N 6N 4 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 8 digital inputs 6P 6P 6 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 4 digital inputs 6R 6R 2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs 6S 6S 2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 digital inputs 6T 6T 4 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 8 digital inputs 6U 6U 6 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 4 digital inputs 5A 5A 4 dcmA inputs, 4 dcmA outputs (only one 5A module is allowed) 5C 5C 8 RTD inputs 5D 5D 4 RTD inputs, 4 dcmA outputs (only one 5D module is allowed) 5E 5E 4 RTD inputs, 4 dcmA inputs 5F 5F 8 dcmA inputs 2A 2A C37.94SM, 1300nm single-mode, ELED, 1 channel single-mode 2B 2B C37.94SM, 1300nm single-mode, ELED, 2 channel single-mode 2E 2E Bi-phase, single channel 2F 2F Bi-phase, dual channel 72 72 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 Channel 73 73 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 Channel 74 74 Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER 75 75 Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, Single-mode LASER 76 76 IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, multimode, LED, 1 Channel 77 77 IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, multimode, LED, 2 Channels 7A 7A 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel 7B 7B 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel 7C 7C 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 Channel 7D 7D 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 Channel 7E 7E Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multi-mode 7F 7F Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multi-mode 7G 7G Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode ELED 7H 7H 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels 7I 7I 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels 7J 7J 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 2 Channels 7K 7K 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 Channels 7L 7L Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multi-mode, LED 7M 7M Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED 7N 7N Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED 7P 7P Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER 7Q 7Q Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode LASER 7R 7R G.703, 1 Channel 7S 7S G.703, 2 Channels 7T 7T RS422, 1 Channel 7W 7W RS422, 2 Channels

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

2-3

2.1 INTRODUCTION

2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

Table 24: G60 ORDER CODES (REDUCED SIZE VERTICAL UNITS)


BASE UNIT CPU G60 - * G60 | E G H J K L M N P R ** - * * | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 00 | | 01 | | 03 | | 04 | | V | B | F L K M H N J Q * - F ** - H | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | H | L | 8F 8G 8H 8J ** - M ** - P/R | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 8F | 8G | 8H | 8J XX | 4A 4A 4B 4B 4C 4C 4D 4D 4L 4L 67 67 6A 6A 6B 6B 6C 6C 6D 6D 6E 6E 6F 6F 6G 6G 6H 6H 6K 6K 6L 6L 6M 6M 6N 6N 6P 6P 6R 6R 6S 6S 6T 6T 6U 6U 5A 5A 5C 5C 5D 5D 5E 5E 5F 5F ** | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | XX 4A 4B 4C 4D 4L 67 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 6G 6H 6K 6L 6M 6N 6P 6R 6S 6T 6U 5A 5C 5D 5E 5F 2A 2B 2E 2F 72 73 74 75 76 77 7A 7B 7C 7D 7E 7F 7G 7H 7I 7J 7K 7L 7M 7N 7P 7Q 7R 7S 7T 7W Reduced Size Vertical Mount (see note regarding P/R slot below) Base Unit RS485 and RS485 RS485 and multi-mode ST 10Base-F RS485 and multi-mode ST redundant 10Base-F RS485 and multi-mode ST 100Base-FX RS485 and multi-mode ST redundant 100Base-FX RS485 and single mode SC 100Base-FX RS485 and single mode SC redundant 100Base-FX RS485 and 10/100Base-T RS485 and single mode ST 100Base-FX RS485 and single mode ST redundant 100Base-FX No Software Options Ethernet Global Data (EGD); not available for Type E CPUs IEC 61850; not available for Type E CPUs Ethernet Global Data (EGD) and IEC 61850; not available for Type E CPUs Vertical (3/4 rack) Vertical (3/4 rack) with harsh environmental coating English display English display with 4 small and 6 large programmable pushbuttons Chinese display Chinese display with 4 small and 6 large programmable pushbuttons French display French display with 4 small and 6 large programmable pushbuttons Russian display Russian display with 4 small and 6 large programmable pushbuttons 125 / 250 V AC/DC power supply 24 to 48 V (DC only) power supply Standard 4CT/4VT Sensitive Ground 4CT/4VT Standard 8CT Sensitive Ground 8CT No Module 4 Solid-State (no monitoring) MOSFET outputs 4 Solid-State (voltage with optional current) MOSFET outputs 4 Solid-State (current with optional voltage) MOSFET outputs 16 digital inputs with Auto-Burnishing 14 Form-A (no monitoring) Latching outputs 8 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs 2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs 2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 digital inputs 8 Form-C outputs 16 digital inputs 4 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs 8 Fast Form-C outputs 4 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 8 digital inputs 6 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 4 digital inputs 4 Form-C and 4 Fast Form-C outputs 2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs 2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 digital inputs 4 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 8 digital inputs 6 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 4 digital inputs 2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs 2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 digital inputs 4 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 8 digital inputs 6 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 4 digital inputs 4 dcmA inputs, 4 dcmA outputs (only one 5A module is allowed) 8 RTD inputs 4 RTD inputs, 4 dcmA outputs (only one 5D module is allowed) 4 RTD inputs, 4 dcmA inputs 8 dcmA inputs C37.94SM, 1300nm single-mode, ELED, 1 channel single-mode C37.94SM, 1300nm single-mode, ELED, 2 channel single-mode Bi-phase, single channel Bi-phase, dual channel 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 Channel 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 Channel Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, Single-mode LASER IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, multimode, LED, 1 Channel IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, multimode, LED, 2 Channels 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 Channel 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 Channel Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multi-mode Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multi-mode Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode ELED 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 2 Channels 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 Channels Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multi-mode, LED Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode LASER G.703, 1 Channel G.703, 2 Channels RS422, 1 Channel RS422, 2 Channels

2
SOFTWARE

MOUNT/COATING FACEPLATE/ DISPLAY

POWER SUPPLY CT/VT MODULES

DIGITAL INPUTS/OUTPUTS

TRANSDUCER INPUTS/OUTPUTS

INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS (select a maximum of 1 per unit

NOTE

For the last module, slot P is used for digital and transducer input/output modules; slot R is used for inter-relay communications modules.

2-4

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

2.1 INTRODUCTION

The order codes for replacement modules to be ordered separately are shown in the following table. When ordering a replacement CPU module or faceplate, please provide the serial number of your existing unit. Table 25: ORDER CODES FOR REPLACEMENT MODULES
POWER SUPPLY (redundant supply only available in horizontal units; must be same type as main supply) CPU UR | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | ** 1H 1L RH RH 9E 9G 9H 9J 9K 9L 9M 9N 9P 9R 3C 3P 3R 3S 3A 3B 3D 3G 3F 3L 3K 3M 3H 3N 3J 3Q 4A 4B 4C 4D 4L 67 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 6G 6H 6K 6L 6M 6N 6P 6R 6S 6T 6U 8F 8G 8H 8J 2A 2B 72 73 74 75 76 77 7A 7B 7C 7D 7E 7F 7G 7H 7I 7J 7K 7L 7M 7N 7P 7Q 7R 7S 7T 7W 5A 5C 5D 5E 5F * | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 125 / 250 V AC/DC 24 to 48 V (DC only) redundant 125 / 250 V AC/DC redundant 24 to 48 V (DC only) RS485 and RS485 (Modbus RTU, DNP 3.0) RS485 and 10Base-F (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0) RS485 and Redundant 10Base-F (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0) RS485 and multi-mode ST 100Base-FX (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0) RS485 and multi-mode ST redundant 100Base-FX (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0) RS485 and single mode SC 100Base-FX (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0) RS485 and single mode SC redundant 100Base-FX (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0) RS485 and 10/100Base-T (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0) RS485 and single mode ST 100Base-FX (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0) RS485 and single mode ST redundant 100Base-FX (Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0) Horizontal faceplate with keypad and English display Horizontal faceplate with keypad, user-programmable pushbuttons, and English display Horizontal faceplate with keypad and Russian display Horizontal faceplate with keypad, user-programmable pushbuttons, and Russian display Horizontal faceplate with keypad and Chinese display Horizontal faceplate with keypad, user-programmable pushbuttons, and Chinese display Horizontal faceplate with keypad and French display Horizontal faceplate with keypad, user-programmable pushbuttons, and French display Vertical faceplate with keypad and English display Vertical faceplate with keypad, user-programmable pushbuttons, and English display Vertical faceplate with keypad and Russian display Vertical faceplate with keypad, user-programmable pushbuttons, and Russian display Vertical faceplate with keypad and Chinese display Vertical faceplate with keypad, user-programmable pushbuttons, and Chinese display Vertical faceplate with keypad and French display Vertical faceplate with keypad, user-programmable pushbuttons, and French display 4 Solid-State (no monitoring) MOSFET outputs 4 Solid-State (voltage with optional current) MOSFET outputs 4 Solid-State (current with optional voltage) MOSFET outputs 16 digital inputs with Auto-Burnishing 14 Form-A (no monitoring) Latching outputs 8 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs 2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs 2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 digital inputs 8 Form-C outputs 16 digital inputs 4 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs 8 Fast Form-C outputs 4 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 8 digital inputs 6 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 4 digital inputs 4 Form-C and 4 Fast Form-C outputs 2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs 2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 digital inputs 4 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 8 digital inputs 6 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 4 digital inputs 2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 digital inputs 2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 digital inputs 4 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 8 digital inputs 6 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 4 digital inputs Standard 4CT/4VT Sensitive Ground 4CT/4VT Standard 8CT Sensitive Ground 8CT C37.94SM, 1300nm single-mode, ELED, 1 channel single-mode C37.94SM, 1300nm single-mode, ELED, 2 channel single-mode 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 Channel 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 Channel Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, Single-mode LASER IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, multimode, LED, 1 Channel IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, multimode, LED, 2 Channels 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 Channel 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 Channel Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multi-mode Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multi-mode Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode ELED 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 2 Channels 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 Channels Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multi-mode, LED Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode LASER G.703, 1 Channel G.703, 2 Channels RS422, 1 Channel RS422, 2 Channels 4 dcmA inputs, 4 dcmA outputs (only one 5A module is allowed) 8 RTD inputs 4 RTD inputs, 4 dcmA outputs (only one 5D module is allowed) 4 dcmA inputs, 4 RTD inputs 8 dcmA inputs

FACEPLATE/DISPLAY

DIGITAL INPUTS/OUTPUTS

CT/VT MODULES (NOT AVAILABLE FOR THE C30) UR INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS

TRANSDUCER INPUTS/OUTPUTS

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

2-5

2.2 SPECIFICATIONS

2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

2.2SPECIFICATIONSSPECIFICATIONS ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE 2.2.1 PROTECTION ELEMENTS The operating times below include the activation time of a trip rated Form-A output contact unless otherwise indicated. FlexLogic operands of a given element are 4 ms faster. This should be taken into account when using FlexLogic to interconnect with other protection or control elements of the relay, building FlexLogic equations, or interfacing with other IEDs or power system devices via communications or different output contacts.
Mho (memory polarized or offset) or Quad (memory polarized or non-directional), selectable individually per zone 3 forward, reverse, or non-directional per zone 0.02 to 500.00 in steps of 0.01 5% including the effect of CVT transients up to an SIR of 30 Right blinder (Quad only): Reach: 0.02 to 500 in steps of 0.01 Characteristic angle: 60 to 90 in steps of 1 Left Blinder (Quad only): Reach: 0.02 to 500 in steps of 0.01 Characteristic angle: 60 to 90 in steps of 1 Time delay: Timing accuracy: Current supervision: Level: Pickup: Dropout: Memory duration: VT location: CT location: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001 3% or 4 ms, whichever is greater line-to-line current 0.050 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001 97 to 98% 5 to 25 cycles in steps of 1 all delta-wye and wye-delta transformers all delta-wye and wye-delta transformers

NOTE

PHASE DISTANCE
Characteristic:

Number of zones: Directionality: Reach (secondary ): Reach accuracy:

Distance: Characteristic angle: 30 to 90 in steps of 1 Comparator limit angle: 30 to 90 in steps of 1 Directional supervision: Characteristic angle: 30 to 90 in steps of 1 Limit angle: 30 to 90 in steps of 1

Voltage supervision pickup (series compensation applications): 0 to 5.000 pu in steps of 0.001

PHASE DISTANCE OPERATING TIME CURVES


The operating times are response times of a microprocessor part of the relay. See output contacts specifications for estimation of the total response time for a particular application. The operating times are average times including variables such as fault inception angle or type of a voltage source (magnetic VTs and CVTs).

Phase Element (21P)


30 SIR = 0.1 SIR = 1 SIR = 10 SIR = 20 SIR = 30

25 Operating Time [ms]

20

15

10

0 0% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% Fault Location [%]
837717A1.CDR

2-6

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION STATOR DIFFERENTIAL


Pickup: Slope 1/2: Break 1: Break 2: Pickup: Dropout: Slope: Pickup delay: Dropout delay: Operate time: Current: Pickup level: Dropout level: Level accuracy: for 0.1 to 2.0 CT: for > 2.0 CT: Curve shapes: 0.050 to 1.00 pu in steps of 0.01 1 to 100% in steps of 1 1.00 to 1.50 pu in steps of 0.01 1.50 to 30.00 pu in steps of 0.01 0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001 97 to 98% of Pickup 0 to 100% in steps of 1% 0 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 0 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 <1 power system cycle Phasor or RMS 0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001 97% to 98% of Pickup 0.5% of reading or 1% of rated (whichever is greater) 1.5% of reading > 2.0 CT rating IEEE Moderately/Very/Extremely Inverse; IEC (and BS) A/B/C and Short Inverse; GE IAC Inverse, Short/Very/ Extremely Inverse; I2t; FlexCurves (programmable); Definite Time (0.01 s base curve) Time Dial = 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01 Instantaneous/Timed (per IEEE) Operate at > 1.03 actual Pickup 3.5% of operate time or cycle (whichever is greater) 0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001 97 to 98% of pickup 0.5% of reading or 1% of rated (whichever is greater) 1.5% of reading <2% 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 <16 ms at 3 Pickup at 60 Hz (Phase/Ground IOC) <20 ms at 3 Pickup at 60 Hz (Neutral IOC) Operate at 1.5 Pickup 3% or 4 ms (whichever is greater) Angle accuracy: Offset impedance: Pickup level: Dropout level: Operation time:

2.2 SPECIFICATIONS PHASE DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT


Relay connection: 90 (quadrature) Quadrature voltage: ABC phase seq.: phase A (VBC), phase B (VCA), phase C (VAB) ACB phase seq.: phase A (VCB), phase B (VAC), phase C (VBA) Polarizing voltage threshold: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001 Current sensitivity threshold: 0.05 pu Characteristic angle: Angle accuracy: 0 to 359 in steps of 1 2

RESTRICTED GROUND FAULT

Operation time (FlexLogic operands): Tripping (reverse load, forward fault):< 12 ms, typically Blocking (forward load, reverse fault):< 8 ms, typically

NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT


Directionality: Polarizing: Polarizing voltage: Polarizing current: Operating current: Level sensing: Restraint, K: Characteristic angle: Limit angle: Angle accuracy: Offset impedance: Pickup level: Dropout level: Operation time: Directionality: Polarizing: Polarizing voltage: Operating current: Level sensing: Zero-sequence: Negative-sequence: Restraint, K: Characteristic angle: Limit angle: Co-existing forward and reverse Voltage, Current, Dual V_0 or VX IG I_0 3 (|I_0| K |I_1|), IG 0.000 to 0.500 in steps of 0.001 90 to 90 in steps of 1 40 to 90 in steps of 1, independent for forward and reverse 2 0.00 to 250.00 in steps of 0.01 0.002 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.01 97 to 98% < 16 ms at 3 Pickup at 60 Hz Co-existing forward and reverse Voltage V_2 I_2 |I_0| K |I_1| |I_2| K |I_1| 0.000 to 0.500 in steps of 0.001 0 to 90 in steps of 1 40 to 90 in steps of 1, independent for forward and reverse 2 0.00 to 250.00 in steps of 0.01 0.05 to 30.00 pu in steps of 0.01 97 to 98% < 16 ms at 3 Pickup at 60 Hz

PHASE/NEUTRAL/GROUND TOC

Curve multiplier: Reset type: Timing accuracy:

NEGATIVE SEQUENCE DIRECTIONAL OC

PHASE/NEUTRAL/GROUND IOC
Pickup level: Dropout level: Level accuracy: 0.1 to 2.0 CT rating: > 2.0 CT rating Overreach: Pickup delay: Reset delay: Operate time:

Timing accuracy:

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

2-7

2.2 SPECIFICATIONS GENERATOR UNBALANCE


Gen. nominal current: Stages: Pickup level: Dropout level: Level accuracy: 0.1 to 2 x CT rating: > 2.0 x CT rating: Time dial (K-value): Pickup delay: Reset delay: Time accuracy: Operate time: Operating quantity: Pickup level: Dropout level: Level accuracy: Pickup delay: Time accuracy: Operate time: Measured power: Number of stages: Characteristic angle: Calibration angle: Minimum power: Pickup level accuracy: Hysteresis: Pickup delay: Time accuracy: Operate time: Pickup level: Dropout level: Level accuracy: Curve shapes: Curve multiplier: Timing accuracy: 0.000 to 1.250 pu in steps of 0.001 2 (I2t with linear reset and definite time) 0.00 to 100.00% in steps of 0.01 97 to 98% of pickup 0.5% of reading or 1% of rated (whichever is greater) 1.5% of reading 0.00 to 100.00 in steps of 0.01 0.0 to 1000.0 s in steps of 0.1 0.0 to 1000.0 s in steps of 0.1 3% or 20 ms, whichever is greater < 50 ms at 60 Hz split phase CT current biased by generator load current 0.020 to 1.500 pu in steps of 0.001 97 to 98% of pickup 0.5% of reading or 1% of rated 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001 3% or 5 cycles, whichever is greater < 5 cycles at 1.10 Pickup at 60 Hz 3-phase, true RMS 2 0 to 359 in steps of 1 0.00 to 0.95 in steps of 0.05 1.200 to 1.200 pu in steps of 0.001 1% or 0.001 pu, whichever is greater 2% or 0.001 pu, whichever is greater 0 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 3% or 4 ms, whichever is greater 50 ms 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001 102 to 103% of pickup 0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V GE IAV Inverse; Definite Time (0.1s base curve) Time dial = 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01 Operate at < 0.90 pickup 3.5% of operate time or 4 ms (whichever is greater) 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001 102 to 103% of pickup 0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V GE IAV Inverse, Definite Time Time Dial = 0 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01 3% of operate time or 4 ms (whichever is greater) Reset delay: Timing accuracy: Operate time: Pickup level: Dropout level: Level accuracy: Pickup delay: Reset delay: Timing accuracy: Operate time: Pickup level: Dropout level: Level accuracy: Pickup delay: Reset delay: Time accuracy: Operate time:

2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION THIRD HARMONIC NEUTRAL UNDERVOLTAGE


Operating quantity: Undervoltage: Pickup level: Dropout level: Accuracy: Power: Pickup level: Dropout level: Accuracy: Undervoltage Inhibit Level: Accuracy: Pickup delay: Time accuracy: Operate time: Voltage: Pickup level: Dropout level: Level accuracy: Pickup delay: Operate time: Timing accuracy: Pickup level: Dropout level: Level accuracy: Pickup delay: 3rd harmonic of auxiliary undervoltage 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001 102 to 103% of pickup 2% of reading from 1 to 120 V 0.000 to 1.200 pu in steps of 0.001 97 to 98% of pickup 5% or 0.01 pu, whichever is greater 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001 pu 0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V 0 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 3% or 20 ms, whichever is greater < 30 ms at 1.10 pickup at 60 Hz Phasor only 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001 97 to 98% of Pickup 0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01 s < 30 ms at 1.10 Pickup at 60 Hz 3% or 4 ms (whichever is greater) 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001 97 to 98% of Pickup 0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 (definite time) or user-defined curve 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 3% or 20 ms (whichever is greater) < 30 ms at 1.10 Pickup at 60 Hz 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001 97 to 98% of Pickup 0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V 0 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 0 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 3% of operate time or 4 ms (whichever is greater) < 30 ms at 1.10 pickup at 60 Hz 0.000 to 1.250 pu in steps of 0.001 97 to 98% of Pickup 0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V 0 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 0 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 3% or 20 ms, whichever is greater < 30 ms at 1.10 Pickup at 60 Hz Phasor only 0.80 to 4.00 in steps of 0.01 pu V/Hz 97 to 98% of Pickup 0.02 pu

SPLIT PHASE PROTECTION

PHASE OVERVOLTAGE

SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER

NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE

AUXILIARY OVERVOLTAGE

PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE

NEGATIVE SEQUENCE OVERVOLTAGE

AUXILIARY UNDERVOLTAGE
Pickup level: Dropout level: Level accuracy: Curve shapes: Curve multiplier: Timing accuracy:

VOLTS PER HERTZ


Voltage: Pickup level: Dropout level: Level accuracy:

2-8

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Timing curves: TD Multiplier: Reset delay: Timing accuracy: Definite Time; Inverse A, B, and C, FlexCurves A, B, C, and D 0.05 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 0.0 to 1000.0 s in steps of 0.1 3% or 15 cycles (whichever is greater) V_neutral_3rd --------------------------------------------------------------------------V_neutral_3rd + V_zero_3rd 0.000 to 0.250 pu in steps of 0.001 97 to 98% of pickup 2% of reading from 1 to 120 V 0 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 Functions: Characteristic: Measured impedance: Tripping mode: Current supervision: Pickup level: Dropout level:

2.2 SPECIFICATIONS SYNCHROCHECK


Max voltage difference: 0 to 400000 V in steps of 1 Max angle difference: Max freq. difference: Dead source function: 0 to 100 in steps of 1 0.00 to 2.00 Hz in steps of 0.01 None, LV1 & DV2, DV1 & LV2, DV1 or DV2, DV1 xor DV2, DV1 & DV2 (L = Live, D = Dead) Power swing block, Out-of-step trip Mho or Quad Positive-sequence Early or Delayed 0.050 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001 97 to 98% of Pickup

Hysteresis for max. freq. diff.: 0.00 to 0.10 Hz in steps of 0.01

100% STATOR GROUND


Operating quantity: Pickup level: Dropout level: Level accuracy: Pickup delay:

POWER SWING DETECT

3rd harmonic supervision level: 0.0010 to 0.1000 pu in steps of 0.0001 Time accuracy: Operate time: 3% or 20 ms, whichever is greater < 30 ms at 1.10 Pickup at 60 Hz 0.10 to 1.25 pu in steps of 0.01 20.00 to 65.00 Hz in steps of 0.01 Pickup + 0.03 Hz 0.01 Hz 0 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001 3% or 4 ms, whichever is greater 20.00 to 65.00 Hz in steps of 0.01 Pickup 0.03 Hz 0.01 Hz 0 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001 3% or 4 ms, whichever is greater increasing, decreasing, bi-directional 0.10 to 15.00 Hz/s in steps of 0.01 96% of pickup 80 mHz/s or 3.5%, whichever is greater 0.100 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001 0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001 0 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001 0 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001 3% or 4 ms, whichever is greater at 2 pickup: 12 cycles at 3 pickup: 8 cycles at 5 pickup: 6 cycles

Blocking / tripping modes: 2-step or 3-step

UNDERFREQUENCY
Minimum signal: Pickup level: Dropout level: Level accuracy: Time delay: Timer accuracy:

Fwd / reverse reach (sec. ): 0.10 to 500.00 in steps of 0.01 Left and right blinders (sec. ): 0.10 to 500.00 in steps of 0.01 Impedance accuracy: Angle accuracy: Timers: Timing accuracy: Operating condition: Arming condition: Overcurrent: Pickup level: Dropout level: Level accuracy: Undervoltage: Pickup level: Dropout level: Level accuracy: Operate Time: Operating condition: Characteristic: Center: Radius: Reach accuracy: 5% 2 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001 3% or 4 ms, whichever is greater Overcurrent Undervoltage and/or Machine Offline 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001 97 to 98% of pickup 0.5% of reading from 0.1 to 2.0 CT rating 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001 102 to 103% of pickup 0.5% of reading 10 to 208 V < 30 ms at 1.10 Pickup at 60 Hz Positive-sequence impedance 2 independent offset mho circles 0.10 to 300.0 (sec.) in steps of 0.01 0.10 to 300.0 (sec.) in steps of 0.01 3% Fwd / reverse angle impedances: 40 to 90 in steps of 1 Characteristic limit angles: 40 to 140 in steps of 1

OVERFREQUENCY
Pickup level: Dropout level: Level accuracy: Time delay: Timer accuracy: df/dt trend: df/dt pickup level: df/dt dropout level: df/dt level accuracy: Overvoltage supv.: Overcurrent supv.: Pickup delay: Reset delay: Time accuracy: Operate time:

ACCIDENTAL ENERGIZATION

RATE OF CHANGE OF FREQUENCY

LOSS OF EXCITATION

95% settling time for df/dt: < 24 cycles

Undervoltage supervision Level: 0.000 to 1.250 pu in steps of 0.001 Accuracy: 0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V Pickup delay: 0 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001 Timing accuracy: Operate time: 3% or 20 ms, whichever is greater <50 ms

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

2-9

2.2 SPECIFICATIONS

2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.2.2 USER-PROGRAMMABLE ELEMENTS

FLEXLOGIC
Programming language: Reverse Polish Notation with graphical visualization (keypad programmable) Lines of code: 512 64 NOT, XOR, OR (2 to 16 inputs), AND (2 to 16 inputs), NOR (2 to 16 inputs), NAND (2 to 16 inputs), Latch (Reset dominant), Edge Detectors, Timers any logical variable, contact, or virtual input 32 0 to 60000 (ms, sec., min.) in steps of 1 0 to 60000 (ms, sec., min.) in steps of 1 4 (A through D) 40 (0 through 1 of pickup) 80 (1 through 20 of pickup) 0 to 65535 ms in steps of 1 up to 256 logical variables grouped under 16 Modbus addresses any logical variable, contact, or virtual input 16 any analog actual value, or two values in differential mode Level, Delta Over, Under 30.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001 0.1 to 50.0% in steps of 0.1 20 ms to 60 days

USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDs
Number: Programmability: Reset mode: 48 plus Trip and Alarm from any logical variable, contact, or virtual input Self-reset or Latched from any digital input or user-programmable condition 3, interruptible at any time approximately 3 minutes all LEDs on all LEDs off, one LED at a time on for 1 s all LEDs on, one LED at a time off for 1 s 16 2 20 alphanumeric characters up to 5, any Modbus register addresses keypad, or any user-programmable condition, including pushbuttons

Internal variables: Supported operations:

LED TEST
Initiation: Number of tests: Duration of full test: Test sequence 1: Test sequence 2: Test sequence 3: Number of displays: Lines of display: Parameters: Invoking and scrolling:

Inputs: Number of timers: Pickup delay: Dropout delay:

FLEXCURVES
Number: Reset points: Operate points: Time delay:

USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS

FLEX STATES
Number: Programmability:

CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS
Number of pushbuttons: 7 Operation: drive FlexLogic operands

USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS (OPTIONAL)


Number of pushbuttons: 12 Mode: Display message: Self-Reset, Latched 2 lines of 20 characters each 2 1 to 7 in steps of 1 Time-out or Acknowledge 3.0 to 60.0 s in steps of 0.1 step-up and 3-bit restore from non-volatile memory or synchronize to a 3-bit control input or Synch/ Restore mode

FLEXELEMENTS
Number of elements: Operating signal:

Operating signal mode: Signed or Absolute Value Operating mode: Comparator direction: Pickup Level: Hysteresis: Delta dt:

SELECTOR SWITCH
Number of elements: Upper position limit: Selecting mode: Time-out timer: Control inputs: Power-up mode:

Pickup & dropout delay: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001

NON-VOLATILE LATCHES
Type: Number: Output: Execution sequence: Set-dominant or Reset-dominant 16 (individually programmed) Stored in non-volatile memory As input prior to protection, control, and FlexLogic

2-10

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

2.2 SPECIFICATIONS 2.2.3 MONITORING

OSCILLOGRAPHY
Maximum records: Sampling rate: Triggers: 64 64 samples per power cycle Any element pickup, dropout or operate Digital input change of state Digital output change of state FlexLogic equation AC input channels Element state Digital input state Digital output state In non-volatile memory 1024 events to 1 microsecond Any element pickup, dropout or operate Digital input change of state Digital output change of state Self-test events In non-volatile memory

USER-PROGRAMMABLE FAULT REPORT


Number of elements: Pre-fault trigger: Fault trigger: Recorder quantities: 2 any FlexLogic operand any FlexLogic operand 32 (any FlexAnalog value) 1 to 16 Any available analog actual value 15 to 3600000 ms in steps of 1 any FlexLogic operand continuous or triggered (NN is dependent on memory) 01 channel for NN days 16 channels for NN days 01 channel for NN days 16 channels for NN days

DATA LOGGER
Number of channels: Parameters: Sampling rate: Trigger: Mode: Storage capacity: 1-second rate: 60-minute rate:

Data:

Data storage:

EVENT RECORDER
Capacity: Time-tag: Triggers:

Data storage:

2.2.4 METERING RMS CURRENT: PHASE, NEUTRAL, AND GROUND


Accuracy at 0.1 to 2.0 CT rating: > 2.0 CT rating: 0.25% of reading or 0.1% of rated (whichever is greater) 1.0% of reading 0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V 1.0% of reading at 0.8 < PF 1.0 and 0.8 < PF 1.0 1.0% of reading at 0.2 PF 0.2 1.0% of reading I = 0.1 to 0.25 pu: I > 0.25 pu:

WATT-HOURS (POSITIVE AND NEGATIVE)


Accuracy: Range: Parameters: Update rate: Accuracy: Range: Parameters: Update rate: 2.0% of reading 0 to 2 109 MWh 3-phase only 50 ms 2.0% of reading 0 to 2 109 Mvarh 3-phase only 50 ms

RMS VOLTAGE
Accuracy: Accuracy:

VAR-HOURS (POSITIVE AND NEGATIVE)

REAL POWER (WATTS)

REACTIVE POWER (VARS)


Accuracy: Accuracy:

FREQUENCY
Accuracy at V = 0.8 to 1.2 pu: 0.01 Hz (when voltage signal is used for frequency measurement) 0.05 Hz 0.02 Hz (when current signal is used for frequency measurement)

APPARENT POWER (VA)

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

2-11

2.2 SPECIFICATIONS

2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.2.5 INPUTS

AC CURRENT
CT rated primary: CT rated secondary: Nominal frequency: 1 to 50000 A 1 A or 5 A by connection 20 to 65 Hz < 0.2 VA at rated secondary

DCMA INPUTS
Current input (mA DC): Input impedance: Conversion range: Accuracy: Type: 0 to 1, 0 to +1, 1 to +1, 0 to 5, 0 to 10, 0 to 20, 4 to 20 (programmable) 379 10% 1 to + 20 mA DC 0.2% of full scale Passive 100 Platinum, 100 & 120 Nickel, 10 Copper 5 mA 50 to +250C 2C 36 V pk-pk 1 to 10 V pk-pk TTL 22 k 2 kV

Relay burden:

Conversion range: Standard CT: 0.02 to 46 CT rating RMS symmetrical Sensitive Ground module: 0.002 to 4.6 CT rating RMS symmetrical Current withstand: 20 ms at 250 times rated 1 sec. at 100 times rated continuous at 3 times rated 50.0 to 240.0 V 1.00 to 24000.00 20 to 65 Hz < 0.25 VA at 120 V 1 to 275 V continuous at 260 V to neutral 1 min./hr at 420 V to neutral 1000 maximum 300 V DC maximum 17 V, 33 V, 84 V, 166 V 10% < 1 ms 0.0 to 16.0 ms in steps of 0.5

RTD INPUTS
Types (3-wire): Sensing current: Range: Accuracy: Isolation:

AC VOLTAGE
VT rated secondary: VT ratio: Nominal frequency: Relay burden: Conversion range: Voltage withstand:

IRIG-B INPUT
Amplitude modulation: DC shift: Input impedance: Isolation:

CONTACT INPUTS
Dry contacts: Wet contacts: Selectable thresholds: Tolerance: Recognition time: Debounce time:

REMOTE INPUTS (MMS GOOSE)


Number of input points: 32, configured from 64 incoming bit pairs Number of remote devices:16 Default states on loss of comms.: On, Off, Latest/Off, Latest/On

DIRECT INPUTS
Number of input points: 32 No. of remote devices: Ring configuration: Data rate: CRC: 16 Yes, No 64 or 128 kbps 32-bit Default states on loss of comms.: On, Off, Latest/Off, Latest/On

Contacts per common return: 4

Continuous current draw:3 mA (when energized)

CONTACT INPUTS WITH AUTO-BURNISHING


Dry contacts: Wet contacts: Selectable thresholds: Tolerance: Recognition time: Debounce time: 1000 maximum 300 V DC maximum 17 V, 33 V, 84 V, 166 V 10% < 1 ms 0.0 to 16.0 ms in steps of 0.5

Contacts per common return: 2

CRC alarm: Responding to: Rate of messages failing the CRC Monitoring message count: 10 to 10000 in steps of 1 Alarm threshold: 1 to 1000 in steps of 1 Unreturned message alarm: Responding to: Rate of unreturned messages in the ring configuration Monitoring message count: 10 to 10000 in steps of 1 Alarm threshold: 1 to 1000 in steps of 1

Continuous current draw:3 mA (when energized) Auto-burnish impulse current: 50 to 70 mA Duration of auto-burnish impulse: 25 to 50 ms

TELEPROTECTION
Number of input points: 16 No. of remote devices: Ring configuration: Data rate: CRC: 3 No 64 or 128 kbps 32-bit Default states on loss of comms.: On, Off, Latest/Off, Latest/On

2-12

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

2.2 SPECIFICATIONS 2.2.6 POWER SUPPLY

LOW RANGE
Nominal DC voltage: Min/max DC voltage: Voltage loss hold-up: 24 to 48 V 20 / 60 V 20 ms duration at nominal

ALL RANGES
Volt withstand: Power consumption: 2 Highest Nominal Voltage for 10 ms typical = 15 to 20 W/VA maximum = 50 W/VA contact factory for exact order code consumption

NOTE: Low range is DC only.

HIGH RANGE
Nominal DC voltage: Min/max DC voltage: Nominal AC voltage: Min/max AC voltage: Voltage loss hold-up: 125 to 250 V 88 / 300 V 100 to 240 V at 50/60 Hz 88 / 265 V at 25 to 100 Hz 200 ms duration at nominal

INTERNAL FUSE RATINGS


Low range power supply: 8 A / 250 V High range power supply: 4 A / 250 V

INTERRUPTING CAPACITY
AC: DC: 100 000 A RMS symmetrical 10 000 A

2.2.7 OUTPUTS FORM-A RELAY


Make and carry for 0.2 s: 30 A as per ANSI C37.90 Carry continuous:
VOLTAGE
24 V 48 V 125 V 250 V

FAST FORM-C RELAY


Make and carry:
INPUT VOLTAGE 250 V DC 120 V DC 48 V DC 24 V DC

0.1 A max. (resistive load)


IMPEDANCE 2 W RESISTOR 20 K 5 K 2 K 2 K 1 W RESISTOR 50 K 2 K 2 K 2 K

6A
CURRENT
1A 0.5 A 0.3 A 0.2 A

Minimum load impedance:

Break (DC inductive, L/R = 40 ms):

Operate time: Contact material:

< 4 ms silver alloy

Note: values for 24 V and 48 V are the same due to a required 95% voltage drop across the load impedance.

LATCHING RELAY
Make and carry for 0.2 s: 30 A as per ANSI C37.90 Carry continuous: Break at L/R of 40 ms: Operate time: Contact material: Control: Control mode: Applicable voltage: Trickle current: Threshold current: 6A 0.25 A DC max. < 4 ms silver alloy separate operate and reset inputs operate-dominant or reset-dominant approx. 15 to 250 V DC approx. 1 to 2.5 mA approx. 80 to 100 mA

Operate time:

< 0.6 ms

Internal Limiting Resistor: 100 , 2 W

SOLID-STATE OUTPUT RELAY


Operate and release time: <100 s Maximum voltage: Make and carry: for 0.2 s: for 0.03 s Breaking capacity:
UL508 Utility application (autoreclose scheme) 5 ops / 0.2 s-On, 0.2 s-Off within 1 minute Industrial application

265 V DC

Maximum continuous current: 5 A at 45C; 4 A at 65C 30 A as per ANSI C37.90 300 A

FORM-A VOLTAGE MONITOR

FORM-A CURRENT MONITOR FORM-C AND CRITICAL FAILURE RELAY


Make and carry for 0.2 s: 30 A as per ANSI C37.90 Carry continuous:
VOLTAGE
24 V 48 V 125 V 250 V

Operations/ interval

5000 ops / 1 s-On, 9 s-Off 1000 ops / 0.5 s-On, 0.5 s-Off

10000 ops / 0.2 s-On, 30 s-Off

8A
CURRENT
1A 0.5 A 0.3 A 0.2 A

Break (DC inductive, L/R = 40 ms):

Break capability (0 to 250 V DC)

3.2 A L/R = 10 ms 1.6 A L/R = 20 ms 0.8 A L/R = 40 ms 10 A L/R = 40 ms 10 A L/R = 40 ms

Operate time: Contact material:

< 8 ms silver alloy

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

2-13

2.2 SPECIFICATIONS IRIG-B OUTPUT


Amplitude: Maximum load: Time delay: Isolation: 10 V peak-peak RS485 level 100 ohms 1 ms for AM input 40 s for DC-shift input 2 kV

2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION DIRECT OUTPUTS


Output points: 32 1 to 1 mA, 0 to 1 mA, 4 to 20 mA 12 k for 1 to 1 mA range 12 k for 0 to 1 mA range 600 for 4 to 20 mA range 0.75% of full-scale for 0 to 1 mA range 0.5% of full-scale for 1 to 1 mA range 0.75% of full-scale for 0 to 20 mA range 1.5 kV any FlexAnalog quantity

DCMA OUTPUTS
Range: Max. load resistance:

CONTROL POWER EXTERNAL OUTPUT (FOR DRY CONTACT INPUT)


Capacity: Isolation: 100 mA DC at 48 V DC 300 Vpk

Accuracy:

REMOTE OUTPUTS (IEC 61850 GSSE/GOOSE)


Standard output points: 32 User output points: 32

99% Settling time to a step change: 100 ms Isolation: Driving signal:

Upper and lower limit for the driving signal: 90 to 90 pu in steps of 0.001

2.2.8 COMMUNICATIONS RS232


Front port:

19.2 kbps, Modbus RTU Up to 115 kbps, Modbus RTU, isolated together at 36 Vpk 1200 m 2 kV

ETHERNET (FIBER)
PARAMETER 10MB MULTIMODE Wavelength Connector Transmit power Receiver sensitivity Power budget Maximum input power Typical distance Duplex Redundancy 820 nm ST 20 dBm 30 dBm 10 dB 7.6 dBm 1.65 km full/half yes FIBER TYPE 100MB MULTI- 100MB SINGLEMODE MODE 1310 nm ST 20 dBm 30 dBm 10 dB 14 dBm 2 km full/half yes 1310 nm SC 15 dBm 30 dBm 15 dB 7 dBm 15 km full/half yes

RS485
1 or 2 rear ports: Typical distance: Isolation:

ETHERNET (COPPER)
Modes: Connector: 10 MB, 10/100 MB (auto-detect) RJ45

SNTP clock synchronization error: <10 ms (typical)

2-14

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

2.2 SPECIFICATIONS 2.2.9 INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS

SHIELDED TWISTED-PAIR INTERFACE OPTIONS


INTERFACE TYPE RS422 G.703 TYPICAL DISTANCE 1200 m 100 m

TYPICAL LINK DISTANCE


EMITTER TYPE 820 nm LED 1300 nm LED 1300 nm ELED 1300 nm Laser 1550 nm Laser FIBER TYPE CONNECTOR TYPE Multimode Multimode Singlemode Singlemode Singlemode ST ST ST ST ST TYPICAL DISTANCE 1.65 km 3.8 km 11.4 km 64 km 105 km

NOTE

RS422 distance is based on transmitter power and does not take into consideration the clock source provided by the user.
TRANSMIT POWER 20 dBm 21 dBm 21 dBm 1 dBm +5 dBm RECEIVED SENSITIVITY 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm POWER BUDGET 10 dB 9 dB 9 dB 29 dB 35 dB

LINK POWER BUDGET


EMITTER, FIBER TYPE 820 nm LED, Multimode 1300 nm LED, Multimode 1300 nm ELED, Singlemode 1300 nm Laser, Singlemode 1550 nm Laser, Singlemode

NOTE

Typical distances listed are based on the following assumptions for system loss. As actual losses will vary from one installation to another, the distance covered by your system may vary.
2 dB 3 dB/km 1 dB/km 0.35 dB/km 0.25 dB/km One splice every 2 km, at 0.05 dB loss per splice.

CONNECTOR LOSSES (TOTAL OF BOTH ENDS)


ST connector

FIBER LOSSES
820 nm multimode 1300 nm multimode 1300 nm singlemode 1550 nm singlemode Splice losses:

NOTE

These Power Budgets are calculated from the manufacturers worst-case transmitter power and worst case receiver sensitivity.
MAX. OPTICAL INPUT POWER 7.6 dBm 11 dBm 14 dBm 14 dBm 14 dBm

MAXIMUM OPTICAL INPUT POWER


EMITTER, FIBER TYPE 820 nm LED, Multimode 1300 nm LED, Multimode 1300 nm ELED, Singlemode 1300 nm Laser, Singlemode 1550 nm Laser, Singlemode

SYSTEM MARGIN
3 dB additional loss added to calculations to compensate for all other losses. Compensated difference in transmitting and receiving (channel asymmetry) channel delays using GPS satellite clock: 10 ms

2.2.10 ENVIRONMENTAL AMBIENT TEMPERATURES


Operating: Storage: 40 to 60C 40 to 80C

OTHER
Humidity (non-condensing): IEC 60068-2-30, 95%, Variant 1, 6 days Altitude: Installation Category: Up to 2000 m II

The LCD contrast may be impaired at temperatures less than 20C.


NOTE

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

2-15

2.2 SPECIFICATIONS

2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.2.11 TYPE TESTS

Electrical fast transient: ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 IEC 61000-4-4 IEC 60255-22-4 Oscillatory transient: ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 IEC 61000-4-12 IEC 60255-5 IEC 60255-6 ANSI/IEEE C37.90 EN 61000-4-5 ANSI/IEEE C37.90.2 IEC 61000-4-3 IEC 60255-22-3 Ontario Hydro C-5047-77 IEC 61000-4-6

Voltage dips/interruptions/variations: IEC 61000-4-11 IEC 60255-11 Power frequency magnetic field immunity: IEC 61000-4-8 Pulse magnetic field immunity: IEC 61000-4-9 Vibration test (sinusoidal): IEC 60255-21-1 Shock and bump: Seismic: Cold: Dry heat: IEC 60255-21-2 IEC 60255-21-3 IEEE C37.98 IEC 60028-2-1, 16 h at 40C IEC 60028-2-2, 16 h at 85C

Insulation resistance: Dielectric strength:

Electrostatic discharge: EN 61000-4-2 Surge immunity: RFI susceptibility:

Type test report available upon request.


NOTE

Conducted RFI:

2.2.12 PRODUCTION TESTS THERMAL


Products go through an environmental test based upon an Accepted Quality Level (AQL) sampling process.

2.2.13 APPROVALS APPROVALS


UL Listed for the USA and Canada CE: LVD 73/23/EEC: EMC 81/336/EEC:

IEC 1010-1 EN 50081-2, EN 50082-2

2.2.14 MAINTENANCE MOUNTING


Attach mounting brackets using 20 inch-pounds (2 inch-pounds) of torque.
NOTE

Units that are stored in a de-energized state should be powered up once per year, for one hour continuously, to avoid deterioration of electrolytic capacitors.

CLEANING
Normally, cleaning is not required; but for situations where dust has accumulated on the faceplate display, a dry cloth can be used.

2-16

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

3 HARDWARE 3 HARDWARE 3.1DESCRIPTION

3.1 DESCRIPTION 3.1.1 PANEL CUTOUT

The relay is available as a 19-inch rack horizontal mount unit or as a reduced size () vertical mount unit, with a removable faceplate. The modular design allows the relay to be easily upgraded or repaired by a qualified service person. The faceplate is hinged to allow easy access to the removable modules, and is itself removable to allow mounting on doors with limited rear depth. There is also a removable dust cover that fits over the faceplate, which must be removed when attempting to access the keypad or RS232 communications port. The vertical and horizontal case dimensions are shown below, along with panel cutout details for panel mounting. When planning the location of your panel cutout, ensure that provision is made for the faceplate to swing open without interference to or from adjacent equipment. The relay must be mounted such that the faceplate sits semi-flush with the panel or switchgear door, allowing the operator access to the keypad and the RS232 communications port. The relay is secured to the panel with the use of four screws supplied with the relay.

UR SERIES

Figure 31: G60 VERTICAL MOUNTING AND DIMENSIONS

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

3-1

3.1 DESCRIPTION

3 HARDWARE

Figure 32: G60 VERTICAL SIDE MOUNTING INSTALLATION

3-2

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

3 HARDWARE

3.1 DESCRIPTION

Figure 33: G60 VERTICAL SIDE MOUNTING REAR DIMENSIONS

Figure 34: G60 HORIZONTAL MOUNTING AND DIMENSIONS

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

3-3

3.1 DESCRIPTION

3 HARDWARE 3.1.2 MODULE WITHDRAWAL AND INSERTION

WARNING

Module withdrawal and insertion may only be performed when control power has been removed from the unit. Inserting an incorrect module type into a slot may result in personal injury, damage to the unit or connected equipment, or undesired operation! Proper electrostatic discharge protection (i.e. a static strap) must be used when coming in contact with modules while the relay is energized!

WARNING

The relay, being modular in design, allows for the withdrawal and insertion of modules. Modules must only be replaced with like modules in their original factory configured slots. The faceplate can be opened to the left, once the sliding latch on the right side has been pushed up, as shown below. This allows for easy accessibility of the modules for withdrawal.

Figure 35: UR MODULE WITHDRAWAL/INSERTION MODULE WITHDRAWAL: The ejector/inserter clips, located at the top and bottom of each module, must be pulled simultaneously to release the module for removal. Before performing this action, control power must be removed from the relay. Record the original location of the module to ensure that the same or replacement module is inserted into the correct slot. Modules with current input provide automatic shorting of external CT circuits. MODULE INSERTION: Ensure that the correct module type is inserted into the correct slot position. The ejector/ inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module must be in the disengaged position as the module is smoothly inserted into the slot. Once the clips have cleared the raised edge of the chassis, engage the clips simultaneously. When the clips have locked into position, the module will be fully inserted. All CPU modules except the 9E are equipped with 10Base-T or 10Base-F Ethernet connectors. These connectors must be individually disconnected from the module before it can be removed from the chassis.
NOTE

NOTE

The version 4.0 release of the G60 relay includes new hardware (CPU and CT/VT modules). The new CPU modules are specified with the following order codes: 9E, 9G, 9H, 9J, 9K, 9L, 9M, 9N, 9P, 9R. The new CT/VT modules are specified with the following order codes: 8F, 8G, 8H, 8J. The new CT/VT modules (8F, 8G, 8H, 8J) can only be used with new CPUs (9E, 9G, 9H, 9J, 9K, 9L, 9M, 9N, 9P, 9R); similarly, old CT/VT modules (8A, 8B, 8C, 8D) can only be used with old CPUs (9A, 9C, 9D). To prevent hardware mismatches, the new modules have blue labels and a warning sticker stating Attn.: Ensure CPU and DSP module label colors are the same!. In the event that there is a mismatch between the CPU and CT/VT module, the relay will not function and a DSP ERROR or HARDWARE MISMATCH error will be displayed. All other input/output modules are compatible with the new hardware. Firmware versions 4.0x and higher are only compatible with the new CPU and CT/VT modules. Previous versions of the firmware (3.4x and earlier) are only compatible with the older CPU and CT/VT modules.

3-4

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

3 HARDWARE

3.1 DESCRIPTION 3.1.3 REAR TERMINAL LAYOUT

830720A1.CDR

Figure 36: REAR TERMINAL VIEW Do not touch any rear terminals while the relay is energized!
WARNING

The relay follows a convention with respect to terminal number assignments which are three characters long assigned in order by module slot position, row number, and column letter. Two-slot wide modules take their slot designation from the first slot position (nearest to CPU module) which is indicated by an arrow marker on the terminal block. See the following figure for an example of rear terminal assignments.

Figure 37: EXAMPLE OF MODULES IN F AND H SLOTS

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

3-5

3.2 WIRING 3.2WIRING


TYPICAL CONFIGURATION
THE AC SIGNAL PATH IS CONFIGURABLE
POSITIVE WATTS

3 HARDWARE 3.2.1 TYPICAL WIRING

OPEN DELTA VT CONNECTION (ABC)

A B C

3
F 3b F 2b F 7a F 5a F 5a F 6c F 7c F 4b
IG

F 6a

F 1b

F 7a

F 8a

F 6a

F 4a

F 3a

F 2a

F 1a

F 2c

F 8c

F 6c

F 5c

F 3c

F 7c

F 5c

F 1c

M 3b

M 1b

M 2b

M 4b

M 3a

M 1a

M 2a

M 4a

M 1c

M 2c

M 3c

M 4c

VA

VB

VC

VA

VB

VX

VC

VB

VB

VC

VX

VC

IG5

IG5

IG1

IA5

IA1

IA5

IA1

IC5

IC1

IB5

IB1

IG1

VA

VA

IG

IA

IB

IC5

IC1

IB5

IB1

IA

IB

IC

IC

F 4c

CURRENT INPUTS 8F/8G or 8H/8J

VOLTAGE INPUTS

VOLTAGE INPUTS 8F / 8G

CURRENT INPUTS

VOLT & CURRENT SUPV.


TC2

H1

V I

V I

H4

H 8b
( DC ONLY )

SURGE

DC AC or DC

B 1b B 1a B 2b B 3a B 3b B5b HI B 6b LO B 6a B 8a B 8b

CRITICAL FAILURE 48 VDC OUTPUT CONTROL POWER SURGE FILTER

GE Multilin

POWER SUPPLY

G60 Generator Management Relay


RS-232 (front) DB-9

RS485 COM 1

RS485 COM 2

IRIG-B Input

IRIG-B Output

CONTACTS SHOWN WITH NO CONTROL POWER

BNC

D1b D2b D3b D1a D2a D3a D4b D4a

BNC

com

com

No. 10AWG Minimum

MODULE ARRANGEMENT

X W V
GROUND BUS

U T

S R

P N M L
8 CT

J
6

H G
8

D
9 CPU

B
1 Power Supply
25 PIN CONNECTOR

I/O

VT/CT

(Rear View)
Shielded twisted pairs Co-axial * Co-axial Co-axial

Co-axial * - For IRIG-B Input only use one terminal as input

COMPUTER

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

8 3 RXD 2 TXD 20 7 SGND 6 4 5 22

Ground at Remote Device

Figure 38: TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM

3-6

G60 Generator Management Relay

1 2 3 4 SGND 5 6 7 8 9

TXD RXD

MODULES MUST BE GROUNDED IF TERMINAL IS PROVIDED

830721A3.CDR

9 PIN CONNECTOR

UR

H 7a H 7c H 8a H 8c H 7b

CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN COMMON

H 7a H 7c H 8a H 8c H7b

H3

GE Multilin

VOLTAGE SUPV.

H2

H 5a H 5c H 6a H 6c H 5b

CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN COMMON

H 5a H 5c H 6a H 6c H 5b

DIGITAL I/O

6G

H1a H1b H1c H2a H2b H2c H3a H3b H3c H4a H4b H4c

TC1

CPU

9E

3 HARDWARE

3.2 WIRING 3.2.2 DIELECTRIC STRENGTH

The dielectric strength of the UR-series module hardware is shown in the following table: Table 31: DIELECTRIC STRENGTH OF UR-SERIES MODULE HARDWARE
MODULE TYPE 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 MODULE FUNCTION FROM Power Supply Power Supply Power Supply Reserved Reserved Reserved Analog Inputs/Outputs Digital Inputs/Outputs G.703 RS422 CT/VT CPU High (+); Low (+); () 48 V DC (+) and () Relay Terminals N/A N/A N/A All except 8b All All except 2b, 3a, 7b, 8a All except 6a, 7b, 8a All All TERMINALS TO Chassis Chassis Chassis N/A N/A N/A Chassis Chassis Chassis Chassis Chassis Chassis DIELECTRIC STRENGTH (AC) 2000 V AC for 1 minute 2000 V AC for 1 minute 2000 V AC for 1 minute N/A N/A N/A < 50 V DC 2000 V AC for 1 minute 2000 V AC for 1 minute < 50 V DC 2000 V AC for 1 minute 2000 V AC for 1 minute

Filter networks and transient protection clamps are used in the hardware to prevent damage caused by high peak voltage transients, radio frequency interference (RFI), and electromagnetic interference (EMI). These protective components can be damaged by application of the ANSI/IEEE C37.90 specified test voltage for a period longer than the specified one minute. 3.2.3 CONTROL POWER CONTROL POWER SUPPLIED TO THE RELAY MUST BE CONNECTED TO THE MATCHING POWER SUPPLY RANGE OF THE RELAY. IF THE VOLTAGE IS APPLIED TO THE WRONG TERMINALS, DAMAGE MAY OCCUR! The G60 relay, like almost all electronic relays, contains electrolytic capacitors. These capacitors are well known to be subject to deterioration over time if voltage is not applied periodically. Deterioration can be avoided by powering the relays up once a year.

CAUTION

NOTE

The power supply module can be ordered for two possible voltage ranges, with or without a redundant power option. Each range has a dedicated input connection for proper operation. The ranges are as shown below (see the Technical Specifications section of Chapter 2 for additional details): LO range: 24 to 48 V (DC only) nominal HI range: 125 to 250 V nominal The power supply module provides power to the relay and supplies power for dry contact input connections. The power supply module provides 48 V DC power for dry contact input connections and a critical failure relay (see the Typical Wiring Diagram earlier). The critical failure relay is a Form-C that will be energized once control power is applied and the relay has successfully booted up with no critical self-test failures. If on-going self-test diagnostic checks detect a critical failure (see the Self-Test Errors table in Chapter 7) or control power is lost, the relay will de-energize. For high reliability systems, the G60 has a redundant option in which two G60 power supplies are placed in parallel on the bus. If one of the power supplies become faulted, the second power supply will assume the full load of the relay without any interruptions. Each power supply has a green LED on the front of the module to indicate it is functional. The critical fail relay of the module will also indicate a faulted power supply. An LED on the front of the module shows the status of the power supply:
LED INDICATION ON ON / OFF CYCLING OFF POWER SUPPLY OK Failure Failure

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

3-7

3.2 WIRING

3 HARDWARE

Figure 39: CONTROL POWER CONNECTION 3.2.4 CT/VT MODULES A CT/VT module may have voltage inputs on Channels 1 through 4 inclusive, or Channels 5 through 8 inclusive. Channels 1 and 5 are intended for connection to Phase A, and are labeled as such in the relay. Channels 2 and 6 are intended for connection to Phase B, and are labeled as such in the relay. Channels 3 and 7 are intended for connection to Phase C and are labeled as such in the relay. Channels 4 and 8 are intended for connection to a single phase source. If voltage, this channel is labelled the auxiliary voltage (VX). If current, this channel is intended for connection to a CT between a system neutral and ground, and is labelled the ground current (IG). a) CT INPUTS VERIFY THAT THE CONNECTION MADE TO THE RELAY NOMINAL CURRENT OF 1 A OR 5 A MATCHES THE SECONDARY RATING OF THE CONNECTED CTs. UNMATCHED CTs MAY RESULT IN EQUIPMENT DAMAGE OR INADEQUATE PROTECTION.

CAUTION

The CT/VT module may be ordered with a standard ground current input that is the same as the phase current inputs (Type 8F) or with a sensitive ground input (Type 8G) which is 10 times more sensitive (see the Technical Specifications section for additional details). Each AC current input has an isolating transformer and an automatic shorting mechanism that shorts the input when the module is withdrawn from the chassis. There are no internal ground connections on the current inputs. Current transformers with 1 to 50000 A primaries and 1 A or 5 A secondaries may be used. CT connections for both ABC and ACB phase rotations are identical as shown in the Typical Wiring Diagram. The exact placement of a zero-sequence CT so that ground fault current will be detected is shown below. Twisted pair cabling on the zero-sequence CT is recommended.

3-8

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

3 HARDWARE

3.2 WIRING

Figure 310: ZERO-SEQUENCE CORE BALANCE CT INSTALLATION b) VT INPUTS The phase voltage channels are used for most metering and protection purposes. The auxiliary voltage channel is used as input for the Synchrocheck and Volts/Hertz features.

827831AA-X5.CDR

827831AA-X3.CDR

Figure 311: CT/VT MODULE WIRING Wherever a tilde ~ symbol appears, substitute with the Slot Position of the module.
NOTE

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

3-9

3.2 WIRING

3 HARDWARE 3.2.5 CONTACT INPUTS/OUTPUTS

Every digital input/output module has 24 terminal connections. They are arranged as three terminals per row, with eight rows in total. A given row of three terminals may be used for the outputs of one relay. For example, for Form-C relay outputs, the terminals connect to the normally open (NO), normally closed (NC), and common contacts of the relay. For a Form-A output, there are options of using current or voltage detection for feature supervision, depending on the module ordered. The terminal configuration for contact inputs is different for the two applications. The digital inputs are grouped with a common return. The G60 has two versions of grouping: four inputs per common return and two inputs per common return. When a digital input/output module is ordered, four inputs per common is used. The four inputs per common allows for high-density inputs in combination with outputs, with a compromise of four inputs sharing one common. If the inputs must be isolated per row, then two inputs per common return should be selected (4D module).

The tables and diagrams on the following pages illustrate the module types (6A, etc.) and contact arrangements that may be ordered for the relay. Since an entire row is used for a single contact output, the name is assigned using the module slot position and row number. However, since there are two contact inputs per row, these names are assigned by module slot position, row number, and column position. UR-SERIES FORM-A / SOLID STATE (SSR) OUTPUT CONTACTS: Some Form-A/SSR outputs include circuits to monitor the DC voltage across the output contact when it is open, and the DC current through the output contact when it is closed. Each of the monitors contains a level detector whose output is set to logic On = 1 when the current in the circuit is above the threshold setting. The voltage monitor is set to On = 1 when the current is above about 1 to 2.5 mA, and the current monitor is set to On = 1 when the current exceeds about 80 to 100 mA. The voltage monitor is intended to check the health of the overall trip circuit, and the current monitor can be used to seal-in the output contact until an external contact has interrupted current flow. The block diagrams of the circuits are below above for the Form-A outputs with: a) optional voltage monitor b) optional current monitor c) with no monitoring
If Idc ~ 80mA, Cont Op x Ion otherwise Cont Op x Ioff If Idc ~ 1mA, Cont Op x Von otherwise Cont Op x Voff

~#a I ~#b V ~#c a) Voltage with optional current monitoring Voltage monitoring only If Idc ~ 1mA, Cont Op x Von otherwise Cont Op x Voff I

~#a

Load

Load
+

~#b V ~#c

Both voltage and current monitoring If Idc ~ 80mA, Cont Op x Ion otherwise Cont Op x Ioff If Idc ~ 1mA, Cont Op x Von otherwise Cont Op x Voff

~#a V I ~#b ~#c b) Current with optional voltage monitoring Current monitoring only If Idc ~ 80mA, Cont Op x Ion otherwise Cont Op x Ioff V

~#a

Load

Load
+

~#b ~#c

Both voltage and current monitoring (external jumper a-b is required) 827821A5.CDR

~#a ~#b ~#c

Load
+

c) No monitoring

Figure 312: FORM-A /SOLID STATE CONTACT FUNCTIONS

3-10

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

3 HARDWARE

3.2 WIRING

The operation of voltage and current monitors is reflected with the corresponding FlexLogic operands (Cont Op # Von, Cont Op # Voff, Cont Op # Ion, and Cont Op # Ioff) which can be used in protection, control and alarm logic. The typical application of the voltage monitor is breaker trip circuit integrity monitoring; a typical application of the current monitor is seal-in of the control command. Refer to the Digital Elements section of Chapter 5 for an example of how Form-A/SSR contacts can be applied for breaker trip circuit integrity monitoring. Relay contacts must be considered unsafe to touch when the unit is energized! If the relay contacts need to be used for low voltage accessible applications, it is the customers responsibility to ensure proper insulation levels! USE OF FORM-A/SSR OUTPUTS IN HIGH IMPEDANCE CIRCUITS
NOTE

WARNING

For Form-A/SSR output contacts internally equipped with a voltage measuring cIrcuit across the contact, the circuit has an impedance that can cause a problem when used in conjunction with external high input impedance monitoring equipment such as modern relay test set trigger circuits. These monitoring circuits may continue to read the Form-A contact as being closed after it has closed and subsequently opened, when measured as an impedance. The solution to this problem is to use the voltage measuring trigger input of the relay test set, and connect the Form-A contact through a voltage-dropping resistor to a DC voltage source. If the 48 V DC output of the power supply is used as a source, a 500 , 10 W resistor is appropriate. In this configuration, the voltage across either the Form-A contact or the resistor can be used to monitor the state of the output. Wherever a tilde ~ symbol appears, substitute with the slot position of the module; wherever a number sign "#" appears, substitute the contact number

NOTE

NOTE

When current monitoring is used to seal-in the Form-A/SSR contact outputs, the FlexLogic operand driving the contact output should be given a reset delay of 10 ms to prevent damage of the output contact (in situations when the element initiating the contact output is bouncing, at values in the region of the pickup value).

Table 32: DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT MODULE ASSIGNMENTS


~6A MODULE TERMINAL OUTPUT OR ASSIGNMENT INPUT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5a, ~5c ~6a, ~6c ~7a, ~7c ~8a, ~8c Form-A Form-A Form-C Form-C 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs ~6B MODULE TERMINAL OUTPUT OR ASSIGNMENT INPUT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5 ~6 ~7a, ~7c ~8a, ~8c Form-A Form-A Form-C Form-C Form-C Form-C 2 Inputs 2 Inputs ~6C MODULE TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5 ~6 ~7 ~8 OUTPUT Form-C Form-C Form-C Form-C Form-C Form-C Form-C Form-C ~6D MODULE TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT ~1a, ~1c ~2a, ~2c ~3a, ~3c ~4a, ~4c ~5a, ~5c ~6a, ~6c ~7a, ~7c ~8a, ~8c OUTPUT 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs

~6E MODULE TERMINAL OUTPUT OR ASSIGNMENT INPUT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5a, ~5c ~6a, ~6c ~7a, ~7c ~8a, ~8c Form-C Form-C Form-C Form-C 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs

~6F MODULE TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5 ~6 ~7 ~8 OUTPUT Fast Form-C Fast Form-C Fast Form-C Fast Form-C Fast Form-C Fast Form-C Fast Form-C Fast Form-C

~6G MODULE TERMINAL OUTPUT OR ASSIGNMENT INPUT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5a, ~5c ~6a, ~6c ~7a, ~7c ~8a, ~8c Form-A Form-A Form-A Form-A 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs

~6H MODULE TERMINAL OUTPUT OR ASSIGNMENT INPUT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5 ~6 ~7a, ~7c ~8a, ~8c Form-A Form-A Form-A Form-A Form-A Form-A 2 Inputs 2 Inputs

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

3-11

3.2 WIRING

3 HARDWARE

~6K MODULE TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5 ~6 ~7 ~8 OUTPUT Form-C Form-C Form-C Form-C Fast Form-C Fast Form-C Fast Form-C Fast Form-C

~6L MODULE TERMINAL OUTPUT OR ASSIGNMENT INPUT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5a, ~5c ~6a, ~6c ~7a, ~7c ~8a, ~8c Form-A Form-A Form-C Form-C 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs

~6M MODULE TERMINAL OUTPUT OR ASSIGNMENT INPUT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5 ~6 ~7a, ~7c ~8a, ~8c Form-A Form-A Form-C Form-C Form-C Form-C 2 Inputs 2 Inputs

~6N MODULE TERMINAL OUTPUT OR ASSIGNMENT INPUT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5a, ~5c ~6a, ~6c ~7a, ~7c ~8a, ~8c Form-A Form-A Form-A Form-A 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs

3
~6P MODULE TERMINAL OUTPUT OR ASSIGNMENT INPUT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5 ~6 ~7a, ~7c ~8a, ~8c Form-A Form-A Form-A Form-A Form-A Form-A 2 Inputs 2 Inputs ~6R MODULE TERMINAL OUTPUT OR ASSIGNMENT INPUT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5a, ~5c ~6a, ~6c ~7a, ~7c ~8a, ~8c Form-A Form-A Form-C Form-C 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs ~6S MODULE TERMINAL OUTPUT OR ASSIGNMENT INPUT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5 ~6 ~7a, ~7c ~8a, ~8c Form-A Form-A Form-C Form-C Form-C Form-C 2 Inputs 2 Inputs ~6T MODULE TERMINAL OUTPUT OR ASSIGNMENT INPUT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5a, ~5c ~6a, ~6c ~7a, ~7c ~8a, ~8c Form-A Form-A Form-A Form-A 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs

~6U MODULE TERMINAL OUTPUT OR ASSIGNMENT INPUT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5 ~6 ~7a, ~7c ~8a, ~8c Form-A Form-A Form-A Form-A Form-A Form-A 2 Inputs 2 Inputs

~67 MODULE TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5 ~6 ~7 ~8 OUTPUT Form-A Form-A Form-A Form-A Form-A Form-A Form-A Form-A

~4A MODULE TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5 ~6 ~7 ~8 OUTPUT Not Used Solid-State Not Used Solid-State Not Used Solid-State Not Used Solid-State

~4B MODULE TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5 ~6 ~7 ~8 OUTPUT Not Used Solid-State Not Used Solid-State Not Used Solid-State Not Used Solid-State

~4C MODULE TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5 ~6 ~7 ~8 OUTPUT Not Used Solid-State Not Used Solid-State Not Used Solid-State Not Used Solid-State

~4D MODULE TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT ~1a, ~1c ~2a, ~2c ~3a, ~3c ~4a, ~4c ~5a, ~5c ~6a, ~6c ~7a, ~7c ~8a, ~8c OUTPUT 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs 2 Inputs

~4L MODULE TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT ~1 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5 ~6 ~7 ~8 OUTPUT 2 Outputs 2 Outputs 2 Outputs 2 Outputs 2 Outputs 2 Outputs 2 Outputs Not Used

3-12

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

3 HARDWARE

3.2 WIRING

4A

4D

4C

4B

1 2

~ 2a ~ 2b ~ 2c ~2

~ 2a

~ 2a

V I
~2

I
~ 2b ~2 ~ 2b ~ 2c ~3

V
~ 2c ~3

3 4

3a 3b 3c Not Used
~ 4a ~ 4b ~ 4c

3a 3b 3c Not Used
~ 4a

3a 3b 3c Not Used
~ 4a

~3

5 6

V I
~4

I
~4 ~ 4b ~4 ~ 4b ~ 4c ~5

V
~ 4c ~5

7 8

5a 5b 5c Not Used
~ 6a ~ 6b ~ 6c

5a 5b 5c Not Used
~ 6a

5a 5b 5c Not Used
~ 6a

~5

9 10

V I
~6

I
~6 ~ 6b ~6 ~ 6b ~ 6c

V
~ 6c

11 12

DIGITAL I/O

DIGITAL I/O

DIGITAL I/O

DIGITAL I/O

~ 8a ~ 8b ~ 8c ~8

~ 8a

~ 8a ~ 8b ~ 8c

V I
~8

14

DIGITAL I/O

7a 7b 7c Not Used

~7

7a 7b 7c Not Used
I
~ 8b

~7

7a 7b 7c Not Used

~7

13

4L

1a 1b 1c Not Used

~1

1a 1b 1c Not Used

~1

1a 1b 1c Not Used

~1

~8

V
~ 8c

~ 1a ~ 1b ~ 1c ~ 2a ~ 2b ~ 2c ~ 3a ~ 3b ~ 3c ~ 4a ~ 4b ~ 4c ~ 5a ~ 5b ~ 5c ~ 6a ~ 6b ~ 6c ~ 7a ~ 7b ~ 7c ~ 8a ~ 8b ~ 8c

CONTACT IN COMMON CONTACT IN CONTACT IN COMMON CONTACT IN CONTACT IN COMMON CONTACT IN CONTACT IN COMMON CONTACT IN CONTACT IN COMMON CONTACT IN CONTACT IN COMMON CONTACT IN CONTACT IN COMMON CONTACT IN CONTACT IN COMMON CONTACT IN

~ 1a ~ 1b ~ 1c ~ 2a ~ 2b ~ 2c ~ 3a ~ 3b ~ 3c ~ 4a ~ 4b ~ 4c ~ 5a ~ 5b ~ 5c ~ 6a ~ 6b ~ 6c ~ 7a ~ 7b ~ 7c ~ 8a ~ 8b ~ 8c

~ 1a ~ 1b ~ 1c ~ 2a ~ 2b ~ 2c ~ 3a ~ 3b ~ 3c ~ 4a ~ 4b ~ 4c ~ 5a ~ 5b ~ 5c ~ 6a ~ 6b ~ 6c ~ 7a ~ 7b ~ 7c ~ 8a ~ 8b ~ 8c

Not Used

~1

~1

V I

~1

V I

~2

~2

~2

~3

~4

~ 7a ~ 7c ~ 8a ~ 8c ~ 7b ~ 8b

CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN COMMON SURGE

~ 7a ~ 7c ~ 8a ~ 8c ~ 7b

~ 8b

SURGE

~3

~3

~4

~4

~5

~5

~6

~6

~8
SURGE

~ 8a

DIGITAL I/O

~7

~ 1a ~ 1b ~ 1c ~ 2a ~ 2b ~ 2c ~ 3a ~ 3b ~ 3c ~ 4a ~ 4b ~ 4c ~ 5a ~ 5b ~ 5c ~ 6a ~ 6b ~ 6c ~ 7a ~ 7b ~ 7c ~ 8a ~ 8b ~ 8c

~1

~2

~ 1a ~ 1c ~ 2a ~ 2c ~ 1b ~ 3a ~ 3c ~ 4a ~ 4c ~ 3b ~ 5a ~ 5c ~ 6a ~ 6c ~ 5b ~ 7a ~ 7c ~ 8a ~ 8c ~ 7b ~ 8b

CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN COMMON CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN COMMON CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN COMMON CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN COMMON SURGE

~ 1a ~ 1c ~ 2a ~ 2c ~ 1b ~ 3a ~ 3c ~ 4a ~ 4c ~ 3b ~ 5a ~ 5c ~ 6a ~ 6c ~ 5b

~ 5a ~ 5c ~ 6a ~ 6c ~ 5b ~ 7a ~ 7c ~ 8a ~ 8c ~ 7b ~ 8b

CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN COMMON CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN COMMON SURGE

~ 5a DIGITAL I/O ~ 5c ~ 6a ~ 6c ~ 5b ~ 7a ~ 7c ~ 8a ~ 8c ~ 7b

6D

6C

~1

~1

~2

~2

~3

~3

~3

~4

~4

~4

~5

~5

~6
DIGITAL I/O

DIGITAL I/O

~7

~7

~8

~8

~1

V I

~1

V I

~2

V I

~2

V I

~4

~ 8b

SURGE

~4

V I

~5

V I

~6

827719D2-X1.CDR

Figure 313: DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT MODULE WIRING (1 of 2)

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

~ 7a ~ 7c ~ 8a ~ 8c ~ 7b

CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN COMMON

~ 7a ~ 7c ~ 8a ~ 8c ~ 7b

~ 8b

SURGE

~3

~3

~ 5a ~ 5c ~ 6a ~ 6c ~ 5b

CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN COMMON

~ 5a DIGITAL I/O ~ 5c ~ 6a ~ 6c ~ 5b

6G

~ 1a ~ 1b ~ 1c ~ 2a ~ 2b ~ 2c ~ 3a ~ 3b ~ 3c ~ 4a ~ 4b ~ 4c

~ 7a ~ 7c ~ 8a ~ 8c ~ 7b

CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN COMMON

~ 7a DIGITAL I/O ~ 7c ~ 8a ~ 8c ~ 7b

6H

~ 1a ~ 1b ~ 1c ~ 2a ~ 2b ~ 2c ~ 3a ~ 3b ~ 3c ~ 4a ~ 4b ~ 4c ~ 5a ~ 5b ~ 5c ~ 6a ~ 6b ~ 6c

3-13

DIGITAL I/O

~ 7a ~ 7c ~ 8a ~ 8c ~ 7b

~6

6F

6E

~ 1a ~ 1b ~ 1c ~ 2a ~ 2b ~ 2c ~ 3a ~ 3b ~ 3c ~ 4a ~ 4b ~ 4c

~ 1a ~ 1b ~ 1c ~ 2a ~ 2b ~ 2c ~ 3a ~ 3b ~ 3c ~ 4a ~ 4b ~ 4c ~ 5a ~ 5b ~ 5c ~ 6a ~ 6b ~ 6c ~ 7a ~ 7b ~ 7c ~ 8a ~ 8b ~ 8c

~ 1a ~ 1b ~ 1c ~ 2a ~ 2b ~ 2c ~ 3a ~ 3b ~ 3c ~ 4a ~ 4b ~ 4c ~ 5a ~ 5b ~ 5c ~ 6a ~ 6b ~ 6c ~ 7a ~ 7b ~ 7c ~ 8b ~ 8c

~ 5a ~ 5c ~ 6a ~ 6c ~ 5b

CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN COMMON

~ 5a DIGITAL I/O ~ 5c ~ 6a ~ 6c ~ 5b

67

6A

~ 1a ~ 1b ~ 1c ~ 2a ~ 2b ~ 2c ~ 3a ~ 3b ~ 3c ~ 4a ~ 4b ~ 4c

~ 7a ~ 7c ~ 8a ~ 8c ~ 7b

CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN COMMON

~ 7a DIGITAL I/O ~ 7c ~ 8a ~ 8c ~ 7b

6B

~ 1a ~ 1b ~ 1c ~ 2a ~ 2b ~ 2c ~ 3a ~ 3b ~ 3c ~ 4a ~ 4b ~ 4c ~ 5a ~ 5b ~ 5c ~ 6a ~ 6b ~ 6c

3.2 WIRING

3 HARDWARE

V I

V I

~2

~2

~2

~3

~4

~ 7a ~ 7c ~ 8a ~ 8c ~ 7b ~ 8b

CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN COMMON SURGE

~ 7a ~ 7c ~ 8a ~ 8c ~ 7b

~ 8b

SURGE

~3

~3

~4

~4

~5

~5

~6
DIGITAL I/O

~6

~7

~8

V I

V I

~2

~2

V I

V I

~4

~4

~ 8b

SURGE

V I

~5

V I

~6

~ 5a ~ 5c ~ 6a ~ 6c ~ 5b ~ 7a ~ 7c ~ 8a ~ 8c ~ 7b ~ 8b

CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN COMMON CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN COMMON SURGE

~ 5a DIGITAL I/O ~ 5c ~ 6a ~ 6c ~ 5b ~ 7a ~ 7c ~ 8a ~ 8c ~ 7b

6R
~1

~2

~3

~4

~ 1a ~ 1b ~ 1c ~ 2a ~ 2b ~ 2c ~ 3a ~ 3b ~ 3c ~ 4a ~ 4b ~ 4c

~ 7a ~ 7c ~ 8a ~ 8c ~ 7b ~ 8b

CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN COMMON SURGE

~ 7a DIGITAL I/O ~ 7c ~ 8a ~ 8c ~ 7b

6S
~1

~2

~3

~4

~5

~6

~ 5a ~ 5c ~ 6a ~ 6c ~ 5b ~ 7a ~ 7c ~ 8a ~ 8c ~ 7b ~ 8b

CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN COMMON CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN COMMON SURGE

~ 5a DIGITAL I/O ~ 5c ~ 6a ~ 6c ~ 5b ~ 7a ~ 7c ~ 8a ~ 8c ~ 7b

6T
~1

~2

~3

~4

~ 1a ~ 1b ~ 1c ~ 2a ~ 2b ~ 2c ~ 3a ~ 3b ~ 3c ~ 4a ~ 4b ~ 4c

~ 7a ~ 7c ~ 8a ~ 8c ~ 7b ~ 8b

CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN COMMON SURGE

~ 7a DIGITAL I/O ~ 7c ~ 8a ~ 8c ~ 7b

6U

~1

~2

~3

~4

~5

~6

827719D2-X1.CDR

Figure 314: DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT MODULE WIRING (2 of 2) CORRECT POLARITY MUST BE OBSERVED FOR ALL CONTACT INPUT AND SOLID STATE OUTPUT CONNECTIONS FOR PROPER FUNCTIONALITY.
CAUTION

3-14

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

~ 7a ~ 7c ~ 8a ~ 8c ~ 7b

CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN COMMON

~ 7a ~ 7c ~ 8a ~ 8c ~ 7b

~ 8b

SURGE

~3

~3

~ 5a ~ 5c ~ 6a ~ 6c ~ 5b

CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN COMMON

~ 5a DIGITAL I/O ~ 5c ~ 6a ~ 6c ~ 5b

6N
~1

~ 1a ~ 1b ~ 1c ~ 2a ~ 2b ~ 2c ~ 3a ~ 3b ~ 3c ~ 4a ~ 4b ~ 4c

~ 7a ~ 7c ~ 8a ~ 8c ~ 7b

CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN COMMON

~ 7a DIGITAL I/O ~ 7c ~ 8a ~ 8c ~ 7b

6P

~1

~ 1a ~ 1b ~ 1c ~ 2a ~ 2b ~ 2c ~ 3a ~ 3b ~ 3c ~ 4a ~ 4b ~ 4c ~ 5a ~ 5b ~ 5c ~ 6a ~ 6b ~ 6c ~ 7a ~ 7b ~ 7c ~ 8a ~ 8b ~ 8c

~1

~ 5a ~ 5c ~ 6a ~ 6c ~ 5b

CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN COMMON

~ 5a DIGITAL I/O ~ 5c ~ 6a ~ 6c ~ 5b

6K

6L
~1

~ 1a ~ 1b ~ 1c ~ 2a ~ 2b ~ 2c ~ 3a ~ 3b ~ 3c ~ 4a ~ 4b ~ 4c

~ 7a ~ 7c ~ 8a ~ 8c ~ 7b

CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN COMMON

~ 7a DIGITAL I/O ~ 7c ~ 8a ~ 8c ~ 7b

6M
~1

~ 1a ~ 1b ~ 1c ~ 2a ~ 2b ~ 2c ~ 3a ~ 3b ~ 3c ~ 4a ~ 4b ~ 4c ~ 5a ~ 5b ~ 5c ~ 6a ~ 6b ~ 6c

~ 1a ~ 1b ~ 1c ~ 2a ~ 2b ~ 2c ~ 3a ~ 3b ~ 3c ~ 4a ~ 4b ~ 4c ~ 5a ~ 5b ~ 5c ~ 6a ~ 6b ~ 6c

~ 1a ~ 1b ~ 1c ~ 2a ~ 2b ~ 2c ~ 3a ~ 3b ~ 3c ~ 4a ~ 4b ~ 4c ~ 5a ~ 5b ~ 5c ~ 6a ~ 6b ~ 6c

~ 1a ~ 1b ~ 1c ~ 2a ~ 2b ~ 2c ~ 3a ~ 3b ~ 3c ~ 4a ~ 4b ~ 4c ~ 5a ~ 5b ~ 5c ~ 6a ~ 6b ~ 6c

3 HARDWARE CONTACT INPUTS:

3.2 WIRING

A dry contact has one side connected to Terminal B3b. This is the positive 48 V DC voltage rail supplied by the power supply module. The other side of the dry contact is connected to the required contact input terminal. Each contact input group has its own common (negative) terminal which must be connected to the DC negative terminal (B3a) of the power supply module. When a dry contact closes, a current of 1 to 3 mA will flow through the associated circuit. A wet contact has one side connected to the positive terminal of an external DC power supply. The other side of this contact is connected to the required contact input terminal. In addition, the negative side of the external source must be connected to the relay common (negative) terminal of each contact input group. The maximum external source voltage for this arrangement is 300 V DC. The voltage threshold at which each group of four contact inputs will detect a closed contact input is programmable as 17 V DC for 24 V sources, 33 V DC for 48 V sources, 84 V DC for 110 to 125 V sources, and 166 V DC for 250 V sources.
(Dry) DIGITAL I/O ~ 7a + CONTACT IN ~ 7c + CONTACT IN ~ 8a + CONTACT IN ~ 8c + CONTACT IN ~ 7b COMMON ~ 8b SURGE 6B ~ 7a ~ 7c ~ 8a ~ 8c ~ 7b (Wet) DIGITAL I/O 6B ~ 7a + CONTACT IN ~ 7a ~ 7c + CONTACT IN ~ 7c ~ 8a + CONTACT IN ~ 8a ~ 8c + CONTACT IN ~ 8c ~ 7b COMMON ~ 7b ~ 8b SURGE

24-250V

B 1b CRITICAL B 1a FAILURE B 2b B 3a 48 VDC OUTPUT B 3b + B 5b HI+ CONTROL B 6b LO+ POWER B 6a B 8a SURGE B 8b FILTER

POWER SUPPLY

827741A4.CDR

Figure 315: DRY AND WET CONTACT INPUT CONNECTIONS Wherever a tilde ~ symbol appears, substitute with the Slot Position of the module.
NOTE

CONTACT OUTPUTS: Contact outputs may be ordered as Form-A or Form-C. The Form A contacts may be connected for external circuit supervision. These contacts are provided with voltage and current monitoring circuits used to detect the loss of DC voltage in the circuit, and the presence of DC current flowing through the contacts when the Form-A contact closes. If enabled, the current monitoring can be used as a seal-in signal to ensure that the Form-A contact does not attempt to break the energized inductive coil circuit and weld the output contacts. There is no provision in the relay to detect a DC ground fault on 48 V DC control power external output. We recommend using an external DC supply.
NOTE

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

3-15

3.2 WIRING USE OF CONTACT INPUTS WITH AUTO-BURNISHING:

3 HARDWARE

The contact inputs sense a change of the state of the external device contact based on the measured current. When external devices are located in a harsh industrial environment (either outdoor or indoor), their contacts can be exposed to various types of contamination. Normally, there is a thin film of insulating sulfidation, oxidation, or contaminates on the surface of the contacts, sometimes making it difficult or impossible to detect a change of the state. This film must be removed to establish circuit continuity an impulse of higher than normal current can accomplish this. The contact inputs with auto-burnish create a high current impulse when the threshold is reached to burn off this oxidation layer as a maintenance to the contacts. Afterwards the contact input current is reduced to a steady-state current. The impulse will have a 5 second delay after a contact input changes state.
current

50 to 70 mA

3 mA time 25 to 50 ms
842749A1.CDR

Figure 316: CURRENT THROUGH CONTACT INPUTS WITH AUTO-BURNISHING Regular contact inputs limit current to less than 3 mA to reduce station battery burden. In contrast, contact inputs with autoburnishing allow currents up to 50 to 70 mA at the first instance when the change of state was sensed. Then, within 25 to 50 ms, this current is slowly reduced to 3 mA as indicated above. The 50 to 70 mA peak current burns any film on the contacts, allowing for proper sensing of state changes. If the external device contact is bouncing, the auto-burnishing starts when external device contact bouncing is over. Another important difference between the auto-burnishing input module and the regular input modules is that only two contact inputs have common ground, as opposed to four contact inputs sharing one common ground (refer to the Digital Input/ Output Module Wiring diagrams). This is beneficial when connecting contact inputs to separate voltage sources. Consequently, the threshold voltage setting is also defined per group of two contact inputs. The auto-burnish feature can be disabled or enabled using the DIP switches found on each daughter card. There is a DIP switch for each contact, for a total of 16 inputs.
CONTACT INPUT 1 AUTO-BURNISH = OFF CONTACT INPUT 2 AUTO-BURNISH = OFF

CONTACT INPUT 1 AUTO-BURNISH = ON CONTACT INPUT 2 AUTO-BURNISH = OFF

CONTACT INPUT 1 AUTO-BURNISH = OFF CONTACT INPUT 2 AUTO-BURNISH = ON

CONTACT INPUT 1 AUTO-BURNISH = ON CONTACT INPUT 2 AUTO-BURNISH = ON


842751A1.CDR

Figure 317: AUTO-BURNISH DIP SWITCHES The auto-burnish circuitry has an internal fuse for safety purposes. During regular maintenance, the auto-burnish functionality can be checked using an oscilloscope.
NOTE

3-16

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

3 HARDWARE

3.2 WIRING 3.2.6 TRANSDUCER INPUTS/OUTPUTS

Transducer input modules can receive input signals from external dcmA output transducers (dcmA In) or resistance temperature detectors (RTD). Hardware and software is provided to receive signals from these external transducers and convert these signals into a digital format for use as required. Transducer output modules provide DC current outputs in several standard dcmA ranges. Software is provided to configure virtually any analog quantity used in the relay to drive the analog outputs. Every transducer input/output module has a total of 24 terminal connections. These connections are arranged as three terminals per row with a total of eight rows. A given row may be used for either inputs or outputs, with terminals in column "a" having positive polarity and terminals in column "c" having negative polarity. Since an entire row is used for a single input/ output channel, the name of the channel is assigned using the module slot position and row number. Each module also requires that a connection from an external ground bus be made to Terminal 8b. The current outputs require a twisted-pair shielded cable, where the shield is grounded at one end only. The figure below illustrates the transducer module types (5A, 5C, 5D, 5E, and 5F) and channel arrangements that may be ordered for the relay. Wherever a tilde ~ symbol appears, substitute with the Slot Position of the module.
NOTE

827831AB-X1.CDR

Figure 318: TRANSDUCER INPUT/OUTPUT MODULE WIRING

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

3-17

3.2 WIRING

3 HARDWARE 3.2.7 RS232 FACEPLATE PORT

A 9-pin RS232C serial port is located on the relays faceplate for programming with a portable (personal) computer. All that is required to use this interface is a personal computer running the EnerVista UR Setup software provided with the relay. Cabling for the RS232 port is shown in the following figure for both 9 pin and 25 pin connectors. The baud rate for this port is fixed at 19200 bps.
NOTE

Figure 319: RS232 FACEPLATE PORT CONNECTION 3.2.8 CPU COMMUNICATIONS PORTS a) OPTIONS In addition to the RS232 port on the faceplate, the relay provides the user with two additional communication port(s) depending on the CPU module installed. The CPU modules do not require a surge ground connection.
NOTE

CPU TYPE 9E 9G 9H 9J 9K 9L 9M 9N 9P 9R

COM1 RS485 10Base-F and 10Base-T Redundant 10Base-F 10Base-FX Redundant 10Base-FX 100Base-FX Redundant 100Base-FX 10/100Base-T 100Base-FX Redundant 100Base-FX

COM2 RS485 RS485 RS485 RS485 RS485 RS485 RS485 RS485 RS485 RS485

3-18

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

3 HARDWARE

3.2 WIRING

827831AF-X6.CDR

Figure 320: CPU MODULE COMMUNICATIONS WIRING b) RS485 PORTS RS485 data transmission and reception are accomplished over a single twisted pair with transmit and receive data alternating over the same two wires. Through the use of these port(s), continuous monitoring and control from a remote computer, SCADA system or PLC is possible. To minimize errors from noise, the use of shielded twisted pair wire is recommended. Correct polarity must also be observed. For instance, the relays must be connected with all RS485 + terminals connected together, and all RS485 terminals connected together. The COM terminal should be connected to the common wire inside the shield, when provided. To avoid loop currents, the shield should be grounded at one point only. Each relay should also be daisy chained to the next one in the link. A maximum of 32 relays can be connected in this manner without exceeding driver capability. For larger systems, additional serial channels must be added. It is also possible to use commercially available repeaters to increase the number of relays on a single channel to more than 32. Star or stub connections should be avoided entirely. Lightning strikes and ground surge currents can cause large momentary voltage differences between remote ends of the communication link. For this reason, surge protection devices are internally provided at both communication ports. An isolated power supply with an optocoupled data interface also acts to reduce noise coupling. To ensure maximum reliability, all equipment should have similar transient protection devices installed. Both ends of the RS485 circuit should also be terminated with an impedance as shown below.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

3-19

3.2 WIRING

3 HARDWARE

Figure 321: RS485 SERIAL CONNECTION c) 10BASE-FL AND 100BASE-FX FIBER OPTIC PORTS ENSURE THE DUST COVERS ARE INSTALLED WHEN THE FIBER IS NOT IN USE. DIRTY OR SCRATCHED CONNECTORS CAN LEAD TO HIGH LOSSES ON A FIBER LINK.
CAUTION

OBSERVING ANY FIBER TRANSMITTER OUTPUT MAY CAUSE INJURY TO THE EYE.

CAUTION

The fiber optic communication ports allow for fast and efficient communications between relays at 10 or 100Mbps. Optical fiber may be connected to the relay supporting a wavelength of 820 nm in multi-mode or 1310 nm in multi-mode and singlemode. The 10 Mbps rate is available for CPU modules 9G and 9H; 100Mbps is available for modules 9J, 9K, 9L, and 9M. The 9H, 9K and 9M modules have a second pair of identical optical fiber transmitter and receiver for redundancy. The optical fiber sizes supported include 50/125 m, 62.5/125 m and 100/140 m for 10 Mbps. The fiber optic port is designed such that the response times will not vary for any core that is 100 m or less in diameter, 62.5 m for 100 Mbps. For optical power budgeting, splices are required every 1 km for the transmitter/receiver pair. When splicing optical fibers, the diameter and numerical aperture of each fiber must be the same. In order to engage or disengage the ST type connector, only a quarter turn of the coupling is required.

3-20

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

3 HARDWARE

3.2 WIRING 3.2.9 IRIG-B

IRIG-B is a standard time code format that allows stamping of events to be synchronized among connected devices within 1 millisecond. The IRIG time code formats are serial, width-modulated codes which can be either DC level shifted or amplitude modulated (AM). Third party equipment is available for generating the IRIG-B signal; this equipment may use a GPS satellite system to obtain the time reference so that devices at different geographic locations can also be synchronized.

GPS SATELLITE SYSTEM


GPS CONNECTION OPTIONAL

RELAY
4B IRIG-B(+) IRIG-B(-) RECEIVER BNC (IN) 4A RG58/59 COAXIAL CABLE +

IRIG-B TIME CODE GENERATOR


(DC SHIFT OR AMPLITUDE MODULATED SIGNAL CAN BE USED)

BNC (OUT) REPEATER

TO OTHER DEVICES (DC-SHIFT ONLY)

827756A5.CDR

Figure 322: IRIG-B CONNECTION The IRIG-B repeater provides an amplified DC-shift IRIG-B signal to other equipment. By using one IRIG-B serial connection, several UR-series relays can be synchronized. The IRIG-B repeater has a bypass function to maintain the time signal even when a relay in the series is powered down.

Figure 323: IRIG-B REPEATER

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

3-21

3.3 DIRECT INPUT/OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS 3.3DIRECT INPUT/OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS

3 HARDWARE 3.3.1 DESCRIPTION

The G60 direct inputs/outputs feature makes use of the Type 7 series of communications modules. These modules are also used by the L90 Line Differential Relay for inter-relay communications. The direct input/output feature uses the communications channel(s) provided by these modules to exchange digital state information between relays. This feature is available on all UR-series relay models except for the L90 Line Differential relay. The communications channels are normally connected in a ring configuration as shown below. The transmitter of one module is connected to the receiver of the next module. The transmitter of this second module is then connected to the receiver of the next module in the ring. This is continued to form a communications ring. The figure below illustrates a ring of four UR-series relays with the following connections: UR1-Tx to UR2-Rx, UR2-Tx to UR3-Rx, UR3-Tx to UR4-Rx, and UR4-Tx to UR1-Rx. A maximum of sixteen (16) UR-series relays can be connected in a single ring

UR #1

Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx
842006A1.CDR

UR #2

UR #3

UR #4

Figure 324: DIRECT INPUT/OUTPUT SINGLE CHANNEL CONNECTION The interconnection for dual-channel Type 7 communications modules is shown below. Two channel modules allow for a redundant ring configuration. That is, two rings can be created to provide an additional independent data path. The required connections are: UR1-Tx1 to UR2-Rx1, UR2-Tx1 to UR3-Rx1, UR3-Tx1 to UR4-Rx1, and UR4-Tx1 to UR1-Rx1 for the first ring; and UR1-Tx2 to UR4-Rx2, UR4-Tx2 to UR3-Rx2, UR3-Tx2 to UR2-Rx2, and UR2-Tx2 to UR1-Rx2 for the second ring.
Tx1 Rx1 Tx2 Rx2 Tx1

UR #1

UR #2

Rx1 Tx2 Rx2 Tx1

UR #3

Rx1 Tx2 Rx2 Tx1

UR #4

Rx1 Tx2 Rx2


842007A1.CDR

Figure 325: DIRECT INPUT/OUTPUT DUAL CHANNEL CONNECTION The following diagram shows the connection for three UR-series relays using two independent communication channels. UR1 and UR3 have single Type 7 communication modules; UR2 has a dual-channel module. The two communication channels can be of different types, depending on the Type 7 modules used. To allow the direct input/output data to crossover from Channel 1 to Channel 2 on UR2, the DIRECT I/O CHANNEL CROSSOVER setting should be Enabled on UR2. This forces UR2 to forward messages received on Rx1 out Tx2, and messages received on Rx2 out Tx1.

3-22

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

3 HARDWARE

3.3 DIRECT INPUT/OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS

UR #1

Tx Rx

Channel #1
Tx1

UR #2

Rx1 Tx2 Rx2

Channel #2 UR #3
Tx Rx
842013A1.CDR

Figure 326: DIRECT INPUT/OUTPUT SINGLE/DUAL CHANNEL COMBINATION CONNECTION The interconnection requirements are described in further detail in this section for each specific variation of Type 7 communications module. These modules are listed in the following table. All fiber modules use ST type connectors. Table 33: CHANNEL COMMUNICATION OPTIONS
MODULE 2A 2B 7A 7B 7C 7D 7E 7F 7G 7H 7I 7J 7K 7L 7M 7N 7P 7Q 7R 7S 7T 7W 72 73 74 75 76 77 SPECIFICATION C37.94SM, 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 channel single-mode C37.94SM, 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 2 channel single-mode 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 channel 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 channel 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 channel 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 channel Channel 1: G.703, Channel 2: 820 nm, multi-mode Channel 1: G.703, Channel 2: 1300 nm, multi-mode Channel 1: G.703, Channel 2: 1300 nm, single-mode ELED 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 channels 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 channels 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 2 channels 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 channels Channel 1: RS422, Channel 2: 820 nm, multi-mode, LED Channel 1: RS422, Channel 2: 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED Channel 1: RS422, Channel 2: 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED Channel 1: RS422, Channel 2: 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER Channel 1: G.703, Channel 2: 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER G.703, 1 channel G.703, 2 channels RS422, 1 channel RS422, 2 channels 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 channel 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 channels Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 channel IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 channels

OBSERVING ANY FIBER TRANSMITTER OUTPUT MAY CAUSE INJURY TO THE EYE.
CAUTION

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

3-23

3.3 DIRECT INPUT/OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS

3 HARDWARE 3.3.2 FIBER: LED AND ELED TRANSMITTERS

The following figure shows the configuration for the 7A, 7B, 7C, 7H, 7I, and 7J fiber-only modules.
Module: Connection Location: 7A / 7B / 7C Slot X 7H / 7I / 7J Slot X

RX1 TX1

RX1 TX1

3
RX2 TX2 1 Channel 2 Channels
831719A2.CDR

Figure 327: LED AND ELED FIBER MODULES 3.3.3 FIBER-LASER TRANSMITTERS The following figure shows the configuration for the 72, 73, 7D, and 7K fiber-laser module.
Module: Connection Location: 72/ 7D Slot X TX1 RX1 73/ 7K Slot X TX1 RX1

TX2 RX2

1 Channel

2 Channels

831720A3.CDR

Figure 328: LASER FIBER MODULES When using a LASER Interface, attenuators may be necessary to ensure that you do not exceed Maximum Optical Input Power to the receiver.
WARNING

3-24

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

3 HARDWARE

3.3 DIRECT INPUT/OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS 3.3.4 G.703 INTERFACE

a) DESCRIPTION The following figure shows the 64K ITU G.703 co-directional interface configuration.
RATE
NOTE

The G.703 module is fixed at 64 kbps only. The SETTINGS setting is not applicable to this module.

PRODUCT SETUP

DIRECT I/O

DIRECT I/O DATA

AWG 24 twisted shielded pair is recommended for external connections, with the shield grounded only at one end. Connecting the shield to Pin X1a or X6a grounds the shield since these pins are internally connected to ground. Thus, if Pin X1a or X6a is used, do not ground at the other end. This interface module is protected by surge suppression devices.
Shld. Tx

G.703 CHANNEL 1

Rx Tx + Rx +

SURGE
Shld. Tx

COMM.

G.703 CHANNEL 2

Rx Tx + Rx +

SURGE

X 1a X 1b X 2a X 2b X 3a X 3b X 6a X 6b X 7a X 7b X 8a X 8b

7R

831727A2-X1.CDR

Figure 329: G.703 INTERFACE CONFIGURATION The following figure shows the typical pin interconnection between two G.703 interfaces. For the actual physical arrangement of these pins, see the Rear Terminal Assignments section earlier in this chapter. All pin interconnections are to be maintained for a connection to a multiplexer.
7R
Tx Tx Rx Tx + Rx +

G.703 CHANNEL 1

Rx Tx + Rx +

G.703 CHANNEL 1

SURGE
Shld. Tx -

SURGE
Shld. Tx Tx + Rx +

COMM.

Tx + Rx +

SURGE

SURGE
831727A2.CDR

Figure 330: TYPICAL PIN INTERCONNECTION BETWEEN TWO G.703 INTERFACES Pin nomenclature may differ from one manufacturer to another. Therefore, it is not uncommon to see pinouts numbered TxA, TxB, RxA and RxB. In such cases, it can be assumed that A is equivalent to + and B is equivalent to .

NOTE

b) G.703 SELECTION SWITCH PROCEDURES 1. Remove the G.703 module (7R or 7S): The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module, must be pulled simultaneously in order to release the module for removal. Before performing this action, control power must be removed from the relay. The original location of the module should be recorded to help ensure that the same or replacement module is inserted into the correct slot. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove the module cover screw. Remove the top cover by sliding it towards the rear and then lift it upwards. Set the Timing Selection Switches (Channel 1, Channel 2) to the desired timing modes. Replace the top cover and the cover screw.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

COMM.

G.703 CHANNEL 2

Rx -

Rx -

G.703 CHANNEL 2

7R

Shld.

X 1a X 1b X 2a X 2b X 3a X 3b X 6a X 6b X 7a X 7b X 8a X 8b

X 1a X 1b X 2a X 2b X 3a X 3b X 6a X 6b X 7a X 7b X 8a X 8b

Shld.

3-25

3.3 DIRECT INPUT/OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS 6.

3 HARDWARE

Re-insert the G.703 module Take care to ensure that the correct module type is inserted into the correct slot position. The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module must be in the disengaged position as the module is smoothly inserted into the slot. Once the clips have cleared the raised edge of the chassis, engage the clips simultaneously. When the clips have locked into position, the module will be fully inserted.

Figure 331: G.703 TIMING SELECTION SWITCH SETTING Table 34: G.703 TIMING SELECTIONS
SWITCHES S1 S5 and S6 FUNCTION OFF Octet Timing Disabled ON Octet Timing 8 kHz S5 = OFF and S6 = OFF Loop Timing Mode S5 = ON and S6 = OFF Internal Timing Mode S5 = OFF and S6 = ON Minimum Remote Loopback Mode S5 = ON and S6 = ON Dual Loopback Mode

c) OCTET TIMING (SWITCH S1) If Octet Timing is enabled (ON), this 8 kHz signal will be asserted during the violation of Bit 8 (LSB) necessary for connecting to higher order systems. When G60s are connected back to back, Octet Timing should be disabled (OFF). d) TIMING MODES (SWITCHES S5 AND S6) There are two timing modes for the G.703 module: internal timing mode and loop timing mode (default). Internal Timing Mode: The system clock is generated internally. Therefore, the G.703 timing selection should be in the Internal Timing Mode for back-to-back (UR-to-UR) connections. For back-to-back connections, set for Octet Timing (S1 = OFF) and Timing Mode = Internal Timing (S5 = ON and S6 = OFF). Loop Timing Mode: The system clock is derived from the received line signal. Therefore, the G.703 timing selection should be in Loop Timing Mode for connections to higher order systems. For connection to a higher order system (URto-multiplexer, factory defaults), set to Octet Timing (S1 = ON) and set Timing Mode = Loop Timing (S5 = OFF and S6 = OFF).

3-26

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

3 HARDWARE

3.3 DIRECT INPUT/OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS

The switch settings for the internal and loop timing modes are shown below:

842752A1.CDR

e) TEST MODES (SWITCHES S5 AND S6) MINIMUM REMOTE LOOPBACK MODE: In Minimum Remote Loopback mode, the multiplexer is enabled to return the data from the external interface without any processing to assist in diagnosing G.703 Line Side problems irrespective of clock rate. Data enters from the G.703 inputs, passes through the data stabilization latch which also restores the proper signal polarity, passes through the multiplexer and then returns to the transmitter. The Differential Received Data is processed and passed to the G.703 Transmitter module after which point the data is discarded. The G.703 Receiver module is fully functional and continues to process data and passes it to the Differential Manchester Transmitter module. Since timing is returned as it is received, the timing source is expected to be from the G.703 line side of the interface.

DMR

G7X

DMR = Differential Manchester Receiver DMX = Differential Manchester Transmitter G7X = G.703 Transmitter G7R = G.703 Receiver

DMX

G7R

DUAL LOOPBACK MODE: In Dual Loopback Mode, the multiplexers are active and the functions of the circuit are divided into two with each receiver/ transmitter pair linked together to deconstruct and then reconstruct their respective signals. Differential Manchester data enters the Differential Manchester Receiver module and then is returned to the Differential Manchester Transmitter module. Likewise, G.703 data enters the G.703 Receiver module and is passed through to the G.703 Transmitter module to be returned as G.703 data. Because of the complete split in the communications path and because, in each case, the clocks are extracted and reconstructed with the outgoing data, in this mode there must be two independent sources of timing. One source lies on the G.703 line side of the interface while the other lies on the Differential Manchester side of the interface.

DMR

G7X

DMR = Differential Manchester Receiver DMX = Differential Manchester Transmitter G7X = G.703 Transmitter G7R = G.703 Receiver

DMX

G7R

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

3-27

3.3 DIRECT INPUT/OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS

3 HARDWARE 3.3.5 RS422 INTERFACE

a) DESCRIPTION The following figure shows the RS422 2-terminal interface configuration at 64 kbps. AWG 24 twisted shielded pair is recommended for external connections. This interface module is protected by surge suppression devices which optically isolated. SHIELD TERMINATION The shield pins (6a and 7b) are internally connected to the ground pin (8a). Proper shield termination is as follows: Site 1: Terminate shield to pins 6a and/or 7b; Site 2: Terminate shield to COM pin 2b. The clock terminating impedance should match the impedance of the line.

W 3b W 3a W 2a W 4b W 6a W 5b W 5a W 4a W 6b W 7b W 7a W 8b W 2b W 8a

Rx Tx + Rx + Shld. Tx Rx Tx + Rx + Shld. + com

RS422 CHANNEL 1

RS422 CHANNEL 2

CLOCK

SURGE
RS422.CDR p/o 827831A6.CDR

Figure 332: RS422 INTERFACE CONFIGURATION The following figure shows the typical pin interconnection between two RS422 interfaces. All pin interconnections are to be maintained for a connection to a multiplexer.

Figure 333: TYPICAL PIN INTERCONNECTION BETWEEN TWO RS422 INTERFACES b) TWO CHANNEL APPLICATIONS VIA MULTIPLEXERS The RS422 Interface may be used for single or two channel applications over SONET/SDH and/or multiplexed systems. When used in single channel applications, the RS422 interface links to higher order systems in a typical fashion observing transmit (Tx), receive (Rx), and send timing (ST) connections. However, when used in two channel applications, certain criteria must be followed since there is one clock input for the two RS422 channels. The system will function correctly if the following connections are observed and your data module has a terminal timing feature. Terminal timing is a common feature to most synchronous data units that allows the module to accept timing from an external source. Using the terminal timing feature, two channel applications can be achieved if these connections are followed: The send timing outputs from the multiplexer (data module 1), will connect to the Clock inputs of the URRS422 interface in the usual fashion. In addition, the send timing outputs of data module 1 will also be paralleled to the terminal timing inputs of data module 2. By using this configuration, the timing for both data modules and both URRS422 channels will be derived from a single clock source. As a result, data sampling for both of the URRS422 channels will be synchronized via the send timing leads on data module 1 as shown below. If the terminal timing feature is not available or this type of connection is not desired, the G.703 interface is a viable option that does not impose timing restrictions.

3-28

G60 Generator Management Relay

W7W

Tx -

GE Multilin

3 HARDWARE

3.3 DIRECT INPUT/OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS

Data Module 1 Pin No. Signal Name SD(A) - Send Data SD(B) - Send Data RD(A) - Received Data RD(B) - Received Data RS(A) - Request to Send (RTS) RS(B) - Request to Send (RTS) RT(A) - Receive Timing RT(B) - Receive Timing CS(A) - Clear To Send CS(B) - Clear To Send Local Loopback Remote Loopback Signal Ground ST(A) - Send Timing ST(B) - Send Timing Data Module 2 Pin No. Signal Name TT(A) - Terminal Timing TT(B) - Terminal Timing SD(A) - Sand Data SD(B) - Sand Data RD(A) - Received Data RD(B) - Received Data RS(A) - Request to Send (RTS) RS(B) - Request to Send (RTS) CS(A) - Clear To Send CS(B) - Clear To Send Local Loopback Remote Loopback Signal Ground ST(A) - Send Timing ST(B) - Send Timing 831022A2.CDR

7W

Tx1(+) Tx1(-)

RS422 CHANNEL 1

Rx1(+) Rx1(-) Shld.

CLOCK

+ Tx2(+) Tx2(-)

L90 COMM.

RS422 CHANNEL 2

Rx2(+) Rx2(-) Shld. com

SURGE

W 2a W 3b W 4b W 3a W 6a W 7a W 8b W 4a W 5b W 6b W 5a W 7b W 2b W 8a

Figure 334: TIMING CONFIGURATION FOR RS422 TWO-CHANNEL, 3-TERMINAL APPLICATION Data module 1 provides timing to the G60 RS422 interface via the ST(A) and ST(B) outputs. Data module 1 also provides timing to data module 2 TT(A) and TT(B) inputs via the ST(A) and AT(B) outputs. The data module pin numbers have been omitted in the figure above since they may vary depending on the manufacturer. c) TRANSIT TIMING The RS422 Interface accepts one clock input for Transmit Timing. It is important that the rising edge of the 64 kHz Transmit Timing clock of the Multiplexer Interface is sampling the data in the center of the Transmit Data window. Therefore, it is important to confirm Clock and Data Transitions to ensure Proper System Operation. For example, the following figure shows the positive edge of the Tx Clock in the center of the Tx Data bit.

Tx Clock

Tx Data

Figure 335: CLOCK AND DATA TRANSITIONS

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

3-29

3.3 DIRECT INPUT/OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS d) RECEIVE TIMING

3 HARDWARE

The RS422 Interface utilizes NRZI-MARK Modulation Code and; therefore, does not rely on an Rx Clock to recapture data. NRZI-MARK is an edge-type, invertible, self-clocking code. To recover the Rx Clock from the data-stream, an integrated DPLL (Digital Phase Lock Loop) circuit is utilized. The DPLL is driven by an internal clock, which is over-sampled 16X, and uses this clock along with the data-stream to generate a data clock that can be used as the SCC (Serial Communication Controller) receive clock. 3.3.6 RS422 AND FIBER INTERFACE The following figure shows the combined RS422 plus Fiber interface configuration at 64K baud. The 7L, 7M, 7N, 7P, and 74 modules are used in 2-terminal with a redundant channel or 3-terminal configurations where Channel 1 is employed via the RS422 interface (possibly with a multiplexer) and Channel 2 via direct fiber. AWG 24 twisted shielded pair is recommended for external RS422 connections and the shield should be grounded only at one end. For the direct fiber channel, power budget issues should be addressed properly. When using a LASER Interface, attenuators may be necessary to ensure that you do not exceed Maximum Optical Input Power to the receiver.
WARNING

L907LNMP.CDR P/O 827831AE.DWG

Figure 336: RS422 AND FIBER INTERFACE CONNECTION Connections shown above are for multiplexers configured as DCE (Data Communications Equipment) units. 3.3.7 G.703 AND FIBER INTERFACE The figure below shows the combined G.703 plus Fiber interface configuration at 64K baud. The 7E, 7F, 7G, 7Q, and 75 modules are used in configurations where Channel 1 is employed via the G.703 interface (possibly with a multiplexer) and Channel 2 via direct fiber. AWG 24 twisted shielded pair is recommended for external G.703 connections connecting the shield to Pin 1A at one end only. For the direct fiber channel, power budget issues should be addressed properly. See previous sections for more details on the G.703 and Fiber interfaces. When using a LASER Interface, attenuators may be necessary to ensure that you do not exceed Maximum Optical Input Power to the receiver.
WARNING

X 1a X 1b X 2a X 2b X 3a X 3b

Tx Rx Tx + Rx +

G.703 CHANNEL 1

SURGE

Tx2 Rx2

FIBER CHANNEL 2

Figure 337: G.703 AND FIBER INTERFACE CONNECTION

3-30

G60 Generator Management Relay

W7E, F, G and Q

Shld.

GE Multilin

3 HARDWARE

3.3 DIRECT INPUT/OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS 3.3.8 IEEE C37.94 INTERFACE

The UR-series IEEE C37.94 communication modules (76 and 77) are designed to interface with IEEE C37.94 compliant digital multiplexers and/or an IEEE C37.94 compliant interface converter for use with direct input/output applications for firmware revisions 3.30 and higher. The IEEE C37.94 standard defines a point-to-point optical link for synchronous data between a multiplexer and a teleprotection device. This data is typically 64 kbps, but the standard provides for speeds up to 64n kbps, where n = 1, 2,, 12. The UR-series C37.94 communication module is 64 kbps only with n fixed at 1. The frame is a valid International Telecommunications Union (ITU-T) recommended G.704 pattern from the standpoint of framing and data rate. The frame is 256 bits and is repeated at a frame rate of 8000 Hz, with a resultant bit rate of 2048 kbps. The specifications for the module are as follows: IEEE standard: C37.94 for 1 64 kbps optical fiber interface Fiber optic cable type: 50 mm or 62.5 mm core diameter optical fiber Fiber optic mode: multi-mode Fiber optic cable length: up to 2 km Fiber optic connector: type ST Wavelength: 830 40 nm Connection: as per all fiber optic connections, a Tx to Rx connection is required. The UR-series C37.94 communication module can be connected directly to any compliant digital multiplexer that supports the IEEE C37.94 standard as shown below.
IEEE C37.94 Fiber Interface UR series relay up to 2 km Digital Multiplexer IEEE C37.94 compliant

The UR-series C37.94 communication module can be connected to the electrical interface (G.703, RS422, or X.21) of a non-compliant digital multiplexer via an optical-to-electrical interface converter that supports the IEEE C37.94 standard, as shown below.
IEEE C37.94 Fiber Interface UR series relay up to 2 km IEEE C37.94 Converter RS422 Interface

Digital Multiplexer with EIA-422 Interface

The UR-series C37.94 communication module has six (6) switches that are used to set the clock configuration. The functions of these control switches is shown below.

842753A1.CDR

For the Internal Timing Mode, the system clock is generated internally. Therefore, the timing switch selection should be Internal Timing for Relay 1 and Loop Timed for Relay 2. There must be only one timing source configured. For the Looped Timing Mode, the system clock is derived from the received line signal. Therefore, the timing selection should be in Loop Timing Mode for connections to higher order systems. The C37.94 communications module cover removal procedure is as follows:

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

3-31

3.3 DIRECT INPUT/OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS 1. Remove the C37.94 module (76 or 77):

3 HARDWARE

The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module, must be pulled simultaneously in order to release the module for removal. Before performing this action, control power must be removed from the relay. The original location of the module should be recorded to help ensure that the same or replacement module is inserted into the correct slot. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Remove the module cover screw. Remove the top cover by sliding it towards the rear and then lift it upwards. Set the Timing Selection Switches (Channel 1, Channel 2) to the desired timing modes (see description above). Replace the top cover and the cover screw. Re-insert the C37.94 module Take care to ensure that the correct module type is inserted into the correct slot position. The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module must be in the disengaged position as the module is smoothly inserted into the slot. Once the clips have cleared the raised edge of the chassis, engage the clips simultaneously. When the clips have locked into position, the module will be fully inserted.

Figure 338: IEEE C37.94 TIMING SELECTION SWITCH SETTING

3-32

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

3 HARDWARE

3.3 DIRECT INPUT/OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS 3.3.9 C37.94SM INTERFACE

The UR-series C37.94SM communication modules (2A and 2B) are designed to interface with modified IEEE C37.94 compliant digital multiplexers and/or IEEE C37.94 compliant interface converters that have been converted from 820 nm multimode fiber optics to 1300 nm ELED single-mode fiber optics. The IEEE C37.94 standard defines a point-to-point optical link for synchronous data between a multiplexer and a teleprotection device. This data is typically 64 kbps, but the standard provides for speeds up to 64n kbps, where n = 1, 2,, 12. The UR-series C37.94SM communication module is 64 kbps only with n fixed at 1. The frame is a valid International Telecommunications Union (ITU-T) recommended G.704 pattern from the standpoint of framing and data rate. The frame is 256 bits and is repeated at a frame rate of 8000 Hz, with a resultant bit rate of 2048 kbps. The specifications for the module are as follows: Emulated IEEE standard: emulates C37.94 for 1 64 kbps optical fiber interface (modules set to n = 1 or 64 kbps) Fiber optic cable type: 9/125 m core diameter optical fiber Fiber optic mode: single-mode, ELED compatible with HP HFBR-1315T transmitter and HP HFBR-2316T receiver Fiber optic cable length: up to 10 km Fiber optic connector: type ST Wavelength: 1300 40 nm Connection: as per all fiber optic connections, a Tx to Rx connection is required. The UR-series C37.94SM communication module can be connected directly to any compliant digital multiplexer that supports C37.94SM as shown below.
C37.94SM Fiber Interface UR-series relay up to 10 km Digital Multiplexer C37.94SM

It can also can be connected directly to any other UR-series relay with a C37.94SM module as shown below.
C37.94SM Fiber Interface UR-series relay up to 10 km UR-series relay

The UR-series C37.94SM communication module has six (6) switches that are used to set the clock configuration. The functions of these control switches is shown below.

842753A1.CDR

For the Internal Timing Mode, the system clock is generated internally. Therefore, the timing switch selection should be Internal Timing for Relay 1 and Loop Timed for Relay 2. There must be only one timing source configured. For the Looped Timing Mode, the system clock is derived from the received line signal. Therefore, the timing selection should be in Loop Timing Mode for connections to higher order systems. The C37.94SM communications module cover removal procedure is as follows: 1. Remove the C37.94SM module (modules 2A or 2B):

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

3-33

3.3 DIRECT INPUT/OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS

3 HARDWARE

The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module, must be pulled simultaneously in order to release the module for removal. Before performing this action, control power must be removed from the relay. The original location of the module should be recorded to help ensure that the same or replacement module is inserted into the correct slot. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Remove the module cover screw. Remove the top cover by sliding it towards the rear and then lift it upwards. Set the Timing Selection Switches (Channel 1, Channel 2) to the desired timing modes (see description above). Replace the top cover and the cover screw. Re-insert the C37.94SM module Take care to ensure that the correct module type is inserted into the correct slot position. The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module must be in the disengaged position as the module is smoothly inserted into the slot. Once the clips have cleared the raised edge of the chassis, engage the clips simultaneously. When the clips have locked into position, the module will be fully inserted.

Figure 339: C37.94SM TIMING SELECTION SWITCH SETTING

3-34

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

4 HUMAN INTERFACES

4.1 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE INTERFACE

4 HUMAN INTERFACES 4.1ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE INTERFACE 4.1.1 GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE The EnerVista UR Setup software provides a graphical user interface (GUI) as one of two human interfaces to a UR device. The alternate human interface is implemented via the devices faceplate keypad and display (see Faceplate Interface section in this chapter). The EnerVista UR Setup software provides a single facility to configure, monitor, maintain, and trouble-shoot the operation of relay functions, connected over local or wide area communication networks. It can be used while disconnected (i.e. offline) or connected (i.e. on-line) to a UR device. In off-line mode, settings files can be created for eventual downloading to the device. In on-line mode, you can communicate with the device in real-time. The EnerVista UR Setup software, provided with every G60 relay, can be run from any computer supporting Microsoft Windows 95, 98, NT, 2000, ME, and XP. This chapter provides a summary of the basic EnerVista UR Setup software interface features. The EnerVista UR Setup Help File provides details for getting started and using the EnerVista UR Setup software interface. 4.1.2 CREATING A SITE LIST To start using the EnerVista UR Setup software, a site definition and device definition must first be created. See the EnerVista UR Setup Help File or refer to the Connecting EnerVista UR Setup with the G60 section in Chapter 1 for details. 4.1.3 SOFTWARE OVERVIEW a) ENGAGING A DEVICE The EnerVista UR Setup software may be used in on-line mode (relay connected) to directly communicate with a UR relay. Communicating relays are organized and grouped by communication interfaces and into sites. Sites may contain any number of relays selected from the UR product series. b) USING SETTINGS FILES The EnerVista UR Setup software interface supports three ways of handling changes to relay settings: In off-line mode (relay disconnected) to create or edit relay settings files for later download to communicating relays. While connected to a communicating relay to directly modify any relay settings via relay data view windows, and then save the settings to the relay. You can create/edit settings files and then write them to the relay while the interface is connected to the relay.

Settings files are organized on the basis of file names assigned by the user. A settings file contains data pertaining to the following types of relay settings: Device Definition Product Setup System Setup FlexLogic Grouped Elements Control Elements Inputs/Outputs Testing

Factory default values are supplied and can be restored after any changes. c) CREATING AND EDITING FLEXLOGIC You can create or edit a FlexLogic equation in order to customize the relay. You can subsequently view the automatically generated logic diagram.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

4-1

4.1 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE INTERFACE d) VIEWING ACTUAL VALUES You can view real-time relay data such as input/output status and measured parameters. e) VIEWING TRIGGERED EVENTS

4 HUMAN INTERFACES

While the interface is in either on-line or off-line mode, you can view and analyze data generated by triggered specified parameters, via one of the following: Event Recorder facility: The event recorder captures contextual data associated with the last 1024 events, listed in chronological order from most recent to oldest. Oscillography facility: The oscillography waveform traces and digital states are used to provide a visual display of power system and relay operation data captured during specific triggered events.

f) FILE SUPPORT Execution: Any EnerVista UR Setup file which is double clicked or opened will launch the application, or provide focus to the already opened application. If the file was a settings file (has a URS extension) which had been removed from the Settings List tree menu, it will be added back to the Settings List tree menu. Drag and Drop: The Site List and Settings List control bar windows are each mutually a drag source and a drop target for device-order-code-compatible files or individual menu items. Also, the Settings List control bar window and any Windows Explorer directory folder are each mutually a file drag source and drop target. New files which are dropped into the Settings List window are added to the tree which is automatically sorted alphabetically with respect to settings file names. Files or individual menu items which are dropped in the selected device menu in the Site List window will automatically be sent to the on-line communicating device. g) FIRMWARE UPGRADES The firmware of a G60 device can be upgraded, locally or remotely, via the EnerVista UR Setup software. The corresponding instructions are provided by the EnerVista UR Setup Help file under the topic Upgrading Firmware. Modbus addresses assigned to firmware modules, features, settings, and corresponding data items (i.e. default values, minimum/maximum values, data type, and item size) may change slightly from version to version of firmware. The addresses are rearranged when new features are added or existing features are enhanced or modified. The EEPROM DATA ERROR message displayed after upgrading/downgrading the firmware is a resettable, self-test message intended to inform users that the Modbus addresses have changed with the upgraded firmware. This message does not signal any problems when appearing after firmware upgrades.

NOTE

4-2

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

4 HUMAN INTERFACES

4.1 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE INTERFACE 4.1.4 ENERVISTA UR SETUP MAIN WINDOW

The EnerVista UR Setup software main window supports the following primary display components: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. Title bar which shows the pathname of the active data view Main window menu bar Main window tool bar Site List control bar window Settings List control bar window Device data view window(s), with common tool bar Settings File data view window(s), with common tool bar Workspace area with data view tabs Status bar

Figure 41: ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE MAIN WINDOW

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

4-3

4.2 FACEPLATE INTERFACE 4.2FACEPLATE INTERFACE

4 HUMAN INTERFACES 4.2.1 FACEPLATE

The keypad/display/LED interface is one of two alternate human interfaces supported. The other alternate human interface is implemented via the EnerVista UR Setup software. The faceplate interface is available in two configurations: horizontal or vertical. The faceplate interface consists of several functional panels. The faceplate is hinged to allow easy access to the removable modules. There is also a removable dust cover that fits over the faceplate which must be removed in order to access the keypad panel. The following two figures show the horizontal and vertical arrangement of faceplate panels.

LED PANEL 1

LED PANEL 2

LED PANEL 3

DISPLAY

STATUS

EVENT CAUSE VOLTAGE CURRENT FREQUENCY OTHER PHASE A PHASE B PHASE C NEUTRAL/GROUND

IN SERVICE TROUBLE TEST MODE TRIP ALARM PICKUP

RESET USER 1 USER 2 USER 3

GE Multilin

4
CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS 1-7

USER 4 USER 5

USER LABEL

USER LABEL

USER LABEL

USER LABEL

USER LABEL

USER LABEL

11

MENU

HELP

MESSAGE

ESCAPE

USER 6 USER 7

USER LABEL

USER LABEL

USER LABEL

USER LABEL

USER LABEL

10

USER LABEL

12

ENTER

VALUE

+/-

USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS 1-12

KEYPAD
827801A5.CDR

Figure 42: UR-SERIES HORIZONTAL FACEPLATE PANELS

Figure 43: UR-SERIES VERTICAL FACEPLATE PANELS

4-4

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

4 HUMAN INTERFACES

4.2 FACEPLATE INTERFACE 4.2.2 LED INDICATORS

a) LED PANEL 1 This panel provides several LED indicators, several keys, and a communications port. The RESET key is used to reset any latched LED indicator or target message, once the condition has been cleared (these latched conditions can also be reset via the SETTINGS INPUT/OUTPUTS RESETTING menu). The USER keys are not used in this unit. The RS232 port is intended for connection to a portable PC.

STATUS

EVENT CAUSE VOLTAGE CURRENT FREQUENCY OTHER PHASE A PHASE B PHASE C NEUTRAL/GROUND

IN SERVICE TROUBLE TEST MODE TRIP ALARM PICKUP

RESET USER 1 USER 2 USER 3

Figure 44: LED PANEL 1 STATUS INDICATORS: IN SERVICE: Indicates that control power is applied; all monitored inputs/outputs and internal systems are OK; the relay has been programmed. TROUBLE: Indicates that the relay has detected an internal problem. TEST MODE: Indicates that the relay is in test mode. TRIP: Indicates that the selected FlexLogic operand serving as a Trip switch has operated. This indicator always latches; the RESET command must be initiated to allow the latch to be reset. ALARM: Indicates that the selected FlexLogic operand serving as an Alarm switch has operated. This indicator is never latched. PICKUP: Indicates that an element is picked up. This indicator is never latched.

EVENT CAUSE INDICATORS: These indicate the input type that was involved in a condition detected by an element that is operated or has a latched flag waiting to be reset. VOLTAGE: Indicates voltage was involved. CURRENT: Indicates current was involved. FREQUENCY: Indicates frequency was involved. OTHER: Indicates a composite function was involved. PHASE A: Indicates Phase A was involved. PHASE B: Indicates Phase B was involved. PHASE C: Indicates Phase C was involved. NEUTRAL/GROUND: Indicates neutral or ground was involved.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

4-5

4.2 FACEPLATE INTERFACE b) LED PANELS 2 AND 3

4 HUMAN INTERFACES

These panels provide 48 amber LED indicators whose operation is controlled by the user. Support for applying a customized label beside every LED is provided. User customization of LED operation is of maximum benefit in installations where languages other than English are used to communicate with operators. Refer to the User-Programmable LEDs section in Chapter 5 for the settings used to program the operation of the LEDs on these panels.

Figure 45: LED PANELS 2 AND 3 (INDEX TEMPLATE)

c) DEFAULT LABELS FOR LED PANEL 2 The default labels are intended to represent: GROUP 1...6: The illuminated GROUP is the active settings group. SYNCHROCHECK NO n IN-SYNCH: Voltages have satisfied the synchrocheck element. Firmware revisions 2.9x and earlier support eight user setting groups; revisions 3.0x and higher support six setting groups. For convenience of users using earlier firmware revisions, the relay panel shows eight setting groups. Please note that the LEDs, despite their default labels, are fully user-programmable.

NOTE

The relay is shipped with the default label for the LED panel 2. The LEDs, however, are not pre-programmed. To match the pre-printed label, the LED settings must be entered as shown in the User-Programmable LEDs section of Chapter 5. The LEDs are fully user-programmable. The default labels can be replaced by user-printed labels for both panels as explained in the following section.

SETTINGS IN USE

SYNCHROCHECK

GROUP 1 GROUP 2 GROUP 3 GROUP 4 GROUP 5 GROUP 6 GROUP 7 GROUP 8

NO1 IN-SYNCH NO2 IN-SYNCH

Figure 46: LED PANEL 2 (DEFAULT LABELS)

4-6

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

4 HUMAN INTERFACES d) CUSTOM LABELING OF LEDS

4.2 FACEPLATE INTERFACE

Custom labeling of an LED-only panel is facilitated through a Microsoft Word file available from the following URL: http://www.GEindustrial.com/multilin/support/ur/ This file provides templates and instructions for creating appropriate labeling for the LED panel. The following procedures are contained in the downloadable file. The panel templates provide relative LED locations and located example text (x) edit boxes. The following procedure demonstrates how to install/uninstall the custom panel labeling. 1. Remove the clear Lexan Front Cover (GE Multilin Part Number: 1501-0014).

Push in and gently lift up the cover.


2. Pop out the LED Module and/or the Blank Module with a screwdriver as shown below. Be careful not to damage the plastic.

( LED MODULE )

( BLANK MODULE )

3. 4.

Place the left side of the customized module back to the front panel frame, then snap back the right side. Put the clear Lexan Front Cover back into place.

e) CUSTOMIZING THE DISPLAY MODULE The following items are required to customize the G60 display module: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Black and white or color printer (color preferred). Microsoft Word 97 or later software for editing the template. 1 each of: 8.5" x 11" white paper, exacto knife, ruler, custom display module (GE Multilin Part Number: 1516-0069), and a custom module cover (GE Multilin Part Number: 1502-0015). Open the LED panel customization template with Microsoft Word. Add text in places of the LED x text placeholders on the template(s). Delete unused place holders as required. When complete, save the Word file to your local PC for future use. Print the template(s) to a local printer. From the printout, cut-out the Background Template from the three windows, using the cropmarks as a guide. Put the Background Template on top of the custom display module (GE Multilin Part Number: 1513-0069) and snap the clear custom module cover (GE Multilin Part Number: 1502-0015) over it and the templates.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

4-7

4.2 FACEPLATE INTERFACE

4 HUMAN INTERFACES 4.2.3 DISPLAY

All messages are displayed on a 2 20 character vacuum fluorescent display to make them visible under poor lighting conditions. An optional liquid crystal display (LCD) is also available. Messages are displayed in English and do not require the aid of an instruction manual for deciphering. While the keypad and display are not actively being used, the display will default to defined messages. Any high priority event driven message will automatically override the default message and appear on the display. 4.2.4 KEYPAD Display messages are organized into pages under the following headings: Actual Values, Settings, Commands, and Targets. The key navigates through these pages. Each heading page is broken down further into logical subgroups. The MESSAGE keys navigate through the subgroups. The VALUE keys scroll increment or decrement numerical setting values when in programming mode. These keys also scroll through alphanumeric values in the text edit mode. Alternatively, values may also be entered with the numeric keypad. The key initiates and advance to the next character in text edit mode or enters a decimal point. The pressed at any time for context sensitive help messages. The key stores altered setting values. key may be

4
a) NAVIGATION

4.2.5 MENUS

Press the key to select the desired header display page (top-level menu). The header title appears momentarily followed by a header display page menu item. Each press of the key advances through the main heading pages as illustrated below.

ACTUAL VALUES

SETTINGS

COMMANDS

TARGETS

ACTUAL VALUES STATUS

SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP

COMMANDS VIRTUAL INPUTS

No Active Targets

USER DISPLAYS (when in use)

User Display 1

4-8

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

4 HUMAN INTERFACES b) HIERARCHY

4.2 FACEPLATE INTERFACE

The setting and actual value messages are arranged hierarchically. The header display pages are indicated by double scroll bar characters ( ), while sub-header pages are indicated by single scroll bar characters ( ). The header display pages represent the highest level of the hierarchy and the sub-header display pages fall below this level. The MESSAGE and keys move within a group of headers, sub-headers, setting values, or actual values. Continually pressing the MESSAGE key from a header display displays specific information for the header category. Conversely, continually pressing the MESSAGE key from a setting value or actual value display returns to the header display.
HIGHEST LEVEL LOWEST LEVEL (SETTING VALUE)

SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP

PASSWORD SECURITY

ACCESS LEVEL: Restricted

SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP c) EXAMPLE MENU NAVIGATION ACTUAL VALUES STATUS Press the key until the header for the first Actual Values page appears. This page contains system and relay status information. Repeatedly press the MESSAGE keys to display the other actual value headers. Press the key until the header for the first page of Settings appears. This page contains settings to configure the relay.

SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP

SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP

Press the MESSAGE key to move to the next Settings page. This page contains settings for System Setup. Repeatedly press the MESSAGE keys to display the other setting headers and then back to the first Settings page header. From the Settings page one header (Product Setup), press the MESSAGE once to display the first sub-header (Password Security). key

PASSWORD SECURITY ACCESS LEVEL: Restricted PASSWORD SECURITY DISPLAY PROPERTIES FLASH MESSAGE TIME: 1.0 s DEFAULT MESSAGE INTENSITY: 25%

Press the MESSAGE key once more and this will display the first setting for Password Security. Pressing the MESSAGE key repeatedly will display the remaining setting messages for this sub-header. Press the MESSAGE key once to move back to the first sub-header message.

Pressing the MESSAGE key will display the second setting sub-header associated with the Product Setup header. Press the MESSAGE play Properties. key once more and this will display the first setting for Dis-

To view the remaining settings associated with the Display Properties subheader, repeatedly press the MESSAGE key. The last message appears as shown.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

4-9

4.2 FACEPLATE INTERFACE

4 HUMAN INTERFACES 4.2.6 CHANGING SETTINGS

a) ENTERING NUMERICAL DATA Each numerical setting has its own minimum, maximum, and increment value associated with it. These parameters define what values are acceptable for a setting. FLASH MESSAGE TIME: 1.0 s MINIMUM: MAXIMUM: 0.5 10.0 For example, select the SETTINGS MESSAGE TIME setting.
PRODUCT SETUP DISPLAY PROPERTIES FLASH

Press the key to view the minimum and maximum values. Press the again to view the next context sensitive help message.

key

Two methods of editing and storing a numerical setting value are available. 0 to 9 and (decimal point): The relay numeric keypad works the same as that of any electronic calculator. A number is entered one digit at a time. The leftmost digit is entered first and the rightmost digit is entered last. Pressing the MESSAGE key or pressing the ESCAPE key, returns the original value to the display. VALUE : The VALUE key increments the displayed value by the step value, up to the maximum value allowed. While at the maximum value, pressing the VALUE key again will allow the setting selection to continue upward from the minimum value. The VALUE key decrements the displayed value by the step value, down to the minimum value. While at the minimum value, pressing the VALUE key again will allow the setting selection to continue downward from the maximum value. As an example, set the flash message time setting to 2.5 seconds. Press the appropriate numeric keys in the sequence 2 . 5". The display message will change as the digits are being entered. Until is pressed, editing changes are not registered by the relay. Therefore, press to store the new value in memory. This flash message will momentarily appear as confirmation of the storing process. Numerical values which contain decimal places will be rounded-off if more decimal place digits are entered than specified by the step value.

FLASH MESSAGE TIME: 2.5 s NEW SETTING HAS BEEN STORED

b) ENTERING ENUMERATION DATA Enumeration settings have data values which are part of a set, whose members are explicitly defined by a name. A set is comprised of two or more members. ACCESS LEVEL: Restricted For example, the selections available for ACCESS LEVEL are "Restricted", "Command", "Setting", and "Factory Service". key displays the next selection while the

Enumeration type values are changed using the VALUE keys. The VALUE VALUE key displays the previous selection. ACCESS LEVEL: Setting NEW SETTING HAS BEEN STORED

If the ACCESS LEVEL needs to be "Setting", press the VALUE keys until the proper selection is displayed. Press at any time for the context sensitive help messages. Changes are not registered by the relay until the key is pressed. Pressing stores the new value in memory. This flash message momentarily appears as confirmation of the storing process.

c) ENTERING ALPHANUMERIC TEXT Text settings have data values which are fixed in length, but user-defined in character. They may be comprised of upper case letters, lower case letters, numerals, and a selection of special characters.

4-10

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

4 HUMAN INTERFACES

4.2 FACEPLATE INTERFACE

There are several places where text messages may be programmed to allow the relay to be customized for specific applications. One example is the Message Scratchpad. Use the following procedure to enter alphanumeric text messages. For example: to enter the text, Breaker #1 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Press to enter text edit mode. to advance the cursor to the next position. Press the VALUE keys until the character 'B' appears; press Repeat step 2 for the remaining characters: r,e,a,k,e,r, ,#,1. Press to store the text. If you have any problem, press to view context sensitive help. Flash messages will sequentially appear for several seconds each. For the case of a text setting message, pressing displays how to edit and store new values.

d) ACTIVATING THE RELAY RELAY SETTINGS: Not Programmed When the relay is powered up, the Trouble LED will be on, the In Service LED off, and this message displayed, indicating the relay is in the "Not Programmed" state and is safeguarding (output relays blocked) against the installation of a relay whose settings have not been entered. This message remains until the relay is explicitly put in the "Programmed" state.

To change the RELAY SETTINGS: "Not Programmed" mode to "Programmed", proceed as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. Press the key until the SETTINGS header flashes momentarily and the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP message appears on the display. Press the MESSAGE Press the MESSAGE Press the MESSAGE key until the PASSWORD SECURITY message appears on the display. key until the INSTALLATION message appears on the display. key until the RELAY SETTINGS: Not Programmed message is displayed.

SETTINGS

SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP

PASSWORD SECURITY DISPLAY PROPERTIES

USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS INSTALLATION RELAY SETTINGS: Not Programmed

5. 6.

After the RELAY SETTINGS: Not Programmed message appears on the display, press the VALUE keys change the selection to "Programmed". Press the key. RELAY SETTINGS: Programmed NEW SETTING HAS BEEN STORED

RELAY SETTINGS: Not Programmed 7.

When the "NEW SETTING HAS BEEN STORED" message appears, the relay will be in "Programmed" state and the In Service LED will turn on.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

4-11

4.2 FACEPLATE INTERFACE e) ENTERING INITIAL PASSWORDS To enter the initial Setting (or Command) Password, proceed as follows: 1. 2. 3.

4 HUMAN INTERFACES

Press the key until the SETTINGS header flashes momentarily and the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP message appears on the display. Press the MESSAGE Press the MESSAGE SETTINGS key until the ACCESS LEVEL message appears on the display. key until the CHANGE SETTING (or COMMAND) PASSWORD message appears on the display.

SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP

PASSWORD SECURITY

ACCESS LEVEL: Restricted CHANGE COMMAND PASSWORD: No CHANGE SETTING PASSWORD: No

4
4. 5. 6. 7. After the CHANGE...PASSWORD message appears on the display, press the VALUE change the selection to Yes. Press the key and the display will prompt you to ENTER NEW PASSWORD. key. Type in a numerical password (up to 10 characters) and press the

ENCRYPTED COMMAND PASSWORD: ---------ENCRYPTED SETTING PASSWORD: ---------key or the VALUE key to

When the VERIFY NEW PASSWORD is displayed, re-type in the same password and press CHANGE SETTING PASSWORD: No

CHANGE SETTING PASSWORD: Yes

ENTER NEW PASSWORD: ##########

VERIFY NEW PASSWORD: ##########

NEW PASSWORD HAS BEEN STORED 8. When the NEW PASSWORD HAS BEEN STORED message appears, your new Setting (or Command) Password will be active.

f) CHANGING EXISTING PASSWORD To change an existing password, follow the instructions in the previous section with the following exception. A message will prompt you to type in the existing password (for each security level) before a new password can be entered. In the event that a password has been lost (forgotten), submit the corresponding Encrypted Password from the PASSWORD SECURITY menu to the Factory for decoding.

4-12

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

4 HUMAN INTERFACES g) INVALID PASSWORD ENTRY

4.2 FACEPLATE INTERFACE

In the event that an incorrect Command or Setting password has been entered via the faceplate interface three times within a three-minute time span, the LOCAL ACCESS DENIED FlexLogic operand will be set to On and the G60 will not allow Settings or Command access via the faceplate interface for the next ten minutes. The TOO MANY ATTEMPTS BLOCKED FOR 10 MIN! flash message will appear upon activation of the ten minute timeout or any other time a user attempts any change to the defined tier during the ten minute timeout. The LOCAL ACCESS DENIED FlexLogic operand will be set to Off after the expiration of the ten-minute timeout. In the event that an incorrect Command or Setting password has been entered via the any external communications interface three times within a three-minute time span, the REMOTE ACCESS DENIED FlexLogic operand will be set to On and the G60 will not allow Settings or Command access via the any external communications interface for the next ten minutes. The REMOTE ACCESS DENIED FlexLogic operand will be set to Off after the expiration of the ten-minute timeout.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

4-13

4.2 FACEPLATE INTERFACE

4 HUMAN INTERFACES

4-14

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS 5 SETTINGS 5.1OVERVIEW

5.1 OVERVIEW 5.1.1 SETTINGS MAIN MENU

SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP

PASSWORD SECURITY DISPLAY PROPERTIES CLEAR RELAY RECORDS COMMUNICATIONS MODBUS USER MAP REAL TIME CLOCK USER-PROGRAMMABLE FAULT REPORT OSCILLOGRAPHY DATA LOGGER USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS USER-PROGRAMMABLE SELF TESTS CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS FLEX STATE PARAMETERS USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS DIRECT I/O TELEPROTECTION INSTALLATION

See page 5-8. See page 5-9. See page 5-11. See page 5-12. See page 5-23. See page 5-24. See page 5-24. See page 5-25. See page 5-27. See page 5-28. See page 5-31. See page 5-32. See page 5-33. See page 5-34. See page 5-35. See page 5-37. See page 5-42. See page 5-43.

SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP

AC INPUTS POWER SYSTEM SIGNAL SOURCES

See page 5-44. See page 5-45. See page 5-46.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-1

5.1 OVERVIEW FLEXCURVES

5 SETTINGS

See page 5-48.

SETTINGS FLEXLOGIC

FLEXLOGIC EQUATION EDITOR FLEXLOGIC TIMERS FLEXELEMENTS NON-VOLATILE LATCHES

See page 5-68. See page 5-68. See page 5-69. See page 5-73.

SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS

SETTING GROUP 1 SETTING GROUP 2


See page 5-74.

SETTING GROUP 6

SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS

SETTING GROUPS SELECTOR SWITCH UNDERFREQUENCY OVERFREQUENCY FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE SYNCHROCHECK DIGITAL ELEMENTS DIGITAL COUNTERS MONITORING ELEMENTS

See page 5-149. See page 5-150. See page 5-156. See page 5-157. See page 5-158. See page 5-160. See page 5-164. See page 5-167. See page 5-169.

SETTINGS INPUTS / OUTPUTS

CONTACT INPUTS VIRTUAL INPUTS CONTACT OUTPUTS

See page 5-170. See page 5-172. See page 5-173.

5-2

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS VIRTUAL OUTPUTS REMOTE DEVICES REMOTE INPUTS REMOTE OUTPUTS DNA BIT PAIRS REMOTE OUTPUTS UserSt BIT PAIRS RESETTING DIRECT INPUTS DIRECT OUTPUTS TELEPROTECTION

5.1 OVERVIEW

See page 5-175. See page 5-176. See page 5-177. See page 5-178. See page 5-178. See page 5-179. See page 5-179. See page 5-179. See page 5-183.

SETTINGS TRANSDUCER I/O

DCMA INPUTS RTD INPUTS DCMA OUTPUTS

See page 5-185. See page 5-186. See page 5-186.

SETTINGS TESTING

TEST MODE FUNCTION: Disabled TEST MODE INITIATE: On FORCE CONTACT INPUTS FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS

See page 5-190. See page 5-190. See page 5-191. See page 5-191.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-3

5.1 OVERVIEW

5 SETTINGS 5.1.2 INTRODUCTION TO ELEMENTS

In the design of UR relays, the term element is used to describe a feature that is based around a comparator. The comparator is provided with an input (or set of inputs) that is tested against a programmed setting (or group of settings) to determine if the input is within the defined range that will set the output to logic 1, also referred to as setting the flag. A single comparator may make multiple tests and provide multiple outputs; for example, the time overcurrent comparator sets a Pickup flag when the current input is above the setting and sets an Operate flag when the input current has been at a level above the pickup setting for the time specified by the time-current curve settings. All comparators, except the Digital Element which uses a logic state as the input, use analog parameter actual values as the input. Elements are arranged into two classes, GROUPED and CONTROL. Each element classed as a GROUPED element is provided with six alternate sets of settings, in setting groups numbered 1 through 6. The performance of a GROUPED element is defined by the setting group that is active at a given time. The performance of a CONTROL element is independent of the selected active setting group. The main characteristics of an element are shown on the element logic diagram. This includes the input(s), settings, fixed logic, and the output operands generated (abbreviations used on scheme logic diagrams are defined in Appendix F). Some settings for current and voltage elements are specified in per-unit (pu) calculated quantities: pu quantity = (actual quantity) / (base quantity) For current elements, the base quantity is the nominal secondary or primary current of the CT. Where the current source is the sum of two CTs with different ratios, the base quantity will be the common secondary or primary current to which the sum is scaled (i.e. normalized to the larger of the 2 rated CT inputs). For example, if CT1 = 300 / 5 A and CT2 = 100 / 5 A, then in order to sum these, CT2 is scaled to the CT1 ratio. In this case, the base quantity will be 5 A secondary or 300 A primary. For voltage elements the base quantity is the nominal primary voltage of the protected system which corresponds (based on VT ratio and connection) to secondary VT voltage applied to the relay. For example, on a system with a 13.8 kV nominal primary voltage and with 14400:120 V Delta-connected VTs, the secondary nominal voltage (1 pu) would be: 13800 --------------- 120 = 115 V 14400 For Wye-connected VTs, the secondary nominal voltage (1 pu) would be: 13800 120 --------------- --------- = 66.4 V 14400 3 Many settings are common to most elements and are discussed below: FUNCTION setting: This setting programs the element to be operational when selected as Enabled. The factory default is Disabled. Once programmed to Enabled, any element associated with the Function becomes active and all options become available. NAME setting: This setting is used to uniquely identify the element. SOURCE setting: This setting is used to select the parameter or set of parameters to be monitored. PICKUP setting: For simple elements, this setting is used to program the level of the measured parameter above or below which the pickup state is established. In more complex elements, a set of settings may be provided to define the range of the measured parameters which will cause the element to pickup. PICKUP DELAY setting: This setting sets a time-delay-on-pickup, or on-delay, for the duration between the Pickup and Operate output states. RESET DELAY setting: This setting is used to set a time-delay-on-dropout, or off-delay, for the duration between the Operate output state and the return to logic 0 after the input transits outside the defined pickup range. BLOCK setting: The default output operand state of all comparators is a logic 0 or flag not set. The comparator remains in this default state until a logic 1 is asserted at the RUN input, allowing the test to be performed. If the RUN input changes to logic 0 at any time, the comparator returns to the default state. The RUN input is used to supervise the comparator. The BLOCK input is used as one of the inputs to RUN control.
(EQ 5.2) (EQ 5.1)

5-4

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.1 OVERVIEW

TARGET setting: This setting is used to define the operation of an element target message. When set to Disabled, no target message or illumination of a faceplate LED indicator is issued upon operation of the element. When set to SelfReset, the target message and LED indication follow the Operate state of the element, and self-resets once the operate element condition clears. When set to Latched, the target message and LED indication will remain visible after the element output returns to logic 0 - until a RESET command is received by the relay. EVENTS setting: This setting is used to control whether the Pickup, Dropout or Operate states are recorded by the event recorder. When set to Disabled, element pickup, dropout or operate are not recorded as events. When set to Enabled, events are created for: (Element) PKP (pickup) (Element) DPO (dropout) (Element) OP (operate) The DPO event is created when the measure and decide comparator output transits from the pickup state (logic 1) to the dropout state (logic 0). This could happen when the element is in the operate state if the reset delay time is not 0. 5.1.3 INTRODUCTION TO AC SOURCES

a) BACKGROUND The G60 may be used on systems with breaker-and-a-half or ring bus configurations. In these applications, each of the two three-phase sets of individual phase currents (one associated with each breaker) can be used as an input to a breaker failure element. The sum of both breaker phase currents and 3I_0 residual currents may be required for the circuit relaying and metering functions. For a three-winding transformer application, it may be required to calculate watts and vars for each of three windings, using voltage from different sets of VTs. These requirements can be satisfied with a single UR, equipped with sufficient CT and VT input channels, by selecting the parameter to measure. A mechanism is provided to specify the AC parameter (or group of parameters) used as the input to protection/control comparators and some metering elements. Selection of the parameter(s) to measure is partially performed by the design of a measuring element or protection/control comparator by identifying the type of parameter (fundamental frequency phasor, harmonic phasor, symmetrical component, total waveform RMS magnitude, phase-phase or phase-ground voltage, etc.) to measure. The user completes the process by selecting the instrument transformer input channels to use and some of the parameters calculated from these channels. The input parameters available include the summation of currents from multiple input channels. For the summed currents of phase, 3I_0, and ground current, current from CTs with different ratios are adjusted to a single ratio before summation. A mechanism called a Source configures the routing of CT and VT input channels to measurement sub-systems. Sources, in the context of UR series relays, refer to the logical grouping of current and voltage signals such that one source contains all the signals required to measure the load or fault in a particular power apparatus. A given source may contain all or some of the following signals: three-phase currents, single-phase ground current, three-phase voltages and an auxiliary voltage from a single VT for checking for synchronism. To illustrate the concept of Sources, as applied to current inputs only, consider the breaker-and-a-half scheme below. In this application, the current flows as shown by the arrows. Some current flows through the upper bus bar to some other location or power equipment, and some current flows into transformer Winding 1. The current into Winding 1 is the phasor sum (or difference) of the currents in CT1 and CT2 (whether the sum or difference is used depends on the relative polarity of the CT connections). The same considerations apply to transformer Winding 2. The protection elements require access to the net current for transformer protection, but some elements may need access to the individual currents from CT1 and CT2.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-5

5.1 OVERVIEW

5 SETTINGS

CT1

Through Current

CT2

WDG 1
UR Platform

Power Transformer

WDG 2

CT3

CT4

827791A2.CDR

Figure 51: BREAKER-AND-A-HALF SCHEME In conventional analog or electronic relays, the sum of the currents is obtained from an appropriate external connection of all CTs through which any portion of the current for the element being protected could flow. Auxiliary CTs are required to perform ratio matching if the ratios of the primary CTs to be summed are not identical. In the UR series of relays, provisions have been included for all the current signals to be brought to the UR device where grouping, ratio correction and summation are applied internally via configuration settings. A major advantage of using internal summation is that the individual currents are available to the protection device; for example, as additional information to calculate a restraint current, or to allow the provision of additional protection features that operate on the individual currents such as breaker failure. Given the flexibility of this approach, it becomes necessary to add configuration settings to the platform to allow the user to select which sets of CT inputs will be added to form the net current into the protected device. The internal grouping of current and voltage signals forms an internal source. This source can be given a specific name through the settings, and becomes available to protection and metering elements in the UR platform. Individual names can be given to each source to help identify them more clearly for later use. For example, in the scheme shown in the above diagram, the configures one Source to be the sum of CT1 and CT2 and can name this Source as Wdg 1 Current. Once the sources have been configured, the user has them available as selections for the choice of input signal for the protection elements and as metered quantities. b) CT/VT MODULE CONFIGURATION CT and VT input channels are contained in CT/VT modules. The type of input channel can be phase/neutral/other voltage, phase/ground current, or sensitive ground current. The CT/VT modules calculate total waveform RMS levels, fundamental frequency phasors, symmetrical components and harmonics for voltage or current, as allowed by the hardware in each channel. These modules may calculate other parameters as directed by the CPU module. A CT/VT module contains up to eight input channels, numbered 1 through 8. The channel numbering corresponds to the module terminal numbering 1 through 8 and is arranged as follows: Channels 1, 2, 3 and 4 are always provided as a group, hereafter called a bank, and all four are either current or voltage, as are Channels 5, 6, 7 and 8. Channels 1, 2, 3 and 5, 6, 7 are arranged as phase A, B and C respectively. Channels 4 and 8 are either another current or voltage. Banks are ordered sequentially from the block of lower-numbered channels to the block of higher-numbered channels, and from the CT/VT module with the lowest slot position letter to the module with the highest slot position letter, as follows:
INCREASING SLOT POSITION LETTER --> CT/VT MODULE 1 < bank 1 > < bank 2 > CT/VT MODULE 2 < bank 3 > < bank 4 > CT/VT MODULE 3 < bank 5 > < bank 6 >

5-6

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.1 OVERVIEW

The UR platform allows for a maximum of three sets of three-phase voltages and six sets of three-phase currents. The result of these restrictions leads to the maximum number of CT/VT modules in a chassis to three. The maximum number of sources is six. A summary of CT/VT module configurations is shown below.
ITEM CT/VT Module CT Bank (3 phase channels, 1 ground channel) VT Bank (3 phase channels, 1 auxiliary channel) MAXIMUM NUMBER 2 8 4

c) CT/VT INPUT CHANNEL CONFIGURATION Upon relay startup, configuration settings for every bank of current or voltage input channels in the relay are automatically generated from the order code. Within each bank, a channel identification label is automatically assigned to each bank of channels in a given product. The bank naming convention is based on the physical location of the channels, required by the user to know how to connect the relay to external circuits. Bank identification consists of the letter designation of the slot in which the CT/VT module is mounted as the first character, followed by numbers indicating the channel, either 1 or 5. For three-phase channel sets, the number of the lowest numbered channel identifies the set. For example, F1 represents the three-phase channel set of F1/F2/F3, where F is the slot letter and 1 is the first channel of the set of three channels. Upon startup, the CPU configures the settings required to characterize the current and voltage inputs, and will display them in the appropriate section in the sequence of the banks (as described above) as follows for a maximum configuration: F1, F5, M1, M5, U1, and U5. The above section explains how the input channels are identified and configured to the specific application instrument transformers and the connections of these transformers. The specific parameters to be used by each measuring element and comparator, and some actual values are controlled by selecting a specific source. The source is a group of current and voltage input channels selected by the user to facilitate this selection. With this mechanism, a user does not have to make multiple selections of voltage and current for those elements that need both parameters, such as a distance element or a watt calculation. It also gathers associated parameters for display purposes. The basic idea of arranging a source is to select a point on the power system where information is of interest. An application example of the grouping of parameters in a Source is a transformer winding, on which a three phase voltage is measured, and the sum of the currents from CTs on each of two breakers is required to measure the winding current flow.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-7

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP 5.2PRODUCT SETUP


PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP PASSWORD SECURITY

5 SETTINGS 5.2.1 PASSWORD SECURITY

PASSWORD SECURITY
MESSAGE

ACCESS LEVEL: Restricted CHANGE COMMAND PASSWORD: No CHANGE SETTING PASSWORD: No ENCRYPTED COMMAND PASSWORD: ---------ENCRYPTED SETTING PASSWORD: ----------

Range: Restricted, Command, Setting, Factory Service (for factory use only) Range: No, Yes

MESSAGE

Range: No, Yes

MESSAGE

Range: 0 to 9999999999 Note: ---------- indicates no password Range: 0 to 9999999999 Note: ---------- indicates no password

MESSAGE

Two levels of password security are provided: Command and Setting. The following command operations are under password supervision: changing the state of virtual inputs, clearing the event records, clearing the oscillography records, changing the date and time, clearing energy records, clearing the data logger, user-programmable pushbuttons The following setting operations are under password supervision: changing any setting, test mode operation

The Command and Setting passwords are defaulted to "Null" when the relay is shipped from the factory. When a password is set to "Null", the password security feature is disabled. Programming a password code is required to enable each access level. A password consists of one to ten numerical characters. When a CHANGE ... PASSWORD setting is set to Yes, the following message sequence is invoked: 1. 2. 3. ENTER NEW PASSWORD: ____________ VERIFY NEW PASSWORD: ____________ NEW PASSWORD HAS BEEN STORED

To gain write access to a "Restricted" setting, set ACCESS LEVEL to "Setting" and then change the setting, or attempt to change the setting and follow the prompt to enter the programmed password. If the password is correctly entered, access will be allowed. If no keys are pressed for longer than 30 minutes or control power is cycled, accessibility will automatically revert to the "Restricted" level. If an entered password is lost (or forgotten), consult the factory with the corresponding ENCRYPTED PASSWORD. In the event that an incorrect Command or Setting password has been entered via the faceplate interface three times within a three-minute time span, the LOCAL ACCESS DENIED FlexLogic operand will be set to On and the G60 will not allow Settings or Command access via the faceplate interface for the next ten minutes. The TOO MANY ATTEMPTS BLOCKED FOR 10 MIN! flash message will appear upon activation of the ten minute timeout or any other time a user attempts any change to the defined tier during the ten minute timeout. The LOCAL ACCESS DENIED FlexLogic operand will be set to Off after the expiration of the ten-minute timeout. In the event that an incorrect Command or Setting password has been entered via the any external communications interface three times within a three-minute time span, the REMOTE ACCESS DENIED FlexLogic operand will be set to On and the G60 will not allow Settings or Command access via the any external communications interface for the next ten minutes. The REMOTE ACCESS DENIED FlexLogic operand will be set to Off after the expiration of the ten-minute timeout. The G60 provides a means to raise an alarm upon failed password entry. Should password verification fail while accessing a password-protected level of the relay (either settings or commands), the UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS FlexLogic operand is asserted. The operand can be programmed to raise an alarm via contact outputs or communications. This feature can be used to protect against both unauthorized and accidental access attempts.

5-8

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

The UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS operand is reset with the COMMANDS CLEAR RECORDS RESET UNAUTHORIZED ALARMS command. Therefore, to apply this feature with security, the command level should be password-protected. The operand does not generate events or targets. If these are required, the operand can be assigned to a digital element programmed with event logs and/or targets enabled. If the Setting and Command passwords are identical, this one password allows access to both commands and settings.
NOTE

NOTE

When EnerVista UR Setup is used to access a particular level, the user will continue to have access to that level as long as there are open windows in the EnerVista UR Setup software. To re-establish the password security feature, all windows must be closed for at least 30 minutes. 5.2.2 DISPLAY PROPERTIES

PATH: SETTINGS

PRODUCT SETUP

DISPLAY PROPERTIES

DISPLAY PROPERTIES
MESSAGE

LANGUAGE: English FLASH MESSAGE TIME: 1.0 s DEFAULT MESSAGE TIMEOUT: 300 s DEFAULT MESSAGE INTENSITY: 25 % SCREEN SAVER FEATURE: Disabled SCREEN SAVER WAIT TIME: 30 min CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL: 0.020 pu VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL: 1.0 V

Range: English; English, French; English, Russian; English, Chinese (range dependent on order code) Range: 0.5 to 10.0 s in steps of 0.1

MESSAGE

Range: 10 to 900 s in steps of 1

MESSAGE

Range: 25%, 50%, 75%, 100% Visible only if a VFD is installed Range: Disabled, Enabled Visible only if an LCD is installed Range: 1 to 65535 min. in steps of 1 Visible only if an LCD is installed Range: 0.002 to 0.020 pu in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

Range: 0.1 to 1.0 V secondary in steps of 0.1

Some relay messaging characteristics can be modified to suit different situations using the display properties settings. LANGUAGE: This setting selects the language used to display settings, actual values, and targets. The range is dependent on the order code of the relay. FLASH MESSAGE TIME: Flash messages are status, warning, error, or information messages displayed for several seconds in response to certain key presses during setting programming. These messages override any normal messages. The duration of a flash message on the display can be changed to accommodate different reading rates. DEFAULT MESSAGE TIMEOUT: If the keypad is inactive for a period of time, the relay automatically reverts to a default message. The inactivity time is modified via this setting to ensure messages remain on the screen long enough during programming or reading of actual values. DEFAULT MESSAGE INTENSITY: To extend phosphor life in the vacuum fluorescent display, the brightness can be attenuated during default message display. During keypad interrogation, the display always operates at full brightness. SCREEN SAVER FEATURE and SCREEN SAVER WAIT TIME: These settings are only visible if the G60 has a liquid crystal display (LCD) and control its backlighting. When the SCREEN SAVER FEATURE is Enabled, the LCD backlighting is turned off after the DEFAULT MESSAGE TIMEOUT followed by the SCREEN SAVER WAIT TIME, providing that no keys have been pressed and no target messages are active. When a keypress occurs or a target becomes active, the LCD backlighting is turned on. CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL: This setting modifies the current cut-off threshold. Very low currents (1 to 2% of the rated value) are very susceptible to noise. Some customers prefer very low currents to display as zero, while others prefer the current be displayed even when the value reflects noise rather than the actual signal. The G60 applies a cutoff value to the magnitudes and angles of the measured currents. If the magnitude is below the cut-off level, it is substi-

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-9

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

5 SETTINGS

tuted with zero. This applies to phase and ground current phasors as well as true RMS values and symmetrical components. The cut-off operation applies to quantities used for metering, protection, and control, as well as those used by communications protocols. Note that the cut-off level for the sensitive ground input is 10 times lower that the CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL setting value. Raw current samples available via oscillography are not subject to cut-off. VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL: This setting modifies the voltage cut-off threshold. Very low secondary voltage measurements (at the fractional volt level) can be affected by noise. Some customers prefer these low voltages to be displayed as zero, while others prefer the voltage to be displayed even when the value reflects noise rather than the actual signal. The G60 applies a cut-off value to the magnitudes and angles of the measured voltages. If the magnitude is below the cut-off level, it is substituted with zero. This operation applies to phase and auxiliary voltages, and symmetrical components. The cut-off operation applies to quantities used for metering, protection, and control, as well as those used by communications protocols. Raw samples of the voltages available via oscillography are not subject cut-off.

The CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL and the VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL are used to determine the metered power cut-off levels. The power cut-off level is calculated as shown below. For Delta connections: 3 CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL VT primary CT primary 3-phase power cut-off = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------VT secondary For Wye connections: 3-phase power cut-off = 3 CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL VT primary CT primary ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------VT secondary
CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL VT primary CT primary per-phase power cut-off = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------VT secondary

(EQ 5.3)

(EQ 5.4)

(EQ 5.5)

where VT primary = VT secondary VT ratio and CT primary = CT secondary CT ratio. For example, given the following settings:
CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL: 0.02 pu VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL: 1.0 V PHASE CT PRIMARY: 100 A PHASE VT SECONDARY: 66.4 V PHASE VT RATIO: 208.00 : 1" PHASE VT CONNECTION: Delta.

We have: CT primary = 100 A, and VT primary = PHASE VT SECONDARY x PHASE VT RATIO = 66.4 V x 208 = 13811.2 V The power cut-off is therefore: power cut-off = (CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL CT primary VT primary)/VT secondary = ( 3 0.02 pu 1.0 V 100 A 13811.2 V) / 66.4 V = 720.5 watts Any calculated power value below this cut-off will not be displayed. As well, the three-phase energy data will not accumulate if the total power from all three phases does not exceed the power cut-off. Lower the VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL and CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL with care as the relay accepts lower signals as valid measurements. Unless dictated otherwise by a specific application, the default settings of 0.02 pu for CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL and 1.0 V for VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL are recommended.

NOTE

5-10

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP 5.2.3 CLEAR RELAY RECORDS

PATH: SETTINGS

PRODUCT SETUP

CLEAR RELAY RECORDS

CLEAR RELAY RECORDS


MESSAGE

CLEAR USER REPORTS: Off CLEAR EVENT RECORDS: Off CLEAR OSCILLOGRAPHY? No CLEAR DATA LOGGER: Off CLEAR ENERGY: Off RESET UNAUTH ACCESS: Off CLEAR DIR I/O STATS: Off

Range: FlexLogic operand

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

Range: FlexLogic operand. Valid only for units with Direct I/O module.

Selected records can be cleared from user-programmable conditions with FlexLogic operands. Assigning user-programmable pushbuttons to clear specific records are typical applications for these commands. Since the G60 responds to rising edges of the configured FlexLogic operands, they must be asserted for at least 50 ms to take effect. Clearing records with user-programmable operands is not protected by the command password. However, user-programmable pushbuttons are protected by the command password. Thus, if they are used to clear records, the user-programmable pushbuttons can provide extra security if required. For example, to assign User-Programmable Pushbutton 1 to clear demand records, the following settings should be applied. 1. Assign the clear demand function to Pushbutton 1 by making the following change in the SETTINGS CLEAR RELAY RECORDS menu:
CLEAR DEMAND: PUSHBUTTON 1 ON PRODUCT SETUP

2.

SETUP

Set the properties for User-Programmable Pushbutton 1 by making the following changes in the SETTINGS USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS USER PUSHBUTTON 1 menu:
PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION: Self-reset PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME: 0.20 s

PRODUCT

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-11

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

5 SETTINGS 5.2.4 COMMUNICATIONS

a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS

COMMUNICATIONS

SERIAL PORTS NETWORK MODBUS PROTOCOL DNP PROTOCOL DNP / IEC104 POINT LISTS IEC 61850 PROTOCOL WEB SERVER HTTP PROTOCOL TFTP PROTOCOL IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL SNTP PROTOCOL EGD PROTOCOL

See below. See page 513. See page 513. See page 514. See page 517. See page 518. See page 520. See page 520. See page 521. See page 521. See page 522.

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

b) SERIAL PORTS
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS SERIAL PORTS Range: 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 14400, 19200, 28800, 33600, 38400, 57600, 115200. Only active if CPU Type E is ordered. Range: None, Odd, Even Only active if CPU Type E is ordered Range: 0 to 1000 ms in steps of 10 Only active if CPU Type E is ordered Range: 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 14400, 19200, 28800, 33600, 38400, 57600, 115200 Range: None, Odd, Even

SERIAL PORTS

RS485 COM1 BAUD RATE: 19200


MESSAGE

RS485 COM1 PARITY: None RS485 COM1 RESPONSE MIN TIME: 0 ms RS485 COM2 BAUD RATE: 19200 RS485 COM2 PARITY: None RS485 COM2 RESPONSE MIN TIME: 0 ms

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

Range: 0 to 1000 ms in steps of 10

The G60 is equipped with up to 3 independent serial communication ports. The faceplate RS232 port is intended for local use and is fixed at 19200 baud and no parity. The rear COM1 port type is selected when ordering: either an Ethernet or RS485 port. The rear COM2 port is RS485. The RS485 ports have settings for baud rate and parity. It is important that these parameters agree with the settings used on the computer or other equipment that is connected to these ports. Any of

5-12

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

these ports may be connected to a computer running EnerVista UR Setup. This software can download and upload setting files, view measured parameters, and upgrade the relay firmware. A maximum of 32 relays can be daisy-chained and connected to a DCS, PLC or PC using the RS485 ports. For each RS485 port, the minimum time before the port will transmit after receiving data from a host can be set. This feature allows operation with hosts which hold the RS485 transmitter active for some time after each transmission.

NOTE

c) NETWORK
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK Range: Standard IP address format Not shown if CPU Type E is ordered. Range: Standard IP address format Not shown if CPU Type E is ordered. Range: Standard IP address format Not shown if CPU Type E is ordered. Range: Select to enter the OSI NETWORK ADDRESS. Not shown if CPU Type E is ordered. Range: Half-Duplex, Full-Duplex Not shown if CPU Type E or N is ordered.

NETWORK

IP ADDRESS: 0.0.0.0
MESSAGE

SUBNET IP MASK: 0.0.0.0 GATEWAY IP ADDRESS: 0.0.0.0 OSI NETWORK ADDRESS (NSAP) ETHERNET OPERATION MODE: Full-Duplex

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

These messages appear only if the G60 is ordered with an Ethernet card. The IP addresses are used with the DNP, Modbus/TCP, IEC 61580, IEC 60870-5-104, TFTP, and HTTP protocols. The NSAP address is used with the IEC 61850 protocol over the OSI (CLNP/TP4) stack only. Each network protocol has a setting for the TCP/UDP PORT NUMBER. These settings are used only in advanced network configurations and should normally be left at their default values, but may be changed if required (for example, to allow access to multiple UR-series relays behind a router). By setting a different TCP/UDP PORT NUMBER for a given protocol on each UR-series relay, the router can map the relays to the same external IP address. The client software (EnerVista UR Setup, for example) must be configured to use the correct port number if these settings are used. When the NSAP address, any TCP/UDP Port Number, or any User Map setting (when used with DNP) is changed, it will not become active until power to the relay has been cycled (OFF/ON).
NOTE

Do not set more than one protocol to use the same TCP/UDP PORT NUMBER, as this will result in unreliable operation of those protocols.

WARNING

d) MODBUS PROTOCOL
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS MODBUS PROTOCOL Range: 1 to 254 in steps of 1

MODBUS PROTOCOL

MODBUS SLAVE ADDRESS: 254 MODBUS TCP PORT NUMBER: 502

MESSAGE

Range: 1 to 65535 in steps of 1

The serial communication ports utilize the Modbus protocol, unless configured for DNP or IEC 60870-5-104 operation (see descriptions below). This allows the EnerVista UR Setup software to be used. The UR operates as a Modbus slave device only. When using Modbus protocol on the RS232 port, the G60 will respond regardless of the MODBUS SLAVE ADDRESS programmed. For the RS485 ports each G60 must have a unique address from 1 to 254. Address 0 is the broadcast address which all Modbus slave devices listen to. Addresses do not have to be sequential, but no two devices can have the same address or conflicts resulting in errors will occur. Generally, each device added to the link should use the next higher address starting at 1. Refer to Appendix B for more information on the Modbus protocol. Changes to the MODBUS TCP PORT NUMBER setting will not take effect until the G60 is restarted.
NOTE

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-13

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP e) DNP PROTOCOL


PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS DNP PROTOCOL Range: see sub-menu below

5 SETTINGS

DNP PROTOCOL

DNP CHANNELS DNP ADDRESS: 65519 DNP NETWORK CLIENT ADDRESSES DNP TCP/UDP PORT NUMBER: 20000 DNP UNSOL RESPONSE FUNCTION: Disabled DNP UNSOL RESPONSE TIMEOUT: 5 s DNP UNSOL RESPONSE MAX RETRIES: 10 DNP UNSOL RESPONSE DEST ADDRESS: 1 DNP CURRENT SCALE FACTOR: 1 DNP VOLTAGE SCALE FACTOR: 1 DNP POWER SCALE FACTOR: 1 DNP ENERGY SCALE FACTOR: 1 DNP OTHER SCALE FACTOR: 1 DNP CURRENT DEFAULT DEADBAND: 30000 DNP VOLTAGE DEFAULT DEADBAND: 30000 DNP POWER DEFAULT DEADBAND: 30000 DNP ENERGY DEFAULT DEADBAND: 30000 DNP OTHER DEFAULT DEADBAND: 30000 DNP TIME SYNC IIN PERIOD: 1440 min DNP MESSAGE FRAGMENT SIZE: 240 DNP OBJECT 1 DEFAULT VARIATION: 2

MESSAGE

Range: 0 to 65519 in steps of 1

MESSAGE

Range: see sub-menu below

MESSAGE

Range: 1 to 65535 in steps of 1

MESSAGE

Range: Enabled, Disabled

MESSAGE

Range: 0 to 60 s in steps of 1

MESSAGE

Range: 1 to 255 in steps of 1

MESSAGE

Range: 0 to 65519 in steps of 1

MESSAGE

Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000, 100000 Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000, 100000 Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000, 100000 Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000, 100000 Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000, 100000 Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

MESSAGE

Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

MESSAGE

Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

MESSAGE

Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

MESSAGE

Range: 1 to 10080 min. in steps of 1

MESSAGE

Range: 30 to 2048 in steps of 1

MESSAGE

Range: 1, 2

5-14

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS DNP OBJECT 2 DEFAULT VARIATION: 2 DNP OBJECT 20 DEFAULT VARIATION: 1 DNP OBJECT 21 DEFAULT VARIATION: 1 DNP OBJECT 22 DEFAULT VARIATION: 1 DNP OBJECT 23 DEFAULT VARIATION: 2 DNP OBJECT 30 DEFAULT VARIATION: 1 DNP OBJECT 32 DEFAULT VARIATION: 1 DNP NUMBER OF PAIRED CONTROL POINTS: 0
Range: 1, 2

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

Range: 1, 2, 5, 6

MESSAGE

Range: 1, 2, 9, 10

MESSAGE

Range: 1, 2, 5, 6

MESSAGE

Range: 1, 2, 5, 6

MESSAGE

Range: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5

MESSAGE

Range: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7

MESSAGE

Range: 0 to 32 in steps of 1

The G60 supports the Distributed Network Protocol (DNP) version 3.0. The G60 can be used as a DNP slave device connected to multiple DNP masters (usually an RTU or a SCADA master station). Since the G60 maintains two sets of DNP data change buffers and connection information, two DNP masters can actively communicate with the G60 at one time. The DNP Channels sub-menu is shown below.
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS DNP PROTOCOL DNP CHANNELS Range: NONE, COM1 - RS485, COM2 - RS485, FRONT PANEL - RS232, NETWORK - TCP, NETWORK - UDP Range: NONE, COM1 - RS485, COM2 - RS485, FRONT PANEL - RS232, NETWORK - TCP, NETWORK - UDP

DNP CHANNELS

DNP CHANNEL 1 PORT: NETWORK


MESSAGE

DNP CHANNEL 2 PORT: COM2 - RS485

The DNP CHANNEL 1(2) PORT settings select the communications port assigned to the DNP protocol for each channel. Once DNP is assigned to a serial port, the Modbus protocol is disabled on that port. Note that COM1 can be used only in nonEthernet UR relays. When this setting is set to Network - TCP, the DNP protocol can be used over TCP/IP on channels 1 or 2. When this value is set to Network - UDP, the DNP protocol can be used over UDP/IP on channel 1 only. Refer to Appendix E for additional information on the DNP protocol. Changes to the DNP CHANNEL 1(2) PORT settings will take effect only after power has been cycled to the relay.
NOTE

The DNP NETWORK CLIENT ADDRESS settings can force the G60 to respond to a maximum of five specific DNP masters. The settings in this sub-menu are shown below.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-15

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP


PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS DNP PROTOCOL

5 SETTINGS
DNP NETWORK CLIENT ADDRESSES

DNP NETWORK CLIENT ADDRESSES


MESSAGE

CLIENT ADDRESS 1: 0.0.0.0 CLIENT ADDRESS 2: 0.0.0.0 CLIENT ADDRESS 3: 0.0.0.0 CLIENT ADDRESS 4: 0.0.0.0 CLIENT ADDRESS 5: 0.0.0.0

Range: standard IP address

Range: standard IP address

MESSAGE

Range: standard IP address

MESSAGE

Range: standard IP address

MESSAGE

Range: standard IP address

The DNP UNSOL RESPONSE FUNCTION should be Disabled for RS485 applications since there is no collision avoidance mechanism. The DNP UNSOL RESPONSE TIMEOUT sets the time the G60 waits for a DNP master to confirm an unsolicited response. The DNP UNSOL RESPONSE MAX RETRIES setting determines the number of times the G60 retransmits an unsolicited response without receiving confirmation from the master; a value of 255 allows infinite re-tries. The DNP UNSOL RESPONSE DEST ADDRESS is the DNP address to which all unsolicited responses are sent. The IP address to which unsolicited responses are sent is determined by the G60 from the current TCP connection or the most recent UDP message. The DNP SCALE FACTOR settings are numbers used to scale Analog Input point values. These settings group the G60 Analog Input data into types: current, voltage, power, energy, and other. Each setting represents the scale factor for all Analog Input points of that type. For example, if the DNP VOLTAGE SCALE FACTOR setting is set to a value of 1000, all DNP Analog Input points that are voltages will be returned with values 1000 times smaller (e.g. a value of 72000 V on the G60 will be returned as 72). These settings are useful when analog input values must be adjusted to fit within certain ranges in DNP masters. Note that a scale factor of 0.1 is equivalent to a multiplier of 10 (i.e. the value will be 10 times larger). The DNP DEFAULT DEADBAND settings determine when to trigger unsolicited responses containing Analog Input data. These settings group the G60 Analog Input data into types: current, voltage, power, energy, and other. Each setting represents the default deadband value for all Analog Input points of that type. For example, to trigger unsolicited responses from the G60 when any current values change by 15 A, the DNP CURRENT DEFAULT DEADBAND setting should be set to 15. Note that these settings are the deadband default values. DNP Object 34 points can be used to change deadband values, from the default, for each individual DNP Analog Input point. Whenever power is removed and re-applied to the G60, the default deadbands will be in effect. The DNP TIME SYNC IIN PERIOD setting determines how often the Need Time Internal Indication (IIN) bit is set by the G60. Changing this time allows the DNP master to send time synchronization commands more or less often, as required. The DNP MESSAGE FRAGMENT SIZE setting determines the size, in bytes, at which message fragmentation occurs. Large fragment sizes allow for more efficient throughput; smaller fragment sizes cause more application layer confirmations to be necessary which can provide for more robust data transfer over noisy communication channels. When the DNP data points (analog inputs and/or binary inputs) are configured for Ethernet-enabled relays, check the DNP Points Lists G60 web page to view the points lists. This page can be viewed with a web browser by entering the G60 IP address to access the G60 Main Menu, then by selecting the Device Information Menu > DNP Points Lists menu item.

NOTE

The DNP OBJECT N DEFAULT VARIATION settings allow the user to select the DNP default variation number for object types 1, 2, 20, 21, 22, 23, 30, and 32. The default variation refers to the variation response when variation 0 is requested and/or in class 0, 1, 2, or 3 scans. Refer to the DNP Implementation section in Appendix E for additional details. The DNP binary outputs typically map one-to-one to IED data points. That is, each DNP binary output controls a single physical or virtual control point in an IED. In the G60 relay, DNP binary outputs are mapped to virtual inputs. However, some legacy DNP implementations use a mapping of one DNP binary output to two physical or virtual control points to support the concept of trip/close (for circuit breakers) or raise/lower (for tap changers) using a single control point. That is, the DNP master can operate a single point for both trip and close, or raise and lower, operations. The G60 can be configured to support paired control points, with each paired control point operating two virtual inputs. The DNP NUMBER OF PAIRED CONTROL POINTS setting allows configuration of from 0 to 32 binary output paired controls. Points not configured as paired operate on a one-to-one basis.

5-16

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

The DNP ADDRESS setting is the DNP slave address. This number identifies the G60 on a DNP communications link. Each DNP slave should be assigned a unique address. f) DNP / IEC 60870-5-104 POINT LISTS
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS DNP / IEC104 POINT LISTS Range: see sub-menu below

DNP / IEC104 POINT LISTS


MESSAGE

BINARY INPUT / MSP POINTS ANALOG INPUT / MME POINTS

Range: see sub-menu below

The binary and analog inputs points for the DNP protocol, or the MSP and MME points for IEC 60870-5-104 protocol, can configured to a maximum of 256 points. The value for each point is user-programmable and can be configured by assigning FlexLogic operands for binary inputs / MSP points or FlexAnalog parameters for analog inputs / MME points. The menu for the binary input points (DNP) or MSP points (IEC 60870-5-104) is shown below.
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS DNP / IEC104 POINT LISTS BINARY INPUT / MSP POINTS Range: FlexLogic operand

BINARY INPUT / MSP POINTS


MESSAGE

Point: Off Point: Off

0 1

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

Point: Off

255

Range: FlexLogic operand

Up to 256 binary input points can be configured for the DNP or IEC 60870-5-104 protocols. The points are configured by assigning an appropriate FlexLogic operand. Refer to the Introduction to FlexLogic section in this chapter for the full range of assignable operands. The menu for the analog input points (DNP) or MME points (IEC 60870-5-104) is shown below.
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS DNP / IEC104 POINT LISTS ANALOG INPUT / MME POINTS Range: any FlexAnalog parameter

ANALOG INPUT / MME POINTS


MESSAGE

Point: Off Point: Off

0 1

Range: any FlexAnalog parameter

MESSAGE

Point: Off

255

Range: any FlexAnalog parameter

Up to 256 analog input points can be configured for the DNP or IEC 60870-5-104 protocols. The analog point list is configured by assigning an appropriate FlexAnalog parameter to each point. Refer to Appendix A: FlexAnalog Parameters for the full range of assignable parameters. The DNP / IEC 60870-5-104 point lists always begin with point 0 and end at the first Off value. Since DNP / IEC 60870-5-104 point lists must be in one continuous block, any points assigned after the first Off point are ignored. Changes to the DNP / IEC 60870-5-104 point lists will not take effect until the G60 is restarted.
NOTE

NOTE

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-17

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP g) IEC 61850 PROTOCOL


PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850 PROTOCOL

5 SETTINGS

GSSE / GOOSE CONFIGURATION

GSSE / GOOSE CONFIGURATION


MESSAGE

REMOTE I/O TRANSFER METHOD: GSSE DEFAULT GSSE/GOOSE: UPDATE TIME: 60 s GOOSE TRANSMIT VLAN PRIORITY: 4 GOOSE TRANSMIT VLAN ID: 0 GOOSE TRANSMIT ETYPE APPID: 0

Range: None, GSSE, GOOSE

Range: 1 to 60 s in steps of 1

MESSAGE

Range: 0 to 7 in steps of 1

MESSAGE

Range: 0 to 4095 in steps of 1

MESSAGE

Range: 0 to 16383 in steps of 1

SERVER CONFIGURATION
MESSAGE

LD NAME: IECDevice IEC/MMS TCP PORT NUMBER: 102 INCLUDE NON-IEC DATA: Enabled NUMBER OF STATUS POINTS IN GGIO1: SERVER SCANNING: Disabled PIOC LOGICAL NODE NAME PREFIXES PTOC LOGICAL NODE NAME PREFIXES

MESSAGE

Range: up to 32 alphanumeric characters

Range: 1 to 65535 in steps of 1

MESSAGE

Range: Disabled, Enabled

MESSAGE

Range: 8 to 128 in steps of 8

8
Range: Disabled, Enabled

MESSAGE

IEC 61850 LOGICAL NODE NAME PREFIXES


MESSAGE

PTRC LOGICAL NODE NAME PREFIXES MMXU1 DEADBANDS MMXU2 DEADBANDS MMXU3 DEADBANDS MMXU4 DEADBANDS GGIO2 CF SPCSO 1 GGIO2 CF SPCSO 2

MMXU DEADBANDS

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

GGIO2 CONTROL CONFIGURATION


MESSAGE

MESSAGE

GGIO2 CF SPCSO64

5-18

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

The G60 Generator Management Relay is provided with optional IEC 61850 communications capability. This feature is specified as a software option at the time of ordering. Refer to the Ordering section of chapter 2 for additional details. The IEC 61850 protocol feature are not available if CPU Type E is ordered.

The G60 supports the Manufacturing Message Specification (MMS) protocol as specified by IEC 61850. MMS is supported over two protocol stacks: TCP/IP over ethernet and TP4/CLNP (OSI) over ethernet. The G60 operates as an IEC 61850 server. The Remote Inputs/Outputs section in this chapter describe the peer-to-peer GSSE/GOOSE message scheme. The REMOTE I/O TRANSFER METHOD selects the method used to transfer remote input/output data. This can be either IEC 61850 GSSE, IEC 61850 GOOSE, or none (remote inputs/outputs disabled). GOOSE messages are more efficient and can make use of Ethernet priority tagging and virtual LAN functionality. All relays exchanging remote input/output data must be set to the same transfer method. The DEFAULT GSSE/GOOSE UPDATE TIME sets the time between GSSE or GOOSE messages when there are no remote output state changes to be sent. When remote output data changes, GSSE or GOOSE messages are sent immediately. This setting controls the steady-state heartbeat time interval. The GOOSE TRANSMIT VLAN PRIORITY setting indicates the Ethernet priority of GOOSE messages. This allows GOOSE messages to have higher priority than other Ethernet data. The GOOSE TRANSMIT ETYPE APPID setting allows the selection of a specific application ID for each GOOSE sending device. This value can be left at its default if the feature is not required. Both the GOOSE TRANSMIT VLAN PRIORITY and GOOSE TRANSMIT ETYPE APPID settings are required by IEC 61850. The LD NAME setting represents the MMS domain name (IEC 61850 logical device) where all IEC/MMS logical nodes are located. The IEC/MMS TCP PORT NUMBER setting allows the user to change the TCP port number for MMS connections. The INCLUDE NON-IEC DATA setting determines whether or not the UR MMS domain will be available. This domain contains a large number of UR-series specific data items that are not available in the IEC 61850 logical nodes. This data does not follow the IEC 61850 naming conventions. For communications schemes that strictly follow the IEC 61850 standard, this setting should be Disabled. The NUMBER OF STATUS POINTS IN GGIO1 setting determines the number of Ind (single point status indications) that are instantiated in the GGIO1 logical node. The indication points in GGIO1 are mapped to FlexStates in the G60. These FlexStates allow user-customized access to the FlexLogic operand states in the relay. The SERVER SCANNING feature should be set to Disabled when IEC 61850 client/server functionality is not required. IEC 61850 has two modes of functionality: GOOSE/GSSE inter-device communication and client/server communication. If the GOOSE/GSSE functionality is required without the IEC 61850 client server feature, then server scanning can be disabled to increase CPU resources. When server scanning is disabled, there will be not updated to the IEC 61850 logical node status values in the G60. Clients will still be able to connect to the server (G60 relay), but most data values will not be updated. This setting does not affect GOOSE/GSSE operation. Changes to the LD NAME, NUMBER OF STATUS POINTS IN GGIO1, and SERVER SCANNING settings will not take effect until the G60 is restarted.
NOTE

The IEC 61850 logical node name prefix settings are used to create name prefixes to uniquely identify each logical node. For example, the logical node PTOC1 may have the name prefix abc. The full logical node name will then be abcMMXU1. Valid characters for the logical node name prefixes are upper and lowercase letters, numbers, and the underscore (_) character, and the first character in the prefix must be a letter. This conforms to the IEC 61850 standard. The MMXU deadband settings represent the deadband values used to determine when the update the MMXU mag and cVal values from the associated instmag and instcVal values. The mag and cVal values are used for the IEC 61850 buffered and unbuffered reports. These settings correspond to the associated db data items in the CF functional constraint of the MMXU logical node, as per the IEC 61850 standard. According to IEC 61850-7-3, the db value shall represent the percentage of difference between the maximum and minimum in units of 0.00%. Thus, it is important to know the maximum value for each MMXU measured quantity, since this represents the 100.00% value for the deadband. The minimum value for all quantities is 0; the maximum values are as follows: phase current: 46 phase CT primary setting neutral current: 46 ground CT primary setting voltage: 275 VT ratio setting

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-19

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP power (real, reactive, and apparent): 46 phase CT primary setting 275 VT ratio setting frequency: 90 Hz power factor: 2

5 SETTINGS

The GGIO2 control configuration settings are used to set the control model for each input. The available choices are 0 (status only), 1 (direct control), and 2 (SBO with normal security). The GGIO2 control points are used to control the G60 virtual inputs. Since GSSE/GOOSE messages are multicast ethernet by specification, they will not usually be forwarded by network routers. However, GOOSE messages may be fowarded by routers if the router has been configured for VLAN functionality.

NOTE

h) WEB SERVER HTTP PROTOCOL


PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS WEB SERVER HTTP PROTOCOL Range: 1 to 65535 in steps of 1

WEB SERVER HTTP PROTOCOL

HTTP TCP PORT NUMBER: 80

The G60 contains an embedded web server and is capable of transferring web pages to a web browser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator. This feature is available only if the G60 has the ethernet option installed. The web pages are organized as a series of menus that can be accessed starting at the G60 Main Menu. Web pages are available showing DNP and IEC 60870-5-104 points lists, Modbus registers, Event Records, Fault Reports, etc. The web pages can be accessed by connecting the UR and a computer to an ethernet network. The Main Menu will be displayed in the web browser on the computer simply by entering the IP address of the G60 into the Address box on the web browser. i) TFTP PROTOCOL

PATH: SETTINGS

PRODUCT SETUP

COMMUNICATIONS

TFTP PROTOCOL Range: 1 to 65535 in steps of 1

TFTP PROTOCOL

TFTP MAIN UDP PORT NUMBER: 69


MESSAGE

TFTP DATA UDP PORT 1 NUMBER: 0 TFTP DATA UDP PORT 2 NUMBER: 0

Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

MESSAGE

Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

The Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) can be used to transfer files from the G60 over a network. The G60 operates as a TFTP server. TFTP client software is available from various sources, including Microsoft Windows NT. The dir.txt file obtained from the G60 contains a list and description of all available files (event records, oscillography, etc.).

5-20

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS j) IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL


PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL Range: Enabled, Disabled

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL


MESSAGE

IEC 60870-5-104 FUNCTION: Disabled IEC TCP PORT NUMBER: 2404 IEC NETWORK CLIENT ADDRESSES IEC COMMON ADDRESS OF ASDU: 0 IEC CYCLIC DATA PERIOD: 60 s IEC CURRENT DEFAULT THRESHOLD: 30000 IEC VOLTAGE DEFAULT THRESHOLD: 30000 IEC POWER DEFAULT THRESHOLD: 30000 IEC ENERGY DEFAULT THRESHOLD: 30000 IEC OTHER DEFAULT THRESHOLD: 30000

Range: 1 to 65535 in steps of 1

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

MESSAGE

Range: 1 to 65535 s in steps of 1

MESSAGE

Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

MESSAGE

Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

MESSAGE

Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

MESSAGE

Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

MESSAGE

Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

The G60 supports the IEC 60870-5-104 protocol. The G60 can be used as an IEC 60870-5-104 slave device connected to a maximum of two masters (usually either an RTU or a SCADA master station). Since the G60 maintains two sets of IEC 60870-5-104 data change buffers, no more than two masters should actively communicate with the G60 at one time. The IEC ------- DEFAULT THRESHOLD settings are used to determine when to trigger spontaneous responses containing M_ME_NC_1 analog data. These settings group the G60 analog data into types: current, voltage, power, energy, and other. Each setting represents the default threshold value for all M_ME_NC_1 analog points of that type. For example, to trigger spontaneous responses from the G60 when any current values change by 15 A, the IEC CURRENT DEFAULT THRESHOLD setting should be set to 15. Note that these settings are the default values of the deadbands. P_ME_NC_1 (parameter of measured value, short floating point value) points can be used to change threshold values, from the default, for each individual M_ME_NC_1 analog point. Whenever power is removed and re-applied to the G60, the default thresholds will be in effect. The IEC 60870-5-104 and DNP protocols can not be used at the same time. When the IEC 60870-5-104 FUNCTION setting is set to Enabled, the DNP protocol will not be operational. When this setting is changed it will not become active until power to the relay has been cycled (Off/On).

NOTE

k) SNTP PROTOCOL
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS SNTP PROTOCOL Range: Enabled, Disabled

SNTP PROTOCOL

SNTP FUNCTION: Disabled


MESSAGE

SNTP SERVER IP ADDR: 0.0.0.0 SNTP UDP PORT NUMBER: 123

Range: Standard IP address format

MESSAGE

Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

The G60 supports the Simple Network Time Protocol specified in RFC-2030. With SNTP, the G60 can obtain clock time over an Ethernet network. The G60 acts as an SNTP client to receive time values from an SNTP/NTP server, usually a dedicated product using a GPS receiver to provide an accurate time. Both unicast and broadcast SNTP are supported.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-21

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

5 SETTINGS

If SNTP functionality is enabled at the same time as IRIG-B, the IRIG-B signal provides the time value to the G60 clock for as long as a valid signal is present. If the IRIG-B signal is removed, the time obtained from the SNTP server is used. If either SNTP or IRIG-B is enabled, the G60 clock value cannot be changed using the front panel keypad. To use SNTP in unicast mode, SNTP SERVER IP ADDR must be set to the SNTP/NTP server IP address. Once this address is set and SNTP FUNCTION is Enabled, the G60 attempts to obtain time values from the SNTP/NTP server. Since many time values are obtained and averaged, it generally takes three to four minutes until the G60 clock is closely synchronized with the SNTP/NTP server. It may take up to two minutes for the G60 to signal an SNTP self-test error if the server is offline. To use SNTP in broadcast mode, set the SNTP SERVER IP ADDR setting to 0.0.0.0 and SNTP FUNCTION to Enabled. The G60 then listens to SNTP messages sent to the all ones broadcast address for the subnet. The G60 waits up to eighteen minutes (>1024 seconds) without receiving an SNTP broadcast message before signaling an SNTP self-test error. The UR-series relays do not support the multicast or anycast SNTP functionality. l) EGD PROTOCOL
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS EGD PROTOCOL

EGD PROTOCOL

FAST PROD EXCH 1 CONFIGURATION


MESSAGE

SLOW PROD EXCH 1 CONFIGURATION SLOW PROD EXCH 2 CONFIGURATION

MESSAGE

The G60 Generator Management Relay is provided with optional Ethernet Global Data (EGD) communications capability. This feature is specified as a software option at the time of ordering. Refer to the Ordering section of chapter 2 for additional details. The Ethernet Global Data (EGD) protocol feature is not available if CPU Type E is ordered. The relay supports one fast Ethernet Global Data (EGD) exchange and two slow EGD exchanges. There are 20 data items in the fast-produced EGD exchange and 50 data items in each slow-produced exchange. Ethernet Global Data (EGD) is a suite of protocols used for the real-time transfer of data for display and control purposes. The relay can be configured to produce EGD data exchanges, and other devices can be configured to consume EGD data exchanges. The number of produced exchanges (up to three), the data items in each exchange (up to 50), and the exchange production rate can be configured. EGD cannot be used to transfer data between UR-series relays. The relay supports EGD production only. An EGD exchange will not be transmitted unless the destination address is non-zero, and at least the first data item address is set to a valid Modbus register address. Note that the default setting value of 0 is considered invalid. The settings menu for the fast EGD exchange is shown below:
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS EGD PROTOCOL FAST PROD EXCH 1 CONFIGURATION Range: Disable, Enable

FAST PROD EXCH 1 CONFIGURATION


MESSAGE

EXCH 1 FUNCTION: Disable EXCH 1 DESTINATION: 0.0.0.0 EXCH 1 DATA RATE: 1000 ms EXCH 1 DATA ITEM 1: 0

Range: standard IP address

MESSAGE

Range: 50 to 1000 ms in steps of 1

MESSAGE

Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1 (Modbus register address range)

MESSAGE

EXCH 1 DATA ITEM 20: 0

Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1 (Modbus register address range)

5-22

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

Fast exchanges (50 to 1000 ms) are generally used in control schemes. The G60 has one fast exchange (Exchange 1) and two slow exchanges (Exchanges 2 and 3). The settings menu for the slow EGD exchanges is shown below:
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS EGD PROTOCOL SLOW PROD EXCH 1(2) CONFIGURATION Range: Disable, Enable

SLOW PROD EXCH 1 CONFIGURATION


MESSAGE

EXCH 1 FUNCTION: Disable EXCH 1 DESTINATION: 0.0.0.0 EXCH 1 DATA RATE: 1000 ms EXCH 1 DATA ITEM 1: 0

Range: standard IP address

MESSAGE

Range: 500 to 1000 ms in steps of 1

MESSAGE

Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1 (Modbus register address range in decimal)

MESSAGE

EXCH 1 DATA ITEM 50: 0

Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1 (Modbus register address range in decimal)

Slow EGD exchanges (500 to 1000 ms) are generally used for the transfer and display of data items. The settings for the fast and slow exchanges are described below: EXCH 1 DESTINATION: This setting specifies the destination IP address of the produced EGD exchange. This is usually unicast or broadcast. EXCH 1 DATA RATE: This setting specifies the rate at which this EGD exchange is transmitted. If the setting is 50 ms, the exchange data will be updated and sent once every 50 ms. If the setting is 1000 ms, the exchange data will be updated and sent once per second. EGD exchange 1 has a setting range of 50 to 1000 ms. Exchanges 2 and 3 have a setting range of 500 to 1000 ms. EXCH 1 DATA ITEM 1 to 20/50: These settings specify the data items that are part of this EGD exchange. Almost any data from the G60 memory map can be configured to be included in an EGD exchange. The settings are the starting Modbus register address for the data item in decimal format. Refer to Appendix B for the complete Modbus memory map. Note that the Modbus memory map displays shows addresses in hexadecimal format; as such, it will be necessary to convert these values to decimal format before entering them as values for these setpoints. To select a data item to be part of an exchange, it is only necessary to choose the starting Modbus address of the item. That is, for items occupying more than one Modbus register (e.g. 32 bit integers and floating point values), only the first Modbus address is required. The EGD exchange configured with these settings contains the data items up to the first setting that contains a Modbus address with no data, or 0. That is, if the first three settings contain valid Modbus addresses and the fourth is 0, the produced EGD exchange will contain three data items. 5.2.5 MODBUS USER MAP
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP MODBUS USER MAP

MODBUS USER MAP

ADDRESS VALUE:

1: 0

Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

MESSAGE

ADDRESS 256: VALUE: 0

Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

The Modbus User Map provides read-only access for up to 256 registers. To obtain a memory map value, enter the desired address in the ADDRESS line (this value must be converted from hex to decimal format). The corresponding value is displayed in the VALUE line. A value of 0 in subsequent register ADDRESS lines automatically returns values for the previous ADDRESS lines incremented by 1. An address value of 0 in the initial register means none and values of 0 will be displayed for all registers. Different ADDRESS values can be entered as required in any of the register positions.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-23

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

5 SETTINGS 5.2.6 REAL TIME CLOCK

PATH: SETTINGS

PRODUCT SETUP

REAL TIME CLOCK

REAL TIME CLOCK


MESSAGE

IRIG-B SIGNAL TYPE: None REAL TIME CLOCK EVENTS: Disabled

Range: None, DC Shift, Amplitude Modulated

Range: Disabled, Enabled

The date and time can be synchronized a known time base and to other relays using an IRIG-B signal. It has the same accuracy as an electronic watch, approximately 1 minute per month. If an IRIG-B signal is connected to the relay, only the current year needs to be entered. See the COMMANDS SET DATE AND TIME menu to manually set the relay clock. The REAL TIME CLOCK EVENTS setting allows changes to the date and/or time to be captured in the event record. 5.2.7 USER-PROGRAMMABLE FAULT REPORT
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP USER-PROGRAMMABLE FAULT REPORT USER-PROGRAMMABLE FAULT REPORT 1(2)

USER-PROGRAMMABLE FAULT REPORT 1


MESSAGE

FAULT REPORT 1 FUNCTION: Disabled PRE-FAULT 1 TRIGGER: Off FAULT 1 TRIGGER: Off FAULT REPORT 1 #1: Off FAULT REPORT 1 #2: Off

Range: Disabled, Enabled

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

Range: Off, any actual value analog parameter

MESSAGE

Range: Off, any actual value analog parameter

MESSAGE

FAULT REPORT 1 #32: Off

Range: Off, any actual value analog parameter

When enabled, this function monitors the pre-fault trigger. The pre-fault data are stored in the memory for prospective creation of the fault report on the rising edge of the pre-fault trigger. The element waits for the fault trigger as long as the prefault trigger is asserted, but not shorter than 1 second. When the fault trigger occurs, the fault data is stored and the complete report is created. If the fault trigger does not occur within 1 second after the pre-fault trigger drops out, the element resets and no record is created. The user programmable record contains the following information: the user-programmed relay name, detailed firmware revision (4.9x, for example) and relay model (G60), the date and time of trigger, the name of pre-fault trigger (specific FlexLogic operand), the name of fault trigger (specific FlexLogic operand), the active setting group at pre-fault trigger, the active setting group at fault trigger, pre-fault values of all programmed analog channels (one cycle before pre-fault trigger), and fault values of all programmed analog channels (at the fault trigger). Each fault report is stored as a file to a maximum capacity of ten files. An eleventh trigger overwrites the oldest file. The EnerVista UR Setup software is required to view all captured data. A FAULT RPT TRIG event is automatically created when the report is triggered. The relay includes two user-programmable fault reports to enable capture of two types of trips (for example, trip from thermal protection with the report configured to include temperatures, and short-circuit trip with the report configured to include voltages and currents). Both reports feed the same report file queue. The last record is available as individual data items via communications protocols. PRE-FAULT 1 TRIGGER: Specifies the FlexLogic operand to capture the pre-fault data. The rising edge of this operand stores one cycle-old data for subsequent reporting. The element waits for the fault trigger to actually create a

5-24

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

record as long as the operand selected as PRE-FAULT TRIGGER is On. If the operand remains Off for 1 second, the element resets and no record is created. FAULT 1 TRIGGER: Specifies the FlexLogic operand to capture the fault data. The rising edge of this operand stores the data as fault data and results in a new report. The trigger (not the pre-fault trigger) controls the date and time of the report. FAULT REPORT 1 #1 to #32: These settings specify an actual value such as voltage or current magnitude, true RMS, phase angle, frequency, temperature, etc., to be stored should the report be created. Up to 32 channels can be configured. Two reports are configurable to cope with variety of trip conditions and items of interest. 5.2.8 OSCILLOGRAPHY a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP OSCILLOGRAPHY Range: 1 to 64 in steps of 1

OSCILLOGRAPHY

NUMBER OF RECORDS: 15
MESSAGE

TRIGGER MODE: Automatic Overwrite TRIGGER POSITION: 50% TRIGGER SOURCE: Off AC INPUT WAVEFORMS: 16 samples/cycle DIGITAL CHANNELS ANALOG CHANNELS

Range: Automatic Overwrite, Protected

MESSAGE

Range: 0 to 100% in steps of 1

MESSAGE

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

Range: Off; 8, 16, 32, 64 samples/cycle

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

Oscillography records contain waveforms captured at the sampling rate as well as other relay data at the point of trigger. Oscillography records are triggered by a programmable FlexLogic operand. Multiple oscillography records may be captured simultaneously. The NUMBER OF RECORDS is selectable, but the number of cycles captured in a single record varies considerably based on other factors such as sample rate and the number of operational CT/VT modules. There is a fixed amount of data storage for oscillography; the more data captured, the less the number of cycles captured per record. See the ACTUAL VALUES RECORDS OSCILLOGRAPHY menu to view the number of cycles captured per record. The following table provides sample configurations with corresponding cycles/record. Table 51: OSCILLOGRAPHY CYCLES/RECORD EXAMPLE
# RECORDS 1 1 8 8 8 8 8 8 32 # CT/VTS 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 SAMPLE RATE 8 16 16 16 16 16 32 64 64 # DIGITALS 0 16 16 16 16 64 64 64 64 # ANALOGS 0 0 0 4 4 16 16 16 16 CYCLES/ RECORD 1872.0 1685.0 276.0 219.5 93.5 93.5 57.6 32.3 9.5

A new record may automatically overwrite an older record if TRIGGER MODE is set to Automatic Overwrite.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-25

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

5 SETTINGS

Set the TRIGGER POSITION to a percentage of the total buffer size (e.g. 10%, 50%, 75%, etc.). A trigger position of 25% consists of 25% pre- and 75% post-trigger data. The TRIGGER SOURCE is always captured in oscillography and may be any FlexLogic parameter (element state, contact input, virtual output, etc.). The relay sampling rate is 64 samples per cycle. The AC INPUT WAVEFORMS setting determines the sampling rate at which AC input signals (i.e. current and voltage) are stored. Reducing the sampling rate allows longer records to be stored. This setting has no effect on the internal sampling rate of the relay which is always 64 samples per cycle, i.e. it has no effect on the fundamental calculations of the device. When changes are made to the oscillography settings, all existing oscillography records will be CLEARED.
WARNING

b) DIGITAL CHANNELS
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP OSCILLOGRAPHY DIGITAL CHANNELS Range: FlexLogic operand

DIGITAL CHANNELS

DIGITAL CHANNEL Off

1:

MESSAGE

DIGITAL CHANNEL 63: Off

Range: FlexLogic operand

A DIGITAL CHANNEL setting selects the FlexLogic operand state recorded in an oscillography trace. The length of each oscillography trace depends in part on the number of parameters selected here. Parameters set to Off are ignored. Upon startup, the relay will automatically prepare the parameter list. c) ANALOG CHANNELS

PATH: SETTINGS

PRODUCT SETUP

OSCILLOGRAPHY

ANALOG CHANNELS Range: Off, any FlexAnalog parameter See Appendix A for complete list.

ANALOG CHANNELS

ANALOG CHANNEL 1: Off

MESSAGE

ANALOG CHANNEL 16: Off

Range: Off, any FlexAnalog parameter See Appendix A for complete list.

An ANALOG CHANNEL setting selects the metering actual value recorded in an oscillography trace. The length of each oscillography trace depends in part on the number of parameters selected here. Parameters set to Off are ignored. The parameters available in a given relay are dependent on: (a) the type of relay, (b) the type and number of CT/VT hardware modules installed, and (c) the type and number of Analog Input hardware modules installed. Upon startup, the relay will automatically prepare the parameter list. A list of all possible analog metering actual value parameters is presented in Appendix A: FlexAnalog Parameters. The parameter index number shown in any of the tables is used to expedite the selection of the parameter on the relay display. It can be quite time-consuming to scan through the list of parameters via the relay keypad/display - entering this number via the relay keypad will cause the corresponding parameter to be displayed. All eight CT/VT module channels are stored in the oscillography file. The CT/VT module channels are named as follows: <slot_letter><terminal_number><I or V><phase A, B, or C, or 4th input> The fourth current input in a bank is called IG, and the fourth voltage input in a bank is called VX. For example, F2-IB designates the IB signal on Terminal 2 of the CT/VT module in slot F. If there are no CT/VT modules and Analog Input modules, no analog traces will appear in the file; only the digital traces will appear.

5-26

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP 5.2.9 DATA LOGGER

PATH: SETTINGS

PRODUCT SETUP

DATA LOGGER

DATA LOGGER

DATA LOGGER MODE: Continuous


MESSAGE

Range: Continuous, Trigger

DATA LOGGER TRIGGER: Off DATA LOGGER RATE: 60000 ms DATA LOGGER CHNL Off DATA LOGGER CHNL Off 1: 2:

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

Range: 15 to 3600000 ms in steps of 1

MESSAGE

Range: Off, any FlexAnalog parameter. See Appendix A: FlexAnalog Parameters for complete list. Range: Off, any FlexAnalog parameter. See Appendix A: FlexAnalog Parameters for complete list.

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

DATA LOGGER CHNL 16: Off DATA LOGGER CONFIG: 0 CHNL x 0.0 DAYS

Range: Off, any FlexAnalog parameter. See Appendix A: FlexAnalog Parameters for complete list. Range: Not applicable - shows computed data only

MESSAGE

The data logger samples and records up to 16 analog parameters at a user-defined sampling rate. This recorded data may be downloaded to EnerVista UR Setup and displayed with parameters on the vertical axis and time on the horizontal axis. All data is stored in non-volatile memory, meaning that the information is retained when power to the relay is lost. For a fixed sampling rate, the data logger can be configured with a few channels over a long period or a larger number of channels for a shorter period. The relay automatically partitions the available memory between the channels in use. Example storage capacities for a system frequency of 60 Hz are shown in the following table. Table 52: DATA LOGGER STORAGE CAPACITY EXAMPLE
SAMPLING RATE 15 ms CHANNELS 1 8 9 16 1000 ms 1 8 9 16 60000 ms 1 8 9 16 3600000 ms 1 8 9 DAYS 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.7 0.1 0.1 0.1 45.4 5.6 5 2.8 2727.5 340.9 303 STORAGE CAPACITY 954 s 120 s 107 s 60 s 65457 s 8182 s 7273 s 4091 s 3927420 s 490920 s 436380 s 254460 s 235645200 s 29455200 s 26182800 s

Changing any setting affecting Data Logger operation will clear any data that is currently in the log.
NOTE

DATA LOGGER MODE: This setting configures the mode in which the data logger will operate. When set to Continuous, the data logger will actively record any configured channels at the rate as defined by the DATA LOGGER RATE. The

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-27

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

5 SETTINGS

data logger will be idle in this mode if no channels are configured. When set to Trigger, the data logger will begin to record any configured channels at the instance of the rising edge of the DATA LOGGER TRIGGER source FlexLogic operand. The Data Logger will ignore all subsequent triggers and will continue to record data until the active record is full. Once the data logger is full a CLEAR DATA LOGGER command is required to clear the data logger record before a new record can be started. Performing the CLEAR DATA LOGGER command will also stop the current record and reset the data logger to be ready for the next trigger. DATA LOGGER TRIGGER: This setting selects the signal used to trigger the start of a new data logger record. Any FlexLogic operand can be used as the trigger source. The DATA LOGGER TRIGGER setting only applies when the mode is set to Trigger. DATA LOGGER RATE: This setting selects the time interval at which the actual value data will be recorded. DATA LOGGER CHNL 1(16): This setting selects the metering actual value that is to be recorded in Channel 1(16) of the data log. The parameters available in a given relay are dependent on: the type of relay, the type and number of CT/ VT hardware modules installed, and the type and number of Analog Input hardware modules installed. Upon startup, the relay will automatically prepare the parameter list. A list of all possible analog metering actual value parameters is shown in Appendix A: FlexAnalog Parameters. The parameter index number shown in any of the tables is used to expedite the selection of the parameter on the relay display. It can be quite time-consuming to scan through the list of parameters via the relay keypad/display entering this number via the relay keypad will cause the corresponding parameter to be displayed. DATA LOGGER CONFIG: This display presents the total amount of time the Data Logger can record the channels not selected to Off without over-writing old data. 5.2.10 USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS

a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS

USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS
MESSAGE

LED TEST TRIP & ALARM LEDS USER-PROGRAMMABLE LED1 USER-PROGRAMMABLE LED2

See below See page 530. See page 530.

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

USER-PROGRAMMABLE LED48

b) LED TEST
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS LED TEST Range: Disabled, Enabled.

LED TEST

LED TEST FUNCTION: Disabled


MESSAGE

LED TEST CONTROL: Off

Range: FlexLogic operand

When enabled, the LED Test can be initiated from any digital input or user-programmable condition such as user-programmable pushbutton. The control operand is configured under the LED TEST CONTROL setting. The test covers all LEDs, including the LEDs of the optional user-programmable pushbuttons. The test consists of three stages. Stage 1: All 62 LEDs on the relay are illuminated. This is a quick test to verify if any of the LEDs is burned. This stage lasts as long as the control input is on, up to a maximum of 1 minute. After 1 minute, the test will end.

5-28

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

Stage 2: All the LEDs are turned off, and then one LED at a time turns on for 1 second, then back off. The test routine starts at the top left panel, moving from the top to bottom of each LED column. This test checks for hardware failures that lead to more than one LED being turned on from a single logic point. This stage can be interrupted at any time. Stage 3: All the LEDs are turned on. One LED at a time turns off for 1 second, then back on. The test routine starts at the top left panel moving from top to bottom of each column of the LEDs. This test checks for hardware failures that lead to more than one LED being turned off from a single logic point. This stage can be interrupted at any time. When testing is in progress, the LEDs are controlled by the test sequence, rather than the protection, control, and monitoring features. However, the LED control mechanism accepts all the changes to LED states generated by the relay and stores the actual LED states (On or Off) in memory. When the test completes, the LEDs reflect the actual state resulting from relay response during testing. The Reset pushbutton will not clear any targets when the LED Test is in progress. A dedicated FlexLogic operand, LED TEST IN PROGRESS, is set for the duration of the test. When the test sequence is initiated, the LED Test Initiated event is stored in the Event Recorder. The entire test procedure is user-controlled. In particular, Stage 1 can last as long as necessary, and Stages 2 and 3 can be interrupted. The test responds to the position and rising edges of the control input defined by the LED TEST CONTROL setting. The control pulses must last at least 250 ms to take effect. The following diagram explains how the test is executed.

READY TO TEST
Reset the LED TEST IN PROGRESS operand

rising edge of the control input

Start the software image of the LEDs

Restore the LED states from the software image

Set the LED TEST IN PROGRESS operand control input is on

STAGE 1 (all LEDs on)


dropping edge of the control input Wait 1 second

time-out (1 minute)

rising edge of the control input

STAGE 2 (one LED on at a time)

rising edge of the control input

Wait 1 second

rising edge of the control input

STAGE 3 (one LED off at a time)

rising edge of the control input

842011A1.CDR

Figure 52: LED TEST SEQUENCE APPLICATION EXAMPLE 1: Assume one needs to check if any of the LEDs is burned through User-Programmable Pushbutton 1. The following settings should be applied. Configure User-Programmable Pushbutton 1 by making the following entries in the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS USER PUSHBUTTON 1 menu:
PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION: Self-reset PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME: 0.10 s

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-29

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

5 SETTINGS

Configure the LED test to recognize User-Programmable Pushbutton 1 by making the following entries in the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS LED TEST menu:
LED TEST FUNCTION: Enabled LED TEST CONTROL: PUSHBUTTON 1 ON

The test will be initiated when the User-Programmable Pushbutton 1 is pressed. The pushbutton should remain pressed for as long as the LEDs are being visually inspected. When finished, the pushbutton should be released. The relay will then automatically start Stage 2. At this point forward, test may be aborted by pressing the pushbutton. APPLICATION EXAMPLE 2: Assume one needs to check if any LEDs are burned as well as exercise one LED at a time to check for other failures. This is to be performed via User-Programmable Pushbutton 1. After applying the settings in Application Example 1, hold down the pushbutton as long as necessary to test all LEDs. Next, release the pushbutton to automatically start Stage 2. Once Stage 2 has started, the pushbutton can be released. When Stage 2 is completed, Stage 3 will automatically start. The test may be aborted at any time by pressing the pushbutton. c) TRIP AND ALARM LEDS
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS TRIP & ALARM LEDS Range: FlexLogic operand

TRIP & ALARM LEDS

TRIP LED INPUT: Off ALARM LED INPUT: Off

MESSAGE

Range: FlexLogic operand

The Trip and Alarm LEDs are on LED Panel 1. Each indicator can be programmed to become illuminated when the selected FlexLogic operand is in the Logic 1 state. d) USER-PROGRAMMABLE LED 1(48)
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS USER-PROGRAMMABLE LED 1(48) Range: FlexLogic operand

USER-PROGRAMMABLE LED 1
MESSAGE

LED 1 OPERAND: Off LED 1 TYPE: Self-Reset

Range: Self-Reset, Latched

There are 48 amber LEDs across the relay faceplate LED panels. Each of these indicators can be programmed to illuminate when the selected FlexLogic operand is in the Logic 1 state. LEDs 1 through 24 inclusive are on LED Panel 2; LEDs 25 through 48 inclusive are on LED Panel 3. Refer to the LED Indicators section in Chapter 4 for the locations of these indexed LEDs. This menu selects the operands to control these LEDs. Support for applying user-customized labels to these LEDs is provided. If the LED X TYPE setting is Self-Reset (default setting), the LED illumination will track the state of the selected LED operand. If the LED X TYPE setting is Latched, the LED, once lit, remains so until reset by the faceplate RESET button, from a remote device via a communications channel, or from any programmed operand, even if the LED operand state de-asserts.

5-30

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

Table 53: RECOMMENDED SETTINGS FOR LED PANEL 2 LABELS


SETTING LED 1 Operand LED 2 Operand LED 3 Operand LED 4 Operand LED 5 Operand LED 6 Operand LED 7 Operand LED 8 Operand LED 9 Operand LED 10 Operand LED 11 Operand LED 12 Operand PARAMETER SETTING GROUP ACT 1 SETTING GROUP ACT 2 SETTING GROUP ACT 3 SETTING GROUP ACT 4 SETTING GROUP ACT 5 SETTING GROUP ACT 6 Off Off Off Off Off Off SETTING LED 13 Operand LED 14 Operand LED 15 Operand LED 16 Operand LED 17 Operand LED 18 Operand LED 19 Operand LED 20 Operand LED 21 Operand LED 22 Operand LED 23 Operand LED 24 Operand PARAMETER Off Off Off Off SYNC 1 SYNC OP SYNC 2 SYNC OP Off Off Off Off Off Off

Refer to the Control of Setting Groups example in the Control Elements section of this chapter for group activation. 5.2.11 USER-PROGRAMMABLE SELF TESTS
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP USER-PROGRAMMABLE SELF TESTS

USER-PROGRAMMABLE SELF TESTS


MESSAGE

DIRECT RING BREAK FUNCTION: Enabled DIRECT DEVICE OFF FUNCTION: Enabled REMOTE DEVICE OFF FUNCTION: Enabled PRI. ETHERNET FAIL FUNCTION: Disabled SEC. ETHERNET FAIL FUNCTION: Disabled BATTERY FAIL FUNCTION: Enabled SNTP FAIL FUNCTION: Enabled IRIG-B FAIL FUNCTION: Enabled

Range: Disabled, Enabled. Valid for units equipped with Direct Input/Output module. Range: Disabled, Enabled. Valid for units equipped with Direct Input/Output module. Range: Disabled, Enabled. Valid for units that contain a CPU with Ethernet capability. Range: Disabled, Enabled. Valid for units that contain a CPU with a primary fiber port. Range: Disabled, Enabled. Valid for units that contain a CPU with a redundant fiber port. Range: Disabled, Enabled.

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

Range: Disabled, Enabled. Valid for units that contain a CPU with Ethernet capability. Range: Disabled, Enabled.

MESSAGE

All major self-test alarms are reported automatically with their corresponding FlexLogic operands, events, and targets. Most of the Minor Alarms can be disabled if desired. When in the Disabled mode, minor alarms will not assert a FlexLogic operand, write to the event recorder, display target messages. Moreover, they will not trigger the ANY MINOR ALARM or ANY SELF-TEST messages. When in the Enabled mode, minor alarms continue to function along with other major and minor alarms. Refer to the Relay Self-Tests section in Chapter 7 for additional information on major and minor self-test alarms.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-31

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

5 SETTINGS 5.2.12 CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS

PATH: SETTINGS

PRODUCT SETUP

CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS

CONTROL PUSHBUTTON 1(7) Range: Disabled, Enabled

CONTROL PUSHBUTTON 1
MESSAGE

CONTROL PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION: Disabled CONTROL PUSHBUTTON 1 EVENTS: Disabled

Range: Disabled, Enabled

The three standard pushbuttons located on the top left panel of the faceplate are user-programmable and can be used for various applications such as performing an LED test, switching setting groups, and invoking and scrolling though user-programmable displays, etc. The location of the control pushbuttons in the following figure. An additonal four control pushbuttons are included when the G60 is ordered with twelve user programmable pushbuttons.
STATUS IN SERVICE TROUBLE TEST MODE TRIP ALARM PICKUP EVENT CAUSE VOLTAGE CURRENT FREQUENCY OTHER PHASE A PHASE B PHASE C NEUTRAL/GROUND USER 3 USER 2 USER 1 RESET

THREE STANDARD CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS

USER 4 USER 5 USER 6

USER 7

FOUR EXTRA OPTIONAL CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS

842733A2.CDR

Figure 53: CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS Control pushbuttons are not typically used for critical operations and are not protected by the control password. However, by supervising their output operands, the user can dynamically enable or disable control pushbuttons for security reasons. Each control pushbutton asserts its own FlexLogic operand, CONTROL PUSHBTN 1(7) ON. These operands should be configured appropriately to perform the desired function. The operand remains asserted as long as the pushbutton is pressed and resets when the pushbutton is released. A dropout delay of 100 ms is incorporated to ensure fast pushbutton manipulation will be recognized by various features that may use control pushbuttons as inputs. An event is logged in the Event Record (as per user setting) when a control pushbutton is pressed; no event is logged when the pushbutton is released. The faceplate keys (including control keys) cannot be operated simultaneously a given key must be released before the next one can be pressed.
SETTING

CONTROL PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION: Enabled=1 SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP/ BREAKERS/BREAKER 1/ BREAKER 1 PUSHBUTTON CONTROL: Enabled=1 SYSTEM SETUP/ BREAKERS/BREAKER 2/ BREAKER 2 PUSHBUTTON CONTROL: Enabled=1

When applicable

AND

RUN OFF ON TIMER 0 100 msec FLEXLOGIC OPERAND CONTROL PUSHBTN 1 ON 842010A2.CDR

Figure 54: CONTROL PUSHBUTTON LOGIC

5-32

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP 5.2.13 USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS

PATH: SETTINGS

PRODUCT SETUP

USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS

USER PUSHBUTTON 1(12)

USER PUSHBUTTON 1

PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION: Disabled PUSHBTN 1 ID TEXT: PUSHBTN 1 ON TEXT: PUSHBTN 1 OFF TEXT: PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME: 0.00 s PUSHBUTTON 1 TARGETS: Disabled PUSHBUTTON 1 EVENTS: Disabled

Range: Self-Reset, Latched, Disabled

MESSAGE

Range: Up to 20 alphanumeric characters

MESSAGE

Range: Up to 20 alphanumeric characters

MESSAGE

Range: Up to 20 alphanumeric characters

MESSAGE

Range: 0 to 60.00 s in steps of 0.01

MESSAGE

Range: Self-Reset, Latched, Disabled

MESSAGE

Range: Disabled, Enabled

The G60 has 12 optional user-programmable pushbuttons available, each configured via 12 identical menus. The pushbuttons provide an easy and error-free method of manually entering digital information (On, Off) into FlexLogic equations as well as protection and control elements. Typical applications include breaker control, autorecloser blocking, ground protection blocking, and setting groups changes. The user-configurable pushbuttons are shown below. They can be custom labeled with a factory-provided template, available online at http://www.GEmultilin.com.

USER LABEL

USER LABEL

USER LABEL

USER LABEL

USER LABEL

USER LABEL

11

USER LABEL

USER LABEL

USER LABEL

USER LABEL

USER LABEL

10

USER LABEL

12

Figure 55: USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS Each pushbutton asserts its own On and Off FlexLogic operands, respectively. FlexLogic operands should be used to program desired pushbutton actions. The operand names are PUSHBUTTON 1 ON and PUSHBUTTON 1 OFF. A pushbutton may be programmed to latch or self-reset. An indicating LED next to each pushbutton signals the present status of the corresponding "On" FlexLogic operand. When set to "Latched", the state of each pushbutton is stored in nonvolatile memory which is maintained during any supply power loss. Pushbuttons states can be logged by the Event Recorder and displayed as target messages. User-defined messages can also be associated with each pushbutton and displayed when the pushbutton is ON. PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION: This setting selects the characteristic of the pushbutton. If set to Disabled, the pushbutton is deactivated and the corresponding FlexLogic operands (both On and Off) are de-asserted. If set to Self-reset, the control logic of the pushbutton asserts the On corresponding FlexLogic operand as long as the pushbutton is being pressed. As soon as the pushbutton is released, the FlexLogic operand is de-asserted. The Off operand is asserted/de-asserted accordingly. If set to Latched, the control logic alternates the state of the corresponding FlexLogic operand between On and Off on each push of the button. When operating in Latched mode, FlexLogic operand states are stored in non-volatile memory. Should power be lost, the correct pushbutton state is retained upon subsequent power up of the relay.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-33

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

5 SETTINGS

PUSHBTN 1 ID TEXT: This setting specifies the top 20-character line of the user-programmable message and is intended to provide ID information of the pushbutton. Refer to the User-Definable Displays section for instructions on how to enter alphanumeric characters from the keypad. PUSHBTN 1 ON TEXT: This setting specifies the bottom 20-character line of the user-programmable message and is displayed when the pushbutton is in the on position. Refer to the User-Definable Displays section for instructions on entering alphanumeric characters from the keypad. PUSHBTN 1 OFF TEXT: This setting specifies the bottom 20-character line of the user-programmable message and is displayed when the pushbutton is activated from the On to the Off position and the PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION is Latched. This message is not displayed when the PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION is Self-reset as the pushbutton operand status is implied to be Off upon its release. All user text messaging durations for the pushbuttons are configured with DISPLAY PROPERTIES FLASH MESSAGE TIME setting. the PRODUCT SETUP PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME: This setting specifies a drop-out time delay for a pushbutton in the self-reset mode. A typical applications for this setting is providing a select-before-operate functionality. The selecting pushbutton should have the drop-out time set to a desired value. The operating pushbutton should be logically ANDed with the selecting pushbutton in FlexLogic. The selecting pushbutton LED remains on for the duration of the drop-out time, signaling the time window for the intended operation.

For example, consider a relay with the following settings: PUSHBTN 1 ID TEXT: AUTORECLOSER, PUSHBTN 1 ON TEXT: DISABLED - CALL 2199", and PUSHBTN 1 OFF TEXT: ENABLED. When Pushbutton 1 changes its state to the On position, the following AUTOCLOSER DISABLED Call 2199 message is displayed: When Pushbutton 1 changes its state to the Off position, the message will change to AUTORECLOSER ENABLED. User-programmable pushbuttons require a type HP relay faceplate. If an HP-type faceplate was ordered separately, the relay order code must be changed to indicate the HP faceplate option. This can be done via EnerVista UR Setup with the Maintenance > Enable Pushbutton command. 5.2.14 FLEX STATE PARAMETERS
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP FLEX STATE PARAMETERS

NOTE

FLEX STATE PARAMETERS


MESSAGE

PARAMETER Off PARAMETER Off

MESSAGE

1: 2:

Range: FlexLogic operand

Range: FlexLogic operand

PARAMETER 256: Off

Range: FlexLogic operand

This feature provides a mechanism where any of 256 selected FlexLogic operand states can be used for efficient monitoring. The feature allows user-customized access to the FlexLogic operand states in the relay. The state bits are packed so that 16 states may be read out in a single Modbus register. The state bits can be configured so that all of the states which are of interest to the user are available in a minimum number of Modbus registers. The state bits may be read out in the Flex States register array beginning at Modbus address 900 hex. 16 states are packed into each register, with the lowest-numbered state in the lowest-order bit. There are 16 registers in total to accommodate the 256 state bits.

5-34

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP 5.2.15 USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS

a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS Range: FlexLogic operand

USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS
MESSAGE

INVOKE AND SCROLL: Off USER DISPLAY 1

MESSAGE

Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters

USER DISPLAY 16

Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters

This menu provides a mechanism for manually creating up to 16 user-defined information displays in a convenient viewing sequence in the USER DISPLAYS menu (between the TARGETS and ACTUAL VALUES top-level menus). The sub-menus facilitate text entry and Modbus Register data pointer options for defining the User Display content. Once programmed, the user-definable displays can be viewed in two ways. KEYPAD: Use the Menu key to select the USER DISPLAYS menu item to access the first user-definable display (note that only the programmed screens are displayed). The screens can be scrolled using the Up and Down keys. The display disappears after the default message time-out period specified by the PRODUCT SETUP DISPLAY PROPERTIES DEFAULT MESSAGE TIMEOUT setting. USER-PROGRAMMABLE CONTROL INPUT: The user-definable displays also respond to the INVOKE AND SCROLL setting. Any FlexLogic operand (in particular, the user-programmable pushbutton operands), can be used to navigate the programmed displays. On the rising edge of the configured operand (such as when the pushbutton is pressed), the displays are invoked by showing the last user-definable display shown during the previous activity. From this moment onward, the operand acts exactly as the Down key and allows scrolling through the configured displays. The last display wraps up to the first one. The INVOKE AND SCROLL input and the Down keypad key operate concurrently. When the default timer expires (set by the DEFAULT MESSAGE TIMEOUT setting), the relay will start to cycle through the user displays. The next activity of the INVOKE AND SCROLL input stops the cycling at the currently displayed user display, not at the first user-defined display. The INVOKE AND SCROLL pulses must last for at least 250 ms to take effect. b) USER DISPLAY 1(16)
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS USER DISPLAY 1(16) Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters

USER DISPLAY 1

DISP 1 TOP LINE: DISP 1 BOTTOM LINE: DISP 1 ITEM 1 0 DISP 1 ITEM 2 0 DISP 1 ITEM 3 0 DISP 1 ITEM 4 0 DISP 1 ITEM 5: 0

MESSAGE

Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters

MESSAGE

Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

MESSAGE

Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

MESSAGE

Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

MESSAGE

Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

MESSAGE

Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-35

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

5 SETTINGS

Any existing system display can be automatically copied into an available user display by selecting the existing display and pressing the key. The display will then prompt ADD TO USER DISPLAY LIST?. After selecting Yes, a message indicates that the selected display has been added to the user display list. When this type of entry occurs, the sub-menus are automatically configured with the proper content this content may subsequently be edited. This menu is used to enter user-defined text and/or user-selected Modbus-registered data fields into the particular user display. Each user display consists of two 20-character lines (top and bottom). The tilde (~) character is used to mark the start of a data field - the length of the data field needs to be accounted for. Up to 5 separate data fields (ITEM 1(5)) can be entered in a user display - the nth tilde (~) refers to the nth item. A User Display may be entered from the faceplate keypad or the EnerVista UR Setup interface (preferred for convenience). The following procedure shows how to enter text characters in the top and bottom lines from the faceplate keypad: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Select the line to be edited. Press the Press the The Press the key to enter text edit mode. key to advance the cursor to the next position. key may be pressed at any time for context sensitive help information. key to store the new settings. Use either Value key to scroll through the characters. A space is selected like a character. Repeat step 3 and continue entering characters until the desired text is displayed.

To enter a numerical value for any of the 5 items (the decimal form of the selected Modbus address) from the faceplate keypad, use the number keypad. Use the value of 0 for any items not being used. Use the key at any selected system display (setting, actual value, or command) which has a Modbus address, to view the hexadecimal form of the Modbus address, then manually convert it to decimal form before entering it (EnerVista UR Setup usage conveniently facilitates this conversion). Use the key to go to the user displays menu to view the user-defined content. The current user displays will show in sequence, changing every 4 seconds. While viewing a user display, press the key and then select the Yes option to remove the display from the user display list. Use the key again to exit the user displays menu. An example User Display setup and result is shown below: USER DISPLAY 1 DISP 1 TOP LINE: Current X ~ A
MESSAGE

Shows user-defined text with first Tilde marker. Shows user-defined text with second Tilde marker. Shows decimal form of user-selected Modbus Register Address, corresponding to first Tilde marker. Shows decimal form of user-selected Modbus Register Address, corresponding to 2nd Tilde marker. This item is not being used - there is no corresponding Tilde marker in Top or Bottom lines. This item is not being used - there is no corresponding Tilde marker in Top or Bottom lines. This item is not being used - there is no corresponding Tilde marker in Top or Bottom lines.

DISP 1 BOTTOM LINE: Current Y ~ A DISP 1 ITEM 1: 6016 DISP 1 ITEM 2: 6357 DISP 1 ITEM 3: 0 DISP 1 ITEM 4: 0 DISP 1 ITEM 5: 0

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

USER DISPLAYS

Current X Current Y

0.850 A 0.327 A

Shows the resultant display content.

5-36

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP 5.2.16 DIRECT INPUTS/OUTPUTS

a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP DIRECT I/O Range: 1 to 16

DIRECT I/O

DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: 1


MESSAGE

DIRECT I/O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION: Yes DIRECT I/O CH2 RING CONFIGURATION: Yes DIRECT I/O DATA RATE: 64 kbps DIRECT I/O CHANNEL CROSSOVER: Disabled CRC ALARM CH1 CRC ALARM CH2 UNRETURNED MESSAGES ALARM CH1 UNRETURNED MESSAGES ALARM CH2

Range: Yes, No

MESSAGE

Range: Yes, No

MESSAGE

Range: 64 kbps, 128 kbps

MESSAGE

Range: Disabled, Enabled

MESSAGE

See page 541. See page 541. See page 541. See page 541.

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

Direct inputs/outputs are intended for exchange of status information (inputs and outputs) between UR-series relays connected directly via Type-7 digital communications cards. The mechanism is very similar to IEC 61850 GSSE, except that communications takes place over a non-switchable isolated network and is optimized for speed. On Type 7 cards that support two channels, direct output messages are sent from both channels simultaneously. This effectively sends direct output messages both ways around a ring configuration. On Type 7 cards that support one channel, direct output messages are sent only in one direction. Messages will be resent (forwarded) when it is determined that the message did not originate at the receiver. Direct output message timing is similar to GSSE message timing. Integrity messages (with no state changes) are sent at least every 1000 ms. Messages with state changes are sent within the main pass scanning the inputs and asserting the outputs unless the communication channel bandwidth has been exceeded. Two Self-Tests are performed and signaled by the following FlexLogic operands: 1. 2.
DIRECT RING BREAK (direct input/output ring break). This FlexLogic operand indicates that direct output messages sent from a UR-series relay are not being received back by the relay. DIRECT DEVICE 1(16) OFF (direct device offline). This FlexLogic operand indicates that direct output messages from

at least one direct device are not being received. Direct input/output settings are similar to remote input/output settings. The equivalent of the remote device name strings for direct inputs/outputs is the DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID. The DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID identifies the relay in all direct output messages. All UR-series IEDs in a ring should have unique numbers assigned. The IED ID is used to identify the sender of the direct input/output message. If the direct input/output scheme is configured to operate in a ring (DIRECT I/O RING CONFIGURATION: Yes), all direct output messages should be received back. If not, the Direct Input/Output Ring Break self-test is triggered. The self-test error is signaled by the DIRECT RING BREAK FlexLogic operand. Select the DIRECT I/O DATA RATE to match the data capabilities of the communications channel. Back-to-back connections of the local relays configured with the 7A, 7B, 7C, 7D, 7H, 7I, 7J, 7K, 72 and 73 fiber optic communication cards may be set to 128 kbps. For local relays configured with all other communication cards (i.e. 7E, 7F, 7G, 7L, 7M, 7N, 7P, 7R, 7S, 7T, 7W, 74, 75, 76 and 77), the baud rate will be set to 64 kbps. All IEDs communicating over direct inputs/outputs must be set to

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-37

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

5 SETTINGS

the same data rate. UR-series IEDs equipped with dual-channel communications cards apply the same data rate to both channels. Delivery time for direct input/output messages is approximately 0.2 of a power system cycle at 128 kbps and 0.4 of a power system cycle at 64 kbps, per each bridge.
DIRECT I/O DATA RATE
NOTE

The G.703 and RS422 modules are fixed at 64 kbps only. The SETTINGS setting is not applicable to these modules.

PRODUCT SETUP

DIRECT I/O

The DIRECT I/O CHANNEL CROSSOVER setting applies to G60s with dual-channel communication cards and allows crossing over messages from Channel 1 to Channel 2. This places all UR-series IEDs into one direct input/output network regardless of the physical media of the two communication channels. The following application examples illustrate the basic concepts for direct input/output configuration. Please refer to the Inputs/Outputs section in this chapter for information on configuring FlexLogic operands (flags, bits) to be exchanged. EXAMPLE 1: EXTENDING THE INPUT/OUTPUT CAPABILITIES OF A UR-SERIES RELAY Consider an application that requires additional quantities of digital inputs and/or output contacts and/or lines of programmable logic that exceed the capabilities of a single UR-series chassis. The problem is solved by adding an extra UR-series IED, such as the C30, to satisfy the additional input/output and programmable logic requirements. The two IEDs are connected via single-channel digital communication cards as shown in the figure below.

TX1

UR IED 1
RX1

TX1

UR IED 2
RX1
842711A1.CDR

Figure 56: INPUT/OUTPUT EXTENSION VIA DIRECT INPUTS/OUTPUTS In the above application, the following settings should be applied: UR IED 1:
DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: "1" DIRECT I/O RING CONFIGURATION: "Yes" DIRECT I/O DATA RATE: "128 kbps" DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: "2" DIRECT I/O RING CONFIGURATION: "Yes" DIRECT I/O DATA RATE: "128 kbps"

UR IED 2:

The message delivery time is about 0.2 of power cycle in both ways (at 128 kbps); i.e., from Device 1 to Device 2, and from Device 2 to Device 1. Different communications cards can be selected by the user for this back-to-back connection (fiber, G.703, or RS422). EXAMPLE 2: INTERLOCKING BUSBAR PROTECTION A simple interlocking busbar protection scheme could be accomplished by sending a blocking signal from downstream devices, say 2, 3, and 4, to the upstream device that monitors a single incomer of the busbar, as shown below.

UR IED 1

BLOCK

UR IED 2

UR IED 3

UR IED 4

842712A1.CDR

Figure 57: SAMPLE INTERLOCKING BUSBAR PROTECTION SCHEME

5-38

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

For increased reliability, a dual-ring configuration (shown below) is recommended for this application.

TX1

RX1

UR IED 1
RX2 TX2

RX1

TX2

RX2

TX1

UR IED 2
TX1 RX2 TX2

UR IED 4
RX1

TX2

RX2

UR IED 3
RX1 TX1

842716A1.CDR

Figure 58: INTERLOCKING BUS PROTECTION SCHEME VIA DIRECT INPUTS/OUTPUTS In the above application, the following settings should be applied: UR IED 1: UR IED 3:
DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: 1 DIRECT I/O RING CONFIGURATION: DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: 3 DIRECT I/O RING CONFIGURATION:

UR IED 2: Yes UR IED 4: Yes

DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: 2 DIRECT I/O RING CONFIGURATION: DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: 4 DIRECT I/O RING CONFIGURATION:

Yes Yes

Message delivery time is approximately 0.2 of power system cycle (at 128 kbps) times number of bridges between the origin and destination. Dual-ring configuration effectively reduces the maximum communications distance by a factor of two. In this configuration the following delivery times are expected (at 128 kbps) if both rings are healthy: IED 1 to IED 2: 0.2 of power system cycle; IED 1 to IED 3: 0.4 of power system cycle; IED 1 to IED 4: 0.2 of power system cycle; IED 2 to IED 3: 0.2 of power system cycle; IED 2 to IED 4: 0.4 of power system cycle; IED 3 to IED 4: 0.2 of power system cycle If one ring is broken (say TX2/RX2) the delivery times are as follows: IED 1 to IED 2: 0.2 of power system cycle; IED 1 to IED 3: 0.4 of power system cycle; IED 1 to IED 4: 0.6 of power system cycle; IED 2 to IED 3: 0.2 of power system cycle; IED 2 to IED 4: 0.4 of power system cycle; IED 3 to IED 4: 0.2 of power system cycle A coordinating timer for this bus protection scheme could be selected to cover the worst case scenario (0.4 of power system cycle). Upon detecting a broken ring, the coordination time should be adaptively increased to 0.6 of power system cycle. The complete application requires addressing a number of issues such as failure of both the communications rings, failure or out-of-service conditions of one of the relays, etc. Self-monitoring flags of the direct inputs/outputs feature would be primarily used to address these concerns. EXAMPLE 3: PILOT-AIDED SCHEMES Consider the three-terminal line protection application shown below:
UR IED 1 UR IED 2

UR IED 3

842713A1.CDR

Figure 59: THREE-TERMINAL LINE APPLICATION A permissive pilot-aided scheme could be implemented in a two-ring configuration as shown below (IEDs 1 and 2 constitute a first ring, while IEDs 2 and 3 constitute a second ring):

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-39

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

5 SETTINGS

TX1

RX1

RX2

UR IED 1
RX1 TX1

UR IED 2
TX2

RX1

UR IED 3
TX1
842714A1.CDR

Figure 510: SINGLE-CHANNEL OPEN LOOP CONFIGURATION In the above application, the following settings should be applied: UR IED 1: UR IED 3:
DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: 1 DIRECT I/O RING CONFIGURATION: DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: "3" DIRECT I/O RING CONFIGURATION:

UR IED 2: Yes "Yes"

DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: 2 DIRECT I/O RING CONFIGURATION:

Yes

In this configuration the following delivery times are expected (at 128 kbps): IED 1 to IED 2: 0.2 of power system cycle; IED 1 to IED 3: 0.5 of power system cycle; IED 2 to IED 3: 0.2 of power system cycle

In the above scheme, IEDs 1 and 3 do not communicate directly. IED 2 must be configured to forward the messages as explained in the Inputs/Outputs section. A blocking pilot-aided scheme should be implemented with more security and, ideally, faster message delivery time. This could be accomplished using a dual-ring configuration as shown below.

TX2

TX1

RX1

RX2

UR IED 1
RX1 RX2 TX2

UR IED 2
TX1

TX1

RX1

UR IED 3
RX2 TX2
842715A1.CDR

Figure 511: DUAL-CHANNEL CLOSED LOOP (DUAL-RING) CONFIGURATION In the above application, the following settings should be applied: UR IED 1: UR IED 3:
DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: 1 DIRECT I/O RING CONFIGURATION: DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: "3" DIRECT I/O RING CONFIGURATION:

UR IED 2: Yes "Yes"

DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: 2 DIRECT I/O RING CONFIGURATION:

Yes

In this configuration the following delivery times are expected (at 128 kbps) if both the rings are healthy: IED 1 to IED 2: 0.2 of power system cycle; IED 1 to IED 3: 0.2 of power system cycle; IED 2 to IED 3: 0.2 of power system cycle The two communications configurations could be applied to both permissive and blocking schemes. Speed, reliability and cost should be taken into account when selecting the required architecture.

5-40

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS b) CRC ALARM CH1(2)


PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP DIRECT I/O CRC ALARM CH1(2) Range: Enabled, Disabled

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

CRC ALARM CH1

CRC ALARM CH1 FUNCTION: Disabled


MESSAGE

CRC ALARM CH1 MESSAGE COUNT: 600 CRC ALARM CH1 THRESHOLD: 10 CRC ALARM CH1 EVENTS: Disabled

Range: 100 to 10000 in steps of 1

MESSAGE

Range: 1 to 1000 in steps of 1

MESSAGE

Range: Enabled, Disabled

The G60 checks integrity of the incoming direct input/output messages using a 32-bit CRC. The CRC Alarm function is available for monitoring the communication medium noise by tracking the rate of messages failing the CRC check. The monitoring function counts all incoming messages, including messages that failed the CRC check. A separate counter adds up messages that failed the CRC check. When the failed CRC counter reaches the user-defined level specified by the CRC ALARM CH1 THRESHOLD setting within the user-defined message count CRC ALARM 1 CH1 COUNT, the DIR IO CH1 CRC ALARM FlexLogic operand is set. When the total message counter reaches the user-defined maximum specified by the CRC ALARM CH1 MESSAGE COUNT setting, both the counters reset and the monitoring process is restarted. The operand shall be configured to drive an output contact, user-programmable LED, or selected communication-based output. Latching and acknowledging conditions - if required - should be programmed accordingly. The CRC Alarm function is available on a per-channel basis. The total number of direct input/output messages that failed DIRECT INPUTS CRC FAIL COUNT CH1(2) actual value. the CRC check is available as the ACTUAL VALUES STATUS Message Count and Length of the Monitoring Window: To monitor communications integrity, the relay sends 1 message per second (at 64 kbps) or 2 messages per second (128 kbps) even if there is no change in the direct outputs. For example, setting the CRC ALARM CH1 MESSAGE COUNT to 10000, corresponds a time window of about 160 minutes at 64 kbps and 80 minutes at 128 kbps. If the messages are sent faster as a result of direct outputs activity, the monitoring time interval will shorten. This should be taken into account when determining the CRC ALARM CH1 MESSAGE COUNT setting. For example, if the requirement is a maximum monitoring time interval of 10 minutes at 64 kbps, then the CRC ALARM CH1 MESSAGE COUNT should be set to 10 60 1 = 600. Correlation of Failed CRC and Bit Error Rate (BER): The CRC check may fail if one or more bits in a packet are corrupted. Therefore, an exact correlation between the CRC fail rate and the BER is not possible. Under certain assumptions an approximation can be made as follows. A direct input/output packet containing 20 bytes results in 160 bits of data being sent and therefore, a transmission of 63 packets is equivalent to 10,000 bits. A BER of 104 implies 1 bit error for every 10,000 bits sent/received. Assuming the best case of only 1 bit error in a failed packet, having 1 failed packet for every 63 received is about equal to a BER of 104.

c) UNRETURNED MESSAGES ALARM CH1(2)


PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP DIRECT I/O UNRETURNED MESSAGES ALARM CH1(2) Range: Enabled, Disabled

UNRETURNED MESSAGES ALARM CH1


MESSAGE

UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1 FUNCTION: Disabled UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1 MESSAGE COUNT: 600 UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1 THRESHOLD: 10 UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1 EVENTS: Disabled

Range: 100 to 10000 in steps of 1

MESSAGE

Range: 1 to 1000 in steps of 1

MESSAGE

Range: Enabled, Disabled

The G60 checks integrity of the direct input/output communication ring by counting unreturned messages. In the ring configuration, all messages originating at a given device should return within a pre-defined period of time. The Unreturned Messages Alarm function is available for monitoring the integrity of the communication ring by tracking the rate of unre-

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-41

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

5 SETTINGS

turned messages. This function counts all the outgoing messages and a separate counter adds the messages have failed to return. When the unreturned messages counter reaches the user-definable level specified by the UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1 THRESHOLD setting and within the user-defined message count UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1 COUNT, the DIR IO CH1 UNRET ALM FlexLogic operand is set. When the total message counter reaches the user-defined maximum specified by the UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1 MESSAGE COUNT setting, both the counters reset and the monitoring process is restarted. The operand shall be configured to drive an output contact, user-programmable LED, or selected communication-based output. Latching and acknowledging conditions, if required, should be programmed accordingly. The Unreturned Messages Alarm function is available on a per-channel basis and is active only in the ring configuration. The total number of unreturned input/output messages is available as the ACTUAL VALUES STATUS DIRECT INPUTS UNRETURNED MSG COUNT CH1(2) actual value. 5.2.17 TELEPROTECTION
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP TELEPROTECTION

TELEPROTECTION

TELEPROTECTION FUNCTION: Disabled


MESSAGE

Range: Disabled, Enabled

NUMBER OF TERMINALS: 2 NUMBER OF COMM CHANNELS: 1 LOCAL RELAY ID NUMBER: 0 TERMINAL 1 RELAY ID NUMBER: 0 TERMINAL 2 RELAY ID NUMBER: 0

Range: 2, 3

MESSAGE

Range: 1, 2

MESSAGE

Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1

MESSAGE

Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1

MESSAGE

Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1

Digital teleprotection functionality is designed to transfer protection commands between 2 or 3 relays in a secure, fast, dependable, and deterministic fashion. Possible applications are permissive or blocking pilot schemes and direct transfer trip (DTT). Teleprotection can be applied over any analog or digital channels and any communications media, such as direct fiber, copper wires, optical networks, or microwave radio links. A mixture of communication media is possible. Once teleprotection is enabled and the teleprotection input/outputs are configured, data packets are transmitted continuously every 1/4 cycle (3/8 cycle if using C37.94 modules) from peer-to-peer. Security of communication channel data is achieved by using CRC-32 on the data packet. Teleprotection inputs/outputs and direct inputs/outputs are mutually exclusive as such, they cannot be used simulatneously. Once teleprotection inputs/outputs are enabled, direct inputs/outputs are blocked, and vice versa.
NOTE

NUMBER OF TERMINALS: Specifies whether the teleprotection system operates between 2 peers or 3 peers. NUMBER OF CHANNELS: Specifies how many channels are used. If the NUMBER OF TERMINALS is 3 (three-terminal system), set the NUMBER OF CHANNELS to 2. For a two-terminal system, the NUMBER OF CHANNELS can set to 1 or 2 (redundant channels). LOCAL RELAY ID NUMBER, TERMINAL 1 RELAY ID NUMBER, and TERMINAL 2 RELAY ID NUMBER: In installations that use multiplexers or modems, it is desirable to ensure that the data used by the relays protecting a given line is from the correct relays. The teleprotection function performs this check by reading the message ID sent by transmitting relays and comparing it to the programmed ID in the receiving relay. This check is also used to block inputs if inadvertently set to loopback mode or data is being received from a wrong relay by checking the ID on a received channel. If an incorrect ID is found on a channel during normal operation, the TELEPROT CH1(2) ID FAIL FlexLogic operand is set, driving the event with the same name and blocking the teleprotection inputs. For commissioning purposes, the CHANNEL TESTS VALIDITY OF CHANNEL CONFIGURAresult of channel identification is also shown in the STATUS TION actual value. The default value of 0 for the LOCAL RELAY ID NUMBER indicates that relay ID is not to be checked.

5-42

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP

On two- terminals two-channel systems, the same LOCAL RELAY ID NUMBER is transmitted over both channels; as such, only the TERMINAL 1 ID NUMBER has to be programmed on the receiving end. 5.2.18 INSTALLATION
PATH: SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP INSTALLATION

INSTALLATION

RELAY SETTINGS: Not Programmed


MESSAGE

Range: Not Programmed, Programmed

RELAY NAME: Relay-1

Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters

To safeguard against the installation of a relay without any entered settings, the unit will not allow signaling of any output relay until RELAY SETTINGS is set to "Programmed". This setting is defaulted to "Not Programmed" when at the factory. The UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED self-test error message is displayed until the relay is put into the "Programmed" state. The RELAY NAME setting allows the user to uniquely identify a relay. This name will appear on generated reports. This name is also used to identify specific devices which are engaged in automatically sending/receiving data over the Ethernet communications channel using the IEC 61850 protocol.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-43

5.3 SYSTEM SETUP 5.3SYSTEM SETUP a) CURRENT BANKS


PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP AC INPUTS CURRENT BANK F1(M5) Range: 1 to 65000 A in steps of 1

5 SETTINGS 5.3.1 AC INPUTS

CURRENT BANK F1

PHASE CT F1 PRIMARY:

1 A
Range: 1 A, 5 A

MESSAGE

PHASE CT F1 SECONDARY: 1 A GROUND CT F1 PRIMARY: 1 A GROUND CT F1 SECONDARY: 1 A

MESSAGE

Range: 1 to 65000 A in steps of 1

MESSAGE

Range: 1 A, 5 A

Because energy parameters are accumulated, these values should be recorded and then reset immediately prior to changing CT characteristics.
NOTE

Four banks of phase/ground CTs can be set, where the current banks are denoted in the following format (X represents the module slot position letter): Xa, where X = {F, M} and a = {1, 5}. See the Introduction to AC Sources section at the beginning of this chapter for additional details. These settings are critical for all features that have settings dependent on current measurements. When the relay is ordered, the CT module must be specified to include a standard or sensitive ground input. As the phase CTs are connected in Wye (star), the calculated phasor sum of the three phase currents (IA + IB + IC = Neutral Current = 3Io) is used as the input for the neutral overcurrent elements. In addition, a zero-sequence (core balance) CT which senses current in all of the circuit primary conductors, or a CT in a neutral grounding conductor may also be used. For this configuration, the ground CT primary rating must be entered. To detect low level ground fault currents, the sensitive ground input may be used. In this case, the sensitive ground CT primary rating must be entered. Refer to Chapter 3 for more details on CT connections. Enter the rated CT primary current values. For both 1000:5 and 1000:1 CTs, the entry would be 1000. For correct operation, the CT secondary rating must match the setting (which must also correspond to the specific CT connections used). The following example illustrates how multiple CT inputs (current banks) are summed as one source current. Given If the following current banks: F1: CT bank with 500:1 ratio; F5: CT bank with 1000: ratio; M1: CT bank with 800:1 ratio The following rule applies: SRC 1 = F1 + F5 + M1
(EQ 5.6)

1 pu is the highest primary current. In this case, 1000 is entered and the secondary current from the 500:1 ratio CT will be adjusted to that created by a 1000:1 CT before summation. If a protection element is set up to act on SRC 1 currents, then a pickup level of 1 pu will operate on 1000 A primary. The same rule applies for current sums from CTs with different secondary taps (5 A and 1 A).

5-44

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS b) VOLTAGE BANKS


PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP AC INPUTS VOLTAGE BANK F5(M5) Range: Wye, Delta

5.3 SYSTEM SETUP

VOLTAGE BANK F5

PHASE VT F5 CONNECTION: Wye PHASE VT F5 SECONDARY: 66.4 V PHASE VT F5 RATIO: 1.00 :1 AUXILIARY VT F5 CONNECTION: Vag AUXILIARY VT F5 SECONDARY: 66.4 V AUXILIARY VT F5 RATIO: 1.00 :1

MESSAGE

Range: 50.0 to 240.0 V in steps of 0.1

MESSAGE

Range: 1.00 to 24000.00 in steps of 0.01

MESSAGE

Range: Vn, Vag, Vbg, Vcg, Vab, Vbc, Vca

MESSAGE

Range: 50.0 to 240.0 V in steps of 0.1

MESSAGE

Range: 1.00 to 24000.00 in steps of 0.01

Because energy parameters are accumulated, these values should be recorded and then reset immediately prior to changing VT characteristics.
CAUTION

Two banks of phase/auxiliary VTs can be set, where voltage banks are denoted in the following format (X represents the module slot position letter): Xa, where X = {F, M} and a = {5}. See the Introduction to AC Sources section at the beginning of this chapter for additional details. With VTs installed, the relay can perform voltage measurements as well as power calculations. Enter the PHASE VT F5 CONNECTION made to the system as Wye or Delta. An open-delta source VT connection would be entered as Delta. See the Typical Wiring Diagram in Chapter 3 for details. The nominal PHASE VT F5 SECONDARY voltage setting is the voltage across the relay input terminals when nominal voltage is applied to the VT primary.
NOTE

For example, on a system with a 13.8 kV nominal primary voltage and with a 14400:120 volt VT in a Delta connection, the secondary voltage would be 115, i.e. (13800 / 14400) 120. For a Wye connection, the voltage value entered must be the phase to neutral voltage which would be 115 / 3 = 66.4. On a 14.4 kV system with a Delta connection and a VT primary to secondary turns ratio of 14400:120, the voltage value entered would be 120, i.e. 14400 / 120. 5.3.2 POWER SYSTEM

PATH: SETTINGS

SYSTEM SETUP

POWER SYSTEM

POWER SYSTEM

NOMINAL FREQUENCY: 60 Hz
MESSAGE

Range: 25 to 60 Hz in steps of 1

PHASE ROTATION: ABC FREQUENCY AND PHASE REFERENCE: SRC 1 FREQUENCY TRACKING: Enabled

Range: ABC, ACB

MESSAGE

Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4

MESSAGE

Range: Disabled, Enabled

The power system NOMINAL FREQUENCY value is used as a default to set the digital sampling rate if the system frequency cannot be measured from available signals. This may happen if the signals are not present or are heavily distorted. Before reverting to the nominal frequency, the frequency tracking algorithm holds the last valid frequency measurement for a safe period of time while waiting for the signals to reappear or for the distortions to decay.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-45

5.3 SYSTEM SETUP

5 SETTINGS

The phase sequence of the power system is required to properly calculate sequence components and power parameters. The PHASE ROTATION setting matches the power system phase sequence. Note that this setting informs the relay of the actual system phase sequence, either ABC or ACB. CT and VT inputs on the relay, labeled as A, B, and C, must be connected to system phases A, B, and C for correct operation. The FREQUENCY AND PHASE REFERENCE setting determines which signal source is used (and hence which AC signal) for phase angle reference. The AC signal used is prioritized based on the AC inputs that are configured for the signal source: phase voltages takes precedence, followed by auxiliary voltage, then phase currents, and finally ground current. For three phase selection, phase A is used for angle referencing ( V ANGLE REF = V A ), while Clarke transformation of the phase signals is used for frequency metering and tracking ( V FREQUENCY = ( 2V A V B V C ) 3 ) for better performance during fault, open pole, and VT and CT fail conditions. The phase reference and frequency tracking AC signals are selected based upon the Source configuration, regardless of whether or not a particular signal is actually applied to the relay. Phase angle of the reference signal will always display zero degrees and all other phase angles will be relative to this signal. If the pre-selected reference signal is not measurable at a given time, the phase angles are not referenced. The phase angle referencing is done via a phase locked loop, which can synchronize independent UR-series relays if they have the same AC signal reference. These results in very precise correlation of time tagging in the event recorder between different UR-series relays provided the relays have an IRIG-B connection.
FREQUENCY TRACKING
NOTE

should only be set to "Disabled" in very unusual circumstances; consult the factory for special variable-frequency applications.

5.3.3 SIGNAL SOURCES

PATH: SETTINGS

SYSTEM SETUP

SIGNAL SOURCES

SOURCE 1(4) Range: up to 6 alphanumeric characters

SOURCE 1

SOURCE 1 NAME: SRC 1


MESSAGE

SOURCE 1 PHASE CT: None SOURCE 1 GROUND CT: None SOURCE 1 PHASE VT: None SOURCE 1 AUX VT: None

Range: None, F1, F5, F1+F5,... up to a combination of any 6 CTs. Only Phase CT inputs are displayed. Range: None, F1, F5, F1+F5,... up to a combination of any 6 CTs. Only Ground CT inputs are displayed. Range: None, F1, F5, M1, M5 Only phase voltage inputs will be displayed. Range: None, F1, F5, M1, M5 Only auxiliary voltage inputs will be displayed.

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

Four identical source menus are available. The "SRC 1" text can be replaced by with a user-defined name appropriate for the associated source. F and M represent the module slot position. The number directly following these letters represents either the first bank of four channels (1, 2, 3, 4) called 1 or the second bank of four channels (5, 6, 7, 8) called 5 in a particular CT/VT module. Refer to the Introduction to AC Sources section at the beginning of this chapter for additional details on this concept. It is possible to select the sum of up to six (6) CTs. The first channel displayed is the CT to which all others will be referred. For example, the selection F1+F5 indicates the sum of each phase from channels F1 and F5, scaled to whichever CT has the higher ratio. Selecting None hides the associated actual values. The approach used to configure the AC sources consists of several steps; first step is to specify the information about each CT and VT input. For CT inputs, this is the nominal primary and secondary current. For VTs, this is the connection type, ratio and nominal secondary voltage. Once the inputs have been specified, the configuration for each source is entered, including specifying which CTs will be summed together.

5-46

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS User Selection of AC Parameters for Comparator Elements:

5.3 SYSTEM SETUP

CT/VT modules automatically calculate all current and voltage parameters from the available inputs. Users must select the specific input parameters to be measured by every element in the relevant settings menu. The internal design of the element specifies which type of parameter to use and provides a setting for source selection. In elements where the parameter may be either fundamental or RMS magnitude, such as phase time overcurrent, two settings are provided. One setting specifies the source, the second setting selects between fundamental phasor and RMS. AC Input Actual Values: The calculated parameters associated with the configured voltage and current inputs are displayed in the current and voltage sections of actual values. Only the phasor quantities associated with the actual AC physical input channels will be displayed here. All parameters contained within a configured source are displayed in the sources section of the actual values. Example Use of Sources: An example of the use of sources, with a relay with two CT/VT modules, is shown in the diagram below. A relay could have the following hardware configuration:
INCREASING SLOT POSITION LETTER --> CT/VT MODULE 1 CTs CT/VT MODULE 2 VTs CT/VT MODULE 3 not applicable

This configuration could be used on a two winding transformer, with one winding connected into a breaker-and-a-half system. The following figure shows the arrangement of sources used to provide the functions required in this application, and the CT/VT inputs that are used to provide the data.
F1 DSP Bank

5
Source 1 Amps Source 3
51BF-1 51BF-2

F5 Source 2 Amps

U1

Volts Amps
A V W Var 87T

V A W Var 51P

Volts Amps M1 M1 Source 4

UR Relay
M5

Figure 512: EXAMPLE USE OF SOURCES

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-47

5.3 SYSTEM SETUP

5 SETTINGS 5.3.4 FLEXCURVES

a) SETTINGS
PATH: SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP FLEXCURVES FLEXCURVE A(D) Range: 0 to 65535 ms in steps of 1

FLEXCURVE A

FLEXCURVE A TIME AT 0.00 xPKP: 0 ms

FlexCurves A through D have settings for entering times to Reset/Operate at the following pickup levels: 0.00 to 0.98 / 1.03 to 20.00. This data is converted into 2 continuous curves by linear interpolation between data points. To enter a custom FlexCurve, enter the Reset/Operate time (using the VALUE keys) for each selected pickup point (using the MESSAGE keys) for the desired protection curve (A, B, C, or D). Table 54: FLEXCURVE TABLE
RESET 0.00 0.05 0.10 0.15 0.20 TIME MS RESET 0.68 0.70 0.72 0.74 0.76 0.78 0.80 0.82 0.84 0.86 0.88 0.90 0.91 0.92 0.93 0.94 0.95 0.96 0.97 0.98 TIME MS OPERATE 1.03 1.05 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2.0 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 TIME MS OPERATE 2.9 3.0 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.9 4.0 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 TIME MS OPERATE 4.9 5.0 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7 5.8 5.9 6.0 6.5 7.0 7.5 8.0 8.5 9.0 9.5 10.0 TIME MS OPERATE 10.5 11.0 11.5 12.0 12.5 13.0 13.5 14.0 14.5 15.0 15.5 16.0 16.5 17.0 17.5 18.0 18.5 19.0 19.5 20.0 TIME MS

0.25 0.30 0.35 0.40 0.45 0.48 0.50 0.52 0.54 0.56 0.58 0.60 0.62 0.64 0.66

NOTE

The relay using a given FlexCurve applies linear approximation for times between the user-entered points. Special care must be applied when setting the two points that are close to the multiple of pickup of 1, i.e. 0.98 pu and 1.03 pu. It is recommended to set the two times to a similar value; otherwise, the linear approximation may result in undesired behavior for the operating quantity that is close to 1.00 pu.

5-48

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS b) FLEXCURVE CONFIGURATION WITH ENERVISTA UR SETUP

5.3 SYSTEM SETUP

The EnerVista UR Setup software allows for easy configuration and management of FlexCurves and their associated data points. Prospective FlexCurves can be configured from a selection of standard curves to provide the best approximate fit, then specific data points can be edited afterwards. Alternately, curve data can be imported from a specified file (.csv format) by selecting the Import Data From EnerVista UR Setup setting. Curves and data can be exported, viewed, and cleared by clicking the appropriate buttons. FlexCurves are customized by editing the operating time (ms) values at pre-defined per-unit current multiples. Note that the pickup multiples start at zero (implying the "reset time"), operating time below pickup, and operating time above pickup. c) RECLOSER CURVE EDITING Recloser Curve selection is special in that recloser curves can be shaped into a composite curve with a minimum response time and a fixed time above a specified pickup multiples. There are 41 recloser curve types supported. These definite operating times are useful to coordinate operating times, typically at higher currents and where upstream and downstream protective devices have different operating characteristics. The Recloser Curve configuration window shown below appears when the Initialize From EnerVista UR Setup setting is set to Recloser Curve and the Initialize FlexCurve button is clicked.

Multiplier: Scales (multiplies) the curve operating times

Addr: Adds the time specified in this field (in ms) to each curve operating time value.
Minimum Response Time (MRT): If enabled, the MRT setting defines the shortest operating time even if the curve suggests a shorter time at higher current multiples. A composite operating characteristic is effectively defined. For current multiples lower than the intersection point, the curve dictates the operating time; otherwise, the MRT does. An information message appears when attempting to apply an MRT shorter than the minimum curve time. High Current Time: Allows the user to set a pickup multiple from which point onwards the operating time is fixed. This is normally only required at higher current levels. The HCT Ratio defines the high current pickup multiple; the HCT defines the operating time.
842721A1.CDR

Figure 513: RECLOSER CURVE INITIALIZATION Multiplier and Adder settings only affect the curve portion of the characteristic and not the MRT and HCT settings. The HCT settings override the MRT settings for multiples of pickup greater than the HCT Ratio.
NOTE

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-49

5.3 SYSTEM SETUP d) EXAMPLE

5 SETTINGS

A composite curve can be created from the GE_111 standard with MRT = 200 ms and HCT initially disabled and then enabled at 8 times pickup with an operating time of 30 ms. At approximately 4 times pickup, the curve operating time is equal to the MRT and from then onwards the operating time remains at 200 ms (see below).

842719A1.CDR

Figure 514: COMPOSITE RECLOSER CURVE WITH HCT DISABLED With the HCT feature enabled, the operating time reduces to 30 ms for pickup multiples exceeding 8 times pickup.

842720A1.CDR

Figure 515: COMPOSITE RECLOSER CURVE WITH HCT ENABLED Configuring a composite curve with an increase in operating time at increased pickup multiples is not allowed. If this is attempted, the EnerVista UR Setup software generates an error message and discards the proposed changes.
NOTE

e) STANDARD RECLOSER CURVES The standard Recloser curves available for the G60 are displayed in the following graphs.

5-50

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.3 SYSTEM SETUP

2 1 0.5
GE106

TIME (sec)

0.2 0.1 0.05

GE103 GE104 GE105

GE101

GE102

0.02 0.01 1 1.2 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 CURRENT (multiple of pickup) 15 20

842723A1.CDR

Figure 516: RECLOSER CURVES GE101 TO GE106

50
GE142

20 10 5

GE138

TIME (sec)

2 1
GE113 GE120

0.5

0.2 0.1 0.05 1

1.2

1.5

2.5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 CURRENT (multiple of pickup)

15

20

842725A1.CDR

Figure 517: RECLOSER CURVES GE113, GE120, GE138 AND GE142

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-51

5.3 SYSTEM SETUP

5 SETTINGS

50

20

10

TIME (sec)

GE201

GE151

2
GE134 GE140 GE137

0.5 1 1.2 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 CURRENT (multiple of pickup) 15 20

842730A1.CDR

Figure 518: RECLOSER CURVES GE134, GE137, GE140, GE151 AND GE201

50

GE152

20

TIME (sec)

GE141

10

GE131

GE200

2 1

1.2

1.5

2.5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 CURRENT (multiple of pickup)

15

20

842728A1.CDR

Figure 519: RECLOSER CURVES GE131, GE141, GE152, AND GE200

5-52

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.3 SYSTEM SETUP

50 20 10 5 2
GE162

GE164

TIME (sec)

1 0.5
GE133

0.2 0.1 0.05


GE161

GE165

0.02 0.01 1 1.2 1.5 2

GE163

2.5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 CURRENT (multiple of pickup)

15

20

842729A1.CDR

Figure 520: RECLOSER CURVES GE133, GE161, GE162, GE163, GE164 AND GE165
20 10 5 2

GE132

TIME (sec)

1 0.5 0.2
GE136 GE139

0.1
GE116

0.05
GE118

GE117

0.02 0.01 1 1.2 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 CURRENT (multiple of pickup) 15 20

842726A1.CDR

Figure 521: RECLOSER CURVES GE116, GE117, GE118, GE132, GE136, AND GE139

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-53

5.3 SYSTEM SETUP

5 SETTINGS

20 10 5
GE122

TIME (sec)

1 0.5
GE114

0.2 0.1 0.05 0.02 0.01 1 1.2 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 CURRENT (multiple of pickup) 15 20
GE121 GE111

GE107

GE115

GE112

842724A1.CDR

Figure 522: RECLOSER CURVES GE107, GE111, GE112, GE114, GE115, GE121, AND GE122

50

20
GE202

10

TIME (sec)

2 1 0.5

GE119

GE135

0.2 1

1.2

1.5

2.5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 CURRENT (multiple of pickup)

15

20

842727A1.CDR

Figure 523: RECLOSER CURVES GE119, GE135, AND GE202

5-54

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS 5.4FLEXLOGIC

5.4 FLEXLOGIC 5.4.1 INTRODUCTION TO FLEXLOGIC

To provide maximum flexibility to the user, the arrangement of internal digital logic combines fixed and user-programmed parameters. Logic upon which individual features are designed is fixed, and all other logic, from digital input signals through elements or combinations of elements to digital outputs, is variable. The user has complete control of all variable logic through FlexLogic. In general, the system receives analog and digital inputs which it uses to produce analog and digital outputs. The major sub-systems of a generic UR-series relay involved in this process are shown below.

Figure 524: UR ARCHITECTURE OVERVIEW The states of all digital signals used in the G60 are represented by flags (or FlexLogic operands, which are described later in this section). A digital 1 is represented by a 'set' flag. Any external contact change-of-state can be used to block an element from operating, as an input to a control feature in a FlexLogic equation, or to operate a contact output. The state of the contact input can be displayed locally or viewed remotely via the communications facilities provided. If a simple scheme where a contact input is used to block an element is desired, this selection is made when programming the element. This capability also applies to the other features that set flags: elements, virtual inputs, remote inputs, schemes, and human operators. If more complex logic than presented above is required, it is implemented via FlexLogic. For example, if it is desired to have the closed state of contact input H7a and the operated state of the phase undervoltage element block the operation of the phase time overcurrent element, the two control input states are programmed in a FlexLogic equation. This equation ANDs the two control inputs to produce a virtual output which is then selected when programming the phase time overcurrent to be used as a blocking input. Virtual outputs can only be created by FlexLogic equations. Traditionally, protective relay logic has been relatively limited. Any unusual applications involving interlocks, blocking, or supervisory functions had to be hard-wired using contact inputs and outputs. FlexLogic minimizes the requirement for auxiliary components and wiring while making more complex schemes possible.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-55

5.4 FLEXLOGIC

5 SETTINGS

The logic that determines the interaction of inputs, elements, schemes and outputs is field programmable through the use of logic equations that are sequentially processed. The use of virtual inputs and outputs in addition to hardware is available internally and on the communication ports for other relays to use (distributed FlexLogic). FlexLogic allows users to customize the relay through a series of equations that consist of operators and operands. The operands are the states of inputs, elements, schemes and outputs. The operators are logic gates, timers and latches (with set and reset inputs). A system of sequential operations allows any combination of specified operands to be assigned as inputs to specified operators to create an output. The final output of an equation is a numbered register called a virtual output. Virtual outputs can be used as an input operand in any equation, including the equation that generates the output, as a seal-in or other type of feedback. A FlexLogic equation consists of parameters that are either operands or operators. Operands have a logic state of 1 or 0. Operators provide a defined function, such as an AND gate or a Timer. Each equation defines the combinations of parameters to be used to set a Virtual Output flag. Evaluation of an equation results in either a 1 (=ON, i.e. flag set) or 0 (=OFF, i.e. flag not set). Each equation is evaluated at least 4 times every power system cycle. Some types of operands are present in the relay in multiple instances; e.g. contact and remote inputs. These types of operands are grouped together (for presentation purposes only) on the faceplate display. The characteristics of the different types of operands are listed in the table below. Table 55: G60 FLEXLOGIC OPERAND TYPES
OPERAND TYPE Contact Input STATE On Off EXAMPLE FORMAT Cont Ip On Cont Ip Off Cont Op 1 VOn Cont Op 1 VOff Cont Op 1 IOn Cont Op 1 IOff DIRECT INPUT 1 On PHASE TOC1 PKP CHARACTERISTICS [INPUT IS 1 (= ON) IF...] Voltage is presently applied to the input (external contact closed). Voltage is presently not applied to the input (external contact open). Voltage exists across the contact. Voltage does not exists across the contact. Current is flowing through the contact. Current is not flowing through the contact. The direct input is presently in the ON state. The tested parameter is presently above the pickup setting of an element which responds to rising values or below the pickup setting of an element which responds to falling values. This operand is the logical inverse of the above PKP operand. The tested parameter has been above/below the pickup setting of the element for the programmed delay time, or has been at logic 1 and is now at logic 0 but the reset timer has not finished timing. The output of the comparator is set to the block function. The input operand is at logic 1. This operand is the logical inverse of the above PKP operand. The input operand has been at logic 1 for the programmed pickup delay time, or has been at logic 1 for this period and is now at logic 0 but the reset timer has not finished timing. The number of pulses counted is above the set number. The number of pulses counted is equal to the set number. The number of pulses counted is below the set number. Logic 1 Logic 0 The remote input is presently in the ON state. The virtual input is presently in the ON state. The virtual output is presently in the set state (i.e. evaluation of the equation which produces this virtual output results in a "1").

Contact Output (type Form-A contact only)

Voltage On Voltage Off Current On Current Off

Direct Input Element (Analog)

On Pickup

Dropout Operate

PHASE TOC1 DPO PHASE TOC1 OP

Block Element (Digital) Pickup Dropout Operate

PH DIR1 BLK Dig Element 1 PKP Dig Element 1 DPO Dig Element 1 OP

Element (Digital Counter)

Higher than Equal to Lower than On Off On On On

Counter 1 HI Counter 1 EQL Counter 1 LO On Off REMOTE INPUT 1 On Virt Ip 1 On Virt Op 1 On

Fixed Remote Input Virtual Input Virtual Output

5-56

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS The operands available for this relay are listed alphabetically by types in the following table. Table 56: G60 FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS (Sheet 1 of 6)
OPERAND TYPE CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS DIRECT DEVICES OPERAND SYNTAX CONTROL PUSHBTN n ON DIRECT DEVICE 1On DIRECT DEVICE 16On DIRECT DEVICE 1Off DIRECT DEVICE 16Off DIR IO CH1(2) CRC ALARM DIR IO CRC ALARM DIR IO CH1(2) UNRET ALM DIR IO UNRET ALM ELEMENT: 100% Stator Ground 100% STATOR STG1 PKP 100% STATOR STG1 OP 100% STATOR STG1 DPO 100% STATOR STG2 PKP 100% STATOR STG2 OP 100% STATOR STG2 DPO 100% STATOR PKP 100% STATOR OP 100% STATOR DPO OPERAND DESCRIPTION Control Pushbutton n (n = 1 to 7) is being pressed. Flag is set, logic=1 Flag is set, logic=1 Flag is set, logic=1 Flag is set, logic=1

5.4 FLEXLOGIC

DIRECT INPUT/ OUTPUT CHANNEL MONITORING

The rate of Direct Input messages received on Channel 1(2) and failing the CRC exceeded the user-specified level. The rate of Direct Input messages failing the CRC exceeded the userspecified level on Channel 1 or 2. The rate of returned direct input/output messages on Channel 1(2) exceeded the user-specified level (ring configurations only). The rate of returned direct input/output messages exceeded the userspecified level on Channel 1 or 2 (ring configurations only). Stage 1 of the 100% Stator Ground element has picked up Stage 1 of the 100% Stator Ground element has operated Stage 1 of the 100% Stator Ground element has dropped out Stage 2 of the 100% Stator Ground element has picked up Stage 2 of the 100% Stator Ground element has operated Stage 2 of the 100% Stator Ground element has dropped out The 100% Stator Ground element has picked up The 100% Stator Ground element has operated The 100% Stator Ground element has dropped out Third Harmonic Neutral Undervoltage element has picked up Third Harmonic Neutral Undervoltage element has operated Third Harmonic Neutral Undervoltage element has dropped out The Accidental Energization element is armed. The Accidental Energization element has dropped out. The Accidental Energization element has operated. Auxiliary Overvoltage element has picked up Auxiliary Overvoltage element has dropped out Auxiliary Overvoltage element has operated Auxiliary Undervoltage element has picked up Auxiliary Undervoltage element has dropped out Auxiliary Undervoltage element has operated Digital Counter 1 output is more than comparison value Digital Counter 1 output is equal to comparison value Digital Counter 1 output is less than comparison value Digital Counter 8 output is more than comparison value Digital Counter 8 output is equal to comparison value Digital Counter 8 output is less than comparison value Digital Element 1 is picked up Digital Element 1 is operated Digital Element 1 is dropped out Digital Element 48 is picked up Digital Element 48 is operated Digital Element 48 is dropped out Stage 1 of the Directional Power element 1 has picked up Stage 2 of the Directional Power element 1 has picked up Stage 1 of the Directional Power element 1 has dropped out Stage 2 of the Directional Power element 1 has dropped out Stage 1 of the Directional Power element 1 has operated Stage 2 of the Directional Power element 1 has operated The Directional Power element has picked up The Directional Power element has dropped out The Directional Power element has operated Same set of operands as DIR POWER 1 The n-th Frequency Rate of Change element has picked up The n-th Frequency Rate of Change element has dropped out The n-th Frequency Rate of Change element has operated

ELEMENT: 3RD HARM NTRL UV PKP 3rd Harmonic 3RD HARM NTRL UV OP Neutral Undervoltage 3RD HARM NTRL UV DPO ELEMENT: Accidental Energization ELEMENT: Auxiliary Overvoltage ELEMENT: Auxiliary Undervoltage ELEMENT: Digital Counters ACCDNT ENRG ARMED ACCDNT ENRG DPO ACCDNT ENRG OP AUX OV1 PKP AUX OV1 DPO AUX OV1 OP AUX UV1 PKP AUX UV1 DPO AUX UV1 OP Counter 1 HI Counter 1 EQL Counter 1 LO Counter 8 HI Counter 8 EQL Counter 8 LO Dig Element 1 PKP Dig Element 1 OP Dig Element 1 DPO Dig Element 48 PKP Dig Element 48 OP Dig Element 48 DPO DIR POWER 1 STG1 PKP DIR POWER 1 STG2 PKP DIR POWER 1 STG1 DPO DIR POWER 1 STG2 DPO DIR POWER 1 STG1 OP DIR POWER 1 STG2 OP DIR POWER 1 PKP DIR POWER 1 DPO DIR POWER 1 OP DIR POWER 2 ELEMENT Frequency Rate of Change FREQ RATE n PKP FREQ RATE n DPO FREQ RATE n OP

ELEMENT: Digital Elements

ELEMENT: Sensitive Directional Power

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-57

5.4 FLEXLOGIC Table 56: G60 FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS (Sheet 2 of 6)


OPERAND TYPE ELEMENT: FlexElements OPERAND SYNTAX FxE 1 PKP FxE 1 OP FxE 1 DPO FxE 16 PKP FxE 16 OP FxE 16 DPO GEN UNBAL STG1 PKP GEN UNBAL STG1 DPO GEN UNBAL STG1 OP GEN UNBAL STG2 PKP GEN UNBAL STG2 DPO GEN UNBAL STG2 OP GEN UNBAL PKP GEN UNBAL DPO GEN UNBAL OP GROUND IOC1 PKP GROUND IOC1 OP GROUND IOC1 DPO GROUND IOC2 GROUND TOC1 PKP GROUND TOC1 OP GROUND TOC1 DPO GROUND TOC2 ELEMENT Non-Volatile Latches LATCH 1 ON LATCH 1 OFF LATCH 16 ON LATCH 16 OFF LOSS EXCIT STG1 PKP LOSS EXCIT STG2 PKP LOSS EXCIT STG1 DPO LOSS EXCIT STG2 DPO LOSS EXCIT STG1 OP LOSS EXCIT STG2 OP LOSS EXCIT PKP LOSS EXCIT DPO LOSS EXCIT OP NEG SEQ DIR OC1 FWD NEG SEQ DIR OC1 REV NEG SEQ DIR OC2 FWD NEG SEQ DIR OC2 REV NEG SEQ OV PKP NEG SEQ OV DPO NEG SEQ OV OP NEUTRAL IOC1 PKP NEUTRAL IOC1 OP NEUTRAL IOC1 DPO NEUTRAL IOC2 NEUTRAL OV1 PKP NEUTRAL OV1 DPO NEUTRAL OV1 OP NEUTRAL TOC1 PKP NEUTRAL TOC1 OP NEUTRAL TOC1 DPO NTRL DIR OC1 FWD NTRL DIR OC1 REV NTRL DIR OC2 OVERFREQ 1 PKP OVERFREQ 1 OP OVERFREQ 1 DPO OVERFREQ 2 to 4 OPERAND DESCRIPTION FlexElement 1 has picked up FlexElement 1 has operated FlexElement 1 has dropped out FlexElement 16 has picked up FlexElement 16 has operated FlexElement 16 has dropped out The Generator Unbalance Stage 1 element has picked up The Generator Unbalance Stage 1 element has dropped out The Generator Unbalance Stage 1 element has operated The Generator Unbalance Stage 2 element has picked up The Generator Unbalance Stage 2 element has dropped out The Generator Unbalance Stage 2 element has operated The Generator Unbalance element has picked up The Generator Unbalance element has dropped out The Generator Unbalance element has operated Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 has picked up Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 has operated Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 has dropped out Same set of operands as shown for GROUND IOC 1 Ground Time Overcurrent 1 has picked up Ground Time Overcurrent 1 has operated Ground Time Overcurrent 1 has dropped out Same set of operands as shown for GROUND TOC1 Non-Volatile Latch 1 is ON (Logic = 1) Non-Voltage Latch 1 is OFF (Logic = 0) Non-Volatile Latch 16 is ON (Logic = 1) Non-Voltage Latch 16 is OFF (Logic = 0) Stage 1 of the Loss of Excitation element has picked up Stage 2 of the Loss of Excitation element has picked up Stage 1 of the Loss of Excitation element has dropped out Stage 2 of the Loss of Excitation element has dropped out Stage 1 of the Loss of Excitation element has operated Stage 2 of the Loss of Excitation element has operated The Loss of Excitation element has picked up The Loss of Excitation element has dropped out The Loss of Excitation element has operated Negative Sequence Directional OC1 Forward has operated Negative Sequence Directional OC1 Reverse has operated Negative Sequence Directional OC2 Forward has operated Negative Sequence Directional OC2 Reverse has operated Negative Sequence Overvoltage element has picked up Negative Sequence Overvoltage element has dropped out Negative Sequence Overvoltage element has operated Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 has picked up Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 has operated Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 has dropped out Same set of operands as shown for NEUTRAL IOC1 Neutral Overvoltage element has picked up Neutral Overvoltage element has dropped out Neutral Overvoltage element has operated Neutral Time Overcurrent 1 has picked up Neutral Time Overcurrent 1 has operated Neutral Time Overcurrent 1 has dropped out Neutral Directional OC1 Forward has operated Neutral Directional OC1 Reverse has operated Same set of operands as shown for NTRL DIR OC1 Overfrequency 1 has picked up Overfrequency 1 has operated Overfrequency 1 has dropped out Same set of operands as shown for OVERFREQ 1

5 SETTINGS

ELEMENT: Generator Unbalance

ELEMENT: Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent ELEMENT: Ground Time Overcurrent

ELEMENT: Loss of Excitation

ELEMENT: Negative Sequence Directional Overcurrent ELEMENT: Negative Sequence Overvoltage ELEMENT: Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent ELEMENT: Neutral Overvoltage ELEMENT: Neutral Time Overcurrent ELEMENT: Neutral Directional Overcurrent ELEMENT: Overfrequency

5-58

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS Table 56: G60 FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS (Sheet 3 of 6)


OPERAND TYPE ELEMENT: Phase Directional Overcurrent ELEMENT: Phase Distance OPERAND SYNTAX PH DIR1 BLK A PH DIR1 BLK B PH DIR1 BLK C PH DIR1 BLK PH DIST Z1 PKP PH DIST Z1 OP PH DIST Z1 OP AB PH DIST Z1 OP BC PH DIST Z1 OP CA PH DIST Z1 PKP AB PH DIST Z1 PKP BC PH DIST Z1 PKP CA PH DIST Z1 SUPN IAB PH DIST Z1 SUPN IBC PH DIST Z1 SUPN ICA PH DIST Z1 DPO AB PH DIST Z1 DPO BC PH DIST Z1 DPO CA PH DIST Z2 to Z3 ELEMENT: Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent PHASE IOC1 PKP PHASE IOC1 OP PHASE IOC1 DPO PHASE IOC1 PKP A PHASE IOC1 PKP B PHASE IOC1 PKP C PHASE IOC1 OP A PHASE IOC1 OP B PHASE IOC1 OP C PHASE IOC1 DPO A PHASE IOC1 DPO B PHASE IOC1 DPO C PHASE IOC2 ELEMENT: Phase Overvoltage PHASE OV1 PKP PHASE OV1 OP PHASE OV1 DPO PHASE OV1 PKP A PHASE OV1 PKP B PHASE OV1 PKP C PHASE OV1 OP A PHASE OV1 OP B PHASE OV1 OP C PHASE OV1 DPO A PHASE OV1 DPO B PHASE OV1 DPO C PHASE TOC1 PKP PHASE TOC1 OP PHASE TOC1 DPO PHASE TOC1 PKP A PHASE TOC1 PKP B PHASE TOC1 PKP C PHASE TOC1 OP A PHASE TOC1 OP B PHASE TOC1 OP C PHASE TOC1 DPO A PHASE TOC1 DPO B PHASE TOC1 DPO C PHASE UV1 PKP PHASE UV1 OP PHASE UV1 DPO PHASE UV1 PKP A PHASE UV1 PKP B PHASE UV1 PKP C PHASE UV1 OP A PHASE UV1 OP B PHASE UV1 OP C PHASE UV1 DPO A PHASE UV1 DPO B PHASE UV1 DPO C PHASE UV2 OPERAND DESCRIPTION Phase A Directional 1 Block Phase B Directional 1 Block Phase C Directional 1 Block Phase Directional 1 Block Phase Distance Zone 1 has picked up Phase Distance Zone 1 has operated Phase Distance Zone 1 phase AB has operated Phase Distance Zone 1 phase BC has operated Phase Distance Zone 1 phase CA has operated Phase Distance Zone 1 phase AB has picked up Phase Distance Zone 1 phase BC has picked up Phase Distance Zone 1 phase CA has picked up Phase Distance Zone 1 phase AB IOC is supervising Phase Distance Zone 1 phase BC IOC is supervising Phase Distance Zone 1 phase CA IOC is supervising Phase Distance Zone 1 phase AB has dropped out Phase Distance Zone 1 phase BC has dropped out Phase Distance Zone 1 phase CA has dropped out Same set of operands as shown for PH DIST Z1 At least one phase of PHASE IOC1 has picked up At least one phase of PHASE IOC1 has operated At least one phase of PHASE IOC1 has dropped out Phase A of PHASE IOC1 has picked up Phase B of PHASE IOC1 has picked up Phase C of PHASE IOC1 has picked up Phase A of PHASE IOC1 has operated Phase B of PHASE IOC1 has operated Phase C of PHASE IOC1 has operated Phase A of PHASE IOC1 has dropped out Phase B of PHASE IOC1 has dropped out Phase C of PHASE IOC1 has dropped out Same set of operands as shown for PHASE IOC1 At least one phase of Overvoltage 1 has picked up At least one phase of Overvoltage 1 has operated At least one phase of Overvoltage 1 has dropped out Phase A of Overvoltage 1 has picked up Phase B of Overvoltage 1 has picked up Phase C of Overvoltage 1 has picked up Phase A of Overvoltage 1 has operated Phase B of Overvoltage 1 has operated Phase C of Overvoltage 1 has operated Phase A of Overvoltage 1 has dropped out Phase B of Overvoltage 1 has dropped out Phase C of Overvoltage 1 has dropped out At least one phase of PHASE TOC1 has picked up At least one phase of PHASE TOC1 has operated At least one phase of PHASE TOC1 has dropped out Phase A of PHASE TOC1 has picked up Phase B of PHASE TOC1 has picked up Phase C of PHASE TOC1 has picked up Phase A of PHASE TOC1 has operated Phase B of PHASE TOC1 has operated Phase C of PHASE TOC1 has operated Phase A of PHASE TOC1 has dropped out Phase B of PHASE TOC1 has dropped out Phase C of PHASE TOC1 has dropped out At least one phase of UV1 has picked up At least one phase of UV1 has operated At least one phase of UV1 has dropped out Phase A of UV1 has picked up Phase B of UV1 has picked up Phase C of UV1 has picked up Phase A of UV1 has operated Phase B of UV1 has operated Phase C of UV1 has operated Phase A of UV1 has dropped out Phase B of UV1 has dropped out Phase C of UV1 has dropped out Same set of operands as shown for PHASE UV1

5.4 FLEXLOGIC

ELEMENT: Phase Time Overcurrent

ELEMENT: Phase Undervoltage

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-59

5.4 FLEXLOGIC Table 56: G60 FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS (Sheet 4 of 6)


OPERAND TYPE ELEMENT: Power Swing Detect OPERAND SYNTAX POWER SWING OUTER POWER SWING MIDDLE POWER SWING INNER POWER SWING BLOCK POWER SWING TMRX PKP POWER SWING TRIP POWER SWING 50DD POWER SWING INCOMING POWER SWING OUTGOING POWER SWING UN/BLOCK RESTD GND FT1 PKP RESTD GND FT1 OP RESTD GND FT1 DOP RESTD GND FT2 to FT4 ELEMENT: Selector Switch SELECTOR 1 POS Y SELECTOR 1 BIT 0 SELECTOR 1 BIT 1 SELECTOR 1 BIT 2 SELECTOR 1 STP ALARM SELECTOR 1 BIT ALARM SELECTOR 1 ALARM SELECTOR 1 PWR ALARM SELECTOR 2 OPERAND DESCRIPTION

5 SETTINGS

Positive Sequence impedance in outer characteristic. Positive Sequence impedance in middle characteristic. Positive Sequence impedance in inner characteristic. Power Swing Blocking element operated. Power Swing Timer x picked up. Out-of-step Tripping operated. The Power Swing element detected a disturbance other than power swing. An unstable power swing has been detected (incoming locus). An unstable power swing has been detected (outgoing locus). Restricted Ground Fault 1 has picked up Restricted Ground Fault 1 has operated Restricted Ground Fault 1 has dropped out Same set of operands as shown for RESTD GND FT1 Selector Switch 1 is in Position Y (mutually exclusive operands). First bit of the 3-bit word encoding position of Selector 1. Second bit of the 3-bit word encoding position of Selector 1. Third bit of the 3-bit word encoding position of Selector 1. Position of Selector 1 has been pre-selected with the stepping up control input but not acknowledged. Position of Selector 1 has been pre-selected with the 3-bit control input but not acknowledged. Position of Selector 1 has been pre-selected but not acknowledged. Position of Selector Switch 1 is undetermined or restored from memory when the relay powers up and synchronizes to the 3-bit input. Same set of operands as shown above for SELECTOR 1 Setting Group 1 is active Setting Group 6 is active Phase A of the split phase protection has picked up. Phase A of the split phase protection has dropped out. Phase A of the split phase protection has operated. Phase B of the split phase protection has picked up. Phase B of the split phase protection has dropped out. Phase B of the split phase protection has operated. Phase C of the split phase protection has picked up. Phase C of the split phase protection has dropped out. Phase C of the split phase protection has operated. The split phase protection has operated. The split phase protection has picked up. The split phase protection has dropped out Source x VT Fuse Failure detector has operated Source x VT Fuse Failure detector has dropped out Source x has lost voltage signals (V2 below 15% AND V1 below 5% of nominal) At least one phase of Stator Differential has operated Phase A of Stator Differential has picked up Phase B of Stator Differential has picked up Phase C of Stator Differential has picked up Phase A of Stator Differential has operated Phase B of Stator Differential has operated Phase C of Stator Differential has operated Phase A of Stator Differential has dropped out Phase B of Stator Differential has dropped out Phase C of Stator Differential has dropped out Phase A of Stator Differential is saturated Phase B of Stator Differential is saturated Phase C of Stator Differential is saturated Phase A of Stator Differential Phase Comparison has been satisfied Phase B of Stator Differential Phase Comparison has been satisfied Phase C of Stator Differential Phase Comparison has been satisfied

ELEMENT: Restricted Ground Fault

ELEMENT: Setting Group ELEMENT: Split Phase Protection

SETTING GROUP ACT 1 SETTING GROUP ACT 6 SPLIT PHASE A PKP SPLIT PHASE A DPO SPLIT PHASE A OP SPLIT PHASE B PKP SPLIT PHASE B DPO SPLIT PHASE B OP SPLIT PHASE C PKP SPLIT PHASE C DPO SPLIT PHASE C OP SPLIT PHASE OP SPLIT PHASE PKP SPLIT PHASE DPO SRCx VT FUSE FAIL OP SRCx VT FUSE FAIL DPO SRCx VT FUSE FAIL VOL LOSS STATOR DIFF OP STATOR DIFF PKP A STATOR DIFF PKP B STATOR DIFF PKP C STATOR DIFF OP A STATOR DIFF OP B STATOR DIFF OP C STATOR DIFF DPO A STATOR DIFF DPO B STATOR DIFF DPO C STATOR DIFF SAT A STATOR DIFF SAT B STATOR DIFF SAT C STATOR DIFF DIR A STATOR DIFF DIR B STATOR DIFF DIR C

ELEMENT: VTFF (Voltage Transformer Fuse Failure) ELEMENT: Stator Differential

5-60

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS Table 56: G60 FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS (Sheet 5 of 6)


OPERAND TYPE ELEMENT: Synchrocheck OPERAND SYNTAX SYNC 1 DEAD S OP SYNC 1 DEAD S DPO SYNC 1 SYNC OP SYNC 1 SYNC DPO SYNC 1 CLS OP SYNC 1 CLS DPO SYNC 1 V1 ABOVE MIN SYNC 1 V1 BELOW MAX SYNC 1 V2 ABOVE MIN SYNC 1 V2 BELOW MAX SYNC 2 ELEMENT: Teleprotection Inputs/Outputs TELEPRO CH1 FAIL TELEPRO CH2 FAIL TELEPRO CH1 ID FAIL TELEPRO CH2 ID FAIL TELEPRO CH1 CRC FAIL TELEPRO CH2 CRC FAIL TELEPRO CH1 PKT LOST TELEPRO CH2 PKT LOST TELEPRO INPUT 1-1 On TELEPRO INPUT 1-16 On TELEPRO INPUT 2-1 On TELEPRO INPUT 2-16 On UNDERFREQ 1 PKP UNDERFREQ 1 OP UNDERFREQ 1 DPO UNDERFREQ 2 to 6 ELEMENT: Volts per Hertz VOLT PER HERTZ 1 PKP VOLT PER HERTZ 1 OP VOLT PER HERTZ 1 DPO VOLT PER HERTZ 2 FIXED OPERANDS Off On INPUTS/OUTPUTS: Contact Inputs Cont Ip 1 Cont Ip 2 Cont Ip 1 Cont Ip 2 Cont Op 1 Cont Op 2 Cont Op 1 Cont Op 2 Cont Op 1 Cont Op 2 Cont Op 1 Cont Op 2 On On Off Off IOn IOn IOff IOff VOn VOn VOff VOff OPERAND DESCRIPTION

5.4 FLEXLOGIC

Synchrocheck 1 dead source has operated Synchrocheck 1 dead source has dropped out Synchrocheck 1 in synchronization has operated Synchrocheck 1 in synchronization has dropped out Synchrocheck 1 close has operated Synchrocheck 1 close has dropped out Synchrocheck 1 V1 is above the minimum live voltage Synchrocheck 1 V1 is below the maximum dead voltage Synchrocheck 1 V2 is above the minimum live voltage Synchrocheck 1 V2 is below the maximum dead voltage Same set of operands as shown for SYNC 1 Channel 1 failed Channel 2 failed The ID check for a peer relay on channel 1 has failed The ID check for a peer relay on channel 2 has failed CRC detected packet corruption on channel 1 CRC detected packet corruption on channel 2 CRC detected lost packet on channel 1 CRC detected lost packet on channel 2 Flag is set, Logic =1 Flag is set, Logic =1 Flag is set, Logic =1 Flag is set, Logic =1 Underfrequency 1 has picked up Underfrequency 1 has operated Underfrequency 1 has dropped out Same set of operands as shown for UNDERFREQ 1 above V/Hz element 1 has picked up V/Hz element 1 has operated V/Hz element 1 has dropped out Same set of operands as VOLT PER HERTZ 1 above Logic = 0. Does nothing and may be used as a delimiter in an equation list; used as Disable by other features. Logic = 1. Can be used as a test setting. (will not appear unless ordered) (will not appear unless ordered) (will not appear unless ordered) (will not appear unless ordered) (will not appear unless ordered) (will not appear unless ordered) (will not appear unless ordered) (will not appear unless ordered) (will not appear unless ordered) (will not appear unless ordered) (will not appear unless ordered) (will not appear unless ordered) Flag is set, logic=1 Flag is set, logic=1 Flag is set, logic=1 Flag is set, logic=1 Flag is set, logic=1 Flag is set, logic=1 Flag is set, logic=1 Flag is set, logic=1

ELEMENT: Underfrequency

INPUTS/OUTPUTS: Contact Outputs, Current (from detector on Form-A output only) INPUTS/OUTPUTS: Contact Outputs, Voltage (from detector on Form-A output only) INPUTS/OUTPUTS Direct Inputs INPUTS/OUTPUTS: Remote Inputs INPUTS/OUTPUTS: Virtual Inputs INPUTS/OUTPUTS: Virtual Outputs

DIRECT INPUT 1 On DIRECT INPUT 32 On REMOTE INPUT 1 On REMOTE INPUT 32 On Virt Ip 1 On Virt Ip 64 On Virt Op 1 On Virt Op 96 On

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-61

5.4 FLEXLOGIC Table 56: G60 FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS (Sheet 6 of 6)


OPERAND TYPE LED TEST REMOTE DEVICES OPERAND SYNTAX LED TEST IN PROGRESS REMOTE DEVICE 1 On REMOTE DEVICE 16 On REMOTE DEVICE 1 Off REMOTE DEVICE 16 Off RESETTING RESET OP RESET OP (COMMS) RESET OP (OPERAND) RESET OP (PUSHBUTTON) SELFDIAGNOSTICS ANY MAJOR ERROR ANY MINOR ERROR ANY SELF-TEST BATTERY FAIL DIRECT DEVICE OFF DIRECT RING BREAK DSP ERROR EEPROM DATA ERROR EQUIPMENT MISMATCH FLEXLOGIC ERR TOKEN IRIG-B FAILURE LATCHING OUT ERROR LOW ON MEMORY NO DSP INTERRUPTS PRI ETHERNET FAIL PROGRAM MEMORY PROTOTYPE FIRMWARE REMOTE DEVICE OFF SEC ETHERNET FAIL SNTP FAILURE SYSTEM EXCEPTION UNIT NOT CALIBRATED UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED WATCHDOG ERROR UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS PUSHBUTTON x ON PUSHBUTTON x OFF OPERAND DESCRIPTION An LED test has been initiated and has not finished. Flag is set, logic=1 Flag is set, logic=1 Flag is set, logic=1 Flag is set, logic=1

5 SETTINGS

Reset command is operated (set by all 3 operands below) Communications source of the reset command RESETTING menu) source Operand (assigned in the INPUTS/OUTPUTS of the reset command Reset key (pushbutton) source of the reset command Any of the major self-test errors generated (major error) Any of the minor self-test errors generated (minor error) Any self-test errors generated (generic, any error) See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets. See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets. See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets. See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets. See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets. See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets. See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets. See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets. See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets. See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets. See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets. See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets. See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets. See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets. See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets. See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets. See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets. See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets. See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets. See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets. See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets. Asserted when a password entry fails while accessing a password-protected level of the relay. Pushbutton Number x is in the On position Pushbutton Number x is in the Off position

5
UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS ALARM USERPROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS

Some operands can be re-named by the user. These are the names of the breakers in the breaker control feature, the ID (identification) of contact inputs, the ID of virtual inputs, and the ID of virtual outputs. If the user changes the default name/ ID of any of these operands, the assigned name will appear in the relay list of operands. The default names are shown in the FlexLogic operands table above. The characteristics of the logic gates are tabulated below, and the operators available in FlexLogic are listed in the FlexLogic operators table. Table 57: FLEXLOGIC GATE CHARACTERISTICS
GATES NOT OR AND NOR NAND XOR NUMBER OF INPUTS 1 2 to 16 2 to 16 2 to 16 2 to 16 2 OUTPUT IS 1 (= ON) IF... input is 0 any input is 1 all inputs are 1 all inputs are 0 any input is 0 only one input is 1

5-62

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.4 FLEXLOGIC

Table 58: FLEXLOGIC OPERATORS


TYPE Editor End One Shot SYNTAX INSERT DELETE END DESCRIPTION Insert a parameter in an equation list. Delete a parameter from an equation list. The first END encountered signifies the last entry in the list of processed FlexLogic parameters. One shot that responds to a negative going edge. One shot that responds to both the positive and negative going edges. Logical Not 2 input OR gate 16 input OR gate 2 input AND gate 16 input AND gate 2 input NOR gate 16 input NOR gate 2 input NAND gate 16 input NAND gate 2 input Exclusive OR gate Latch (Set, Reset) - reset-dominant A one shot refers to a single input gate that generates a pulse in response to an edge on the input. The output from a one shot is True (positive) for only one pass through the FlexLogic equation. There is a maximum of 64 one shots. Operates on the previous parameter. Operates on the 2 previous parameters. Operates on the 16 previous parameters. Operates on the 2 previous parameters. Operates on the 16 previous parameters. Operates on the 2 previous parameters. Operates on the 16 previous parameters. Operates on the 2 previous parameters. Operates on the 16 previous parameters. Operates on the 2 previous parameters. The parameter preceding LATCH(S,R) is the Reset input. The parameter preceding the Reset input is the Set input. The timer is started by the preceding parameter. The output of the timer is TIMER #. The virtual output is set by the preceding parameter NOTES

POSITIVE ONE SHOT One shot that responds to a positive going edge. NEGATIVE ONE SHOT DUAL ONE SHOT

Logic Gate

NOT OR(2) OR(16) AND(2) AND(16) NOR(2) NOR(16) NAND(2) NAND(16) XOR(2) LATCH (S,R)

Timer

TIMER 1 TIMER 32 = Virt Op 1 = Virt Op 96

Timer set with FlexLogic Timer 1 settings. Timer set with FlexLogic Timer 32 settings. Assigns previous FlexLogic parameter to Virtual Output 1. Assigns previous FlexLogic parameter to Virtual Output 96.

Assign Virtual Output

5.4.2 FLEXLOGIC RULES When forming a FlexLogic equation, the sequence in the linear array of parameters must follow these general rules: 1. 2. 3. 4. Operands must precede the operator which uses the operands as inputs. Operators have only one output. The output of an operator must be used to create a virtual output if it is to be used as an input to two or more operators. Assigning the output of an operator to a Virtual Output terminates the equation. A timer operator (e.g. "TIMER 1") or virtual output assignment (e.g. " = Virt Op 1") may only be used once. If this rule is broken, a syntax error will be declared. 5.4.3 FLEXLOGIC EVALUATION Each equation is evaluated in the order in which the parameters have been entered. FlexLogic provides latches which by definition have a memory action, remaining in the set state after the set input has been asserted. However, they are volatile; i.e. they reset on the re-application of control power. When making changes to settings, all FlexLogic equations are re-compiled whenever any new setting value is entered, so all latches are automatically reset. If it is necessary to re-initialize FlexLogic during testing, for example, it is suggested to power the unit down and then back up.

CAUTION

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-63

5.4 FLEXLOGIC

5 SETTINGS 5.4.4 FLEXLOGIC EXAMPLE

This section provides an example of implementing logic for a typical application. The sequence of the steps is quite important as it should minimize the work necessary to develop the relay settings. Note that the example presented in the figure below is intended to demonstrate the procedure, not to solve a specific application situation. In the example below, it is assumed that logic has already been programmed to produce Virtual Outputs 1 and 2, and is only a part of the full set of equations used. When using FlexLogic, it is important to make a note of each Virtual Output used a Virtual Output designation (1 to 96) can only be properly assigned once.
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 State=ON VIRTUAL OUTPUT 2 State=ON VIRTUAL INPUT 1 State=ON XOR DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 State=Pickup DIGITAL ELEMENT 2 State=Operated AND Timer 1 Time Delay on Pickup (800 ms) CONTACT INPUT H1c State=Closed
827025A2.vsd

Set LATCH OR #1 Reset Timer 2 OR #2 Time Delay on Dropout (200 ms) Operate Output Relay H1

Figure 525: EXAMPLE LOGIC SCHEME

1.

Inspect the example logic diagram to determine if the required logic can be implemented with the FlexLogic operators. If this is not possible, the logic must be altered until this condition is satisfied. Once this is done, count the inputs to each gate to verify that the number of inputs does not exceed the FlexLogic limits, which is unlikely but possible. If the number of inputs is too high, subdivide the inputs into multiple gates to produce an equivalent. For example, if 25 inputs to an AND gate are required, connect Inputs 1 through 16 to AND(16), 17 through 25 to AND(9), and the outputs from these two gates to AND(2). Inspect each operator between the initial operands and final virtual outputs to determine if the output from the operator is used as an input to more than one following operator. If so, the operator output must be assigned as a Virtual Output. For the example shown above, the output of the AND gate is used as an input to both OR#1 and Timer 1, and must therefore be made a Virtual Output and assigned the next available number (i.e. Virtual Output 3). The final output must also be assigned to a Virtual Output as Virtual Output 4, which will be programmed in the contact output section to operate relay H1 (i.e. Output Contact H1). Therefore, the required logic can be implemented with two FlexLogic equations with outputs of Virtual Output 3 and Virtual Output 4 as shown below.
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 State=ON VIRTUAL OUTPUT 2 State=ON VIRTUAL INPUT 1 State=ON XOR DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 State=Pickup DIGITAL ELEMENT 2 State=Operated AND Timer 1 Time Delay on Pickup (800 ms) CONTACT INPUT H1c State=Closed VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3
827026A2.VSD

Set LATCH OR #1 Reset Timer 2 OR #2 Time Delay on Dropout (200 ms) VIRTUAL OUTPUT 4

Figure 526: LOGIC EXAMPLE WITH VIRTUAL OUTPUTS

5-64

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS 2.

5.4 FLEXLOGIC

Prepare a logic diagram for the equation to produce Virtual Output 3, as this output will be used as an operand in the Virtual Output 4 equation (create the equation for every output that will be used as an operand first, so that when these operands are required they will already have been evaluated and assigned to a specific Virtual Output). The logic for Virtual Output 3 is shown below with the final output assigned.
DIGITAL ELEMENT 2 State=Operated AND(2) CONTACT INPUT H1c State=Closed
827027A2.VSD

VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3

Figure 527: LOGIC FOR VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3 3. Prepare a logic diagram for Virtual Output 4, replacing the logic ahead of Virtual Output 3 with a symbol identified as Virtual Output 3, as shown below.
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 State=ON VIRTUAL OUTPUT 2 State=ON VIRTUAL INPUT 1 State=ON XOR DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 State=Pickup Timer 1 VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3 State=ON CONTACT INPUT H1c State=Closed Time Delay on Pickup (800 ms)
827028A2.VSD

Set LATCH OR #1 Reset Timer 2 OR #2 Time Delay on Dropout (200 ms)

VIRTUAL OUTPUT 4

Figure 528: LOGIC FOR VIRTUAL OUTPUT 4 4. Program the FlexLogic equation for Virtual Output 3 by translating the logic into available FlexLogic parameters. The equation is formed one parameter at a time until the required logic is complete. It is generally easier to start at the output end of the equation and work back towards the input, as shown in the following steps. It is also recommended to list operator inputs from bottom to top. For demonstration, the final output will be arbitrarily identified as parameter 99, and each preceding parameter decremented by one in turn. Until accustomed to using FlexLogic, it is suggested that a worksheet with a series of cells marked with the arbitrary parameter numbers be prepared, as shown below.

01 02 03 04 05
.....

97 98 99
827029A1.VSD

Figure 529: FLEXLOGIC WORKSHEET 5. Following the procedure outlined, start with parameter 99, as follows: 99: The final output of the equation is Virtual Output 3, which is created by the operator "= Virt Op n". This parameter is therefore "= Virt Op 3."

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-65

5.4 FLEXLOGIC

5 SETTINGS

98: The gate preceding the output is an AND, which in this case requires two inputs. The operator for this gate is a 2input AND so the parameter is AND(2). Note that FlexLogic rules require that the number of inputs to most types of operators must be specified to identify the operands for the gate. As the 2-input AND will operate on the two operands preceding it, these inputs must be specified, starting with the lower. 97: This lower input to the AND gate must be passed through an inverter (the NOT operator) so the next parameter is NOT. The NOT operator acts upon the operand immediately preceding it, so specify the inverter input next. 96: The input to the NOT gate is to be contact input H1c. The ON state of a contact input can be programmed to be set when the contact is either open or closed. Assume for this example the state is to be ON for a closed contact. The operand is therefore Cont Ip H1c On. 95: The last step in the procedure is to specify the upper input to the AND gate, the operated state of digital element 2. This operand is "DIG ELEM 2 OP". Writing the parameters in numerical order can now form the equation for VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3: [95] [96] [97] [98] [99] DIG ELEM 2 OP Cont Ip H1c On NOT AND(2) = Virt Op 3

It is now possible to check that this selection of parameters will produce the required logic by converting the set of parameters into a logic diagram. The result of this process is shown below, which is compared to the Logic for Virtual Output 3 diagram as a check.

95

96 97 98 99

FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: DIG ELEM 2 OP FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: Cont Ip H1c On FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: NOT FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: AND (2) FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: =Virt Op 3

AND

VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3

827030A2.VSD

Figure 530: FLEXLOGIC EQUATION FOR VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3 6. Repeating the process described for VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3, select the FlexLogic parameters for Virtual Output 4. 99: The final output of the equation is VIRTUAL OUTPUT 4 which is parameter = Virt Op 4". 98: The operator preceding the output is Timer 2, which is operand TIMER 2". Note that the settings required for the timer are established in the timer programming section. 97: The operator preceding Timer 2 is OR #2, a 3-input OR, which is parameter OR(3). 96: The lowest input to OR #2 is operand Cont Ip H1c On. 95: The center input to OR #2 is operand TIMER 1". 94: The input to Timer 1 is operand Virt Op 3 On". 93: The upper input to OR #2 is operand LATCH (S,R). 92: There are two inputs to a latch, and the input immediately preceding the latch reset is OR #1, a 4-input OR, which is parameter OR(4). 91: The lowest input to OR #1 is operand Virt Op 3 On". 90: The input just above the lowest input to OR #1 is operand XOR(2). 89: The lower input to the XOR is operand DIG ELEM 1 PKP. 88: The upper input to the XOR is operand Virt Ip 1 On". 87: The input just below the upper input to OR #1 is operand Virt Op 2 On". 86: The upper input to OR #1 is operand Virt Op 1 On". 85: The last parameter is used to set the latch, and is operand Virt Op 4 On".

5-66

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS The equation for VIRTUAL OUTPUT 4 is: [85] [86] [87] [88] [89] [90] [91] [92] [93] [94] [95] [96] [97] [98] [99] Virt Op 4 On Virt Op 1 On Virt Op 2 On Virt Ip 1 On DIG ELEM 1 PKP XOR(2) Virt Op 3 On OR(4) LATCH (S,R) Virt Op 3 On TIMER 1 Cont Ip H1c On OR(3) TIMER 2 = Virt Op 4

5.4 FLEXLOGIC

It is now possible to check that the selection of parameters will produce the required logic by converting the set of parameters into a logic diagram. The result of this process is shown below, which is compared to the Logic for Virtual Output 4 diagram as a check.
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: Virt Op 4 On FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: Virt Op 1 On FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: Virt Op 2 On FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: Virt Ip 1 On FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: DIG ELEM 1 PKP FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: XOR FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: Virt Op 3 On FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: OR (4) FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: LATCH (S,R) FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: Virt Op 3 On FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: TIMER 1 FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: Cont Ip H1c On FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: OR (3) FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: TIMER 2 FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n: =Virt Op 4

85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99

Set LATCH XOR OR Reset

OR

T2

VIRTUAL OUTPUT 4

T1

827031A2.VSD

Figure 531: FLEXLOGIC EQUATION FOR VIRTUAL OUTPUT 4 7. Now write the complete FlexLogic expression required to implement the logic, making an effort to assemble the equation in an order where Virtual Outputs that will be used as inputs to operators are created before needed. In cases where a lot of processing is required to perform logic, this may be difficult to achieve, but in most cases will not cause problems as all logic is calculated at least 4 times per power frequency cycle. The possibility of a problem caused by sequential processing emphasizes the necessity to test the performance of FlexLogic before it is placed in service. In the following equation, Virtual Output 3 is used as an input to both Latch 1 and Timer 1 as arranged in the order shown below: DIG ELEM 2 OP Cont Ip H1c On NOT AND(2)

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-67

5.4 FLEXLOGIC = Virt Op 3 Virt Op 4 On Virt Op 1 On Virt Op 2 On Virt Ip 1 On DIG ELEM 1 PKP XOR(2) Virt Op 3 On OR(4) LATCH (S,R) Virt Op 3 On TIMER 1 Cont Ip H1c On OR(3) TIMER 2 = Virt Op 4 END

5 SETTINGS

In the expression above, the Virtual Output 4 input to the 4-input OR is listed before it is created. This is typical of a form of feedback, in this case, used to create a seal-in effect with the latch, and is correct. 8. The logic should always be tested after it is loaded into the relay, in the same fashion as has been used in the past. Testing can be simplified by placing an "END" operator within the overall set of FlexLogic equations. The equations will then only be evaluated up to the first "END" operator. The "On" and "Off" operands can be placed in an equation to establish a known set of conditions for test purposes, and the "INSERT" and "DELETE" commands can be used to modify equations.

5
PATH: SETTINGS FLEXLOGIC FLEXLOGIC EQUATION EDITOR

5.4.5 FLEXLOGIC EQUATION EDITOR

FLEXLOGIC EQUATION EDITOR

FLEXLOGIC ENTRY END

1:

Range: FlexLogic parameters

MESSAGE

FLEXLOGIC ENTRY 512: END

Range: FlexLogic parameters

There are 512 FlexLogic entries available, numbered from 1 to 512, with default END entry settings. If a "Disabled" Element is selected as a FlexLogic entry, the associated state flag will never be set to 1. The +/ key may be used when editing FlexLogic equations from the keypad to quickly scan through the major parameter types. 5.4.6 FLEXLOGIC TIMERS
PATH: SETTINGS FLEXLOGIC FLEXLOGIC TIMERS FLEXLOGIC TIMER 1(32) Range: millisecond, second, minute

FLEXLOGIC TIMER 1
MESSAGE

TIMER 1 TYPE: millisecond TIMER 1 PICKUP DELAY: 0 TIMER 1 DROPOUT DELAY: 0

Range: 0 to 60000 in steps of 1

MESSAGE

Range: 0 to 60000 in steps of 1

There are 32 identical FlexLogic timers available. These timers can be used as operators for FlexLogic equations. TIMER 1 TYPE: This setting is used to select the time measuring unit. TIMER 1 PICKUP DELAY: Sets the time delay to pickup. If a pickup delay is not required, set this function to "0". TIMER 1 DROPOUT DELAY: Sets the time delay to dropout. If a dropout delay is not required, set this function to "0".

5-68

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.4 FLEXLOGIC 5.4.7 FLEXELEMENTS

PATH: SETTING

FLEXLOGIC

FLEXELEMENTS

FLEXELEMENT 1(16) Range: Disabled, Enabled

FLEXELEMENT 1

FLEXELEMENT 1 FUNCTION: Disabled


MESSAGE

FLEXELEMENT 1 NAME: FxE1 FLEXELEMENT 1 +IN: Off FLEXELEMENT 1 -IN: Off FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT MODE: Signed FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE: Level FLEXELEMENT 1 DIRECTION: Over FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP: 1.000 pu FLEXELEMENT 1 HYSTERESIS: 3.0% FLEXELEMENT 1 dt UNIT: milliseconds FLEXELEMENT 1 dt: 20 FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP DELAY: 0.000 s FLEXELEMENT 1 RST DELAY: 0.000 s FLEXELEMENT 1 BLK: Off FLEXELEMENT 1 TARGET: Self-reset FLEXELEMENT 1 EVENTS: Disabled

Range: up to 6 alphanumeric characters

MESSAGE

Range: Off, any analog actual value parameter

MESSAGE

Range: Off, any analog actual value parameter

MESSAGE

Range: Signed, Absolute

MESSAGE

Range: Level, Delta

MESSAGE

Range: Over, Under

MESSAGE

Range: 90.000 to 90.000 pu in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE

Range: 0.1 to 50.0% in steps of 0.1

MESSAGE

Range: milliseconds, seconds, minutes

MESSAGE

Range: 20 to 86400 in steps of 1

MESSAGE

Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE

Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled

MESSAGE

Range: Disabled, Enabled

A FlexElement is a universal comparator that can be used to monitor any analog actual value calculated by the relay or a net difference of any two analog actual values of the same type. The effective operating signal could be treated as a signed number or its absolute value could be used as per user's choice. The element can be programmed to respond either to a signal level or to a rate-of-change (delta) over a pre-defined period of time. The output operand is asserted when the operating signal is higher than a threshold or lower than a threshold as per user's choice.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-69

5.4 FLEXLOGIC

5 SETTINGS

SETTING FLEXELEMENT 1 FUNCTION: Enabled = 1 Disabled = 0 SETTING FLEXELEMENT 1 BLK: AND Off = 0 SETTINGS FLEXELEMENT 1 +IN: RUN Actual Value FLEXELEMENT 1 -IN: Actual Value

SETTINGS FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT MODE: FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE: FLEXELEMENT 1 DIRECTION: FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP: FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT HYSTERESIS: FLEXELEMENT 1 dt UNIT: FLEXELEMENT 1 dt: SETTINGS FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP DELAY: FLEXELEMENT 1 RST DELAY: FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS FxE 1 OP

+ -

tPKP tRST

FxE 1 DPO FxE 1 PKP

ACTUAL VALUE FlexElement 1 OpSig


842004A3.CDR

Figure 532: FLEXELEMENT SCHEME LOGIC The FLEXELEMENT 1 +IN setting specifies the first (non-inverted) input to the FlexElement. Zero is assumed as the input if this setting is set to Off. For proper operation of the element at least one input must be selected. Otherwise, the element will not assert its output operands. This FLEXELEMENT 1 IN setting specifies the second (inverted) input to the FlexElement. Zero is assumed as the input if this setting is set to Off. For proper operation of the element at least one input must be selected. Otherwise, the element will not assert its output operands. This input should be used to invert the signal if needed for convenience, or to make the element respond to a differential signal such as for a top-bottom oil temperature differential alarm. The element will not operate if the two input signals are of different types, for example if one tries to use active power and phase angle to build the effective operating signal. The element responds directly to the differential signal if the FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT MODE setting is set to Signed. The element responds to the absolute value of the differential signal if this setting is set to Absolute. Sample applications for the Absolute setting include monitoring the angular difference between two phasors with a symmetrical limit angle in both directions; monitoring power regardless of its direction, or monitoring a trend regardless of whether the signal increases of decreases. The element responds directly to its operating signal as defined by the FLEXELEMENT 1 +IN, FLEXELEMENT 1 IN and FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT MODE settings if the FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE setting is set to Level. The element responds to the rate of change of its operating signal if the FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE setting is set to Delta. In this case the FLEXELEMENT 1 dt UNIT and FLEXELEMENT 1 dt settings specify how the rate of change is derived. The FLEXELEMENT 1 DIRECTION setting enables the relay to respond to either high or low values of the operating signal. The following figure explains the application of the FLEXELEMENT 1 DIRECTION, FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP and FLEXELEMENT 1 HYSTERESIS settings.

5-70

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.4 FLEXLOGIC

FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP

FLEXELEMENT DIRECTION = Over

HYSTERESIS = % of PICKUP
PICKUP

FlexElement 1 OpSig

FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP

FLEXELEMENT DIRECTION = Under

HYSTERESIS = % of PICKUP
PICKUP

FlexElement 1 OpSig
842705A1.CDR

Figure 533: FLEXELEMENT DIRECTION, PICKUP, AND HYSTERESIS In conjunction with the FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT MODE setting the element could be programmed to provide two extra characteristics as shown in the figure below.
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP

FLEXELEMENT DIRECTION = Over; FLEXELEMENT INPUT MODE = Signed;

5
FlexElement 1 OpSig

FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP

FLEXELEMENT DIRECTION = Over; FLEXELEMENT INPUT MODE = Absolute;

FlexElement 1 OpSig

FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP

FLEXELEMENT DIRECTION = Under; FLEXELEMENT INPUT MODE = Signed;

FlexElement 1 OpSig

FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP

FLEXELEMENT DIRECTION = Under; FLEXELEMENT INPUT MODE = Absolute;

FlexElement 1 OpSig
842706A2.CDR

Figure 534: FLEXELEMENT INPUT MODE SETTING

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-71

5.4 FLEXLOGIC

5 SETTINGS

The FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP setting specifies the operating threshold for the effective operating signal of the element. If set to Over, the element picks up when the operating signal exceeds the FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP value. If set to Under, the element picks up when the operating signal falls below the FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP value. The FLEXELEMENT 1 HYSTERESIS setting controls the element dropout. It should be noticed that both the operating signal and the pickup threshold can be negative facilitating applications such as reverse power alarm protection. The FlexElement can be programmed to work with all analog actual values measured by the relay. The FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP setting is entered in per-unit values using the following definitions of the base units: Table 59: FLEXELEMENT BASE UNITS
dcmA FREQUENCY FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE PHASE ANGLE POWER FACTOR RTDs SENSITIVE DIR POWER (Sns Dir Power) SOURCE CURRENT SOURCE ENERGY (Positive and Negative Watthours, Positive and Negative Varhours) BASE = maximum value of the DCMA INPUT MAX setting for the two transducers configured under the +IN and IN inputs. fBASE = 1 Hz df/dtBASE = 1 Hz/s BASE = 360 degrees (see the UR angle referencing convention) PFBASE = 1.00 BASE = 100C PBASE = maximum value of 3 VBASE IBASE for the +IN and IN inputs of the sources configured for the sensitive power directional element(s). IBASE = maximum nominal primary RMS value of the +IN and IN inputs EBASE = 10000 MWh or MVAh, respectively PBASE = maximum value of VBASE IBASE for the +IN and IN inputs VBASE = maximum nominal primary RMS value of the +IN and IN inputs IBASE = maximum primary RMS value of the +IN and IN inputs (CT primary for source currents, and bus reference primary current for bus differential currents) VBASE = Primary auxiliary voltage of the STATOR GROUND SOURCE IBASE = maximum primary RMS value of the +IN and IN inputs (CT primary for source currents, and bus reference primary current for bus differential currents) VBASE = maximum primary RMS value of all the sources related to the +IN and IN inputs BASE = 1.00 pu

SOURCE POWER SOURCE VOLTAGE STATOR DIFFERENTIAL CURRENT (Stator Diff Iar, Ibr, and Icr) STATOR GROUND 3RD HARMONIC VOLTAGES (Stator Gnd Vn/V0 3rd) STATOR RESTRAINING CURRENT (Stator Diff Iad, Ibd, and Icd) SYNCHROCHECK (Max Delta Volts) VOLTS PER HERTZ

The FLEXELEMENT 1 HYSTERESIS setting defines the pickupdropout relation of the element by specifying the width of the hysteresis loop as a percentage of the pickup value as shown in the FlexElement Direction, Pickup, and Hysteresis diagram. The FLEXELEMENT 1 DT UNIT setting specifies the time unit for the setting FLEXELEMENT 1 dt. This setting is applicable only if FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE is set to Delta. The FLEXELEMENT 1 DT setting specifies duration of the time interval for the rate of change mode of operation. This setting is applicable only if FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE is set to Delta. This FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP DELAY setting specifies the pickup delay of the element. The FLEXELEMENT 1 RST DELAY setting specifies the reset delay of the element.

5-72

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.4 FLEXLOGIC 5.4.8 NON-VOLATILE LATCHES

PATH: SETTINGS

FLEXLOGIC

NON-VOLATILE LATCHES

LATCH 1(16) Range: Disabled, Enabled

LATCH 1

LATCH 1 FUNCTION: Disabled


MESSAGE

LATCH 1 TYPE: Reset Dominant LATCH 1 SET: Off LATCH 1 RESET: Off LATCH 1 TARGET: Self-reset LATCH 1 EVENTS: Disabled

Range: Reset Dominant, Set Dominant

MESSAGE

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled

MESSAGE

Range: Disabled, Enabled

The non-volatile latches provide a permanent logical flag that is stored safely and will not reset upon reboot after the relay is powered down. Typical applications include sustaining operator commands or permanently block relay functions, such as Autorecloser, until a deliberate HMI action resets the latch. The settings, logic, and element operation are described below: LATCH 1 TYPE: This setting characterizes Latch 1 to be Set- or Reset-dominant. LATCH 1 SET: If asserted, the specified FlexLogic operands 'sets' Latch 1. LATCH 1 RESET: If asserted, the specified FlexLogic operand 'resets' Latch 1.
SETTING

LATCH N TYPE Reset Dominant

LATCH N SET ON OFF ON OFF

LATCH N RESET OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF ON

LATCH N ON ON Previous State OFF OFF ON ON Previous State OFF

LATCH N OFF OFF Previous State ON ON OFF OFF Previous State ON

LATCH 1 FUNCTION: Disabled=0 Enabled=1 SETTING LATCH 1 SET: Off=0 SETTING LATCH 1 SET: Off=0

SETTING LATCH 1 TYPE: RUN

Set Dominant

ON ON OFF OFF

FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS SET LATCH 1 ON LATCH 1 OFF

RESET

842005A1.CDR

Figure 535: NON-VOLATILE LATCH OPERATION TABLE (N=1 to 16) AND LOGIC

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-73

5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS 5.5GROUPED ELEMENTS

5 SETTINGS 5.5.1 OVERVIEW

Each protection element can be assigned up to six different sets of settings according to Setting Group designations 1 to 6. The performance of these elements is defined by the active Setting Group at a given time. Multiple setting groups allow the user to conveniently change protection settings for different operating situations (e.g. altered power system configuration, season of the year). The active setting group can be preset or selected via the SETTING GROUPS menu (see the Control Elements section later in this chapter). See also the Introduction to Elements section at the beginning of this chapter. 5.5.2 SETTING GROUP
PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6)

SETTING GROUP 1

DISTANCE POWER SWING DETECT STATOR DIFFERENTIAL PHASE CURRENT NEUTRAL CURRENT GROUND CURRENT NEGATIVE SEQUENCE CURRENT GENERATOR UNBALANCE SPLIT PHASE VOLTAGE ELEMENTS LOSS OF EXCITATION ACCIDENTAL ENERGIZATION SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER STATOR GROUND

See page 575. See page 582. See page 590. See page 593. See page 5103. See page 5110. See page 5117. See page 5120. See page 5122. See page 5126. See page 5136. See page 5-138. See page 5-140. See page 5-143.

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

Each of the six Setting Group menus is identical. SETTING GROUP 1 (the default active group) automatically becomes active if no other group is active (see the Control Elements section for additional details).

5-74

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS 5.5.3 DISTANCE

a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) DISTANCE Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4

DISTANCE

DISTANCE SOURCE: SRC 1


MESSAGE

MEMORY DURATION: 10 cycles FORCE SELF-POLAR: Off FORCE MEM-POLAR: Off PHASE DISTANCE Z1 PHASE DISTANCE Z2 PHASE DISTANCE Z3

Range: 5 to 25 cycles in steps of 1

MESSAGE

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

See page 576.

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

Three common settings (DISTANCE SOURCE, MEMORY DURATION, and FORCE SELF-POLAR) and three menus for three zones of phase distance protection are available. The DISTANCE SOURCE identifies the Signal Source for all distance functions. The Mho distance functions use a dynamic characteristic: the positive-sequence voltage either memorized or actual is used as a polarizing signal. The memory voltage is also used by the built-in directional supervising functions applied for both the Mho and Quad characteristics. The MEMORY DURATION setting specifies the length of time a memorized positive-sequence voltage should be used in the distance calculations. After this interval expires, the relay checks the magnitude of the actual positive-sequence voltage. If it is higher than 10% of the nominal, the actual voltage is used, if lower the memory voltage continues to be used. The memory is established when the positive-sequence voltage stays above 80% of its nominal value for five power system cycles. For this reason it is important to ensure that the nominal secondary voltage of the VT is entered correctly under the SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP AC INPUTS VOLTAGE BANK menu. Set MEMORY DURATION long enough to ensure stability on close-in reverse three-phase faults. For this purpose, the maximum fault clearing time (breaker fail time) in the substation should be considered. On the other hand, the MEMORY DURATION cannot be too long as the power system may experience power swing conditions rotating the voltage and current phasors slowly while the memory voltage is static, as frozen at the beginning of the fault. Keeping the memory in effect for too long may eventually lead to incorrect operation of the distance functions. The distance zones can be forced to become self-polarized through the FORCE SELF-POLAR setting. Any user-selected condition (FlexLogic operand) can be configured to force self-polarization. When the selected operand is asserted (logic 1), the distance functions become self-polarized regardless of other memory voltage logic conditions. When the selected operand is de-asserted (logic 0), the distance functions follow other conditions of the memory voltage logic as shown below. The distance zones can be forced to become memory-polarized through the FORCE MEM-POLAR setting. Any user-selected condition (FlexLogic operand) can be configured to force memory polarization. When the selected operand is asserted (logic 1), the distance functions become memory-polarized regardless of the positive-sequence voltage magnitude. When the selected operand is de-asserted (logic 0), the distance functions follow other conditions of the memory voltage logic. The FORCE SELF-POLAR and FORCE MEM-POLAR settings should never be asserted simultaneously. If this happens, the logic will give higher priority to forcing self-polarization as indicated in the logic below. This is consistent with the overall philosophy of distance memory polarization: the memory polarization cannot be applied permanently but for a limited time only; the self-polarization may be applied permanently and therefore should take higher priority.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-75

5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS

5 SETTINGS

SETTING FORCE MEM-POLAR: Off=0 UPDATE MEMORY AND RUN SETTING MEMORY DURATION: V_1 < 1.15 pu V_RMS- V < V_RMS/8 V_RMS- V < V_RMS/8 V_RMS- V < V_RMS/8 V_1 > 0.8 pu IA < 0.05 pu IB < 0.05 pu IC < 0.05 pu V_1 < 0.1 pu AND OR R AND AND 5 cy 0 S Q AND 0 t RST AND Use V_1 mem OR Use V_1

SETTING DISTANCE SOURCE: V_A, V_RMS_A V_B, V_RMS_B V_C, V_RMS_C V_1 IA IB IC SETTING FORCE SELF-POLAR: Off=0

827842A6.CDR

Figure 536: MEMORY VOLTAGE LOGIC b) PHASE DISTANCE


PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) DISTANCE PHASE DISTANCE Z1(Z3) Range: Disabled, Enabled

PHASE DISTANCE Z1

PHS DIST Z1 FUNCTION: Disabled PHS DIST Z1 DIR: Forward PHS DIST Z1 XFMR VOL CONNECTION: None PHS DIST Z1 XFMR CUR CONNECTION: None PHS DIST Z1 REACH: 2.00 ohms PHS DIST Z1 RCA: 85 PHS DIST Z1 REV REACH: 2.00 ohms PHS DIST Z1 REV REACH RCA: 85 PHS DIST Z1 COMP LIMIT: 90 PHS DIST Z1 DIR RCA: 85 PHS DIST Z1 DIR COMP LIMIT: 90 PHS DIST Z1 SUPV: 0.200 pu PHS DIST Z1 VOLT LEVEL: 0.000 pu PHS DIST Z1 DELAY: 0.000 s

MESSAGE

Range: Forward, Reverse, Non-directional

MESSAGE

Range: None, Dy1, Dy3, Dy5, Dy7, Dy9, Dy11, Yd1, Yd3, Yd5, Yd7, Yd9, Yd11 Range: None, Dy1, Dy3, Dy5, Dy7, Dy9, Dy11, Yd1, Yd3, Yd5, Yd7, Yd9, Yd11 Range: 0.02 to 500.00 ohms in steps of 0.01

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

Range: 30 to 90 in steps of 1

MESSAGE

Range: 0.02 to 500.00 ohms in steps of 0.01

MESSAGE

Range: 30 to 90 in steps of 1

MESSAGE

Range: 30 to 90 in steps of 1

MESSAGE

Range: 30 to 90 in steps of 1

MESSAGE

Range: 30 to 90 in steps of 1

MESSAGE

Range: 0.050 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE

Range: 0.000 to 5.000 pu in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE

Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001

5-76

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS PHS DIST Z1 BLK: Off PHS DIST Z1 TARGET: Self-reset PHS DIST Z1 EVENTS: Disabled

5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS


Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled

MESSAGE

Range: Disabled, Enabled

The phase mho distance function uses a dynamic 100% memory-polarized mho characteristic with additional reactance, directional, and overcurrent supervising characteristics. When set to Non-directional, the mho function becomes an offset mho with the reverse reach controlled independently from the forward reach, and all the directional characteristics removed. Three zones of phase distance protection are provided. Each zone is configured individually through its own setting menu. All of the settings can be independently modified for each of the zones except: 1. 2. The SIGNAL SOURCE setting (common for the phase distance elements of all zones as entered under SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) DISTANCE). The MEMORY DURATION setting (common for the phase distance elements of all zones as entered under SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) DISTANCE).

The common distance settings described earlier must be properly chosen for correct operation of the phase distance elements. Additional details may be found in Chapter 8: Theory of Operation.
VOLTAGE BANK
WARNING

Ensure that the PHASE VT SECONDARY VOLTAGE setting (see the SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP AC INPUTS menu) is set correctly to prevent improper operation of associated memory action.

PHS DIST Z1 DIR: All zones are reversible. The forward direction is defined by the PHS DIST Z1 RCA setting, whereas the reverse direction is shifted 180 from that angle. The non-directional zone spans between the forward reach impedance defined by the PHS DIST Z1 REACH and PHS DIST Z1 RCA settings, and the reverse reach impedance defined by PHS DIST Z1 REV REACH and PHS DIST Z1 REV REACH RCA as illustrated below.

COMP LIMIT

DIR COMP LIMIT

REAC H

DIR COMP LIMIT DIR RCA RCA

837720A1.CDR

Figure 537: DIRECTIONAL MHO DISTANCE CHARACTERISTIC

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-77

5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS

5 SETTINGS

COMP LIMIT

REACH
RCA

R
REV R EACH
REV REACH RCA

837800A1-X1.CDR

Figure 538: NON-DIRECTIONAL MHO DISTANCE CHARACTERISTIC

RCA = 80o COMP LIMIT = 90o DIR RCA = 80o DIR COMP LIMIT = 90o

RCA = 80o COMP LIMIT = 90o DIR RCA = 80o DIR COMP LIMIT = 60o

REAC H

REAC H

RCA = 90o COMP LIMIT = 90o DIR RCA = 45o DIR COMP LIMIT = 90o

RCA = 80o COMP LIMIT = 60o DIR RCA = 80o DIR COMP LIMIT = 60o

REACH

REAC H

R
837722A1.CDR

Figure 539: MHO DISTANCE CHARACTERISTIC SAMPLE SHAPES PHS DIST Z1 XFMR VOL CONNECTION: The phase distance elements can be applied to look through a three-phase delta-wye or wye-delta power transformer. In addition, VTs and CTs could be located independently from one another at different windings of the transformer. If the potential source is located at the correct side of the transformer, this setting shall be set to None. This setting specifies the location of the voltage source with respect to the involved power transformer in the direction of the zone. The following figure illustrates the usage of this setting. In section (a), Zone 1 is looking through a transformer from the delta into the wye winding. Therefore, the Z1 setting shall be set to Dy11. In section (b), Zone 3 is looking through a transformer from the wye into the delta winding. Therefore, the Z3 setting shall be set to Yd1. The zone is restricted by the potential point (location of the VTs) as illustrated in Figure (e). PHS DIST Z1 XFMR CUR CONNECTION: This setting specifies the location of the current source with respect to the involved power transformer in the direction of the zone. In section (a) of the following figure, Zone 1 is looking through

5-78

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS

a transformer from the delta into the wye winding. Therefore, the Z1 setting shall be set to Dy11. In section (b), the CTs are located at the same side as the read point. Therefore, the Z3 setting shall be set to None. See Chapter 8: Theory of Operation for more details, and Chapter 9: Application of Settings for information on how to calculate distance reach settings in applications involving power transformers.
(a) (b)

delta

wye, 330o lag

delta

wye, 330o lag

Z3 Z3 XFRM VOL CONNECTION = None Z3 XFRM CUR CONNECTION = None

Z3 Z3 XFRM VOL CONNECTION = Yd1 Z3 XFRM CUR CONNECTION = None

Z1 Z1 XFRM VOL CONNECTION = Dy11 Z1 XFRM CUR CONNECTION = Dy11

Z1 Z1 XFRM VOL CONNECTION = None Z1 XFRM CUR CONNECTION = Dy11

(c)

delta

wye, 330o lag

(e)
L1 L2

Z3 Z3 XFRM VOL CONNECTION = None Z3 XFRM CUR CONNECTION = Yd1

Zone 3 Zone 1 ZL1 ZT ZL2

Z1 Z1 XFRM VOL CONNECTION = Dy11 Z1 XFRM CUR CONNECTION = None


830717A1.CDR

Figure 540: APPLICATIONS OF THE PH DIST XFMR VOL/CUR CONNECTION SETTINGS PHS DIST Z1 REACH: This setting defines the zone reach for the forward and reverse applications. In the non-directional applications, this setting defines the forward reach of the zone. The reverse reach impedance in non-directional applications is set independently. The reach impedance is entered in secondary ohms. The reach impedance angle is entered as the PHS DIST Z1 RCA setting. PHS DIST Z1 RCA: This setting specifies the characteristic angle (similar to the maximum torque angle in previous technologies) of the phase distance characteristic for the forward and reverse applications. In the non-directional applications, this setting defines the angle of the forward reach impedance. The reverse reach impedance in the non-directional applications is set independently. The setting is an angle of reach impedance as shown in Mho Distance Characteristic figures. This setting is independent from PHS DIST Z1 DIR RCA, the characteristic angle of an extra directional supervising function. PHS DIST Z1 REV REACH: This setting defines the reverse reach of the zone set to non-directional (PHS DIST Z1 DIR setting). The value must be entered in secondary ohms. This setting does not apply when the zone direction is set to Forward or Reverse. PHS DIST Z1 REV REACH RCA: This setting defines the angle of the reverse reach impedance if the zone is set to non-directional (PHS DIST Z1 DIR setting). This setting does not apply when the zone direction is set to Forward or Reverse. PHS DIST Z1 COMP LIMIT: This setting shapes the operating characteristic, producing the lens-type characteristic of the mho function. The same limit angle applies to both the mho and supervising reactance comparators. This setting improves loadability of the protected line. PHS DIST Z1 DIR RCA: This setting selects the characteristic angle (or maximum torque angle) of the directional supervising function. The directional function is an extra supervising function as the dynamic mho characteristic itself is

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-79

5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS

5 SETTINGS

a directional one. The directional function uses the memory voltage for polarization. This setting typically equals the distance characteristic angle PHS DIST Z1 RCA. PHS DIST Z1 DIR COMP LIMIT: Selects the comparator limit angle for the directional supervising function. PHS DIST Z1 SUPV: The phase distance elements are supervised by the magnitude of the line-to-line current (fault loop current used for the distance calculations). For convenience, 3 is accommodated by the pickup (i.e., before being used, the entered value of the threshold setting is multiplied by 3 ). If the minimum fault current level is sufficient, the current supervision pickup should be set above maximum full load current preventing maloperation under VT fuse fail conditions. This requirement may be difficult to meet for remote faults at the end of Zones 2 through 3. If this is the case, the current supervision pickup would be set below the full load current, but this may result in maloperation during fuse fail conditions. Zone 1 is sealed-in with the current supervision. PHS DIST Z1 VOLT LEVEL: This setting is relevant for applications on series-compensated lines, or in general, if series capacitors are located between the relaying point and a point where the zone shall not overreach. For plain (non-compensated) lines, set to zero. Otherwise, the setting is entered in per unit of the phase VT bank configured under the DISTANCE SOURCE. Effectively, this setting facilitates dynamic current-based reach reduction. In non-directional applications (PHS DIST Z1 DIR set to Non-directional), this setting applies only to the forward reach of the nondirectional zone. See Chapters 8 and 9 for information on calculating this setting for series compensated lines. PHS DIST Z1 DELAY: This setting allows the user to delay operation of the distance elements and implement stepped distance protection. The distance element timers for Zones 2 through 3 apply a short dropout delay to cope with faults located close to the zone boundary when small oscillations in the voltages and/or currents could inadvertently reset the timer. Zone 1 does not need any drop out delay since it is sealed-in by the presence of current. PHS DIST Z1 BLK: This setting enables the user to select a FlexLogic operand to block a given distance element. VT fuse fail detection is one of the applications for this setting.

AND OR

SETTING FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS PH DIST Z1 PKP AB PH DIST Z1 PKP BC PH DIST Z1 PKP CA PH DIST Z1 SUPN IAB PH DIST Z1 SUPN IBC PH DIST Z1 SUPN ICA OPEN POLE OP * NOTE: * D60 Only. Other UR models apply regular current seal-in for Z1. PHS DIST Z1 DELAY:

AND OR 0 0 0 AND OR OR

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PH DIST Z1 OP

t PKP t PKP t PKP


AND AND AND

FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS PH DIST Z1 OP AB PH DIST Z1 OP BC PH DIST Z1 OP CA

837017A6.CDR

Figure 541: PHASE DISTANCE ZONE 1 OP SCHEME

5-80

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND OPEN POLE OP SETTING FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PH DIST Z2 PKP AB AND 20 ms OR PH DIST Z2 DELAY: t PKP FLEXLOGIC OPERAND 0 PH DIST Z2 OP AB

SETTING FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PH DIST Z2 PKP BC AND 20 ms OR PH DIST Z2 DELAY: t PKP FLEXLOGIC OPERAND 0 PH DIST Z2 OP BC

SETTING FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PH DIST Z2 PKP CA AND 20 ms OR PH DIST Z2 DELAY: t PKP FLEXLOGIC OPERAND 0 OR PH DIST Z2 OP CA

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PH DIST Z2 OP 837020A6.CDR

Figure 542: PHASE DISTANCE ZONE 2 TO ZONE 3 OP SCHEME


SETTINGS PHS DIST Z1 DIR: PHS DIST Z1 SHAPE: PHS DIST Z1 XFMR VOL CONNECTION: SETTINGS PHS DIST Z1 FUNCTION: Disable=0 Enable=1 SETTING PHS DIST Z1 BLK: Off=0 SETTING DISTANCE SOURCE: IA-IB IB-IC IC-IA VT CONNECTION WYE VAG-VBG VBG-VCG VCG-VAG V_1 I_1 MEMORY V_1 > 0.80pu OR I_1 > 0.025pu SETTING PHS DIST Z1 SUPV: RUN IA - IB > 3 PICKUP RUN IB - IC > 3 PICKUP RUN IC - IA > 3 PICKUP FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS PH DIST Z1 SUPN IAB PH DIST Z1 SUPN IBC PH DIST Z1 SUPN ICA DELTA VAB VBC VCA RUN C-A ELEMENT FLEXLOGIC OPERAND OPEN POLE BLK CA 1 CYCLE 1 CYCLE OR AND RUN PHS DIST Z1 XFMR CUR CONNECTION: PHS DIST Z1 REACH: PHS DIST Z1 RCA: PHS DIST Z1 REV REACH: PHS DIST Z1 REV REACH RCA: PHS DIST Z1 COMP LIMIT: AND PHS DIST Z1 DIR RCA: PHS DIST Z1 DIR COMP LIMIT: PHS DIST Z1 QUAD RGT BLD: PHS DIST Z1 QUAD RGT BLD RCA: PHS DIST Z1 QUAD LFT BLD: PHS DIST Z1 QUAD LFT BLD RCA: PHS DIST Z1 VOLT LEVEL: RUN A-B ELEMENT FLEXLOGIC OPERAND OPEN POLE BLK AB B-C ELEMENT AND FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS PH DIST Z1 PKP AB PH DIST Z1 DPO AB QUAD ONLY

D60 ONLY

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND OPEN POLE BLK BC

AND

PH DIST Z1 PKP BC PH DIST Z1 DPO BC PH DIST Z1 PKP CA PH DIST Z1 DPO CA PH DIST Z1 PKP

837002AH.CDR

Figure 543: PHASE DISTANCE ZONE 1 TO ZONE 3 SCHEME LOGIC

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-81

5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS

5 SETTINGS 5.5.4 POWER SWING DETECT

PATH: SETTINGS

GROUPED ELEMENTS

SETTING GROUP 1(6)

POWER SWING DETECT Range: Disabled, Enabled

POWER SWING DETECT


MESSAGE

POWER SWING FUNCTION: Disabled POWER SWING SOURCE: SRC 1 POWER SWING SHAPE: Mho Shape POWER SWING MODE: Two Step POWER SWING SUPV: 0.600 pu POWER SWING FWD REACH: 50.00 POWER SWING QUAD FWD REACH MID: 60.00 POWER SWING QUAD FWD REACH OUT: 70.00 POWER SWING FWD RCA: 75 POWER SWING REV REACH: 50.00 POWER SWING QUAD REV REACH MID: 60.00 POWER SWING QUAD REV REACH OUT: 70.00 POWER SWING REV RCA: 75 POWER SWING OUTER LIMIT ANGLE: 120 POWER SWING MIDDLE LIMIT ANGLE: 90 POWER SWING INNER LIMIT ANGLE: 60 POWER SWING OUTER RGT BLD: 100.00 POWER SWING OUTER LFT BLD: 100.00 POWER SWING MIDDLE RGT BLD: 100.00 POWER SWING MIDDLE LFT BLD: 100.00 POWER SWING INNER RGT BLD: 100.00

Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4

MESSAGE

Range: Mho Shape, Quad Shape

MESSAGE

Range: Two Step, Three Step

MESSAGE

Range: 0.050 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE

Range: 0.10 to 500.00 in steps of 0.01 Range: 0.10 to 500.00 in steps of 0.01 Range: 0.10 to 500.00 in steps of 0.01

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

Range: 40 to 90 in steps of 1

MESSAGE

Range: 0.10 to 500.00 in steps of 0.01 Range: 0.10 to 500.00 in steps of 0.01 Range: 0.10 to 500.00 in steps of 0.01

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

Range: 40 to 90 in steps of 1

MESSAGE

Range: 40 to 140 in steps of 1

MESSAGE

Range: 40 to 140 in steps of 1

MESSAGE

Range: 40 to 140 in steps of 1

MESSAGE

Range: 0.10 to 500.00 in steps of 0.01 Range: 0.10 to 500.00 in steps of 0.01 Range: 0.10 to 500.00 in steps of 0.01 Range: 0.10 to 500.00 in steps of 0.01 Range: 0.10 to 500.00 in steps of 0.01

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

5-82

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS POWER SWING INNER LFT BLD: 100.00 POWER SWING PICKUP DELAY 1: 0.030 s POWER SWING RESET DELAY 1: 0.050 s POWER SWING PICKUP DELAY 2: 0.017 s POWER SWING PICKUP DELAY 3: 0.009 s POWER SWING PICKUP DELAY 4: 0.017 s POWER SWING SEAL-IN DELAY: 0.400 s POWER SWING TRIP MODE: Delayed POWER SWING BLK: Off POWER SWING TARGET: Self-Reset POWER SWING EVENTS: Disabled

5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS


Range: 0.10 to 500.00 in steps of 0.01

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE

Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE

Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE

Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE

Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE

Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE

Range: Early, Delayed

MESSAGE

Range: Flexlogic operand

MESSAGE

Range: Self-Reset, Latched, Disabled

MESSAGE

Range: Disabled, Enabled

The Power Swing Detect element provides both power swing blocking and out-of-step tripping functions. The element measures the positive-sequence apparent impedance and traces its locus with respect to either two or three user-selectable operating characteristic boundaries. Upon detecting appropriate timing relations, the blocking and/or tripping indication is given through FlexLogic operands. The element incorporates an adaptive disturbance detector. This function does not trigger on power swings, but is capable of detecting faster disturbances faults in particular that may occur during power swings. Operation of this dedicated disturbance detector is signaled via the POWER SWING 50DD operand. The Power Swing Detect element asserts two outputs intended for blocking selected protection elements on power swings:
POWER SWING BLOCK is a traditional signal that is safely asserted for the entire duration of the power swing, and POWER SWING UN/BLOCK is established in the same way, but resets when an extra disturbance is detected during the power swing. The POWER SWING UN/BLOCK operand may be used for blocking selected protection elements if the intent is to respond to

faults during power swing conditions. Different protection elements respond differently to power swings. If tripping is required for faults during power swing conditions, some elements may be blocked permanently (using the POWER SWING BLOCK operand), and others may be blocked and dynamically unblocked upon fault detection (using the POWER SWING UN/BLOCK operand). The operating characteristic and logic figures should be viewed along with the following discussion to develop an understanding of the operation of the element. The Power Swing Detect element operates in three-step or two-step mode: Three-step operation: The power swing blocking sequence essentially times the passage of the locus of the positivesequence impedance between the outer and the middle characteristic boundaries. If the locus enters the outer characteristic (indicated by the POWER SWING OUTER FlexLogic operand) but stays outside the middle characteristic (indicated by the POWER SWING MIDDLE FlexLogic operand) for an interval longer than POWER SWING PICKUP DELAY 1, the power swing blocking signal (POWER SWING BLOCK FlexLogic operand) is established and sealed-in. The blocking signal resets when the locus leaves the outer characteristic, but not sooner than the POWER SWING RESET DELAY 1 time. Two-step operation: If the 2-step mode is selected, the sequence is identical, but it is the outer and inner characteristics that are used to time the power swing locus.

The Out-of-Step Tripping feature operates as follows for three-step and two-step Power Swing Detection modes:

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-83

5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS

5 SETTINGS

Three-step operation: The out-of-step trip sequence identifies unstable power swings by determining if the impedance locus spends a finite time between the outer and middle characteristics and then a finite time between the middle and inner characteristics. The first step is similar to the power swing blocking sequence. After timer POWER SWING PICKUP DELAY 1 times out, Latch 1 is set as long as the impedance stays within the outer characteristic. If afterwards, at any time (given the impedance stays within the outer characteristic), the locus enters the middle characteristic but stays outside the inner characteristic for a period of time defined as POWER SWING PICKUP DELAY 2, Latch 2 is set as long as the impedance stays inside the outer characteristic. If afterwards, at any time (given the impedance stays within the outer characteristic), the locus enters the inner characteristic and stays there for a period of time defined as POWER SWING PICKUP DELAY 3, Latch 2 is set as long as the impedance stays inside the outer characteristic; the element is now ready to trip. If the "Early" trip mode is selected, the POWER SWING TRIP operand is set immediately and sealed-in for the interval set by the POWER SWING SEAL-IN DELAY. If the "Delayed" trip mode is selected, the element waits until the impedance locus leaves the inner characteristic, then times out the POWER SWING PICKUP DELAY 2 and sets Latch 4; the element is now ready to trip. The trip operand is set later, when the impedance locus leaves the outer characteristic.

Two-step operation: The 2-step mode of operation is similar to the 3-step mode with two exceptions. First, the initial stage monitors the time spent by the impedance locus between the outer and inner characteristics. Second, the stage involving the POWER SWING PICKUP DELAY 2 timer is bypassed. It is up to the user to integrate the blocking (POWER SWING BLOCK) and tripping (POWER SWING TRIP) FlexLogic operands with other protection functions and output contacts in order to make this element fully operational.

The element can be set to use either lens (mho) or rectangular (quad) characteristics as illustrated below. When set to Mho, the element applies the right and left blinders as well. If the blinders are not required, their settings should be set high enough to effectively disable the blinders.

5
OU TE R
DL E M ID

IN

FWD RE

NE

ACH

FW DR CA

REV REAC

E NN

LIM

IT

AN

E GL
MI

DD

LE

I LIM

TA

NG

LE

Figure 544: POWER SWING DETECT MHO OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS

RE VR CA

OUTER LIMIT ANGLE

827843A2.CDR

5-84

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS

842734A1.CDR

Figure 545: EFFECTS OF BLINDERS ON THE MHO CHARACTERISTICS

5
INNER LFT BL D D MIDDLE LFT BL OUTER LFT BL D INNER RGT BL MIDDLE RGT D ACH MID QUAD FWD RE FWD REACH ACH OUT QUAD FWD RE

BLD D

OUTER RGT BL

FWD RCA

REV REACH

CH MID

QUAD REV REA

QUAD REV RE AC

H OUT

842735A1.CDR

Figure 546: POWER SWING DETECT QUAD OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS The FlexLogic output operands for the Power Swing Detect element are described below: The POWER SWING OUTER, POWER SWING MIDDLE, POWER SWING INNER, POWER SWING TMR2 PKP, POWER SWING TMR3 PKP, and POWER SWING TMR4 PKP FlexLogic operands are auxiliary operands that could be used to facilitate testing and special applications. The POWER SWING BLOCK FlexLogic operand shall be used to block selected protection elements such as distance functions.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-85

5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS

5 SETTINGS

The POWER SWING UN/BLOCK FlexLogic operand shall be used to block those protection elements that are intended to be blocked under power swings, but subsequently unblocked should a fault occur after the power swing blocking condition has been established. The POWER SWING 50DD FlexLogic operand indicates that an adaptive disturbance detector integrated with the element has picked up. This operand will trigger on faults occurring during power swing conditions. This includes both three-phase and single-pole-open conditions. The POWER SWING INCOMING FlexLogic operand indicates an unstable power swing with an incoming locus (the locus enters the inner characteristic). The POWER SWING OUTGOING FlexLogic operand indicates an unstable power swing with an outgoing locus (the locus leaving the outer characteristic). This operand can be used to count unstable swings and take certain action only after pre-defined number of unstable power swings. The POWER SWING TRIP FlexLogic operand is a trip command. POWER SWING FUNCTION: This setting enables/disables the entire Power Swing Detection element. The setting applies to both power swing blocking and out-of-step tripping functions. POWER SWING SOURCE: The source setting identifies the Signal Source for both blocking and tripping functions. POWER SWING SHAPE: This setting selects the shapes (either Mho or Quad) of the outer, middle and, inner characteristics of the power swing detect element. The operating principle is not affected. The Mho characteristics use the left and right blinders. POWER SWING MODE: This setting selects between the 2-step and 3-step operating modes and applies to both power swing blocking and out-of-step tripping functions. The 3-step mode applies if there is enough space between the maximum load impedances and distance characteristics of the relay that all three (outer, middle, and inner) characteristics can be placed between the load and the distance characteristics. Whether the spans between the outer and middle as well as the middle and inner characteristics are sufficient should be determined by analysis of the fastest power swings expected in correlation with settings of the power swing timers. The 2-step mode uses only the outer and inner characteristics for both blocking and tripping functions. This leaves more space in heavily loaded systems to place two power swing characteristics between the distance characteristics and the maximum load, but allows for only one determination of the impedance trajectory.

The settings for the Power Swing Detect element are described below:

POWER SWING SUPV: A common overcurrent pickup level supervises all three power swing characteristics. The supervision responds to the positive sequence current. POWER SWING FWD REACH: This setting specifies the forward reach of all three mho characteristics and the inner quad characteristic. For a simple system consisting of a line and two equivalent sources, this reach should be higher than the sum of the line and remote source positive-sequence impedances. Detailed transient stability studies may be needed for complex systems in order to determine this setting. The angle of this reach impedance is specified by the POWER SWING FWD RCA setting. POWER SWING QUAD FWD REACH MID: This setting specifies the forward reach of the middle quad characteristic. The angle of this reach impedance is specified by the POWER SWING FWD RCA setting. The setting is not used if the shape setting is Mho. POWER SWING QUAD FWD REACH OUT: This setting specifies the forward reach of the outer quad characteristic. The angle of this reach impedance is specified by the POWER SWING FWD RCA setting. The setting is not used if the shape setting is Mho. POWER SWING FWD RCA: This setting specifies the angle of the forward reach impedance for the mho characteristics, angles of all the blinders, and both forward and reverse reach impedances of the quad characteristics. POWER SWING REV REACH: This setting specifies the reverse reach of all three mho characteristics and the inner quad characteristic. For a simple system of a line and two equivalent sources, this reach should be higher than the positive-sequence impedance of the local source. Detailed transient stability studies may be needed for complex systems to determine this setting. The angle of this reach impedance is specified by the POWER SWING REV RCA setting for Mho, and the POWER SWING FWD RCA setting for Quad. POWER SWING QUAD REV REACH MID: This setting specifies the reverse reach of the middle quad characteristic. The angle of this reach impedance is specified by the POWER SWING FWD RCA setting. The setting is not used if the shape setting is Mho.

5-86

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS

POWER SWING QUAD REV REACH OUT: This setting specifies the reverse reach of the outer quad characteristic. The angle of this reach impedance is specified by the POWER SWING FWD RCA setting. The setting is not used if the shape setting is Mho. POWER SWING REV RCA: This setting specifies the angle of the reverse reach impedance for the mho characteristics. This setting applies to mho shapes only. POWER SWING OUTER LIMIT ANGLE: This setting defines the outer power swing characteristic. The convention depicted in the Power Swing Detect Characteristic diagram should be observed: values greater than 90 result in an apple shaped characteristic; values less than 90 result in a lens shaped characteristic. This angle must be selected in consideration of the maximum expected load. If the maximum load angle is known, the outer limit angle should be coordinated with a 20 security margin. Detailed studies may be needed for complex systems to determine this setting. This setting applies to mho shapes only. POWER SWING MIDDLE LIMIT ANGLE: This setting defines the middle power swing detect characteristic. It is relevant only for the 3-step mode. A typical value would be close to the average of the outer and inner limit angles. This setting applies to mho shapes only. POWER SWING INNER LIMIT ANGLE: This setting defines the inner power swing detect characteristic. The inner characteristic is used by the out-of-step tripping function: beyond the inner characteristic out-of-step trip action is definite (the actual trip may be delayed as per the TRIP MODE setting). Therefore, this angle must be selected in consideration to the power swing angle beyond which the system becomes unstable and cannot recover. The inner characteristic is also used by the power swing blocking function in the 2-step mode. In this case, set this angle large enough so that the characteristics of the distance elements are safely enclosed by the inner characteristic. This setting applies to mho shapes only.

POWER SWING OUTER, MIDDLE, and INNER RGT BLD: These settings specify the resistive reach of the right blinder. The blinder applies to both Mho and Quad characteristics. Set these value high if no blinder is required for the Mho characteristic. POWER SWING OUTER, MIDDLE, and INNER LFT BLD: These settings specify the resistive reach of the left blinder. Enter a positive value; the relay automatically uses a negative value. The blinder applies to both Mho and Quad characteristics. Set this value high if no blinder is required for the Mho characteristic. POWER SWING PICKUP DELAY 1: All the coordinating timers are related to each other and should be set to detect the fastest expected power swing and produce out-of-step tripping in a secure manner. The timers should be set in consideration to the power swing detect characteristics, mode of power swing detect operation and mode of out-ofstep tripping. This timer defines the interval that the impedance locus must spend between the outer and inner characteristics (2-step operating mode), or between the outer and middle characteristics (3-step operating mode) before the power swing blocking signal is established. This time delay must be set shorter than the time required for the impedance locus to travel between the two selected characteristics during the fastest expected power swing. This setting is relevant for both power swing blocking and out-of-step tripping. POWER SWING RESET DELAY 1: This setting defines the dropout delay for the power swing blocking signal. Detection of a condition requiring a Block output sets Latch 1 after PICKUP DELAY 1 time. When the impedance locus leaves the outer characteristic, timer POWER SWING RESET DELAY 1 is started. When the timer times-out the latch is reset. This setting should be selected to give extra security for the power swing blocking action. POWER SWING PICKUP DELAY 2: Controls the out-of-step tripping function in the 3-step mode only. This timer defines the interval the impedance locus must spend between the middle and inner characteristics before the second step of the out-of-step tripping sequence is completed. This time delay must be set shorter than the time required for the impedance locus to travel between the two characteristics during the fastest expected power swing. POWER SWING PICKUP DELAY 3: Controls the out-of-step tripping function only. It defines the interval the impedance locus must spend within the inner characteristic before the last step of the out-of-step tripping sequence is completed and the element is armed to trip. The actual moment of tripping is controlled by the TRIP MODE setting. This time delay is provided for extra security before the out-of-step trip action is executed. POWER SWING PICKUP DELAY 4: Controls the out-of-step tripping function in Delayed trip mode only. This timer defines the interval the impedance locus must spend outside the inner characteristic but within the outer characteristic before the element is armed for the delayed trip. The delayed trip occurs when the impedance leaves the outer characteristic. This time delay is provided for extra security and should be set considering the fastest expected power swing.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-87

5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS

5 SETTINGS

POWER SWING SEAL-IN DELAY: The out-of-step trip FlexLogic operand (POWER SWING TRIP) is sealed-in for the specified period of time. The sealing-in is crucial in the delayed trip mode, as the original trip signal is a very short pulse occurring when the impedance locus leaves the outer characteristic after the out-of-step sequence is completed. POWER SWING TRIP MODE: Selection of the Early trip mode results in an instantaneous trip after the last step in the out-of-step tripping sequence is completed. The Early trip mode will stress the circuit breakers as the currents at that moment are high (the electromotive forces of the two equivalent systems are approximately 180 apart). Selection of the Delayed trip mode results in a trip at the moment when the impedance locus leaves the outer characteristic. Delayed trip mode will relax the operating conditions for the breakers as the currents at that moment are low. The selection should be made considering the capability of the breakers in the system. POWER SWING BLK: This setting specifies the FlexLogic operand used for blocking the out-of-step function only. The power swing blocking function is operational all the time as long as the element is enabled. The blocking signal resets the output POWER SWING TRIP operand but does not stop the out-of-step tripping sequence.
SETTINGS POWER SWING SHAPE: POWER SWING FWD REACH: POWER SWING QUAD FWD REACH MID: POWER SWING QUAD FWD REACH OUT: POWER SWING FWD RCA: SETTING POWER SWING FUNCTION: POWER SWING REV REACH: POWER SWING OUTER LIMIT ANGLE: POWER SWING MIDDLE LIMIT ANGLE: POWER SWING INNER LIMIT ANGLE: POWER SWING OUTER RGT BLD: POWER SWING OUTER LFT BLD: POWER SWING MIDDLE RGT BLD:

Disabled = 0 Enabled = 1 SETTING POWER SWING SOURCE: V_1 I_1

POWER SWING QUAD REV POWER SWING MIDDLE LFT BLD: REACH MID: POWER SWING QUAD REV POWER SWING INNER REACH OUT: RGT BLD: POWER SWING REV RCA: RUN OUTER IMPEDANCE REGION RUN MIDDLE IMPEDANCE REGION RUN INNER IMPEDANCE REGION SETTING POWER SWING SUPV: RUN I_1 > PICKUP 827840A3.CDR AND AND AND POWER SWING INNER LFT BLD: FLEXLOGIC OPERAND POWER SWING OUTER FLEXLOGIC OPERAND POWER SWING MIDDLE FLEXLOGIC OPERAND POWER SWING INNER

Figure 547: POWER SWING DETECT SCHEME LOGIC (1 of 3)


SETTING POWER SWING FUNCTION: Disabled = 0 Enabled = 1 0 SETTING POWER SWING SOURCE: I_0 I_1 I_2 RUN | |I_0| - |I_0'|| > K_0 | |I_1| - |I_1'|| > K_1 | |I_2| - |I_2'|| > K_2 OR AND 0 4 cycles TIMER 10 cycles FLEXLOGIC OPERAND POWER SWING 50DD TIMER

I_0, I_1, I_2 - present values I_0', I_1', I_2' - half-a-cycle old values K_0, K_2 - three times the average change over last power cycle K_1 - four times the average change over last power cycle

842008A1.CDR

Figure 548: POWER SWING DETECT SCHEME LOGIC (2 of 3)

5-88

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS

POWER SWING MIDDLE

POWER SWING INNER

GE Multilin

POWER SWING OUTER

NOTE: L1 AND L4 LATCHES ARE SET DOMINANT L2, L3 AND L5 LATCHES ARE RESET DOMINANT

FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
AND AND AND AND AND

SETTING POWER SWING MODE: 3-step

SETTINGS POWER SWING DELAY 1 PICKUP: POWER SWING DELAY 1 RESET: tPKP tRST
S Q1 L1 R

FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS POWER SWING BLOCK FLEXLOGIC OPERAND POWER SWING 50DD OR OR
S Q5

POWER SWING UN/BLOCK

2-step

L5
R

SETTING POWER SWING DELAY 2 PICKUP: tPKP 0


S Q2 L2 R

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND POWER SWING TMR2 PKP

3-step

2-step SETTING POWER SWING DELAY 3 PICKUP: tPKP 0


S Q3 L3 R

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND POWER SWING TMR3 PKP FLEXLOGIC OPERAND POWER SWING INCOMING SETTING POWER SWING TRIP MODE: SETTING Early 0 S Q4 L4 R POWER SWING SEAL-IN DELAY: 0 tRST AND Delayed AND FLEXLOGIC OPERAND POWER SWING TRIP

SETTING POWER SWING DELAY 4 PICKUP: tPKP

SETTING POWER SWING BLK: Off=0

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND POWER SWING TMR4 PKP

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND POWER SWING OUTGOING 827841A4.CDR

Figure 549: POWER SWING DETECT SCHEME LOGIC (3 of 3)

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-89

5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS

5 SETTINGS 5.5.5 STATOR DIFFERENTIAL

PATH: SETTINGS

GROUPED ELEMENTS

SETTING GROUP 1(6)

STATOR DIFFERENTIAL Range: Disabled, Enabled

STATOR DIFFERENTIAL
MESSAGE

STATOR DIFF FUNCTION: Disabled STATOR DIFF LINE END SOURCE: SRC 1 STATOR DIFF NEUTRAL END SOURCE: SRC 1 STATOR DIFF PICKUP: 0.100 pu STATOR DIFF SLOPE 1: 10 % STATOR DIFF BREAK 1: 1.15 pu STATOR DIFF SLOPE 2: 80 % STATOR DIFF BREAK 2: 8.00 pu STATOR DIFF BLK: Off STATOR DIFF TARGET: Self-reset STATOR DIFF EVENTS: Disabled

Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4

MESSAGE

Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4

MESSAGE

Range: 0.050 to 1.000 pu in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE

Range: 1 to 100% in steps of 1

MESSAGE

Range: 1.00 to 1.50 pu in steps of 0.01

MESSAGE

Range: 1 to 100% in steps of 1

MESSAGE

Range: 1.50 to 30.00 pu in steps of 0.01

MESSAGE

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled

MESSAGE

Range: Disabled, Enabled

The stator differential protection element is intended for use on the stator windings of rotating machinery.
|I D|

differential

OPERATE
SLOPE 2

BLOCK
SLOPE 1 PICKUP BREAK 1 BREAK 2

restraining

IR

Figure 550: STATOR DIFFERENTIAL CHARACTERISTIC This element has a dual slope characteristic. The main purpose of the percent-slope characteristic is to prevent a maloperation caused by unbalances between CTs during external faults. CT unbalances arise as a result of the following factors: 1. 2. CT accuracy errors CT saturation

5-90

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS

The characteristic allows for very sensitive settings when fault current is low and less sensitive settings when fault current is high and CT performance may produce incorrect operate signals. STATOR DIFF LINE END SOURCE: This setting selects the Source connected to CTs in the end of the machine stator winding closest to the load and furthest from the winding neutral point. Both line and neutral-side CTs should be wired to measure their currents in the same direction with respect to the neutral point of the winding. STATOR DIFF NEUTRAL END SOURCE: This setting selects the Source connected to CTs in the end of the machine stator winding furthest from the load and closest to the winding neutral point. Both line and neutral-side CTs should be wired to measure their currents in the same direction with respect to the neutral point of the winding. STATOR DIFF PICKUP: This setting defines the minimum differential current required for operation. This setting is based on the amount of differential current that might be seen under normal operating conditions. A setting of 0.1 to 0.3 pu is generally recommended. STATOR DIFF SLOPE 1: This setting is applicable for restraint currents from zero to STATOR DIFF BREAK 1, and defines the ratio of differential to restraint current above which the element will operate. This slope is set to ensure sensitivity to internal faults at normal operating current levels. The criteria for setting this slope is to allow for maximum expected CT mismatch error when operating at the maximum permitted current. This maximum error is generally in the range of 5 to 10% of CT rating. STATOR DIFF BREAK 1: This setting defines the end of the Slope 1 region and the start of the transition region. It should be set just above the maximum normal operating current level of the machine. STATOR DIFF SLOPE 2: This setting is applicable for restraint currents above the STATOR DIFF BREAK 2 setting when the element is applied to generator stator windings. This slope is set to ensure stability under heavy external fault conditions that could lead to high differential currents as a result of CT saturation. A setting of 80 to 100% is recommended. The transition region (as shown on the characteristic plot) is a cubic spline, automatically calculated by the relay to result in a smooth transition between STATOR DIFF SLOPE 1 and STATOR DIFF SLOPE 2 with no discontinuities. STATOR DIFF BREAK 2: This setting defines the end of the transition region and the start of the Slope 2 region. It should be set to the level at which any of the protection CTs are expected to begin to saturate.
SETTING STATOR DIFF FUNCTION: Disabled = 0 Enabled = 1 SETTING STATOR DIFF BLOCK: Off = 0 SETTING STATOR DIFF LINE END SOURCE: IA IB IC DC Offset Removal D.F.T. and Differential and Restraint Differential Phasors Iad Ibd Icd Iar RUN Ibd FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS STATOR DIFF PKP B STATOR DIFF DPO B Restraint Phasors Iar Ibr Icr Icr Ibr RUN Icd FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS STATOR DIFF PKP C STATOR DIFF DPO C SETTINGS STATOR DIFF PICKUP: STATOR DIFF SLOPE 1: AND STATOR DIFF BREAK 1: STATOR DIFF SLOPE 2: STATOR DIFF BREAK 2: RUN Iad FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS STATOR DIFF PKP A STATOR DIFF DPO A

SETTING STATOR DIFF NEUTRAL END SOURCE: IA IB IC

Figure 551: STATOR DIFFERENTIAL SCHEME LOGIC SATURATION DETECTION: External faults near generators typically result in very large time constants of DC components in the fault currents. Also, when energizing a step-up transformer, the inrush current being limited only by the machine impedance may be significant and may last for a very long time. In order to provide additional security against maloperations during these events, the G60 incorporates saturation detection logic. When saturation is detected the element will make an additional check on the angle between the neutral and output current. If this angle indicates an internal fault then tripping is permitted.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-91

5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS

5 SETTINGS

The saturation detector is implemented as a state machine (see below). "NORMAL" is the initial state of the machine. When in "NORMAL" state, the saturation flag is not set (SAT = 0). The algorithm calculates the saturation condition, SC. If SC = 1 while the state machine is "NORMAL", the saturation detector goes into the "EXTERNAL FAULT" state and sets the saturation flag (SAT = 1). The algorithm returns to the "NORMAL" state if the differential current is below the first slope, SL, for more than 200 ms. When in the "EXTERNAL FAULT" state, the algorithm goes into the "EXTERNAL FAULT & CT SATURATION" state if the differential flag is set (DIF = 1). When in the "EXTERNAL FAULT & CT SATURATION" state, the algorithm keeps the saturation flag set (SAT = 1). The state machine returns to the "EXTERNAL FAULT" state if the differential flag is reset (DIF = 0) for 100 ms.
NORMAL

SC = (|ID| < SL x IR) and (IR > BL) SAT := 0


(|ID| < SL x IR or |ID| < PICKUP) AND (NOT (SC)) for 200 msec where: IR = restraint current ID = differential current DIF = stator differential pickup flag SC SL = slope 1 setting ("saturation condition") BL = break point 1 setting PICKUP = pickup setting
EXTERNAL FAULT

SAT := 1
DIF=1 DIF=0 for 100 msec

5
PHASE COMPARISON PRINCIPLE:

EXTERNAL FAULT & CT SATURATION

SAT := 1

Figure 552: SATURATION DETECTION STATE MACHINE The test for direction can be summarized by the following equation: If ( I TS > B L or ( I TS > K I R and I TS > 0.1 pu ) ) and ( I NS > B L or ( I NS > K I R and I NS > 0.1 pu ) ) then DIR = abs ( I TS I NS ) > 90 else DIR = 1 where: IR = restraining current, DIR = flag indicating that the phase comparison principle is satisfied BL = breakpoint 1 setting, ITS, INS = current at the terminal and neutral sources, respectively K = factory constant of 0.25
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS STATOR DIFF PKP A STATOR DIFF SAT A STATOR DIFF DIR A FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS STATOR DIFF PKP B STATOR DIFF SAT B STATOR DIFF DIR B FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS STATOR DIFF PKP C STATOR DIFF SAT C STATOR DIFF DIR C OR FLEXLOGIC OPERAND AND STATOR DIFF OP C OR FLEXLOGIC OPERAND AND STATOR DIFF OP B OR FLEXLOGIC OPERAND AND STATOR DIFF OP A

(EQ 5.7)

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND OR STATOR DIFF OP


842707A1.CDR

Figure 553: STATOR DIFFERENTIAL FINAL OUTPUT LOGIC

5-92

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS 5.5.6 PHASE CURRENT

a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) PHASE CURRENT

PHASE CURRENT

PHASE TOC1 PHASE IOC1 PHASE IOC2 PHASE DIRECTIONAL 1

See page 598. See page 5100. See page 5100. See page 5101.

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

b) INVERSE TOC CURVE CHARACTERISTICS The inverse time overcurrent curves used by the time overcurrent elements are the IEEE, IEC, GE Type IAC, and I2t standard curve shapes. This allows for simplified coordination with downstream devices. If however, none of these curve shapes is adequate, FlexCurves may be used to customize the inverse time curve characteristics. The Definite Time curve is also an option that may be appropriate if only simple protection is required. Table 510: OVERCURRENT CURVE TYPES
IEEE IEEE Extremely Inv. IEEE Very Inverse IEEE Moderately Inv. IEC IEC Curve A (BS142) IEC Curve B (BS142) IEC Curve C (BS142) IEC Short Inverse GE TYPE IAC IAC Extremely Inv. IAC Very Inverse IAC Inverse IAC Short Inverse OTHER I2t FlexCurves A, B, C, and D Recloser Curves Definite Time

A time dial multiplier setting allows selection of a multiple of the base curve shape (where the time dial multiplier = 1) with the curve shape (CURVE) setting. Unlike the electromechanical time dial equivalent, operate times are directly proportional to the time multiplier (TD MULTIPLIER) setting value. For example, all times for a multiplier of 10 are 10 times the multiplier 1 or base curve values. Setting the multiplier to zero results in an instantaneous response to all current levels above pickup. Time overcurrent time calculations are made with an internal energy capacity memory variable. When this variable indicates that the energy capacity has reached 100%, a time overcurrent element will operate. If less than 100% energy capacity is accumulated in this variable and the current falls below the dropout threshold of 97 to 98% of the pickup value, the variable must be reduced. Two methods of this resetting operation are available: Instantaneous and Timed. The Instantaneous selection is intended for applications with other relays, such as most static relays, which set the energy capacity directly to zero when the current falls below the reset threshold. The Timed selection can be used where the relay must coordinate with electromechanical relays.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-93

5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS IEEE CURVES:

5 SETTINGS

The IEEE time overcurrent curve shapes conform to industry standards and the IEEE C37.112-1996 curve classifications for extremely, very, and moderately inverse. The IEEE curves are derived from the formulae: A tr --------------------------------- + B --------------------------------I T = TDM --------------- p 1 , T RESET = TDM I - 2 --------------- 1 I pickup I pickup where:

(EQ 5.8)

T = operate time (in seconds), TDM = Multiplier setting, I = input current, Ipickup = Pickup Current setting A, B, p = constants, TRESET = reset time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET is Timed), tr = characteristic constant

Table 511: IEEE INVERSE TIME CURVE CONSTANTS


IEEE CURVE SHAPE IEEE Extremely Inverse IEEE Very Inverse IEEE Moderately Inverse A 28.2 19.61 0.0515 B 0.1217 0.491 0.1140 P 2.0000 2.0000 0.02000 TR 29.1 21.6 4.85

Table 512: IEEE CURVE TRIP TIMES (IN SECONDS)


MULTIPLIER (TDM) CURRENT ( I / Ipickup) 1.5 11.341 22.682 45.363 90.727 136.090 181.454 226.817 8.090 16.179 32.358 64.716 97.074 129.432 161.790 3.220 6.439 12.878 25.756 38.634 51.512 64.390 2.0 4.761 9.522 19.043 38.087 57.130 76.174 95.217 3.514 7.028 14.055 28.111 42.166 56.221 70.277 1.902 3.803 7.606 15.213 22.819 30.426 38.032 3.0 1.823 3.647 7.293 14.587 21.880 29.174 36.467 1.471 2.942 5.885 11.769 17.654 23.538 29.423 1.216 2.432 4.864 9.729 14.593 19.458 24.322 4.0 1.001 2.002 4.003 8.007 12.010 16.014 20.017 0.899 1.798 3.597 7.193 10.790 14.387 17.983 0.973 1.946 3.892 7.783 11.675 15.567 19.458 5.0 0.648 1.297 2.593 5.187 7.780 10.374 12.967 0.654 1.308 2.616 5.232 7.849 10.465 13.081 0.844 1.688 3.377 6.753 10.130 13.507 16.883 6.0 0.464 0.927 1.855 3.710 5.564 7.419 9.274 0.526 1.051 2.103 4.205 6.308 8.410 10.513 0.763 1.526 3.051 6.102 9.153 12.204 15.255 7.0 0.355 0.709 1.418 2.837 4.255 5.674 7.092 0.450 0.900 1.799 3.598 5.397 7.196 8.995 0.706 1.412 2.823 5.647 8.470 11.294 14.117 8.0 0.285 0.569 1.139 2.277 3.416 4.555 5.693 0.401 0.802 1.605 3.209 4.814 6.418 8.023 0.663 1.327 2.653 5.307 7.960 10.614 13.267 9.0 0.237 0.474 0.948 1.897 2.845 3.794 4.742 0.368 0.736 1.472 2.945 4.417 5.889 7.361 0.630 1.260 2.521 5.041 7.562 10.083 12.604 10.0 0.203 0.407 0.813 1.626 2.439 3.252 4.065 0.345 0.689 1.378 2.756 4.134 5.513 6.891 0.603 1.207 2.414 4.827 7.241 9.654 12.068

IEEE EXTREMELY INVERSE

0.5 1.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 0.5 1.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 0.5 1.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0

IEEE VERY INVERSE

IEEE MODERATELY INVERSE

5-94

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS IEC CURVES

5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS

For European applications, the relay offers three standard curves defined in IEC 255-4 and British standard BS142. These are defined as IEC Curve A, IEC Curve B, and IEC Curve C. The formulae for these curves are:
K tr --------------------------------------------------------------------------2 T = TDM ( I I pickup ) E 1 , T RESET = TDM ( I I pickup ) 1 (EQ 5.9)

where:

T = operate time (in seconds), TDM = Multiplier setting, I = input current, Ipickup = Pickup Current setting, K, E = constants, tr = characteristic constant, and TRESET = reset time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET is Timed)

Table 513: IEC (BS) INVERSE TIME CURVE CONSTANTS


IEC (BS) CURVE SHAPE IEC Curve A (BS142) IEC Curve B (BS142) IEC Curve C (BS142) IEC Short Inverse K 0.140 13.500 80.000 0.050 E 0.020 1.000 2.000 0.040 TR 9.7 43.2 58.2 0.500

Table 514: IEC CURVE TRIP TIMES (IN SECONDS)


MULTIPLIER (TDM) IEC CURVE A 0.05 0.10 0.20 0.40 0.60 0.80 1.00 IEC CURVE B 0.05 0.10 0.20 0.40 0.60 0.80 1.00 IEC CURVE C 0.05 0.10 0.20 0.40 0.60 0.80 1.00 0.05 0.10 0.20 0.40 0.60 0.80 1.00 3.200 6.400 12.800 25.600 38.400 51.200 64.000 0.153 0.306 0.612 1.223 1.835 2.446 3.058 1.333 2.667 5.333 10.667 16.000 21.333 26.667 0.089 0.178 0.356 0.711 1.067 1.423 1.778 0.500 1.000 2.000 4.000 6.000 8.000 10.000 0.056 0.111 0.223 0.445 0.668 0.890 1.113 0.267 0.533 1.067 2.133 3.200 4.267 5.333 0.044 0.088 0.175 0.351 0.526 0.702 0.877 0.167 0.333 0.667 1.333 2.000 2.667 3.333 0.038 0.075 0.150 0.301 0.451 0.602 0.752 0.114 0.229 0.457 0.914 1.371 1.829 2.286 0.034 0.067 0.135 0.269 0.404 0.538 0.673 0.083 0.167 0.333 0.667 1.000 1.333 1.667 0.031 0.062 0.124 0.247 0.371 0.494 0.618 0.063 0.127 0.254 0.508 0.762 1.016 1.270 0.029 0.058 0.115 0.231 0.346 0.461 0.576 0.050 0.100 0.200 0.400 0.600 0.800 1.000 0.027 0.054 0.109 0.218 0.327 0.435 0.544 0.040 0.081 0.162 0.323 0.485 0.646 0.808 0.026 0.052 0.104 0.207 0.311 0.415 0.518 1.350 2.700 5.400 10.800 16.200 21.600 27.000 0.675 1.350 2.700 5.400 8.100 10.800 13.500 0.338 0.675 1.350 2.700 4.050 5.400 6.750 0.225 0.450 0.900 1.800 2.700 3.600 4.500 0.169 0.338 0.675 1.350 2.025 2.700 3.375 0.135 0.270 0.540 1.080 1.620 2.160 2.700 0.113 0.225 0.450 0.900 1.350 1.800 2.250 0.096 0.193 0.386 0.771 1.157 1.543 1.929 0.084 0.169 0.338 0.675 1.013 1.350 1.688 0.075 0.150 0.300 0.600 0.900 1.200 1.500 0.860 1.719 3.439 6.878 10.317 13.755 17.194 0.501 1.003 2.006 4.012 6.017 8.023 10.029 0.315 0.630 1.260 2.521 3.781 5.042 6.302 0.249 0.498 0.996 1.992 2.988 3.984 4.980 0.214 0.428 0.856 1.712 2.568 3.424 4.280 0.192 0.384 0.767 1.535 2.302 3.070 3.837 0.176 0.353 0.706 1.411 2.117 2.822 3.528 0.165 0.330 0.659 1.319 1.978 2.637 3.297 0.156 0.312 0.623 1.247 1.870 2.493 3.116 0.149 0.297 0.594 1.188 1.782 2.376 2.971 CURRENT ( I / Ipickup) 1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0

IEC SHORT TIME

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-95

5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS IAC CURVES: The curves for the General Electric type IAC relay family are derived from the formulae: D E B tr - T = TDM A + ----------------------------- + ------------------------------------- + ------------------------------------- , T RESET = TDM ------------------------------2 3 ( I I pkp ) C ( ( I I pkp ) C ) 2 ( ( I I pkp ) C ) ( I I pkp ) 1 where:

5 SETTINGS

(EQ 5.10)

T = operate time (in seconds), TDM = Multiplier setting, I = Input current, Ipkp = Pickup Current setting, A to E = constants, tr = characteristic constant, and TRESET = reset time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET is Timed)

Table 515: GE TYPE IAC INVERSE TIME CURVE CONSTANTS


IAC CURVE SHAPE IAC Extreme Inverse IAC Very Inverse IAC Inverse IAC Short Inverse A 0.0040 0.0900 0.2078 0.0428 B 0.6379 0.7955 0.8630 0.0609 C 0.6200 0.1000 0.8000 0.6200 D 1.7872 1.2885 0.4180 0.0010 E 0.2461 7.9586 0.1947 0.0221 TR 6.008 4.678 0.990 0.222

Table 516: IAC CURVE TRIP TIMES


MULTIPLIER (TDM)

CURRENT ( I / Ipickup) 1.5 1.699 3.398 6.796 13.591 20.387 27.183 33.979 1.451 2.901 5.802 11.605 17.407 23.209 29.012 0.578 1.155 2.310 4.621 6.931 9.242 11.552 0.072 0.143 0.286 0.573 0.859 1.145 1.431 2.0 0.749 1.498 2.997 5.993 8.990 11.987 14.983 0.656 1.312 2.624 5.248 7.872 10.497 13.121 0.375 0.749 1.499 2.997 4.496 5.995 7.494 0.047 0.095 0.190 0.379 0.569 0.759 0.948 3.0 0.303 0.606 1.212 2.423 3.635 4.846 6.058 0.269 0.537 1.075 2.150 3.225 4.299 5.374 0.266 0.532 1.064 2.128 3.192 4.256 5.320 0.035 0.070 0.140 0.279 0.419 0.559 0.699 4.0 0.178 0.356 0.711 1.422 2.133 2.844 3.555 0.172 0.343 0.687 1.374 2.061 2.747 3.434 0.221 0.443 0.885 1.770 2.656 3.541 4.426 0.031 0.061 0.123 0.245 0.368 0.490 0.613 5.0 0.123 0.246 0.491 0.983 1.474 1.966 2.457 0.133 0.266 0.533 1.065 1.598 2.131 2.663 0.196 0.392 0.784 1.569 2.353 3.138 3.922 0.028 0.057 0.114 0.228 0.341 0.455 0.569 6.0 0.093 0.186 0.372 0.744 1.115 1.487 1.859 0.113 0.227 0.453 0.906 1.359 1.813 2.266 0.180 0.360 0.719 1.439 2.158 2.878 3.597 0.027 0.054 0.108 0.217 0.325 0.434 0.542 7.0 0.074 0.149 0.298 0.595 0.893 1.191 1.488 0.101 0.202 0.405 0.810 1.215 1.620 2.025 0.168 0.337 0.674 1.348 2.022 2.695 3.369 0.026 0.052 0.105 0.210 0.314 0.419 0.524 8.0 0.062 0.124 0.248 0.495 0.743 0.991 1.239 0.093 0.186 0.372 0.745 1.117 1.490 1.862 0.160 0.320 0.640 1.280 1.921 2.561 3.201 0.026 0.051 0.102 0.204 0.307 0.409 0.511 9.0 0.053 0.106 0.212 0.424 0.636 0.848 1.060 0.087 0.174 0.349 0.698 1.046 1.395 1.744 0.154 0.307 0.614 1.229 1.843 2.457 3.072 0.025 0.050 0.100 0.200 0.301 0.401 0.501 10.0 0.046 0.093 0.185 0.370 0.556 0.741 0.926 0.083 0.165 0.331 0.662 0.992 1.323 1.654 0.148 0.297 0.594 1.188 1.781 2.375 2.969 0.025 0.049 0.099 0.197 0.296 0.394 0.493

IAC EXTREMELY INVERSE

0.5 1.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 0.5 1.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 IAC INVERSE 0.5 1.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 0.5 1.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0

IAC VERY INVERSE

IAC SHORT INVERSE

5-96

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS I2t CURVES: The curves for the I2t are derived from the formulae: 100 100 ---------------------------------------------------I I T = TDM --------------- 2 , T RESET = TDM --------------- 2 I pickup I pickup where:

5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS

(EQ 5.11)

T = Operate Time (sec.); TDM = Multiplier Setting; I = Input Current; Ipickup = Pickup Current Setting; TRESET = Reset Time in sec. (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET: Timed)

Table 517: I2T CURVE TRIP TIMES


MULTIPLIER (TDM) 0.01 0.10 1.00 10.00 100.00 600.00 CURRENT ( I / Ipickup) 1.5 0.44 4.44 44.44 444.44 4444.4 26666.7 2.0 0.25 2.50 25.00 250.00 2500.0 15000.0 3.0 0.11 1.11 11.11 111.11 1111.1 6666.7 4.0 0.06 0.63 6.25 62.50 625.00 3750.0 5.0 0.04 0.40 4.00 40.00 400.00 2400.0 6.0 0.03 0.28 2.78 27.78 277.78 1666.7 7.0 0.02 0.20 2.04 20.41 204.08 1224.5 8.0 0.02 0.16 1.56 15.63 156.25 937.50 9.0 0.01 0.12 1.23 12.35 123.46 740.74 10.0 0.01 0.10 1.00 10.00 100.00 600.00

FLEXCURVES: The custom FlexCurves are described in detail in the FlexCurves section of this chapter. The curve shapes for the FlexCurves are derived from the formulae: I T = TDM FlexCurve Time at --------------- I pickup I when --------------- 1.00 I pickup I when --------------- 0.98 I pickup
(EQ 5.12)

I T RESET = TDM FlexCurve Time at --------------- I pickup where:

(EQ 5.13)

T = Operate Time (sec.), TDM = Multiplier setting I = Input Current, Ipickup = Pickup Current setting TRESET = Reset Time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET: Timed)

DEFINITE TIME CURVE: The Definite Time curve shape operates as soon as the pickup level is exceeded for a specified period of time. The base definite time curve delay is in seconds. The curve multiplier of 0.00 to 600.00 makes this delay adjustable from instantaneous to 600.00 seconds in steps of 10 ms. T = TDM in seconds, when I > I pickup T RESET = TDM in seconds where: T = Operate Time (sec.), TDM = Multiplier setting I = Input Current, Ipickup = Pickup Current setting TRESET = Reset Time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET: Timed)
(EQ 5.14) (EQ 5.15)

RECLOSER CURVES: The G60 uses the FlexCurve feature to facilitate programming of 41 recloser curves. Please refer to the FlexCurve section in this chapter for additional details.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-97

5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS c) PHASE TIME OVERCURRENT (ANSI 51P)


PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) PHASE CURRENT PHASE TOC1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

5 SETTINGS

PHASE TOC1

PHASE TOC1 FUNCTION: Disabled


MESSAGE

PHASE TOC1 SIGNAL SOURCE: SRC 1 PHASE TOC1 INPUT: Phasor PHASE TOC1 PICKUP: 1.000 pu PHASE TOC1 CURVE: IEEE Mod Inv PHASE TOC1 TD MULTIPLIER: 1.00

Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4

MESSAGE

Range: Phasor, RMS

MESSAGE

Range: 0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE

Range: See Overcurrent Curve Types table

MESSAGE

Range: 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01

MESSAGE

PHASE TOC1 RESET: Instantaneous PHASE TOC1 VOLTAGE RESTRAINT: Disabled PHASE TOC1 BLOCK A: Off PHASE TOC1 BLOCK B: Off PHASE TOC1 BLOCK C: Off PHASE TOC1 TARGET: Self-reset PHASE TOC1 EVENTS: Disabled

Range: Instantaneous, Timed

MESSAGE

Range: Disabled, Enabled

MESSAGE

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled

MESSAGE

Range: Disabled, Enabled

The phase time overcurrent element can provide a desired time-delay operating characteristic versus the applied current or be used as a simple Definite Time element. The phase current input quantities may be programmed as fundamental phasor magnitude or total waveform RMS magnitude as required by the application. Two methods of resetting operation are available: Timed and Instantaneous (refer to the Inverse TOC Curves Characteristic sub-section earlier for details on curve setup, trip times and reset operation). When the element is blocked, the time accumulator will reset according to the reset characteristic. For example, if the element reset characteristic is set to Instantaneous and the element is blocked, the time accumulator will be cleared immediately. The PHASE TOC1 PICKUP setting can be dynamically reduced by a voltage restraint feature (when enabled). This is accomplished via the multipliers (Mvr) corresponding to the phase-phase voltages of the voltage restraint characteristic curve (see the figure below); the pickup level is calculated as Mvr times the PHASE TOC1 PICKUP setting. If the voltage restraint feature is disabled, the pickup level always remains at the setting value.

5-98

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS

Multiplier for Pickup Current

1.0 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3 0.2 0.1 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0

Phase-Phase Voltage VT Nominal Phase-phase Voltage


818784A4.CDR

Figure 554: PHASE TOC VOLTAGE RESTRAINT CHARACTERISTIC


SETTING PHASE TOC1 FUNCTION: Disabled=0 Enabled=1 SETTING PHASE TOC1 BLOCK-A : Off=0 SETTING PHASE TOC1 BLOCK-B: Off=0 SETTING PHASE TOC1 BLOCK-C: Off=0 SETTING PHASE TOC1 SOURCE: IA IB IC Seq=ABC Seq=ACB
RUN

5
SETTING PHASE TOC1 INPUT: PHASE TOC1 PICKUP: PHASE TOC1 CURVE: PHASE TOC1 TD MULTIPLIER: PHASE TOC1 RESET:
AND
RUN

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND PHASE TOC1 A PKP PHASE TOC1 A DPO PHASE TOC1 A OP PHASE TOC1 B PKP PHASE TOC1 B DPO PHASE TOC1 B OP PHASE TOC1 C PKP PHASE TOC1 C DPO PHASE TOC1 C OP
OR OR

IA

PICKUP t

VAB VBC VCA

VAC VBA VCB

Set Calculate Multiplier Set Calculate Multiplier Set Calculate Multiplier

MULTIPLY INPUTS Set Pickup Multiplier-Phase A Set Pickup Multiplier-Phase B Set Pickup Multiplier-Phase C
AND
RUN

RUN

IB

PICKUP t

RUN

AND

RUN

IC

PICKUP t

SETTING PHASE TOC1 VOLT RESTRAINT: Enabled

PHASE TOC1 PKP PHASE TOC1 OP PHASE TOC1 DPO


827072A4.CDR

AND

Figure 555: PHASE TOC1 SCHEME LOGIC

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-99

5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS d) PHASE INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT (ANSI 50P)


PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) PHASE CURRENT PHASE IOC 1(2) Range: Disabled, Enabled

5 SETTINGS

PHASE IOC1

PHASE IOC1 FUNCTION: Disabled


MESSAGE

PHASE IOC1 SIGNAL SOURCE: SRC 1 PHASE IOC1 PICKUP: 1.000 pu PHASE IOC1 PICKUP DELAY: 0.00 s PHASE IOC1 RESET DELAY: 0.00 s PHASE IOC1 BLOCK A: Off PHASE IOC1 BLOCK B: Off PHASE IOC1 BLOCK C: Off PHASE IOC1 TARGET: Self-reset PHASE IOC1 EVENTS: Disabled

Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4

MESSAGE

Range: 0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE

Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01

MESSAGE

Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01

MESSAGE

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

Range: FlexLogic operand

5
SETTING PHASE IOC1 FUNCTION: Enabled = 1 Disabled = 0 SETTING PHASE IOC1 SOURCE: IA IB IC SETTING PHASE IOC1 BLOCK-A: Off = 0 SETTING PHASE IOC1 BLOCK-B: Off = 0 SETTING PHASE IOC1 BLOCK-C: Off = 0

MESSAGE

Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled

MESSAGE

Range: Disabled, Enabled

The phase instantaneous overcurrent element may be used as an instantaneous element with no intentional delay or as a Definite Time element. The input current is the fundamental phasor magnitude.
SETTING PHASE IOC1 PICKUP: RUN IA PICKUP AND RUN IB PICKUP AND RUN IC PICKUP tPKP tRST tPKP tRST SETTINGS PHASE IOC1 PICKUPDELAY: PHASE IOC1 RESET DELAY: tPKP tRST FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS PHASE IOC1 A PKP PHASE IOC1 A DPO PHASE IOC1 B PKP PHASE IOC1 B DPO PHASE IOC1 C PKP PHASE IOC1 C DPO PHASE IOC1 A OP PHASE IOC1 B OP PHASE IOC1 C OP OR OR AND PHASE IOC1 PKP PHASE IOC1 OP PHASE IOC1 DPO

AND

827033A6.VSD

Figure 556: PHASE IOC1 SCHEME LOGIC

5-100

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS e) PHASE DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT (ANSI 67P)


PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) PHASE CURRENT

5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS

PHASE DIRECTIONAL 1

PHASE DIRECTIONAL 1
MESSAGE

PHASE DIR 1 FUNCTION: Disabled PHASE DIR 1 SIGNAL SOURCE: SRC 1 PHASE DIR 1 BLOCK: Off PHASE DIR 1 ECA: 30 PHASE DIR POL V1 THRESHOLD: 0.700 pu PHASE DIR 1 BLOCK WHEN V MEM EXP: No PHASE DIR 1 TARGET: Self-reset PHASE DIR 1 EVENTS: Disabled

Range: Disabled, Enabled

Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4

MESSAGE

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

Range: 0 to 359 in steps of 1

MESSAGE

Range: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE

Range: No, Yes

MESSAGE

Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled

MESSAGE

Range: Disabled, Enabled

The phase directional elements (one for each of phases A, B, and C) determine the phase current flow direction for steady state and fault conditions and can be used to control the operation of the phase overcurrent elements via the BLOCK inputs of these elements.
OU TP S UT 0

90

VAG (Unfaulted)

Fault angle set at 60 Lag VPol

VAG(Faulted)

IA

ECA set at 30 VBC

VBC VCG VBG +90

Phasors for Phase A Polarization: VPol = VBC (1/_ECA) = polarizing voltage IA = operating current ECA = Element Characteristic Angle at 30

827800A2.CDR

Figure 557: PHASE A DIRECTIONAL POLARIZATION This element is intended to apply a block signal to an overcurrent element to prevent an operation when current is flowing in a particular direction. The direction of current flow is determined by measuring the phase angle between the current from the phase CTs and the line-line voltage from the VTs, based on the 90 or quadrature connection. If there is a requirement to supervise overcurrent elements for flows in opposite directions, such as can happen through a bus-tie breaker, two phase directional elements should be programmed with opposite ECA settings.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-101

5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS

5 SETTINGS

To increase security for three phase faults very close to the VTs used to measure the polarizing voltage, a voltage memory feature is incorporated. This feature stores the polarizing voltage the moment before the voltage collapses, and uses it to determine direction. The voltage memory remains valid for one second after the voltage has collapsed. The main component of the phase directional element is the phase angle comparator with two inputs: the operating signal (phase current) and the polarizing signal (the line voltage, shifted in the leading direction by the characteristic angle, ECA). The following table shows the operating and polarizing signals used for phase directional control:
PHASE A B C OPERATING SIGNAL Angle of IA Angle of IB Angle of IC POLARIZING SIGNAL Vpol ABC PHASE SEQUENCE Angle of VBC (1ECA) Angle of VCA (1ECA) Angle of VAB (1ECA) ACB PHASE SEQUENCE Angle of VCB (1ECA) Angle of VAC 1ECA) Angle of VBA (1ECA)

MODE OF OPERATION: When the function is Disabled, or the operating current is below 5% CT nominal, the element output is 0. When the function is Enabled, the operating current is above 5% CT nominal, and the polarizing voltage is above the set threshold, the element output is dependent on the phase angle between the operating and polarizing signals: The element output is logic 0 when the operating current is within polarizing voltage 90. For all other angles, the element output is logic 1. Once the voltage memory has expired, the phase overcurrent elements under directional control can be set to block or trip on overcurrent as follows: When BLOCK WHEN V MEM EXP is set to Yes, the directional element will block the operation of any phase overcurrent element under directional control when voltage memory expires. When BLOCK WHEN V MEM EXP is set to No, the directional element allows tripping of phase overcurrent elements under directional control when voltage memory expires. In all cases, directional blocking will be permitted to resume when the polarizing voltage becomes greater than the polarizing voltage threshold. SETTINGS: PHASE DIR 1 SIGNAL SOURCE: This setting is used to select the source for the operating and polarizing signals. The operating current for the phase directional element is the phase current for the selected current source. The polarizing voltage is the line voltage from the phase VTs, based on the 90 or quadrature connection and shifted in the leading direction by the element characteristic angle (ECA). PHASE DIR 1 ECA: This setting is used to select the element characteristic angle, i.e. the angle by which the polarizing voltage is shifted in the leading direction to achieve dependable operation. In the design of the UR-series elements, a block is applied to an element by asserting logic 1 at the blocking input. This element should be programmed via the ECA setting so that the output is logic 1 for current in the non-tripping direction. PHASE DIR 1 POL V THRESHOLD: This setting is used to establish the minimum level of voltage for which the phase angle measurement is reliable. The setting is based on VT accuracy. The default value is "0.700 pu". PHASE DIR 1 BLOCK WHEN V MEM EXP: This setting is used to select the required operation upon expiration of voltage memory. When set to "Yes", the directional element blocks the operation of any phase overcurrent element under directional control, when voltage memory expires; when set to "No", the directional element allows tripping of phase overcurrent elements under directional control. The Phase Directional element responds to the forward load current. In the case of a following reverse fault, the element needs some time in the order of 8 ms to establish a blocking signal. Some protection elements such as instantaneous overcurrent may respond to reverse faults before the blocking signal is established. Therefore, a coordination time of at least 10 ms must be added to all the instantaneous protection elements under the supervision of the Phase Directional element. If current reversal is of a concern, a longer delay in the order of 20 ms may be needed.

NOTE

5-102

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS

SETTING PHASE DIR 1 FUNCTION: Disabled=0 Enabled=1 SETTING PHASE DIR 1 BLOCK: Off=0 SETTING PHASE DIR 1 SOURCE: IA Seq=ABC VBC Seq=ACB VCB SETTING PHASE DIR 1 POL V THRESHOLD: -Use V when V Min -Use V memory when V < Min V MINIMUM OR MEMORY TIMER 1 cycle 1 sec AND I 0.05 pu AND

AND

SETTING PHASE DIR 1 ECA: RUN 1 I 0 Vpol OR


FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

PH DIR1 BLK
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

PH DIR1 BLK A

SETTING PHASE DIR 1 BLOCK OC WHEN V MEM EXP: No Yes

USE ACTUAL VOLTAGE

USE MEMORIZED VOLTAGE

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

PHASE B LOGIC SIMILAR TO PHASE A

PH DIR1 BLK B

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

PHASE C LOGIC SIMILAR TO PHASE A


Figure 558: PHASE DIRECTIONAL SCHEME LOGIC

PH DIR1 BLK C 827078A6.CDR

5.5.7 NEUTRAL CURRENT a) MAIN MENU


PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) NEUTRAL CURRENT

NEUTRAL CURRENT

NEUTRAL TOC1 NEUTRAL IOC1 NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL OC1 NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL OC2

See page 5104. See page 5105. See page 5106. See page 5106.

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-103

5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS b) NEUTRAL TIME OVERCURRENT (ANSI 51N)


PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) NEUTRAL CURRENT NEUTRAL TOC1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

5 SETTINGS

NEUTRAL TOC1

NEUTRAL TOC1 FUNCTION: Disabled


MESSAGE

NEUTRAL TOC1 SIGNAL SOURCE: SRC 1 NEUTRAL TOC1 INPUT: Phasor NEUTRAL TOC1 PICKUP: 1.000 pu NEUTRAL TOC1 CURVE: IEEE Mod Inv NEUTRAL TOC1 TD MULTIPLIER: 1.00

Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4

MESSAGE

Range: Phasor, RMS

MESSAGE

Range: 0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE

Range: See OVERCURRENT CURVE TYPES table

MESSAGE

Range: 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01

MESSAGE

NEUTRAL TOC1 RESET: Instantaneous NEUTRAL TOC1 BLOCK: Off NEUTRAL TOC1 TARGET: Self-reset NEUTRAL TOC1 EVENTS: Disabled

Range: Instantaneous, Timed

MESSAGE

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled

MESSAGE

Range: Disabled, Enabled

The Neutral Time Overcurrent element can provide a desired time-delay operating characteristic versus the applied current or be used as a simple Definite Time element. The neutral current input value is a quantity calculated as 3Io from the phase currents and may be programmed as fundamental phasor magnitude or total waveform RMS magnitude as required by the application. Two methods of resetting operation are available: Timed and Instantaneous (refer to the Inverse TOC Curve Characteristics section for details on curve setup, trip times and reset operation). When the element is blocked, the time accumulator will reset according to the reset characteristic. For example, if the element reset characteristic is set to Instantaneous and the element is blocked, the time accumulator will be cleared immediately.
SETTINGS NEUTRAL TOC1 INPUT: NEUTRAL TOC1 PICKUP: NEUTRAL TOC1 CURVE: NEUTRAL TOC1 TD MULTIPLIER: NEUTRAL TOC 1 RESET: IN PICKUP RUN
t I

SETTING NEUTRAL TOC1 FUNCTION: Disabled = 0 Enabled = 1

SETTING NEUTRAL TOC1 SOURCE: IN SETTING NEUTRAL TOC1 BLOCK: Off = 0

AND

FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS NEUTRAL TOC1 PKP NEUTRAL TOC1 DPO NEUTRAL TOC1 OP

827034A3.VSD

Figure 559: NEUTRAL TOC1 SCHEME LOGIC

5-104

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS c) NEUTRAL INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT (ANSI 50N)


PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) NEUTRAL CURRENT

5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS

NEUTRAL IOC1

NEUTRAL IOC1

NEUTRAL IOC1 FUNCTION: Disabled


MESSAGE

Range: Disabled, Enabled

NEUTRAL IOC1 SIGNAL SOURCE: SRC 1 NEUTRAL IOC1 PICKUP: 1.000 pu NEUTRAL IOC1 PICKUP DELAY: 0.00 s NEUTRAL IOC1 RESET DELAY: 0.00 s NEUTRAL IOC1 BLOCK: Off NEUTRAL IOC1 TARGET: Self-reset NEUTRAL IOC1 EVENTS: Disabled

Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4

MESSAGE

Range: 0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE

Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01

MESSAGE

Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01

MESSAGE

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled

MESSAGE

Range: Disabled, Enabled

The Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent element may be used as an instantaneous function with no intentional delay or as a Definite Time function. The element essentially responds to the magnitude of a neutral current fundamental frequency phasor calculated from the phase currents. A positive-sequence restraint is applied for better performance. A small portion (6.25%) of the positive-sequence current magnitude is subtracted from the zero-sequence current magnitude when forming the operating quantity of the element as follows: I op = 3 ( I_0 K I_1 ) where K = 1 16
(EQ 5.16)

The positive-sequence restraint allows for more sensitive settings by counterbalancing spurious zero-sequence currents resulting from: system unbalances under heavy load conditions transformation errors of current transformers (CTs) during double-line and three-phase faults switch-off transients during double-line and three-phase faults

The positive-sequence restraint must be considered when testing for pickup accuracy and response time (multiple of pickup). The operating quantity depends on how test currents are injected into the relay (single-phase injection: I op = 0.9375 I injected ; three-phase pure zero-sequence injection: I op = 3 I injected ).
SETTING
NEUTRAL IOC1 FUNCTION:

SETTINGS SETTING
NEUTRAL IOC1 PICKUP:

Disabled=0 Enabled=1 SETTING


NEUTRAL IOC1 BLOCK:

NEUTRAL IOC1 PICKUP DELAY : NEUTRAL IOC1 RESET DELAY : tPKP tRST

FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS NEUTRAL IOC1 PKP NEUTRAL IOC1 DPO NEUTRAL IOC1 OP

AND

RUN 3( I_0 - K I_1 ) PICKUP

Off=0 SETTING
NEUTRAL IOC1 SOURCE:

I_0

827035A4.CDR

Figure 560: NEUTRAL IOC1 SCHEME LOGIC

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-105

5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS d) NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT (ANSI 67N)


PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) NEUTRAL CURRENT

5 SETTINGS

NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL OC1(2)

NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL OC1


MESSAGE

NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FUNCTION: Disabled NEUTRAL DIR OC1 SOURCE: SRC 1 NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POLARIZING: Voltage NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POL VOLT: Calculated V0 NEUTRAL DIR OC1 OP CURR: Calculated 3I0 NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POSSEQ RESTRAINT: 0.063 NEUTRAL DIR OC1 OFFSET: 0.00 NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD ECA: 75 Lag NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD LIMIT ANGLE: 90 NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD PICKUP: 0.050 pu NEUTRAL DIR OC1 REV LIMIT ANGLE: 90 NEUTRAL DIR OC1 REV PICKUP: 0.050 pu NEUTRAL DIR OC1 BLK: Off NEUTRAL DIR OC1 TARGET: Self-reset NEUTRAL DIR OC1 EVENTS: Disabled

Range: Disabled, Enabled

Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4

MESSAGE

Range: Voltage, Current, Dual

MESSAGE

Range: Calculated V0, Measured VX

MESSAGE

Range: Calculated 3I0, Measured IG

MESSAGE

Range: 0.000 to 0.500 in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE

Range: 0.00 to 250.00 in steps of 0.01

MESSAGE

Range: 90 to 90 in steps of 1

MESSAGE

Range: 40 to 90 in steps of 1

MESSAGE

Range: 0.002 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE

Range: 40 to 90 in steps of 1

MESSAGE

Range: 0.002 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled

MESSAGE

Range: Disabled, Enabled

There are two Neutral Directional Overcurrent protection elements available. The element provides both forward and reverse fault direction indications the NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD and NEUTRAL DIR OC1 REV operands, respectively. The output operand is asserted if the magnitude of the operating current is above a pickup level (overcurrent unit) and the fault direction is seen as forward or reverse, respectively (directional unit). The overcurrent unit responds to the magnitude of a fundamental frequency phasor of the either the neutral current calculated from the phase currents or the ground current. There are two separate pickup settings for the forward- and reverselooking functions, respectively. If set to use the calculated 3I_0, the element applies a positive-sequence restraint for better performance: a small user-programmable portion of the positivesequence current magnitude is subtracted from the zero-sequence current magnitude when forming the operating quantity. I op = 3 ( I_0 K I_1 )
(EQ 5.17)

The positive-sequence restraint allows for more sensitive settings by counterbalancing spurious zero-sequence currents resulting from: System unbalances under heavy load conditions.

5-106

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS

Transformation errors of current transformers (CTs) during double-line and three-phase faults. Switch-off transients during double-line and three-phase faults.

The positive-sequence restraint must be considered when testing for pickup accuracy and response time (multiple of pickup). The operating quantity depends on the way the test currents are injected into the relay (single-phase injection: Iop = (1 K) Iinjected ; three-phase pure zero-sequence injection: Iop = 3 Iinjected). The positive-sequence restraint is removed for low currents. If the positive-sequence current is below 0.8 pu, the restraint is removed by changing the constant K to zero. This facilitates better response to high-resistance faults when the unbalance is very small and there is no danger of excessive CT errors as the current is low. The directional unit uses the zero-sequence current (I_0) or ground current (IG) for fault direction discrimination and may be programmed to use either zero-sequence voltage (Calculated V0 or Measured VX), ground current (IG), or both for polarizing. The following tables define the neutral directional overcurrent element. Table 518: QUANTITIES FOR "CALCULATED 3I0" CONFIGURATION
DIRECTIONAL UNIT POLARIZING MODE Voltage Current DIRECTION Forward Reverse Forward Reverse Forward Dual Reverse IG IG V_0 + Z_offset I_0 or I_0 COMPARED PHASORS V_0 + Z_offset I_0 V_0 + Z_offset I_0 IG IG V_0 + Z_offset I_0 or I_0 I_0 1ECA I_0 1ECA I_0 1ECA I_0 I_0 I_0 1ECA Iop = 3 (|I_0| K |I_1|) if |I1| > 0.8 pu Iop = 3 (|I_0|) if |I1| 0.8 pu OVERCURRENT UNIT

Table 519: QUANTITIES FOR "MEASURED IG" CONFIGURATION


DIRECTIONAL UNIT POLARIZING MODE Voltage DIRECTION Forward Reverse COMPARED PHASORS V_0 + Z_offset IG/3 V_0 + Z_offset IG/3 IG 1ECA IG 1ECA OVERCURRENT UNIT Iop = |IG|

where:

1 V_0 = -- ( VAG + VBG + VCG ) = zero sequence voltage , 3 1 1 I_0 = -- IN = -- ( IA + IB + IC ) = zero sequence current , 3 3 ECA = element characteristic angle and IG = ground current

When NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POL VOLT is set to Measured VX, one-third of this voltage is used in place of V_0. The following figure explains the usage of the voltage polarized directional unit of the element. The figure below shows the voltage-polarized phase angle comparator characteristics for a phase A to ground fault, with: ECA = 90 (element characteristic angle = centerline of operating characteristic) FWD LA = 80 (forward limit angle = the angular limit with the ECA for operation) REV LA = 80 (reverse limit angle = the angular limit with the ECA for operation) The above bias should be taken into account when using the neutral directional overcurrent element to directionalize other protection elements.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-107

5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS

5 SETTINGS

REV LA line

3V_0 line VAG


(reference)

FWD LA line

REV Operating Region

FWD Operating Region

LA ECA

LA 3I_0 line

ECA line ECA line

3I_0 line VCG LA

LA

VBG

REV LA line

3V_0 line

FWD LA line
827805A1.CDR

Figure 561: NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL VOLTAGE-POLARIZED CHARACTERISTICS NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POLARIZING: This setting selects the polarizing mode for the directional unit. If Voltage polarizing is selected, the element uses the zero-sequence voltage angle for polarization. The user can use either the zero-sequence voltage V_0 calculated from the phase voltages, or the zero-sequence voltage supplied externally as the auxiliary voltage Vx, both from the NEUTRAL DIR OC1 SOURCE. The calculated V_0 can be used as polarizing voltage only if the voltage transformers are connected in Wye. The auxiliary voltage can be used as the polarizing voltage provided SYSTEM SETUP AC INPUTS VOLTAGE BANK AUXILIARY VT CONNECTION is set to Vn and the auxiliary voltage is connected to a zero-sequence voltage source (such as open delta connected secondary of VTs). The zero-sequence (V_0) or auxiliary voltage (Vx), accordingly, must be higher than 0.02 pu nominal voltage to be validated as a polarizing signal. If the polarizing signal is invalid, neither forward nor reverse indication is given. If Current polarizing is selected, the element uses the ground current angle connected externally and configured under NEUTRAL OC1 SOURCE for polarization. The Ground CT must be connected between the ground and neutral point of an adequate local source of ground current. The ground current must be higher than 0.05 pu to be validated as a polarizing signal. If the polarizing signal is not valid, neither forward nor reverse indication is given. For a choice of current polarizing, it is recommended that the polarizing signal be analyzed to ensure that a known direction is maintained irrespective of the fault location. For example, if using an autotransformer neutral current as a polarizing source, it should be ensured that a reversal of the ground current does not occur for a high-side fault. The low-side system impedance should be assumed minimal when checking for this condition. A similar situation arises for a Wye/Delta/Wye transformer, where current in one transformer winding neutral may reverse when faults on both sides of the transformer are considered. If "Dual" polarizing is selected, the element performs both directional comparisons as described above. A given direction is confirmed if either voltage or current comparators indicate so. If a conflicting (simultaneous forward and reverse) indication occurs, the forward direction overrides the reverse direction.

NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POL VOLT: Selects the polarizing voltage used by the directional unit when "Voltage" or "Dual" polarizing mode is set. The polarizing voltage can be programmed to be either the zero-sequence voltage calculated from the phase voltages ("Calculated V0") or supplied externally as an auxiliary voltage ("Measured VX"). NEUTRAL DIR OC1 OP CURR: This setting indicates whether the 3I_0 current calculated from the phase currents, or the ground current shall be used by this protection. This setting acts as a switch between the neutral and ground

5-108

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS

modes of operation (67N and 67G). If set to Calculated 3I0 the element uses the phase currents and applies the positive-sequence restraint; if set to Measured IG the element uses ground current supplied to the ground CT of the CT bank configured as NEUTRAL DIR OC1 SOURCE. If this setting is Measured IG, then the NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POLARIZING setting must be Voltage, as it is not possible to use the ground current as an operating and polarizing signal simultaneously. NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POS-SEQ RESTRAINT: This setting controls the amount of the positive-sequence restraint. Set to 0.063 for backward compatibility with firmware revision 3.40 and older. Set to zero to remove the restraint. Set higher if large system unbalances or poor CT performance are expected. NEUTRAL DIR OC1 OFFSET: This setting specifies the offset impedance used by this protection. The primary application for the offset impedance is to guarantee correct identification of fault direction on series compensated lines. In regular applications, the offset impedance ensures proper operation even if the zero-sequence voltage at the relaying point is very small. If this is the intent, the offset impedance shall not be larger than the zero-sequence impedance of the protected circuit. Practically, it shall be several times smaller. The offset impedance shall be entered in secondary ohms. NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD ECA: This setting defines the characteristic angle (ECA) for the forward direction in the "Voltage" polarizing mode. The "Current" polarizing mode uses a fixed ECA of 0. The ECA in the reverse direction is the angle set for the forward direction shifted by 180. NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD LIMIT ANGLE: This setting defines a symmetrical (in both directions from the ECA) limit angle for the forward direction. NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD PICKUP: This setting defines the pickup level for the overcurrent unit of the element in the forward direction. When selecting this setting it must be kept in mind that the design uses a positive-sequence restraint technique for the Calculated 3I0 mode of operation. NEUTRAL DIR OC1 REV LIMIT ANGLE: This setting defines a symmetrical (in both directions from the ECA) limit angle for the reverse direction. NEUTRAL DIR OC1 REV PICKUP: This setting defines the pickup level for the overcurrent unit of the element in the reverse direction. When selecting this setting it must be kept in mind that the design uses a positive-sequence restraint technique for the Calculated 3I0 mode of operation. Proper application of this element requires that the operating current and the polarizing voltage (or current) be measured from the same side of the transformer.
NOTE

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-109

5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS

5 SETTINGS

SETTING NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD PICKUP: NEUTRAL DIR OC1 OP CURR: SETTING NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FUNCTION: Disabled=0 Enabled=1 SETTING NEUTRAL DIR OC1 BLK: Off=0 SETTING NEUTRAL DIR OC1 SOURCE: NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POL VOLT: NEUTRAL DIR OC1 OP CURR: Measured VX Calculated V_0 Zero Seq Crt (I_0) Ground Crt (IG) NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POSSEQ RESTRAINT: RUN 3( I_0 - K I_1 ) PICKUP OR IG PICKUP

AND

AND AND

SETTINGS NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD ECA: NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD LIMIT ANGLE: NEUTRAL DIR OC1 REV LIMIT ANGLE: NEUTRAL DIR OC1 OFFSET: RUN FLEXLOGIC OPERAND AND NEUTRAL DIR OC1 FWD

}
IG 0.05 pu AND

FWD

OR AND 1.25 cy 1.5 cy

}
OR OR

FWD REV

-3V_0 3I_0 REV

Voltage Polarization SETTING NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POLARIZING: Voltage Current Dual NOTE: 1) CURRENT POLARIZING IS POSSIBLE ONLY IN RELAYS WITH THE GROUND CURRENT INPUTS CONNECTED TO AN ADEQUATE CURRENT POLARIZING SOURCE 2) GROUND CURRENT CAN NOT BE USED FOR POLARIZATION AND OPERATION SIMULTANEOUSLY 3) POSITIVE SEQUENCE RESTRAINT IS NOT APPLIED WHEN I_1 IS BELOW 0.8pu Current Polarization REV OR RUN FWD

SETTING NEUTRAL DIR OC1 REV PICKUP: NEUTRAL DIR OC1 OP CURR: NEUTRAL DIR OC1 POSSEQ RESTRAINT: RUN 3( I_0 - K I_1 ) PICKUP OR IG PICKUP 827077AB.CDR

AND

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND NEUTRAL DIR OC1 REV

Figure 562: NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT LOGIC 5.5.8 GROUND CURRENT a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) GROUND CURRENT

GROUND CURRENT

GROUND TOC1 GROUND IOC1 RESTRICTED GROUND FAULT 1

MESSAGE

See page 5111. See page 5112. See page 5113.

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

RESTRICTED GROUND FAULT 4

The G60 relay contains one Ground Time Overcurrent, one Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent, and four Restricted Ground Fault elements. Refer to Inverse TOC Curve Characteristics on page 593 for additional information.

5-110

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS b) GROUND TIME OVERCURRENT (ANSI 51G)


PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) GROUND CURRENT

5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS

GROUND TOC1

GROUND TOC1

GROUND TOC1 FUNCTION: Disabled


MESSAGE

Range: Disabled, Enabled

GROUND TOC1 SIGNAL SOURCE: SRC 1 GROUND TOC1 INPUT: Phasor GROUND TOC1 PICKUP: 1.000 pu GROUND TOC1 CURVE: IEEE Mod Inv GROUND TOC1 TD MULTIPLIER: 1.00

Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4

MESSAGE

Range: Phasor, RMS

MESSAGE

Range: 0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE

Range: see the Overcurrent Curve Types table

MESSAGE

Range: 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01

MESSAGE

GROUND TOC1 RESET: Instantaneous GROUND TOC1 BLOCK: Off GROUND TOC1 TARGET: Self-reset GROUND TOC1 EVENTS: Disabled

Range: Instantaneous, Timed

MESSAGE

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled

MESSAGE

Range: Disabled, Enabled

This element can provide a desired time-delay operating characteristic versus the applied current or be used as a simple Definite Time element. The ground current input value is the quantity measured by the ground input CT and is the fundamental phasor or RMS magnitude. Two methods of resetting operation are available; Timed and Instantaneous (refer to the Inverse Time Overcurrent Curve Characteristics section for details). When the element is blocked, the time accumulator will reset according to the reset characteristic. For example, if the element reset characteristic is set to Instantaneous and the element is blocked, the time accumulator will be cleared immediately. These elements measure the current that is connected to the ground channel of a CT/VT module. This channel may be equipped with a standard or sensitive input. The conversion range of a standard channel is from 0.02 to 46 times the CT rating. The conversion range of a sensitive channel is from 0.002 to 4.6 times the CT rating.
SETTINGS GROUND TOC1 INPUT: GROUND TOC1 PICKUP: GROUND TOC1 CURVE: GROUND TOC1 TD MULTIPLIER: GROUND TOC 1 RESET: RUN IG PICKUP t I SETTING GROUND TOC1 BLOCK: Off = 0

NOTE

SETTING GROUND TOC1 FUNCTION: Disabled = 0 Enabled = 1

SETTING GROUND TOC1 SOURCE: IG

AND

FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS GROUND TOC1 PKP GROUND TOC1 DPO GROUND TOC1 OP

827036A3.VSD

Figure 563: GROUND TOC1 SCHEME LOGIC

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-111

5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS c) GROUND INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT (ANSI 50G)


PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) GROUND CURRENT GROUND IOC1 Range: Disabled, Enabled

5 SETTINGS

GROUND IOC1

GROUND IOC1 FUNCTION: Disabled


MESSAGE

GROUND IOC1 SIGNAL SOURCE: SRC 1 GROUND IOC1 PICKUP: 1.000 pu GROUND IOC1 PICKUP DELAY: 0.00 s GROUND IOC1 RESET DELAY: 0.00 s GROUND IOC1 BLOCK: Off GROUND IOC1 TARGET: Self-reset GROUND IOC1 EVENTS: Disabled

Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4

MESSAGE

Range: 0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE

Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01

MESSAGE

Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01

MESSAGE

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled

MESSAGE

Range: Disabled, Enabled

The Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent element may be used as an instantaneous element with no intentional delay or as a Definite Time element. The ground current input is the quantity measured by the ground input CT and is the fundamental phasor magnitude.
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS GROUND IOC1 PKP GROUND IOIC DPO GROUND IOC1 OP

SETTING GROUND IOC1 FUNCTION: Disabled = 0 Enabled = 1 SETTING GROUND IOC1 SOURCE: IG SETTING GROUND IOC1 BLOCK: Off = 0

AND

SETTING GROUND IOC1 PICKUP: RUN IG PICKUP

SETTINGS GROUND IOC1 PICKUP DELAY: GROUND IOC1 RESET DELAY: tPKP tRST

827037A4.VSD

Figure 564: GROUND IOC1 SCHEME LOGIC These elements measure the current that is connected to the ground channel of a CT/VT module. This channel may be equipped with a standard or sensitive input. The conversion range of a standard channel is from 0.02 to 46 times the CT rating. The conversion range of a sensitive channel is from 0.002 to 4.6 times the CT rating.

NOTE

5-112

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS d) RESTRICTED GROUND FAULT (ANSI 87G)


PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) GROUND CURRENT

5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS

RESTRICTED GROUND FAULT 1(4)

RESTRICTED GROUND FAULT 1


MESSAGE

RESTD GND FT1 FUNCTION: Disabled RESTD GND FT1 SOURCE: SRC 1 RESTD GND FT1 PICKUP: 0.080 pu RESTD GND FT1 SLOPE: 40% RESTD GND FT1 PICKUP DELAY: 0.10 s RESTD GND FT1 RESET DELAY: 0.00 s RESTD GND FT1 BLOCK: Off RESTD GND FT1 TARGET: Self-reset RESTD GND FT1 EVENTS: Disabled

Range: Disabled, Enabled

Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4

MESSAGE

Range: 0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE

Range: 0 to 100% in steps of 1

MESSAGE

Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01

MESSAGE

Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01

MESSAGE

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled

MESSAGE

Range: Disabled, Enabled

Restricted Ground Fault (RGF) protection provides sensitive ground fault detection for low-magnitude fault currents, primarily faults close to the neutral point of a Wye-connected winding. An internal ground fault on an impedance grounded Wye winding will produce a fault current dependent on the ground impedance value and the fault position on the winding with respect to the neutral point. The resultant primary current will be negligible for faults on the lower 30% of the winding since the fault voltage is not the system voltage, but rather the result of the transformation ratio between the primary windings and the percentage of shorted turns on the secondary. Therefore, the resultant differential currents may be below the slope threshold of the main differential element and the fault could go undetected. Application of the RGF protection extends the coverage towards the neutral point (see the RGF and Percent Differential Zones of Protection diagram).
WINDING

35%

Rg

RGF ZONE

DIFFERENTIAL ZONE

842731A1.CDR

Figure 565: RGF AND PERCENT DIFFERENTIAL ZONES OF PROTECTION This protection is often applied to transformers having impedance-grounded Wye windings. The element may also be applied to the stator winding of a generator having the neutral point grounded with a CT installed in the grounding path, or the ground current obtained by external summation of the neutral-side stator CTs. The Typical Applications of RGF Protection diagram explains the basic application and wiring rules.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-113

5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS

5 SETTINGS

(A) Transformer
Transformer Winding IA

(C) Stator
Stator Winding IA

IB

IB

IC

IC

IG

IG

(B) Transformer in a Breaker-and-a-Half


Transformer Winding IA

1 IA

1 IB

1 IC

(D) Stator without a Ground CT


Stator Winding

IA

IB

IB

IC

IC

IG 2

IA 2

IB 2

IC

IG

842732A1.CDR

Figure 566: TYPICAL APPLICATIONS OF RGF PROTECTION The relay incorporates low-impedance RGF protection. The low-impedance form of the RGF faces potential stability problems. An external phase-to-phase fault is an ultimate case. Ideally, there is neither ground (IG) nor neutral (IN = IA + IB + IC) current present. If one or more of the phase CTs saturate, a spurious neutral current is seen by the relay. This is similar to a single infeed situation and may be mistaken for an internal fault. Similar difficulties occur in a breaker-and-a-half application of the RGF, where any through fault with a weak infeed from the winding itself may cause problems. The UR uses a novel definition of the restraining signal to cope with the above stability problems while providing for fast and sensitive protection. Even with the improved definition of the restraining signal, the breaker-and-a-half application of the RGF must be approached with care, and is not recommended unless the settings are carefully selected to avoid maloperation due to CT saturation. The differential current is produced as an unbalance current between the ground current of the neutral CT (IG) and the neutral current derived from the phase CTs (IN = IA + IB + IC): Igd = IG + IN = IG + IA + IB + IC
(EQ 5.18)

The relay automatically matches the CT ratios between the phase and ground CTs by re-scaling the ground CT to the phase CT level. The restraining signal ensures stability of protection during CT saturation conditions and is produced as a maximum value between three components related to zero, negative, and positive-sequence currents of the three phase CTs as follows: Irest = max ( IR0, IR1, IR2 )
(EQ 5.19)

The zero-sequence component of the restraining signal (IR0) is meant to provide maximum restraint during external ground faults, and therefore is calculated as a vectorial difference of the ground and neutral currents: IR0 = IG IN = IG ( IA + IB + IC )
(EQ 5.20)

The equation above brings an advantage of generating the restraining signal of twice the external ground fault current, while reducing the restraint below the internal ground fault current. The negative-sequence component of the restraining signal (IR2) is meant to provide maximum restraint during external phase-to-phase faults and is calculated as follows:

5-114

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS IR2 = I_2 or IR2 = 3 I_2

5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS


(EQ 5.21)

The multiplier of 1 is used by the relay for first two cycles following complete de-energization of the winding (all three phase currents below 5% of nominal for at least five cycles). The multiplier of 3 is used during normal operation; that is, two cycles after the winding has been energized. The lower multiplier is used to ensure better sensitivity when energizing a faulty winding. The positive-sequence component of the restraining signal (IR1) is meant to provide restraint during symmetrical conditions, either symmetrical faults or load, and is calculated according to the following algorithm: 1 If I_1 > 1.5 pu of phase CT, then 2 If I_1 > I_0 , then IR1 = 3 ( I_1 I_0 ) 3 else IR1 = 0 4 else IR1 = I_1 8 Under load-level currents (below 150% of nominal), the positive-sequence restraint is set to 1/8th of the positive-sequence current (Line 4). This is to ensure maximum sensitivity during low-current faults under full load conditions. Under fault-level currents (above 150% of nominal), the positive-sequence restraint is removed if the zero-sequence component is greater than the positive-sequence (Line 3), or set at the net difference of the two (Line 2). The raw restraining signal (Irest) is further post-filtered for better performance during external faults with heavy CT saturation and for better switch-off transient control: Igr ( k ) = max ( Irest ( k ), Igr ( k 1 ) )
(EQ 5.22)

where k represents a present sample, k 1 represents the previous sample, and is a factory constant ( < 1). The equation above introduces a decaying memory to the restraining signal. Should the raw restraining signal (Irest) disappear or drop significantly, such as when an external fault gets cleared or a CT saturates heavily, the actual restraining signal (Igr(k)) will not reduce instantly but will keep decaying decreasing its value by 50% each 15.5 power system cycles. Having the differential and restraining signals developed, the element applies a single slope differential characteristic with a minimum pickup as shown in the Restricted Ground Fault Scheme Logic diagram.
SETTING RESTD GND FT1 FUNCTION: Disabled=0 Enabled=1 SETTING RESTD GND FT1 BLOCK: Off=0 SETTING SETTING RESTD GND FT1 SOURCE: IG IN I_0 I_1 I_2 ACTUAL VALUES RGF 1 Igd Mag RGF 1 Igr Mag
828002A2.CDR

SETTING RESTD GND FT1 PICKUP: AND RUN Igd > PICKUP SETTINGS RESTD GND FT1 PICKUP DELAY: RESTD GND FT1 RESET DELAY: AND t PKP t RST

FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS RESTD GND FT1 PKP RESTD GND FT1 DPO RESTD GND FT1 OP

RESTD GND FT1 SLOPE: RUN Differential and Restraining Currents Igd > SLOPE * Igr

Figure 567: RESTRICTED GROUND FAULT SCHEME LOGIC

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-115

5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS

5 SETTINGS

The following examples explain how the restraining signal is created for maximum sensitivity and security. These examples clarify the operating principle and provide guidance for testing of the element. EXAMPLE 1: EXTERNAL SINGLE-LINE-TO-GROUND FAULT Given the following inputs: IA = 1 pu 0, IB = 0, IC = 0, and IG = 1 pu 180 The relay calculates the following values: 1 1 13 Igd = 0, IR0 = abs 3 -- ( 1 ) = 2 pu , IR2 = 3 -- = 1 pu , IR1 = --------- = 0.042 pu , and Igr = 2 pu 3 3 8 The restraining signal is twice the fault current. This gives extra margin should the phase or neutral CT saturate. EXAMPLE 2: EXTERNAL HIGH-CURRENT SLG FAULT Given the following inputs: IA = 10 pu 0, IB = 0, IC = 0, and IG = 10 pu 180 The relay calculates the following values: 1 10 Igd = 0, IR0 = abs 3 -- ( 10 ) = 20 pu , IR2 = 3 ----- = 10 pu , IR1 = 3 10 10 = 0 , and Igr = 20 pu. ----- ----- 3 3 3 3 EXAMPLE 3: EXTERNAL HIGH-CURRENT THREE-PHASE SYMMETRICAL FAULT Given the following inputs: IA = 10 pu 0, IB = 10 pu 120, IC = 10 pu 120, and IG = 0 pu The relay calculates the following values: Igd = 0, IR0 = abs ( 3 0 ( 0 ) ) = 0 pu , IR2 = 3 0 = 0 pu , IR1 = 3 10 0 = 10 pu , and Igr = 10 pu. ----3 EXAMPLE 4: INTERNAL LOW-CURRENT SINGLE-LINE-TO-GROUND FAULT UNDER FULL LOAD Given the following inputs: IA = 1.10 pu 0, IB = 1.0 pu 120, IC = 1.0 pu 120, and IG = 0.05 pu 0 The relay calculates the following values: I_0 = 0.033 pu 0, I_2 = 0.033 pu 0, and I_1 = 1.033 pu 0 Igd = abs(3 0.0333 + 0.05) = 0.15 pu, IR0 = abs(3 0.033 (0.05)) = 0.05 pu, IR2 = 3 0.033 = 0.10 pu, IR1 = 1.033 / 8 = 0.1292 pu, and Igr = 0.1292 pu Despite very low fault current level the differential current is above 100% of the restraining current. EXAMPLE 5: INTERNAL LOW-CURRENT, HIGH-LOAD SINGLE-LINE-TO-GROUND FAULT WITH NO FEED FROM THE GROUND Given the following inputs: IA = 1.10 pu 0, IB = 1.0 pu 120, IC = 1.0 pu 120, and IG = 0.0 pu 0 The relay calculates the following values: I_0 = 0.033 pu 0, I_2 = 0.033 pu 0, and I_1 = 1.033 pu 0 Igd = abs(3 0.0333 + 0.0) = 0.10 pu, IR0 = abs(3 0.033 (0.0)) = 0.10 pu, IR2 = 3 0.033 = 0.10 pu, IR1 = 1.033 / 8 = 0.1292 pu, and Igr = 0.1292 pu Despite very low fault current level the differential current is above 75% of the restraining current. EXAMPLE 6: INTERNAL HIGH-CURRENT SINGLE-LINE-TO-GROUND FAULT WITH NO FEED FROM THE GROUND Given the following inputs: IA = 10 pu 0, IB = 0 pu, IC = 0 pu, and IG = 0 pu The relay calculates the following values: I_0 = 3.3 pu 0, I_2 = 3.3 pu 0, and I_1 = 3.3 pu 0 Igd = abs(3 3.3 + 0.0) = 10 pu, IR0 = abs(3 3.3 (0.0)) = 10 pu, IR2 = 3 3.3 = 10 pu, IR1 = 3 (3.33 3.33) = 0 pu, and Igr = 10 pu The differential current is 100% of the restraining current.

5-116

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS 5.5.9 NEGATIVE SEQUENCE CURRENT

a) NEGATIVE SEQUENCE DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT (ANSI 67_2)


PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) NEGATIVE SEQUENCE CURRENT Range: Disabled, Enabled NEG SEQ DIR OC1(2)

NEG SEQ DIR OC1

NEG SEQ DIR OC1 FUNCTION: Disabled NEG SEQ DIR OC1 SOURCE: SRC 1 NEG SEQ DIR OC1 OFFSET: 0.00 NEG SEQ DIR OC1 TYPE: Neg Sequence NEG SEQ DIR OC1 POSSEQ RESTRAINT: 0.063 NEG SEQ DIR OC1 FWD ECA: 75 Lag NEG SEQ DIR OC1 FWD LIMIT ANGLE: 90 NEG SEQ DIR OC1 FWD PICKUP: 0.05 pu NEG SEQ DIR OC1 REV LIMIT ANGLE: 90 NEG SEQ DIR OC1 REV PICKUP: 0.05 pu NEG SEQ DIR OC1 BLK: Off NEG SEQ DIR OC1 TARGET: Self-reset NEG SEQ DIR OC1 EVENTS: Disabled

MESSAGE

Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4

MESSAGE

Range: 0.00 to 250.00 in steps of 0.01

MESSAGE

Range: Neg Sequence, Zero Sequence

MESSAGE

Range: 0.000 to 0.500 in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE

Range: 0 to 90 Lag in steps of 1

MESSAGE

Range: 40 to 90 in steps of 1

MESSAGE

Range: 0.05 to 30.00 pu in steps of 0.01

MESSAGE

Range: 40 to 90 in steps of 1

MESSAGE

Range: 0.05 to 30.00 pu in steps of 0.01

MESSAGE

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled

MESSAGE

Range: Disabled, Enabled

There are two Negative Sequence Directional Overcurrent protection elements available. The element provides both forward and reverse fault direction indications through its output operands NEG SEQ DIR OC1 FWD and NEG SEQ DIR OC1 REV, respectively. The output operand is asserted if the magnitude of the operating current is above a pickup level (overcurrent unit) and the fault direction is seen as forward or reverse, respectively (directional unit). The overcurrent unit of the element essentially responds to the magnitude of a fundamental frequency phasor of either the negative-sequence or zero-sequence current as per user selection. The zero-sequence current should not be mistaken with the neutral current (factor 3 difference). A positive-sequence restraint is applied for better performance: a small user-programmable portion of the positive sequence current magnitude is subtracted from the negative- or zero-sequence current magnitude, respectively, when forming the element operating quantity. I op = I_2 K I_1 or I op = I_0 K I_1
(EQ 5.23)

The positive-sequence restraint allows for more sensitive settings by counterbalancing spurious negative- and zerosequence currents resulting from: System unbalances under heavy load conditions. Transformation errors of Current Transformers (CTs). Fault inception and switch-off transients.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-117

5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS

5 SETTINGS

The positive-sequence restraint must be considered when testing for pick-up accuracy and response time (multiple of pickup). The operating quantity depends on the way the test currents are injected into the relay: single-phase injection: Iop = 1/3 (1 K) Iinjected three-phase pure zero- or negative-sequence injection, respectively: Iop = Iinjected. the directional unit uses the negative-sequence current and voltage for fault direction discrimination

The following table defines the Negative Sequence Directional Overcurrent element.
OVERCURRENT UNIT MODE Negative-Sequence Zero-Sequence OPERATING CURRENT DIRECTION Forward Reverse Forward Reverse DIRECTIONAL UNIT COMPARED PHASORS V_2 + Z_offset I_2 V_2 + Z_offset I_2 V_2 + Z_offset I_2 V_2 + Z_offset I_2 I_2 1ECA (I_2 1ECA) I_2 1ECA (I_2 1ECA)

Iop = |I_2| K I_1| Iop = |I_0| K |I_1|

DISPLAY PROPERTIES VOLTAGE CUT-OFF The negative-sequence voltage must be higher than the PRODUCT SETUP value to be validated for use as a polarizing signal. If the polarizing signal is not validated neither forward nor reverse indication is given. The following figure explains the usage of the voltage polarized directional unit of the element. LEVEL

The figure below shows the phase angle comparator characteristics for a Phase A to ground fault, with settings of: ECA FWD LA REV LA = 75 (Element Characteristic Angle = centerline of operating characteristic) = 80 (Forward Limit Angle = the angular limit with the ECA for operation) = 80 (Reverse Limit Angle = the angular limit with the ECA for operation)

The element incorporates a current reversal logic: if the reverse direction is indicated for at least 1.25 of a power system cycle, the prospective forward indication will be delayed by 1.5 of a power system cycle. The element is designed to emulate an electromechanical directional device. Larger operating and polarizing signals will result in faster directional discrimination bringing more security to the element operation.

V_2 line REV LA FWD LA VAG (reference)

REV Operating Region

LA ECA line LA ECA I_2 line

I_2 line

LA FWD Operating Region

ECA line

LA VCG VBG

V_2 line

REV LA

FWD LA
827806A2.CDR

Figure 568: NEG SEQ DIRECTIONAL CHARACTERISTICS The forward-looking function is designed to be more secure as compared to the reverse-looking function, and therefore, should be used for the tripping direction. The reverse-looking function is designed to be faster as compared to the forwardlooking function and should be used for the blocking direction. This allows for better protection coordination. The above bias should be taken into account when using the Negative Sequence Directional Overcurrent element to directionalize other protection elements.

5-118

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS

NEG SEQ DIR OC1 OFFSET: This setting specifies the offset impedance used by this protection. The primary application for the offset impedance is to guarantee correct identification of fault direction on series compensated lines (see the Application of Settings chapter for information on how to calculate this setting). In regular applications, the offset impedance ensures proper operation even if the negative-sequence voltage at the relaying point is very small. If this is the intent, the offset impedance shall not be larger than the negative-sequence impedance of the protected circuit. Practically, it shall be several times smaller. The offset impedance shall be entered in secondary ohms. See the Theory of Operation chapter for additional details. NEG SEQ DIR OC1 TYPE: This setting selects the operating mode for the overcurrent unit of the element. The choices are Neg Sequence and Zero Sequence. In some applications it is advantageous to use a directional negative-sequence overcurrent function instead of a directional zero-sequence overcurrent function as inter-circuit mutual effects are minimized. NEG SEQ DIR OC1 POS-SEQ RESTRAINT: This setting controls the amount of the positive-sequence restraint. Set to 0.063 (in Zero Sequence mode) or 0.125 (in Neg Sequence mode) for backward compatibility with firmware revision 3.40 and older. Set to zero to remove the restraint. Set higher if large system unbalances or poor CT performance are expected. NEG SEQ DIR OC1 FWD ECA: This setting select the element characteristic angle (ECA) for the forward direction. The element characteristic angle in the reverse direction is the angle set for the forward direction shifted by 180. NEG SEQ DIR OC1 FWD LIMIT ANGLE: This setting defines a symmetrical (in both directions from the ECA) limit angle for the forward direction. NEG SEQ DIR OC1 FWD PICKUP: This setting defines the pickup level for the overcurrent unit in the forward direction. Upon NEG SEQ DIR OC1 TYPE selection, this pickup threshold applies to zero- or negative-sequence current. When selecting this setting it must be kept in mind that the design uses a positive-sequence restraint technique. NEG SEQ DIR OC1 REV LIMIT ANGLE: This setting defines a symmetrical (in both directions from the ECA) limit angle for the reverse direction. NEG SEQ DIR OC1 REV PICKUP: This setting defines the pickup level for the overcurrent unit in the reverse direction. Upon NEG SEQ DIR OC1 TYPE selection, this pickup threshold applies to zero- or negative-sequence current. When selecting this setting it must be kept in mind that the design uses a positive-sequence restraint technique.
SETTING NEG SEQ DIR OC1 FWD PICKUP: NEG SEQ DIR OC1 POSSEQ RESTRAINT: AND AND SETTING NEG SEQ DIR OC1 FUNCTION: Disabled=0 Enabled=1 SETTING NEG SEQ DIR OC1 BLK: Off=0 SETTING NEG SEQ DIR OC1 SOURCE: Neg Seq Voltage (V_2) Neg Seq Seq Crt (I_2) Zero Seq Seq Crt (I_0) SETTINGS NEG SEQ DIR OC1 FWD ECA: AND NEG SEQ DIR OC1 FWD LIMIT ANGLE: NEG SEQ DIR OC1 REV LIMIT ANGLE: NEG SEQ DIR OC1 OFFSET: RUN REV. V_2 pol Voltage Polarization FWD FWD AND 1.25 cy 1.5 cy AND FLEXLOGIC OPERAND NEG SEQ DIR OC1 FWD RUN I_0 - K I_1 RUN I_2 - K I_1 PICKUP PICKUP

OR AND

REV

SETTING NEG SEQ DIR OC1 TYPE: Neg Sequence Zero Sequence AND AND

SETTING NEG SEQ DIR OC1 REV PICKUP: NEG SEQ DIR OC1 POSSEQ RESTRAINT: RUN I_2 - K I_1 RUN I_0 - K I_1 PICKUP PICKUP AND FLEXLOGIC OPERAND NEG SEQ DIR OC1 REV OR 827091A4.CDR

Figure 569: NEGATIVE SEQUENCE DIRECTIONAL OC1 SCHEME LOGIC

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-119

5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS

5 SETTINGS 5.5.10 GENERATOR UNBALANCE

PATH: SETTINGS

GROUPED ELEMENTS

SETTING GROUP 1(6)

GENERATOR UNBALANCE Range: Disabled, Enabled

GENERATOR UNBALANCE
MESSAGE

GENERATOR UNBAL FUNCTION: Disabled GEN UNBAL SOURCE: SRC 1 GEN UNBAL INOM: 0.800 pu GEN UNBAL STG1 PICKUP: 8.00% GEN UNBAL STG1 K-VALUE: 1.00 GEN UNBAL STG1 TMIN: 0.250 s GEN UNBAL STG1 TMAX: 600.00 s GEN UNBAL STG1 K-RESET: 240.00 s GEN UNBAL STG2 PICKUP: 3.0% GEN UNBAL STG2 PKP DELAY: 5.0 s GEN UNBAL BLOCK: Off GEN UNBAL TARGET: Self-Reset GEN UNBAL EVENTS: Disabled

Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4

MESSAGE

Range: 0.000 to 1.250 pu in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE

Range: 0.00 to 100.00% in steps of 0.01

MESSAGE

Range: 0.00 to 100.00 in steps of 0.01

MESSAGE

Range: 0.000 to 50.000 s in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE

Range: 0.0 to 1000.0 s in steps of 0.1

MESSAGE

Range: 0.0 to 1000.0 s in steps of 0.1

MESSAGE

Range: 0.00 to 100.00% in steps of 0.01

MESSAGE

Range: 0.0 to 1000.0 s in steps of 0.1

MESSAGE

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled Range: Enabled, Disabled

MESSAGE

The generator unbalance element protects the machine from rotor damage due to excessive negative sequence current. The element has an inverse time stage which is typically used for tripping and a definite time stage typically used for alarm purposes. The inverse time stage operating characteristic is defined by the following equation: K T = -------------------------2 ( I 2 I nom ) where Inom is the generator rated current and K is the negative-sequence capability constant normally provided by the generator manufacturer.

GEN UNBAL INOM: This setting is the rated full load current of the machine. GEN UNBAL STG1 PICKUP: This setting defines the pickup of the stage 1 element expressed as a percentage of the nominal current as specified by GEN UNBAL INOM setting. It is typically set at the maximum continuous negative sequence current rating of the machine. GEN UNBAL STG1 K-VALUE: This setting is the negative sequence capability constant. This value is normally provided by the generator manufacturer (see ANSI C50.13 for details). GEN UNBAL STG1 TMIN: This is the minimum operate time of the stage 1 element. The stage will not operate before this time expires. This is set to prevent false trips for faults that would be cleared normally by system protections. GEN UNBAL STG1 TMAX: This is the maximum operate time of the stage 1 element. This setting can be applied to limit the maximum tripping time for low level unbalances.

5-120

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS

GEN UNBAL STG1 K-RESET: This setting defines the linear reset rate of the stage 1 element. It is the maximum reset time from the threshold of tripping. This feature provides a thermal memory of previous unbalance conditions. GEN UNBAL STG2 PICKUP: This setting defines the pickup of the stage 2 element expressed as a percentage of the nominal current as specified by GEN UNBAL INOM setting. The definite time element would normally be used to generate an alarm to prompt an operator to take some corrective action. The stage 2 element would typically be set at a safe margin below the stage 1 pickup setting. GEN UNBAL STG2 PKP DELAY: This is the minimum operate time of the stage 2 element. This is set to prevent nuisance alarms during system faults.
1000

K=1 Tmax

K=4

K=15 K=40 K=100

100

10

Tmin
0.1 0.01 0.1 1 10 100
830714A1.CDR

Figure 570: GENERATOR UNBALANCE INVERSE TIME CURVES


SETTINGS GEN UNBAL INOM: GEN UNBAL STG1 PICKUP: GEN UNBAL STG1 TMIN: GEN UNBAL STG1 TMAX: GEN UNBAL STG1 K-VALUE: GEN UNBAL STG1 K-RESET: AND RUN t

SETTING GEN UNBAL FUNCTION: Disabled=0 Enabled=1 SETTING GEN UNBAL BLOCK: Off=0 SETTINGS GEN UNBAL STG2 PICKUP: SETTING GEN UNBAL SOURCE: I_2 AND GEN UNBAL INOM: RUN I_2 > PICKUP x INOM 100

FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS GEN UNBAL STG1 OP I_2 GEN UNBAL STG1 PKP GEN UNBAL STG1 DPO SETTING GEN UNBAL STG2 PKP DELAY: TPKP 0 OR GEN UNBAL STG2 OP GEN UNBAL STG2 PKP GEN UNBAL STG2 DPO OR GEN UNBAL PKP FLEXLOGIC OPERAND GEN UNBAL OP FLEXLOGIC OPERAND OR GEN UNBAL DPO

Figure 571: GENERATOR UNBALANCE SCHEME LOGIC

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-121

5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS

5 SETTINGS 5.5.11 SPLIT PHASE PROTECTION

PATH: SETTINGS

GROUPED ELEMENTS

SETTING GROUP 1(6)

SPLIT PHASE Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4

SPLIT PHASE

SPLIT PHASE SOURCE: SRC 1


MESSAGE

SPLIT PHASE LOAD SOURCE: SRC 2 SPLIT PHASE A PICKUP: 0.200 pu SPLIT PHASE A OFFSET: 0.000 pu SPLIT PHASE A SLOPE: 0.0% SPLIT PHASE B PICKUP: 0.200 pu SPLIT PHASE B OFFSET: 0.000 pu SPLIT PHASE B SLOPE: 0.0% SPLIT PHASE C PICKUP: 0.200 pu SPLIT PHASE C OFFSET: 0.000 pu SPLIT PHASE C SLOPE: 0.0% SPLIT PHASE MIN LOAD: 0.00 pu SPLIT PHASE MODE: Over SPLIT PHASE DELAY: 0.000 s SPLIT PHASE BLK: Off SPLIT PHASE TARGET: Self-Reset SPLIT PHASE EVENTS: Disabled

Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4

MESSAGE

Range: 0.020 to 1.500 pu in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE

Range: 0.000 to 1.000 pu in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE

Range: 0.0 to 100% in steps of 0.1

MESSAGE

Range: 0.020 to 1.500 pu in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE

Range: 0.000 to 1.000 pu in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE

Range: 0.0 to 100% in steps of 0.1

MESSAGE

Range: 0.020 to 1.500 pu in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE

Range: 0.000 to 1.000 pu in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE

Range: 0.0 to 100% in steps of 0.1

MESSAGE

Range: 0.00 to 1.00 pu in steps of 0.01

MESSAGE

Range: Over, Over-Under

MESSAGE

Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled Range: Enabled, Disabled

MESSAGE

Some generators, due to physical construction, have windings that consist of multiple adjacent turns. It is therefore possible for faults to develop between turns on the same phase (inter-turn faults). These faults are not detected by the stator differential protection, as there is no difference between the neutral and at the terminal currents. Split phase protection may be applied to detect inter-turn faults in the case that the generator is wound with two three-phase windings, each brought separately out of the machine and connected in parallel. The currents in the two windings are compared, any difference indicating an inter-turn fault. The Split Phase element allows a separate pickup setting to be applied for each phase. Additionally, the pickup can be biased by the load current (slope characteristic). Two modes of operation are supported (over and over-under).

5-122

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS

830728A1.CDR

Split Phase Source

Load Source

Figure 572: SPLIT PHASE PROTECTION FOR 2 CTS

830727A1.CDR

Split Phase Source

Load Source

Figure 573: SPLIT PHASE PROTECTION FOR 1 CT The Split Phase element principle of operation is as follows. First, define the following parameters: Isplit: split-phase current, Iload: load current, pickup: pickup setting, min_load: minimum load supervision setting Then, the expected value of the steady state unbalance (defined as bias current) is expressed as follows: I bias = slope I load + offset where: I split Load CT Primary - Split Phase CT Secondary slope = ---------- ---------------------------------------------------- --------------------------------------------------------------------I load Load CT Secondary Split Phase CT Primary and offset is the split phase current at no-load. In Over mode, the element will pickup if: ( I split I bias > pickup ) In Over-under, mode, the element will pickup if: ( I split I bias > pickup ) and ( I load min_load )
(EQ 5.27) (EQ 5.25) (EQ 5.24)

and

( I load min_load )

(EQ 5.26)

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-123

5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS

5 SETTINGS

I splt phs (pu)

Operate

Slope

Offset

Operate
Min Load Iload (pu) Operating Characteristic

I splt phs (pu)

Operate

5
Iload (pu) Operating Characteristic (mode = over, Min Load = 0, Slope = 0)

I splt phs (pu)

Min Load

Operate

Slope

Offset

Iload (pu) Operating Characteristic (mode = over)


830729A1.CDR

Figure 574: SPLIT PHASE PROTECTION OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS SPLIT PHASE SOURCE: This setting specifies a signal source used to provide current from the split phase CT to the split phase protection. SPLIT PHASE LOAD SOURCE: This setting specifies a signal source used to provide current from the load CT to the split phase protection. SPLIT PHASE A(C) PICKUP: This setting specifies a pickup level for each phase. This should be set less than the minimum expected unbalance (split phase) current due to an inter-turn fault. SPLIT PHASE A(C) OFFSET: This setting specifies the steady-state split phase current at no-load for the each phase. This should be set equal to the split phase current during normal (unfaulted) operation. The user should assign the split phase current and the load current (positive sequence) to the data logger to identify the optimum value for this setting. SPLIT PHASE A(C) SLOPE: This setting specifies the slope of split phase characteristic for each phase. This setting is used to bias the pickup of the element due to variations in generator loading. The slope is defined as the ratio of the

5-124

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS

per-unit split phase current over the per-unit load current. The user should assign the split phase current and the load current (positive sequence) to the data logger to identify the optimum value for this setting. SPLIT PHASE MIN LOAD: This setting specifies the minimum load (positive-sequence current) supervision level. SPLIT PHASE MODE: This setting specifies the mode of operation. If the Over mode is chosen, the element will pickup when the split phase current is rises above the biased offset current plus the pickup setting. If Over-under mode is chosen, the element will also pickup if the split phase current is falls below the biased offset current minus the pickup setting. See the earlier description for further details. SPLIT PHASE DELAY: This setting specifies a time delay required to operate after the pickup condition is established. During an external disturbance the CTs may saturate. CT saturation can cause a spurious split phase current, especially in the case where the split phase current is derived from the external summation of two split phase CTs (first figure above). In this instance, a time delay can be used to ride through the saturation event. Alternately, the CT saturation flag (see the Stator Differential section for details) can also be used to supervise the function.
SETTINGS SPLIT PHASE A PICKUP SETTINGS SPLIT PHASE FUNCTION Enabled =1 SPLIT PHASE BLOCK Off = 0 AND SPLIT PHASE A OFFSET SPLIT PHASE A SLOPE SPLIT PHASE MIN LOAD SPLIT PHASE MODE START SETTING SPLIT PHASE DELAY t 0 FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS SPLIT PHASE PKP A SPLIT PHASE DPO A SPLIT PHASE OP A

SETTING SPLIT PHASE LOAD SOURCE: I_1 SETTINGS SPLIT PHASE B PICKUP SPLIT PHASE B OFFSET SPLIT PHASE B SLOPE SETTING SPLIT PHASE SOURCE: I_A I_B I_C SPLIT PHASE MIN LOAD SPLIT PHASE MODE START SETTING SPLIT PHASE DELAY t 0 FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS SPLIT PHASE PKP B SPLIT PHASE DPO B SPLIT PHASE OP B

SETTINGS SPLIT PHASE C PICKUP SPLIT PHASE C OFFSET SPLIT PHASE C SLOPE SPLIT PHASE MIN LOAD SPLIT PHASE MODE START SETTING SPLIT PHASE DELAY t 0

FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS OR SPLIT PHASE OP

FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS SPLIT PHASE PKP C SPLIT PHASE DPO C SPLIT PHASE OP C

ACTUAL VALUES SPLIT PHASE A CURRENT (PU) SPLIT PHASE B CURRENT (PU) SPLIT PHASE C CURRENT (PU) LOAD CURRENT (PU)

830007A1.CDR

Figure 575: SPLIT PHASE PROTECTION LOGIC

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-125

5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS

5 SETTINGS 5.5.12 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS

a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) VOLTAGE ELEMENTS

VOLTAGE ELEMENTS

PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE1 PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE2 PHASE OVERVOLTAGE1 NEUTRAL OV1 NEUTRAL OV2 NEUTRAL OV3 NEG SEQ OV AUXILIARY UV1 AUXILIARY OV1 VOLTS/HZ 1 VOLTS/HZ 2

See page 5128. See page 5128. See page 5129. See page 5130. See page 5130. See page 5130. See page 5131. See page 5132. See page 5133. See page 5134. See page 5134.

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

These protection elements can be used for a variety of applications such as: Undervoltage Protection: For voltage sensitive loads, such as induction motors, a drop in voltage increases the drawn current which may cause dangerous overheating in the motor. The undervoltage protection feature can be used to either cause a trip or generate an alarm when the voltage drops below a specified voltage setting for a specified time delay. Permissive Functions: The undervoltage feature may be used to block the functioning of external devices by operating an output relay when the voltage falls below the specified voltage setting. The undervoltage feature may also be used to block the functioning of other elements through the block feature of those elements. Source Transfer Schemes: In the event of an undervoltage, a transfer signal may be generated to transfer a load from its normal source to a standby or emergency power source.

5-126

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS

The undervoltage elements can be programmed to have a Definite Time delay characteristic. The Definite Time curve operates when the voltage drops below the pickup level for a specified period of time. The time delay is adjustable from 0 to 600.00 seconds in steps of 10 ms. The undervoltage elements can also be programmed to have an inverse time delay characteristic. The undervoltage delay setting defines the family of curves shown below. D T = --------------------------------V 1 ------------------ V
pickup
20.0 18.0 16.0 Time (seconds) 14.0 12.0 10.0 8.0 6.0 4.0 2.0 0.0 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 % of V pickup D=5.0 2.0 1.0

where:

T = Operating Time D = Undervoltage Delay Setting (D = 0.00 operates instantaneously) V = Secondary Voltage applied to the relay Vpickup = Pickup Level At 0% of pickup, the operating time equals the UNDERVOLTAGE DELAY setting.

NOTE

Figure 576: INVERSE TIME UNDERVOLTAGE CURVES

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-127

5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS b) PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE (ANSI 27P)


PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) VOLTAGE ELEMENTS

5 SETTINGS

PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE1(2)

PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE1
MESSAGE

PHASE UV1 FUNCTION: Disabled PHASE UV1 SIGNAL SOURCE: SRC 1 PHASE UV1 MODE: Phase to Ground PHASE UV1 PICKUP: 1.000 pu PHASE UV1 CURVE: Definite Time PHASE UV1 DELAY: 1.00 s PHASE UV1 MINIMUM VOLTAGE: 0.100 pu PHASE UV1 BLOCK: Off PHASE UV1 TARGET: Self-reset PHASE UV1 EVENTS: Disabled

Range: Disabled, Enabled

Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4

MESSAGE

Range: Phase to Ground, Phase to Phase

MESSAGE

Range: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE

Range: Definite Time, Inverse Time

MESSAGE

Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01

MESSAGE

Range: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled

MESSAGE

Range: Disabled, Enabled

This element may be used to give a desired time-delay operating characteristic versus the applied fundamental voltage (phase-to-ground or phase-to-phase for Wye VT connection, or phase-to-phase for Delta VT connection) or as a Definite Time element. The element resets instantaneously if the applied voltage exceeds the dropout voltage. The delay setting selects the minimum operating time of the phase undervoltage. The minimum voltage setting selects the operating voltage below which the element is blocked (a setting of 0 will allow a dead source to be considered a fault condition).
SETTING PHASE UV1 FUNCTION: Disabled = 0 Enabled = 1 SETTING PHASE UV1 BLOCK: Off = 0 SETTING PHASE UV1 SOURCE: Source VT = Delta VAB VBC VCA Source VT = Wye SETTING PHASE UV1 MODE:
Phase to Ground Phase to Phase

SETTING PHASE UV1 PICKUP: PHASE UV1 CURVE: PHASE UV1 DELAY: AND RUN VAG or VAB < PICKUP t V RUN VBG or VBC< PICKUP t V RUN VCG or VCA < PICKUP t V FLEXLOGIC OPERAND OR PHASE UV1 PKP FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS PHASE UV1 A PKP PHASE UV1 A DPO PHASE UV1 A OP SETTING AND PHASE UV1 B PKP PHASE UV1 B DPO PHASE UV1 B OP AND PHASE UV1 C PKP PHASE UV1 C DPO PHASE UV1 C OP

AND

VAG VBG VCG

VAB VBC VCA

PHASE UV1 MINIMUM VOLTAGE: VAG or VAB < Minimum VBG or VBC < Minimum VCG or VCA < Minimum

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND OR PHASE UV1 OP

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND AND PHASE UV1 DPO


827039AB.CDR

Figure 577: PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE1 SCHEME LOGIC

5-128

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS c) PHASE OVERVOLTAGE (ANSI 59P)


PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) VOLTAGE ELEMENTS

5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS

PHASE OVERVOLTAGE1

PHASE OVERVOLTAGE1
MESSAGE

PHASE OV1 FUNCTION: Disabled PHASE OV1 SIGNAL SOURCE: SRC 1 PHASE OV1 PICKUP: 1.000 pu PHASE OV1 PICKUP DELAY: 1.00 s PHASE OV1 RESET DELAY: 1.00 s PHASE OV1 BLOCK: Off PHASE OV1 TARGET: Self-reset PHASE OV1 EVENTS: Disabled

Range: Disabled, Enabled

Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4

MESSAGE

Range: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE

Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01

MESSAGE

Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01

MESSAGE

Range: FlexLogic Operand

MESSAGE

Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled

MESSAGE

Range: Disabled, Enabled

The phase overvoltage element may be used as an instantaneous element with no intentional time delay or as a Definite Time element. The input voltage is the phase-to-phase voltage, either measured directly from Delta-connected VTs or as calculated from phase-to-ground (Wye) connected VTs. The specific voltages to be used for each phase are shown below.
SETTING PHASE OV1 FUNCTION: Disabled = 0 Enabled = 1 SETTING PHASE OV1 BLOCK: Off = 0 SETTING PHASE OV1 PICKUP: PHASE OV1 CURVE: PHASE OV1 DELAY: AND RUN VAG or VAB < PICKUP t V RUN VBG or VBC < PICKUP t V RUN VCG or VCA < PICKUP t FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS V PHASE OV1 A PKP PHASE OV1 A DPO PHASE OV1 A OP PHASE OV1 B PKP PHASE OV1 B DPO PHASE OV1 B OP PHASE OV1 C PKP PHASE OV1 C DPO PHASE OV1 C OP

SETTING PHASE OV1 SOURCE: Source VT = Delta VAB VBC VCA Source VT = Wye

SETTING PHASE OV1 MODE:


Phase to Ground

Phase to Phase VAB VBC VCA

VAG VBG VCG

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND OR PHASE OV1 PKP FLEXLOGIC OPERAND OR PHASE OV1 OP FLEXLOGIC OPERAND AND PHASE OV1 DPO
827066A5.CDR

Figure 578: PHASE OVERVOLTAGE SCHEME LOGIC

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-129

5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS d) NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE (ANSI 59N)


PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) VOLTAGE ELEMENTS

5 SETTINGS

NEUTRAL OV1(3)

NEUTRAL OV1

NEUTRAL OV1 FUNCTION: Disabled


MESSAGE

Range: Disabled, Enabled

NEUTRAL OV1 SIGNAL SOURCE: SRC 1 NEUTRAL OV1 PICKUP: 0.300 pu NEUTRAL OV1 CURVE: Definite time NEUTRAL OV1 PICKUP: DELAY: 1.00 s NEUTRAL OV1 RESET: DELAY: 1.00 s NEUTRAL OV1 BLOCK: Off NEUTRAL OV1 TARGET: Self-reset NEUTRAL OV1 EVENTS: Disabled

Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4

MESSAGE

Range: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE

Range: Definite time, FlexCurve A, FlexCurve B, FlexCurve C Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01

MESSAGE

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled

MESSAGE

Range: Disabled, Enabled

There are three neutral overvoltage elements available. The neutral overvoltage element can be used to detect asymmetrical system voltage condition due to a ground fault or to the loss of one or two phases of the source. The element responds to the system neutral voltage (3V_0), calculated from the phase voltages. The nominal secondary voltage of the phase voltSYSTEM SETUP AC INPUTS VOLTAGE BANK PHASE VT SECONDARY is the age channels entered under SETTINGS p.u. base used when setting the pickup level. The Neutral Overvoltage element can provide a time-delayed operating characteristic versus the applied voltage (initialized from FlexCurves A, B, or C) or be used as a definite time element. The NEUTRAL OV1(3) PICKUP DELAY setting applies only if the NEUTRAL OV1(3) CURVE setting is Definite time. The source assigned to this element must be configured for a phase VT. VT errors and normal voltage unbalance must be considered when setting this element. This function requires the VTs to be Wye connected.

Figure 579: NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE1 SCHEME LOGIC

5-130

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS e) NEGATIVE SEQUENCE OVERVOLTAGE (ANSI 59_2)


PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) VOLTAGE ELEMENTS

5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS

NEG SEQ OV

NEG SEQ OV

NEG SEQ OV FUNCTION: Disabled


MESSAGE

Range: Disabled, Enabled

NEG SEQ OV SIGNAL SOURCE: SRC 1 NEG SEQ OV PICKUP: 0.300 pu NEG SEQ OV PICKUP DELAY: 0.50 s NEG SEQ OV RESET DELAY: 0.50 s NEG SEQ OV BLOCK: Off NEG SEQ OV TARGET: Self-reset NEG SEQ OV EVENTS: Disabled

Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4

MESSAGE

Range: 0.000 to 1.250 pu in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE

Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01

MESSAGE

Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01

MESSAGE

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled

MESSAGE

Range: Disabled, Enabled

The negative sequence overvoltage element may be used to detect loss of one or two phases of the source, a reversed phase sequence of voltage, or a non-symmetrical system voltage condition.
SETTING NEG SEQ OV FUNCTION: Disabled = 0 Enabled = 1 SETTING NEG SEQ OV BLOCK: Off = 0 SETTING NEG SEQ OV SIGNAL SOURCE:
Source VT=Wye Source VT=Delta

SETTING NEG SEQ OV PICKUP: AND RUN SETTINGS NEG SEQ OV PICKUP DELAY: NEG SEQ OV RESET DELAY: t PKP V_2 or 3 * V_2 > PKP = t RST

FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS NEG SEQ OV PKP NEG SEQ OV DPO NEG SEQ OV OP

V_2

3 * V_2

827839A2.CDR

Figure 580: NEG SEQ OV SCHEME LOGIC

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-131

5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS f) AUXILIARY UNDERVOLTAGE (ANSI 27X)


PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) VOLTAGE ELEMENTS

5 SETTINGS

AUXILIARY UV1

AUXILIARY UV1

AUX UV1 FUNCTION: Disabled


MESSAGE

Range: Disabled, Enabled

AUX UV1 SIGNAL SOURCE: SRC 1 AUX UV1 PICKUP: 0.700 pu AUX UV1 CURVE: Definite Time AUX UV1 DELAY: 1.00 s AUX UV1 MINIMUM: VOLTAGE: 0.100 pu AUX UV1 BLOCK: Off AUX UV1 TARGET: Self-reset AUX UV1 EVENTS: Disabled

Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4

MESSAGE

Range: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE

Range: Definite Time, Inverse Time

MESSAGE

Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01

MESSAGE

Range: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled

MESSAGE

Range: Disabled, Enabled

This element is intended for monitoring undervoltage conditions of the auxiliary voltage. The AUX UV1 PICKUP selects the voltage level at which the time undervoltage element starts timing. The nominal secondary voltage of the auxiliary voltage SYSTEM SETUP AC INPUTS VOLTAGE BANK X5 AUXILIARY VT X5 SECONDARY channel entered under SETTINGS is the p.u. base used when setting the pickup level. The AUX UV1 DELAY setting selects the minimum operating time of the auxiliary undervoltage element. Both AUX UV1 PICKUP and AUX UV1 DELAY settings establish the operating curve of the undervoltage element. The auxiliary undervoltage element can be programmed to use either Definite Time Delay or Inverse Time Delay characteristics. The operating characteristics and equations for both Definite and Inverse Time Delay are as for the Phase Undervoltage element. The element resets instantaneously. The minimum voltage setting selects the operating voltage below which the element is blocked.
SETTING
AUX UV1 FUNCTION:

SETTING AUX UV1 PICKUP: AUX UV1 CURVE: AUX UV1 DELAY: AND SETTING AUX UV1 MINIMUM VOLTAGE: Vx < Minimum V
827849A2.CDR

Disabled=0 Enabled=1 SETTING


AUX UV1 BLOCK:

FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS AUX UV1 PKP AUX UV1 DPO AUX UV1 OP

Off=0 SETTING
AUX UV1 SIGNAL SOURCE:

RUN t

Vx < Pickup

AUX VOLT Vx

Figure 581: AUXILIARY UNDERVOLTAGE SCHEME LOGIC

5-132

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS g) AUXILIARY OVERVOLTAGE (ANSI 59X)


PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) VOLTAGE ELEMENTS

5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS

AUXILIARY OV1

AUXILIARY OV1

AUX OV1 FUNCTION: Disabled


MESSAGE

Range: Disabled, Enabled

AUX OV1 SIGNAL SOURCE: SRC 1 AUX OV1 PICKUP: 0.300 pu AUX OV1 PICKUP DELAY: 1.00 s AUX OV1 RESET DELAY: 1.00 s AUX OV1 BLOCK: Off AUX OV1 TARGET: Self-reset AUX OV1 EVENTS: Disabled

Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4

MESSAGE

Range: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE

Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01

MESSAGE

Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01

MESSAGE

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled

MESSAGE

Range: Disabled, Enabled

This element is intended for monitoring overvoltage conditions of the auxiliary voltage. In the G60, this element is used to detect stator ground faults by measuring the voltage across the neutral resistor. The nominal secondary voltage of the auxVOLTAGE BANK X5 AUXILIARY VT X5 SECONDARY is iliary voltage channel entered under SYSTEM SETUP AC INPUTS the p.u. base used when setting the pickup level.
SETTING
AUX OV1 FUNCTION:

Disabled=0 Enabled=1 SETTING


AUX OV1 BLOCK:

SETTING AUX OV1 PICKUP: AND RUN SETTING AUX OV1 PICKUP DELAY : AUX OV1 RESET DELAY : Vx < Pickup tPKP tRST

Off=0 SETTING
AUX OV1 SIGNAL SOURCE:

FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS AUX OV1 OP AUX OV1 DPO AUX OV1 PKP

AUXILIARY VOLT (Vx)


827836A2.CDR

Figure 582: AUXILIARY OVERVOLTAGE SCHEME LOGIC

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-133

5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS h) VOLTS PER HERTZ (ANSI 24)


PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) VOLTAGE ELEMENTS VOLTS/HZ 1(2) Range: Disabled, Enabled

5 SETTINGS

VOLTS/HZ 1

VOLTS/HZ 1 FUNCTION: Disabled


MESSAGE

VOLTS/HZ 1 SOURCE: SRC 1 VOLTS/HZ 1 PICKUP: 1.00 pu VOLTS/HZ 1 CURVE: Definite Time VOLTS/HZ 1 TD MULTIPLIER: 1.00 VOLTS/HZ 1 T-RESET: 1.0 s VOLTS/HZ 1 BLOCK: Off VOLTS/HZ 1 TARGET: Self-reset VOLTS/HZ 1 EVENTS: Disabled

Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4

MESSAGE

Range: 0.80 to 4.00 pu in steps of 0.01

MESSAGE

Range: Definite Time, Inverse A, Inverse B, Inverse C, FlexCurve A, FlexCurve B Range: 0.05 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

Range: 0.0 to 1000.0 s in steps of 0.1

MESSAGE

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled

MESSAGE

Range: Disabled, Enabled

The per-unit V/Hz value is calculated using the maximum of the three-phase voltage inputs or the auxiliary voltage channel Vx input, if the Source is not configured with phase voltages. To use the V/Hz element with auxiliary voltage, set SYSTEM SIGNAL SOURCES SOURCE 1(6) SOURCE 1(6) PHASE VT to None and SOURCE 1(6) AUX VT to the correspondSETUP ing voltage input bank. If there is no voltage on the relay terminals in either case, the per-unit V/Hz value is automatically set to 0. The per unit value is established as per voltage and nominal frequency power system settings as follows: 1.
SETUP SETUP

If the phase voltage inputs defined in the source menu are used for V/Hz operation, then 1 pu is the selected SYSTEM AC INPUTS VOLTAGE BANK N PHASE VT N SECONDARY setting, divided by the divided by the SYSTEM POWER SYSTEM NOMINAL FREQUENCY setting.

2.

When the auxiliary voltage Vx is used (regarding the condition for None phase voltage setting mentioned above), then the 1 pu value is the SYSTEM SETUP AC INPUTS VOLTAGE BANK N AUXILIARY VT N SECONDARY setting POWER SYSTEM NOMINAL FREQUENCY setting. divided by the SYSTEM SETUP If V/Hz source is configured with both phase and auxiliary voltages, the maximum phase among the three voltage channels at any given point in time is the input voltage signal for element operation, and therefore the per-unit value will be calculated as described in Step 1 above. If the measured voltage of all three phase voltages is 0, than the perunit value becomes automatically 0 regardless of the presence of auxiliary voltage.
SETTINGS VOLTS / HZ 1 PICKUP: VOLTS / HZ 1 CURVE: VOLTS / HZ 1 TD MULTIPLIER: VOLTS / HZ 1 T-RESET: AND t RUN FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS VOLTS PER HERTZ 1 PKP VOLTS PER HERTZ 1 DPO VOLTS PER HERTZ 1 OP

3.

SETTING VOLTS/HZ 1 FUNCTION: Disabled = 0 Enabled = 1 SETTING VOLTS/HZ 1 BLOCK: Off = 0 SETTING VOLTS/HZ 1 SOURCE: VOLT / Hz

V/Hz

828003A5.CDR

Figure 583: VOLTS PER HERTZ SCHEME LOGIC

5-134

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS

The element has a linear reset characteristic. The reset time can be programmed to match the cooling characteristics of the protected equipment. The element will fully reset from the trip threshold in VOLTS/HZ T-RESET seconds. The V/Hz element may be used as an instantaneous element with no intentional time delay or as a Definite or Inverse timed element. The characteristics of the inverse curves are shown below. DEFINITE TIME: T(sec.) = TD Multiplier. For example, setting the TD Multiplier set to 20 means a time delay of 20 seconds to operate, when above the Volts/Hz pickup setting. Instantaneous operation can be obtained the same way by setting the TD Multiplier to 0. INVERSE CURVE A: The curve for the Volts/Hertz Inverse Curve A shape is derived from the formula:
Time To Trip (seconds)

1000

100

TDM V T = ------------------------------------------------ when --- > Pickup 2 F V --- Pickup 1 F where:

(EQ 5.28)

10

Time Delay Setting

10 1 3 1 0.1 0.3 0.1 0.01 1.00

T = Operating Time TDM = Time Delay Multiplier (delay in sec.) V = fundamental RMS value of voltage (pu) F = frequency of voltage signal (pu) Pickup = volts-per-hertz pickup setpoint (pu)

1.20

1.40

1.60

1.80

2.00

Multiples of Volts/Hertz Pickup

INVERSE CURVE B: The curve for the Volts/Hertz Inverse Curve B shape is derived from the formula:
Time To Trip (seconds)

1000

5
Time Delay Setting

TDM V T = --------------------------------------------- when --- > Pickup F V Pickup 1 -- F where:

(EQ 5.29)

100

T = Operating Time TDM = Time Delay Multiplier (delay in sec.) V = fundamental RMS value of voltage (pu) F = frequency of voltage signal (pu) Pickup = volts-per-hertz pickup setpoint (pu)

10

10 3

1 0.3 0.1 1.20 1.40 1.60 1.80 2.00

0.1 1.00

Multiples of Volts/Hertz Pickup

INVERSE CURVE C: The curve for the Volts/Hertz Inverse Curve C shape is derived from the formula: V TDM T = ---------------------------------------------------- when --- > Pickup 0.5 F V Pickup --1 F where:
(EQ 5.30)
Time To Trip (seconds)

10000

1000

100

Time Delay Setting

T = Operating Time TDM = Time Delay Multiplier (delay in sec.) V = fundamental RMS value of voltage (pu) F = frequency of voltage signal (pu) Pickup = volts-per-hertz pickup setpoint (pu)

10 10 3 1 1 0.3 0.1 0.1 1.00 1.20 1.40 1.60 1.80 2.00

Multiples of Voltz/Hertz Pickup

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-135

5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS

5 SETTINGS 5.5.13 LOSS OF EXCITATION

PATH: SETTINGS

GROUPED ELEMENTS

SETTING GROUP 1(6)

LOSS OF EXCITATION Range: Disabled, Enabled

LOSS OF EXCITATION
MESSAGE

LOSS OF EXCITATION FUNCTION: Disabled LOSS OF EXCITATION SOURCE: SRC 1 LOSS OF EXCITATION CENTER 1: 10.00 ohm LOSS OF EXCITATION RADIUS 1: 8.00 ohm EXCITATION V SUPV 1: Enabled LOSS OF EXCITATION PKP DELAY1: 0.050 s LOSS OF EXCITATION CENTER 2: 12.00 ohm LOSS OF EXCITATION RADIUS 2: 10.00 ohm LOSS OF EXCITATION V SUPV 2: Enabled LOSS OF EXCITATION PKP DELAY2: 0.500 s LOSS OF EXCITATION UV SUPV: 0.700 pu LOSS OF EXCIT BLK: Off LOSS OF EXCITATION TARGET: Self-reset LOSS OF EXCITATION EVENTS: Disabled

Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4

MESSAGE

Range: 0.10 to 300.00 ohms in steps of 0.01

MESSAGE

Range: 0.10 to 300.00 ohms in steps of 0.01

MESSAGE

Range: Disabled, Enabled

MESSAGE

Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.01

MESSAGE

Range: 0.10 to 300.00 ohms in steps of 0.01

MESSAGE

Range: 0.10 to 300.00 ohms in steps of 0.01

MESSAGE

Range: Disabled, Enabled

MESSAGE

Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.01

MESSAGE

Range: 0.000 to 1.250 pu in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled

MESSAGE

Range: Disabled, Enabled

The operating characteristic is shaped out of two offset mho circles shifted down along the imaginary axis as shown below.
X

Xd 2

R
C1 = Center of element 1 = (Zb + Xd) / 2 R1 = Radius of element 1 = Zb / 2

C2

C1

Zb

C2 = Center of element 2 = (Xd + Xd) / 2 R2 = Radius of element 2 = Xd / 2 Zb = Base impedance of the machine Xd = Transient reactance of the machine Xd = Synchronous reactance of the machine
830711A1.CDR

Figure 584: LOSS OF EXCITATION OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS

5-136

G60 Generator Management Relay

Xd

R1 R2

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS STAGE 1 SETTINGS:

5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS

The stage 1 characteristic is typically set to detect a loss of excitation for load conditions of 30% of the nominal or higher. This is achieved with a mho element with a diameter equal to the base impedance of the machine and an offset equal to half the machine transient reactance (Xd). Zb + Xd CENTER 1 = ---------------------- , 2 RADIUS 1 = Zb -----2
(EQ 5.31)

The stage 1 element should be time delayed to allow for blocking by the VT fuse failure element (50 ms). STAGE 2 SETTINGS: The stage 2 characteristic is typically set to detect a loss of excitation for all load conditions. This is achieved with a mho element with a diameter equal to the synchronous reactance of the machine and an offset equal to half the machine transient reactance (Xd). Xd + Xd CENTER 2 = ---------------------- , 2 RADIUS 1 = Xd -----2
(EQ 5.32)

During stable power swing conditions the positive-sequence impedance may momentarily enter the stage 2 characteristic. For security of the function under such conditions, it is recommended to delay stage 2 by a minimum of 0.5 seconds. The LOSS OF EXCIT BLK setting specifies a FlexLogic operand for blocking the feature based on user-programmable conditions. When the blocking input is asserted, the element resets its timers, de-asserts the PKP and OP operands (if asserted), clears self-reset targets, logs a blocked event if events are enabled, and becomes inactive. When unblocked, the element will start functioning instantly. If exposed to pickup conditions for an extended period of time and unblocked, the element will pickup and start timing out at the moment of unblocking. The element responds to the positive sequence impedance as shown below.
SETTING
LOSS OF EXCITATION FUNCTION:

Disabled=0 Generator=1, Motor=1 SETTING


LOSS EXCIT BLK:

SETTINGS
LOSS OF EXCITATION FUNCTION:

Off=0 SETTING
LOSS OF EXCITATION UV SUPV 1 :

BLOCK (See description) COMPARATOR


RUN

LOSS OF EXCITATION CENTER 1: LOSS OF EXCITATION RADIUS 1:

FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS LOSS EXCIT STG1 PKP SETTING


LOSS OF EXCITATION PKP DELAY 1:

I_1 > 0.05 pu AND OR

LOSS EXCIT STG1 DPO

Disabled=1 Enabled=0

RUN

0 ms

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND 0 ms LOSS EXCIT STG1 OP

20 ms

SETTING
LOSS OF EXCITATION UV SUPV : RUN

LOSS OF EXCITATION CENTER 2: LOSS OF EXCITATION RADIUS 2:

FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS LOSS EXCIT STG2 PKP SETTING


LOSS OF EXCITATION PKP DELAY 2:

LOSS EXCIT STG2 DPO

SETTING
LOSS OF EXCITATION UV SUPV 2 :

|V_1| < PICKUP


OR

AND

RUN

Disabled=1 Enabled=0 SETTING


LOSS OF EXCITATION SOURCE:

0 ms

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND 0 ms LOSS EXCIT STG2 OP FLEXLOGIC OPERAND OR LOSS EXCIT OP FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

20 ms

I_1 V_1

OR

LOSS EXCIT PKP FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

830001AB.CDR

LOSS EXCIT DPO

Figure 585: LOSS OF EXCITATION SCHEME LOGIC

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-137

5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS

5 SETTINGS 5.5.14 ACCIDENTAL ENERGIZATION

PATH: SETTINGS

GROUPED ELEMENTS

SETTING GROUP 1(6)

ACCIDENTAL ENERGIZATION Range: Disabled, Enabled

ACCIDENTAL ENERGIZATION
MESSAGE

ACCDNT ENRG FUNCTION: Disabled ACCDNT ENRG SOURCE: SRC 1 ACCDNT ENRG ARMING MODE: UV and Offline ACCDNT ENRG OC PICKUP: 0.300 pu ACCDNT ENRG UV PICKUP: 0.500 pu ACCDNT ENRG OFFLINE: Off ACCDNT ENRG BLOCK: Off ACCDNT ENRG TARGET: Self-reset ACCDNT ENRG EVENTS: Disabled

Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4

MESSAGE

Range: UV and Offline, UV or Offline

MESSAGE

Range: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE

Range: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled

MESSAGE

Range: Disabled, Enabled

This element provides protection against energization while the generator is at standstill or reduced speed. The feature is armed using either the AND or OR combination of the undervoltage and machine off-line conditions, selected with the ACCDNT ENRG ARMING MODE setting (see below). The undervoltage condition is determined from the measured voltages. The machine off-line status is indicated by a dedicated FlexLogic operand. Once armed, the Accidental Energization feature operates upon detecting an overcurrent condition in any of the stator phases. This feature can also provide protection against poor synchronization. ACCDNT ENRG ARMING MODE: This setting specifies whether the feature gets armed by either of the undervoltage or machine off-line conditions (UV or Off-line value), or by both the conditions (UV and Off-line value). In both cases, the element is armed after 5 seconds of the appropriate condition and de-armed 250 ms after the arming condition (UV and/or Off-line) ceases. The UV or Off-line selection shall be made when the VTs are on the power system side of the disconnecting device. If this is the case, the measured voltages may be normal regardless of the status of the protected machine, thus the need for an OR condition. The UV or Off-line value provides protection against poor synchronization. During normal synchronization, there should be relatively low current measured. If however, synchronization is attempted when conditions are not appropriate, a large current would be measured shortly after closing the breaker. Since this feature does not de-arm immediately, but after a 250 ms time delay, this will result in operation under imprecise synchronization. The ACCDNT ENRG OC PICKUP setting can control the required precision of synchronization. The UV and Off-line value shall be made when the VTs are on the generator side of the disconnecting device. If this is the case, both the undervoltage and machine off-line conditions are required to indicate that the protected generator is not energized. ACCDNT ENRG OC PICKUP: This setting specifies the current level required to operate the armed Accidental Energization element. If any of the phase current is above the ACCDNT ENRG OC PICKUP level, the feature operates. ACCDNT ENRG UV PICKUP: This setting specifies the voltage level required to arm the Accidental Energization element. All of the line-to-line voltages must drop below the ACCDNT ENRG UV PICKUP level in order to detect the undervoltage condition. The setting is entered in voltage pu values. As the element always responds to the line-to-line voltages, care must be applied in picking up the value depending on the VT connection. ACCDNT ENRG OFFLINE: This setting specifies the FlexLogic operand indicating that the protected generator is off-line.

5-138

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS

SETTING ACCDNT ENRG FUNCTION: Disabled = 0 Enabled = 1 SETTING ACCDNT ENRG BLOCK: Off = 0 SETTINGS ACCDNT ENRG OC PICKUP: AND RUN RUN RUN SETTING ACCDNT ENRG SOURCE: IA IB IC VT CONNECTION WYE VAG - VBG VBG - VCG VCG - VAG SETTING ACCDNT ENRG OFFLINE: Off = 0 SETTING ACCDNT ENRG ARMING MODE: UV or Offline = 1
830004A3.CDR

IA IB IC

> Pickup > Pickup > Pickup OR

SETTINGS ACCDNT ENRG UV PICKUP: RUN DELTA VAB VBC VCA RUN RUN VAB < Pickup VBC < Pickup VCA < Pickup AND AND AND

FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS ACCDNT ENRG OP ACCDNT ENRG DPO

OR

OR

5s 0.25 s

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND ACCDNT ENRG ARMED

AND

Figure 586: ACCIDENTAL ENERGIZATION SCHEME LOGIC

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-139

5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS

5 SETTINGS 5.5.15 SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER

PATH: SETTINGS

GROUPED ELEMENTS

SETTING GROUP 1(6)

SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL...

DIRECTIONAL POWER 1(2)

DIRECTIONAL POWER 1
MESSAGE

DIR POWER 1 FUNCTION: Disabled DIR POWER 1 SOURCE: SRC 1 DIR POWER 1 RCA: 0 DIR POWER 1 CALIBRATION: 0.00 DIR POWER 1 STG1 SMIN: 0.100 pu DIR POWER 1 STG1 DELAY: 0.50 s DIR POWER 1 STG2 SMIN: 0.100 pu DIR POWER 1 STG2 DELAY: 20.00 s DIR POWER 1 BLK: Off DIR POWER 1 TARGET: Self-Reset DIR POWER 1 EVENTS: Disabled

Range: Disabled, Enabled

Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4

MESSAGE

Range: 0 to 359 in steps of 1

MESSAGE

Range: 0 to 0.95 in steps of 0.05

MESSAGE

Range: 1.200 to 1.200 pu in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE

Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01

MESSAGE

Range: 1.200 to 1.200 pu in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE

Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01

MESSAGE

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

Range: Self-Reset, Latched, Disabled

MESSAGE

Range: Disabled, Enabled

The Directional Power element responds to three-phase active power and is designed for reverse power and low forward power applications for synchronous machines or interconnections involving co-generation. The relay measures the threephase power from either full set of wye-connected VTs or full-set of delta-connected VTs. In the latter case, the two-wattmeter method is used. Refer to the UR Metering Conventions section in Chapter 6 for conventions regarding the active and reactive powers used by the Directional Power element. The element has an adjustable characteristic angle and minimum operating power as shown in the Directional Power Characteristic diagram. The element responds to the following condition: P cos + Q sin > SMIN where:
(EQ 5.33)

P and Q are active and reactive powers as measured per the UR convention, is a sum of the element characteristic (DIR POWER 1 RCA) and calibration (DIR POWER 1 CALIBRATION) angles, and SMIN is the minimum operating power

The operating quantity is available for display as under ACTUAL VALUES METERING SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER 1(2). The element has two independent (as to the pickup and delay settings) stages for alarm and trip, respectively.

5-140

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS

Q
re ct io n Di

OPERATE RCA+ CALIBRATION P

SMIN + RESTRAIN -

Figure 587: DIRECTIONAL POWER CHARACTERISTIC By making the characteristic angle adjustable and providing for both negative and positive values of the minimum operating power a variety of operating characteristics can be achieved as presented in the figure below. For example, Figure (a) below shows settings for reverse power application, while Figure (b) shows settings for low forward power application.

(a)

(b)

RESTRAIN OPERATE RESTRAIN

OPERATE

RCA = 180o SMIN > 0

RCA = 180o SMIN < 0

(c)

(d)

OPERATE

OPERATE

P
RESTRAIN RCA = 0o SMIN < 0 RESTRAIN RCA = 0o SMIN > 0

(e)

OPERATE

(f)

RESTRAIN

RESTRAIN

OPERATE

RCA = 90o SMIN > 0

RCA = 270o SMIN < 0

842702A1.CDR

Figure 588: DIRECTIONAL POWER ELEMENT SAMPLE APPLICATIONS

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-141

5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS

5 SETTINGS

DIR POWER 1(2) RCA: Specifies the relay characteristic angle (RCA) for the directional power function. Application of this setting is threefold: 1. 2. 3. It allows the element to respond to active or reactive power in any direction (active overpower/underpower, etc.). Together with a precise calibration angle, it allows compensation for any CT and VT angular errors to permit more sensitive settings. It allows for required direction in situations when the voltage signal is taken from behind a delta-wye connected power transformer and the phase angle compensation is required.

For example, the active overpower characteristic is achieved by setting DIR POWER 1(2) RCA to 0, reactive overpower by setting DIR POWER 1(2) RCA to 90, active underpower by setting DIR POWER 1(2) RCA to 180, and reactive underpower by setting DIR POWER 1(2) RCA to 270. DIR POWER 1(2) CALIBRATION: This setting allows the RCA to change in small steps of 0.05. This may be useful when a small difference in VT and CT angular errors is to be compensated to permit more sensitive settings. This setting virtually enables calibration of the Directional Power function in terms of the angular error of applied VTs and CTs. The element responds to the sum of the DIR POWER 1(2) RCA and DIR POWER 1(2) CALIBRATION settings. DIR POWER 1(2) STG1 SMIN: This setting specifies the minimum power as defined along the RCA angle for the stage 1 of the element. The positive values imply a shift towards the operate region along the RCA line. The negative values imply a shift towards the restrain region along the RCA line. Refer to the Directional Power Sample Applications figure for an illustration. Together with the RCA, this setting enables a wide range of operating characteristics. This setting applies to three-phase power and is entered in pu. The base quantity is 3 VT pu base CT pu base. For example, a setting of 2% for a 200 MW machine, is 0.02 200 MW = 4 MW. If 7.967 kV is a primary VT voltage and 10 kA is a primary CT current, the source pu quantity is 239 MVA, and thus, SMIN should be set at 4 MW / 239 MVA = 0.0167 pu 0.017 pu. If the reverse power application is considered, RCA = 180 and SMIN = 0.017 pu. The element drops out if the magnitude of the positive-sequence current becomes virtually zero, that is, it drops below the cutoff level. DIR POWER 1(2) STG1 DELAY: This setting specifies a time delay for Stage 1. For reverse power or low forward power applications for a synchronous machine, Stage 1 is typically applied for alarming and Stage 2 for tripping.

SETTING DIR POWER 1 FUNCTION: Enabled = 1 SETTINGS SETTING


AND

SETTING DIR POWER 1 STG1 DELAY: tPKP 100ms FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS DIR POWER 1 STG1 DPO DIR POWER 1 DPO
OR

DIR POWER 1 RCA: DIR POWER 1 CALIBRATION: DIR POWER 1 STG1 SMIN:

DIR POWER 1 BLK: Off

SETTING DIR POWER 1 SOURCE: 3 Active Power (P) 3 Reactive Power (Q)

DIR POWER 1 STG2 SMIN: RUN DIRECTIONAL POWER CHARACTERISTICS

FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS DIR POWER 1 STG1 OP

DIR POWER 1 STG1 PKP DIR POWER 1 STG2 PKP DIR POWER 1 STG2 DPO SETTING DIR POWER 1 STG2 DELAY: tPKP 100ms

DIR POWER 1 PKP


OR

DIR POWER 1 OP DIR POWER 1 STG2 OP

842003A2.CDR

Figure 589: DIRECTIONAL POWER SCHEME LOGIC

5-142

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS 5.5.16 STATOR GROUND

a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) STATOR GROUND Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4

STATOR GROUND
MESSAGE

STATOR GROUND SOURCE: SRC1 100% STATOR GROUND 3RD HARM NTRL UNDERVOLTAGE

See page 5144. See page 5147.

MESSAGE

Two means of stator ground fault protection are provided: 100% Stator Ground protection that uses third harmonic signals at the neutral of the machine and in the zerosequence voltage of the machine terminals. Third Harmonic Neutral Undervoltage protection that responds to the 3rd harmonic in the voltage at the machine neutral point.

SOURCE

The two protection elements are configured through their individual setting menus. They share the STATOR GROUND setting. This setting specifies a signal source used to provide current and voltage signals for stator ground fault protection. For the 100% Stator Ground protection function, the source shall be configured as follows: Phase voltages measured at the terminal of the machine shall be configured as phase VT banks. The element extracts the 3rd harmonic of the zero-sequence voltage from the phase voltages in order to operate. The VTs must be connected in WYE. Voltage measured at the neutral of the machine shall be configured as the Auxiliary VT bank. The element extracts the 3rd harmonic of the auxiliary voltage from the source in order to operate. Phase voltages measured at the terminal of the machine shall be configured as Phase VT banks. The element uses the voltages to measure the power at the machine terminals for power supervision. Phase currents measured at the terminal of the machine shall be configured as Phase CT banks. The element uses the currents to measures the power at the machine terminals for power supervision. Voltage measured at the neutral of the machine shall be configured as the Auxiliary VT bank. The element extracts the 3rd harmonic of the auxiliary voltage from the source in order to operate.

For the Third Harmonic Neutral Undervoltage protection function, the source shall be configured as follows:

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-143

5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS b) 100% STATOR GROUND


PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) STATOR GROUND

5 SETTINGS

100% STATOR GROUND

100% STATOR GROUND


MESSAGE

100% STATOR GROUND FUNCTION: Disabled 100% STATOR GND STG1 PICKUP: 0.150 pu 100% STATOR GND STG1 DELAY: 1.00 s 100% STATOR GND STG1 SUPV: 0.0075 pu 100% STATOR GND STG2 PICKUP: 0.150 pu 100% STATOR GND STG2 DELAY: 1.00 s 100% STATOR GND STG2 SUPV: 0.0075 pu 100% STATOR GND BLK: Off 100% STATOR GROUND TARGET: Self-reset 100% STATOR GROUND EVENTS: Disabled

Range: Disabled, Enabled

Range: 0.000 to 0.250 pu in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE

Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01

MESSAGE

Range: 0.0010 to 0.1000 pu in steps of 0.0001

MESSAGE

Range: 0.000 to 0.250 pu in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE

Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01

MESSAGE

Range: 0.0010 to 0.1000 pu in steps of 0.0001

MESSAGE

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled

MESSAGE

Range: Disabled, Enabled

The 100% stator ground function responds to third harmonic voltage measured at the generator neutral and output terminals. When used in conjunction with the neutral overvoltage (fundamental frequency) element, it provides 100% ground fault protection of the stator windings. Since the amount of third harmonic voltage that appears in the neutral is both load and machine dependent, the protection method of choice is an adaptive method. The following formula is used to create an adaptive operating quantity based on the amount of third harmonic that appears at the generator terminals. V N ( 3rd ) --------------------------------------------- < Pickup V N ( 3rd ) + V 0 ( 3rd ) where: and V 0 ( 3rd ) --------------------------------------------- > 1 Pickup V N ( 3rd ) + V 0 ( 3rd ) and V N ( 3rd ) + V 0 ( 3rd ) > Supervision
(EQ 5.34)

VN(3rd) is a magnitude of the 3rd harmonic in the voltage measured at the machine neutral point measured via an auxiliary channel of the VT bank, and V0(3rd) is a magnitude of the 3rd harmonic in the zero-sequence voltage measured at the machine terminals. This element requires wye-connected VTs for measurement of the third harmonic in the zero-sequence voltage at the generator output terminals.

NOTE

Example 1: Operating quantities under normal conditions. Consider the figure shown below. In the case of a high impedance grounded machine, the neutral resistor is typically chosen such that power dissipated in the resistor during a single line to ground fault is approximately equal to the reactive power produced by the zero sequence capacitance of the stator winding and the GSU LV winding ( X oc ). At power system frequencies, the neutral resistance is therefore equal to equal X oc 3 , and at 3 F n , the neutral resistance is X oc . For analysis, assume that E 3 = 10 V , R = 5, and X c = 5 .

5-144

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS

E3 E3 E3

k
VN

VA VB VC

Vn(3rd ) Vn(3rd ) + Vo (3rd ) and


Vn(3rd)

< Pickup
Va(3rd)

Vo (3rd ) Vn(3rd ) + Vo (3rd ) and

< 1 Pickup >


3Vo (3rd)

Vb(3rd) Vc(3rd)

Vn(3rd ) + Vo (3rd ) < Supervision >

Figure 590: 100% STATOR GROUND APPLICATION EXAMPLE We have the magnitude of neutral voltage VN as: R E3 10 5 10V N = ----------------- = --------------- V = --------- V 5 j5 1j R jX c V N = 7.07 V and the magnitude of the neutral and zero-sequence voltages V N + V 0 as: jX c E 3 j50 j10 V 0 = ----------------------- = ------------- = ---------- V N + V 0 = 10 j10 -------------------R jX c 5 j5 1 j 1j V N + V 0 = 10 pu Therefore, under the normal conditions described above, we set the operating quantities as follows: VN Pickup > ---------------------- = 0.707 = 0.707 pu -------------VN + V0 10 Supervision < V N + V 0 = 10 pu In actual practice, the pickup ratio may vary from 0.4 to 0.85. Example 2: Operating quantities for a fault at a fraction k from the neutral grounding point. For analysis, consider the above figure and assume that E 3 = 10 V , R = 5, X c = 5, and k = 0.15 . In this case, we have the magnitude of the neutral voltage at: V N = k E 3 = 0.15 10 = 1.5 and the magnitude of the neutral and zero-sequence voltages V N + V 0 as:
(EQ 5.38) (EQ 5.36) (EQ 5.35)

(EQ 5.37)

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-145

5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS ( 1 k )E 3 + ( 1 k )E 3 + ( 1 k )E 3 3 0.85 10 V 0 = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ = --------------------------------- = 8.5 V N + V 0 = 8.5 + 1.5 = 10 3 3 V N + V 0 = 10 pu

5 SETTINGS

(EQ 5.39)

Therefore, for faults at a fraction k = 0.15 from the neutral grounding point, we set the operating quantities as follows: VN 1.5 Pickup > ---------------------- = ------- = 0.15 pu VN + V0 10 Supervision < V N + V 0 = 10 pu The 100% stator ground settings are described below. 100% STATOR GND STG1(2) PICKUP: This setting specifies a pickup level for the operating quantity. It may be beneficial to measure the operating quantity under various load conditions for a particular machine in order to optimize this setting. This can be achieved using the actual values menu of the G60. 100% STATOR GND STG1(2) DELAY: This setting specifies a time delay required to operate after the pickup condition is established. 100% STATOR GND STG1(2) SUPV: This setting specifies a signal level supervision for the vectorial sum of the third harmonic at the machine neutral and in the zero-sequence terminal voltage. The setting is entered as a pu of the terminal voltages. Different settings may be considered for stages 1 and 2 as one of them could be used for alarm and the other for trip. The safe value of this setting could be established after putting a given machine into service and reading the quantity from the relay under ACTUAL VALUES menu.
SETTING

(EQ 5.40)

SETTING 100% STATOR GROUND FUNCTION: Disabled=0 Enabled=1 SETTING 100% STATOR GND BLK: Off=0 SETTING STATOR GROUND SOURCE: Vaux (3rd harmonic) V_0 (3rd harmonic) V_1 (fundamental)

100% STATOR GND STG1 PICKUP: 100% STATOR GND STG1 SUPV: 100% STATOR GND STG2 PICKUP: 100% STATOR GND STG2 SUPV: AND RUN Vaux Vaux + V_0 & V_0 Vaux + V_0 & Vaux + V_0 < Supv AND V_1 > 0.5 pu SETTING 100% STATOR GND STG2 DELAY: t PKP 20 ms OR FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS 100% STATOR STG2 PKP 100% STATOR STG2 DPO FLEXLOGIC OPERAND 100% STATOR OP FLEXLOGIC OPERAND 100% STATOR STG2 OP
830003A5.CDR

SETTING 100% STATOR GND STG1 DELAY: t PKP 20 ms

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND 100% STATOR STG1 OP FLEXLOGIC OPERAND 100% STATOR DPO

< Pickup AND

FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS 100% STATOR STG1 DPO 100% STATOR STG1 PKP

< 1-Pickup

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND OR 100% STATOR PKP

Figure 591: 100% STATOR GROUND SCHEME LOGIC

5-146

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS c) THIRD HARMONIC NEUTRAL UNDERVOLTAGE


PATH: SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) STATOR GROUND

5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS

3RD HARM NTRL UNDERVOLTAGE

3RD HARM NTRL UNDERVOLTAGE


MESSAGE

3RD HARM NTRL UV FUNCTION: Disabled 3RD HARM NTRL UV PICKUP: 0.300 pu 3RD HARM NTRL UV PKP DELAY: 0.00 s 3RD HARM NTRL UV MAX POWER: 0.200 pu 3RD HARM NTRL UV MIN POWER: 0.200 pu 3RD HARM NTRL UV VOLT SUPV: 0.500 pu 3RD HARM NTRL UV BLK: Off 3RD HARM NTRL UV TARGET: Self-reset 3RD HARM NTRL UV EVENTS: Disabled

Range: Disabled, Enabled

Range: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE

Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01

MESSAGE

Range: 0.000 to 1.250 pu in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE

Range: 0.000 to 1.250 pu in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE

Range: 0.000 to 1.250 pu in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled

MESSAGE

Range: Disabled, Enabled

The Third Harmonic Neutral Undervoltage function detects a loss of 3rd harmonic voltage at the generator neutral. The percentage of stator winding covered by this function depends on the pickup setting and the amount of third harmonic generated by the machine at the time of the fault. A settable window of forward power can supervise this element for enhanced security. The element is also supervised by positive sequence voltage measured at the generator output terminals. This element can be used with either wye or delta connected VTs on the terminal side and requires the machine neutral voltage to be connected via an auxiliary voltage channel of a relay VT bank. 3RD HARM NTRL UV PICKUP: This setting specifies the pickup level for the magnitude of the 3rd harmonic of the neutral voltage. This setting is entered in pu of the nominal auxiliary voltage.
100% STATOR The magnitude of the third harmonic voltage at the neutral point is monitored in ACTUAL VALUES GROUND. Measuring the actual value of the operating quantity for a specific machine under variety of load conditions may be helpful when selecting the pickup threshold for this feature.

3RD HARM NTRL UV MAX POWER: This setting specifies the maximum active power that inhibits this protection function. If the measured power is below this setting but above the 3RD HARM NTRL UV MIN POWER setting the element shall not operate. This setting applies to three-phase power and is entered in pu. The base quantity is 3 VT pu base CT pu base. For example, a setting of 20% for a 200 MW machine, is 0.20 200 MW = 40 MW. If 7.967 kV is a primary VT voltage and 10 kA is a primary CT current, the source pu quantity is 239 MVA, and thus, the pu power setting is 40 MW / 239 MVA = 0.167 pu.

3RD HARM NTRL UV MIN POWER: This setting specifies the minimum active power that inhibits this protection function. If the measured power is above this setting but below the 3RD HARM NTRL UV MAX POWER setting the element shall not operate. If the 3RD HARMONIC NTRL UV MIN POWER is set to 0.00 pu, then the element will not operate for all power values less than the 3RD HARM NTRL UV MAX POWER setting. This setting applies to three-phase power and is entered in pu. The base quantity is 3 VT pu base CT pu base.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-147

5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS

5 SETTINGS

SETTING 3RD HARM NTRL UV FUNCTION: Disabled = 0 Enabled = 1 SETTING 3RD HARM NTRL UV BLK: Off = 0 SETTINGS 3RD HARM NTRL UV PICKUP: AND RUN Vaux < Pickup

SETTINGS 3RD HARM NTRL UV MAX POWER: 3RD HARM NTRL UV MIN POWER: RUN Min < 3 Phase Power < Max AND

SETTINGS 3RD HARM NTRL UV PKP DELAY: 20 ms

FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS 3RD HARM NTRL UV PKP 3RD HARM NTRL UV DPO 3RD HARM NTRL UV OP

SETTING STATOR GROUND SOURCE: Vaux (3rd harmonic) 3 Phase Real Power V_1

SETTINGS 3RD HARM NTRL UV VOLT SUPV: RUN V_1 > Pickup

830005A4.CDR

Figure 592: THIRD HARMONIC NEUTRAL UNDERVOLTAGE SCHEME LOGIC

5-148

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS 5.6CONTROL ELEMENTS

5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS 5.6.1 OVERVIEW

Control elements are generally used for control rather than protection. See the Introduction to Elements section at the beginning of this chapter for further information. 5.6.2 SETTING GROUPS
PATH: SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS SETTINGS GROUPS

SETTING GROUPS

SETTING GROUPS FUNCTION: Disabled


MESSAGE

Range: Disabled, Enabled

SETTING GROUPS BLK: Off GROUP 2 ACTIVATE ON: Off GROUP 3 ACTIVATE ON: Off

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

GROUP 6 ACTIVATE ON: Off GROUP 1 NAME: GROUP 2 NAME:

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

Range: up to 16 alphanumeric characters

MESSAGE

Range: up to 16 alphanumeric characters

MESSAGE

GROUP 6 NAME: SETTING GROUP EVENTS: Disabled

Range: up to 16 alphanumeric characters

MESSAGE

Range: Disabled, Enabled

MENTS

The Setting Groups menu controls the activation/deactivation of up to six possible groups of settings in the GROUPED ELEsettings menu. The faceplate Settings In Use LEDs indicate which active group (with a non-flashing energized LED) is in service. The SETTING GROUPS BLK setting prevents the active setting group from changing when the FlexLogic parameter is set to "On". This can be useful in applications where it is undesirable to change the settings under certain conditions, such as the breaker being open.

Each GROUP n ACTIVATE ON setting selects a FlexLogic operand which, when set, will make the particular setting group active for use by any grouped element. A priority scheme ensures that only one group is active at a given time the highest-numbered group which is activated by its GROUP n ACTIVATE ON parameter takes priority over the lower-numbered groups. There is no activate on setting for Group 1 (the default active group), because Group 1 automatically becomes active if no other group is active. The SETTING GROUP 1(6) NAME settings allows to user to assign a name to each of the six settings groups. Once programmed, this name will appear on the second line of the GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1(6) menu display. The relay can be set up via a FlexLogic equation to receive requests to activate or de-activate a particular non-default settings group. The following FlexLogic equation (see the figure below) illustrates requests via remote communications (e.g. VIRTUAL INPUT 1) or from a local contact input (e.g. H7a) to initiate the use of a particular settings group, and requests from several overcurrent pickup measuring elements to inhibit the use of the particular settings group. The assigned VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 operand is used to control the On state of a particular settings group.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-149

5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS

5 SETTINGS

Figure 593: EXAMPLE FLEXLOGIC CONTROL OF A SETTINGS GROUP 5.6.3 SELECTOR SWITCH
PATH: SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS SELECTOR SWITCH SELECTOR SWITCH 1(2) Range: Disabled, Enabled

SELECTOR SWITCH 1

SELECTOR 1 FUNCTION: Disabled SELECTOR 1 FULL RANGE: 7 SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT: 5.0 s SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP: Off SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP MODE: Time-out SELECTOR 1 ACK: Off SELECTOR 1 3BIT A0: Off SELECTOR 1 3BIT A1: Off SELECTOR 1 3BIT A2: Off SELECTOR 1 3BIT MODE: Time-out SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK: Off SELECTOR 1 POWER-UP MODE: Restore SELECTOR 1 TARGETS: Self-reset SELECTOR 1 EVENTS: Disabled

MESSAGE

Range: 1 to 7 in steps of 1

MESSAGE

Range: 3.0 to 60.0 s in steps of 0.1

MESSAGE

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

Range: Time-out, Acknowledge

MESSAGE

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

Range: Time-out, Acknowledge

MESSAGE

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

Range: Restore, Synchronize, Sync/Restore

MESSAGE

Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled

MESSAGE

Range: Disabled, Enabled

5-150

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS

The Selector Switch element is intended to replace a mechanical selector switch. Typical applications include setting group control or control of multiple logic sub-circuits in user-programmable logic. The element provides for two control inputs. The step-up control allows stepping through selector position one step at a time with each pulse of the control input, such as a user-programmable pushbutton. The 3-bit control input allows setting the selector to the position defined by a 3-bit word. The element allows pre-selecting a new position without applying it. The pre-selected position gets applied either after timeout or upon acknowledgement via separate inputs (user setting). The selector position is stored in non-volatile memory. Upon power-up, either the previous position is restored or the relay synchronizes to the current 3-bit word (user setting). Basic alarm functionality alerts the user under abnormal conditions; e.g. the 3-bit control input being out of range. SELECTOR 1 FULL RANGE: This setting defines the upper position of the selector. When stepping up through available positions of the selector, the upper position wraps up to the lower position (Position 1). When using a direct 3-bit control word for programming the selector to a desired position, the change would take place only if the control word is within the range of 1 to the SELECTOR FULL RANGE. If the control word is outside the range, an alarm is established by setting the SELECTOR ALARM FlexLogic operand for 3 seconds. SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT: This setting defines the time-out period for the selector. This value is used by the relay in the following two ways. When the SELECTOR STEP-UP MODE is Time-out, the setting specifies the required period of inactivity of the control input after which the pre-selected position is automatically applied. When the SELECTOR STEPUP MODE is Acknowledge, the setting specifies the period of time for the acknowledging input to appear. The timer is re-started by any activity of the control input. The acknowledging input must come before the SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT timer expires; otherwise, the change will not take place and an alarm will be set. SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP: This setting specifies a control input for the selector switch. The switch is shifted to a new position at each rising edge of this signal. The position changes incrementally, wrapping up from the last (SELECTOR 1 FULL RANGE) to the first (Position 1). Consecutive pulses of this control operand must not occur faster than every 50 ms. After each rising edge of the assigned operand, the time-out timer is restarted and the SELECTOR SWITCH 1: POS Z CHNG INITIATED target message is displayed, where Z the pre-selected position. The message is displayed for the time specified by the FLASH MESSAGE TIME setting. The pre-selected position is applied after the selector times out (Time-out mode), or when the acknowledging signal appears before the element times out (Acknowledge mode). When the new position is applied, the relay displays the SELECTOR SWITCH 1: POSITION Z IN USE message. Typically, a user-programmable pushbutton is configured as the stepping up control input. SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP MODE: This setting defines the selector mode of operation. When set to Time-out, the selector will change its position after a pre-defined period of inactivity at the control input. The change is automatic and does not require any explicit confirmation of the intent to change the selector's position. When set to Acknowledge, the selector will change its position only after the intent is confirmed through a separate acknowledging signal. If the acknowledging signal does not appear within a pre-defined period of time, the selector does not accept the change and an alarm is established by setting the SELECTOR STP ALARM output FlexLogic operand for 3 seconds. SELECTOR 1 ACK: This setting specifies an acknowledging input for the stepping up control input. The pre-selected position is applied on the rising edge of the assigned operand. This setting is active only under Acknowledge mode of operation. The acknowledging signal must appear within the time defined by the SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT setting after the last activity of the control input. A user-programmable pushbutton is typically configured as the acknowledging input. SELECTOR 1 3BIT A0, A1, and A2: These settings specify a 3-bit control input of the selector. The 3-bit control word pre-selects the position using the following encoding convention:
A2 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 A1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 A0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 POSITION rest 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-151

5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS

5 SETTINGS

The rest position (0, 0, 0) does not generate an action and is intended for situations when the device generating the 3-bit control word is having a problem. When SELECTOR 1 3BIT MODE is Time-out, the pre-selected position is applied in SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT seconds after the last activity of the 3-bit input. When SELECTOR 1 3BIT MODE is Acknowledge, the pre-selected position is applied on the rising edge of the SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK acknowledging input. The stepping up control input (SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP) and the 3-bit control inputs (SELECTOR 1 3BIT A0 through A2) lockout mutually: once the stepping up sequence is initiated, the 3-bit control input is inactive; once the 3-bit control sequence is initiated, the stepping up input is inactive. SELECTOR 1 3BIT MODE: This setting defines the selector mode of operation. When set to Time-out, the selector changes its position after a pre-defined period of inactivity at the control input. The change is automatic and does not require explicit confirmation to change the selector position. When set to Acknowledge, the selector changes its position only after confirmation via a separate acknowledging signal. If the acknowledging signal does not appear within a pre-defined period of time, the selector rejects the change and an alarm established by invoking the SELECTOR BIT ALARM FlexLogic operand for 3 seconds. SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK: This setting specifies an acknowledging input for the 3-bit control input. The pre-selected position is applied on the rising edge of the assigned FlexLogic operand. This setting is active only under the Acknowledge mode of operation. The acknowledging signal must appear within the time defined by the SELECTOR TIME-OUT setting after the last activity of the 3-bit control inputs. Note that the stepping up control input and 3-bit control input have independent acknowledging signals (SELECTOR 1 ACK and SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK, accordingly). SELECTOR 1 POWER-UP MODE: This setting specifies the element behavior on power up of the relay. When set to Restore, the last position of the selector (stored in the non-volatile memory) is restored after powering up the relay. If the position restored from memory is out of range, position 0 (no output operand selected) is applied and an alarm is set (SELECTOR 1 PWR ALARM).

When set to Synchronize selector switch acts as follows. For two power cycles, the selector applies position 0 to the switch and activates SELECTOR 1 PWR ALARM. After two power cycles expire, the selector synchronizes to the position dictated by the 3-bit control input. This operation does not wait for time-out or the acknowledging input. When the synchronization attempt is unsuccessful (i.e., the 3-bit input is not available (0,0,0) or out of range) then the selector switch output is set to position 0 (no output operand selected) and an alarm is established (SELECTOR 1 PWR ALARM). The operation of Synch/Restore mode is similar to the Synchronize mode. The only difference is that after an unsuccessful synchronization attempt, the switch will attempt to restore the position stored in the relay memory. The Synch/Restore mode is useful for applications where the selector switch is employed to change the setting group in redundant (two relay) protection schemes. SELECTOR 1 EVENTS: If enabled, the following events are logged:
EVENT NAME SELECTOR 1 POS Z SELECTOR 1 STP ALARM SELECTOR 1 BIT ALARM DESCRIPTION Selector 1 changed its position to Z. The selector position pre-selected via the stepping up control input has not been confirmed before the time out. The selector position pre-selected via the 3-bit control input has not been confirmed before the time out.

5-152

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS

The following figures illustrate the operation of the Selector Switch. In these diagrams, T represents a time-out setting.
pre-existing position 2 changed to 4 with a pushbutton changed to 1 with a 3-bit input changed to 2 with a pushbutton changed to 7 with a 3-bit input

STEP-UP T T

3BIT A0 3BIT A1 3BIT A2 T T

POS 1 POS 2 POS 3 POS 4 POS 5 POS 6 POS 7 BIT 0 BIT 1 BIT 2

STP ALARM BIT ALARM ALARM


842737A1.CDR

Figure 594: TIME-OUT MODE

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-153

5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS

5 SETTINGS

pre-existing position 2

changed to 4 with a pushbutton

changed to 1 with a 3-bit input

changed to 2 with a pushbutton

STEP-UP ACK 3BIT A0 3BIT A1 3BIT A2 3BIT ACK POS 1 POS 2 POS 3 POS 4 POS 5 POS 6 POS 7 BIT 0 BIT 1 BIT 2 STP ALARM BIT ALARM ALARM
842736A1.CDR

Figure 595: ACKNOWLEDGE MODE

5-154

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS APPLICATION EXAMPLE

5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS

Consider an application where the selector switch is used to control Setting Groups 1 through 4 in the relay. The setting groups are to be controlled from both User-Programmable Pushbutton 1 and from an external device via Contact Inputs 1 through 3. The active setting group shall be available as an encoded 3-bit word to the external device and SCADA via output contacts 1 through 3. The pre-selected setting group shall be applied automatically after 5 seconds of inactivity of the control inputs. When the relay powers up, it should synchronize the setting group to the 3-bit control input. Make the following changes to Setting Group Control in the SETTINGS
SETTING GROUPS FUNCTION: Enabled SETTING GROUPS BLK: Off GROUP 2 ACTIVATE ON: SELECTOR 1 POS GROUP 3 ACTIVATE ON: SELECTOR 1 POS SELECTOR SWITCH 1 CONTROL ELEMENTS SETTING GROUPS

menu:

2" 3"

GROUP 4 ACTIVATE ON: GROUP 5 ACTIVATE ON: GROUP 6 ACTIVATE ON:

SELECTOR 1 POS 4" Off Off

Make the following changes to Selector Switch element in the SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS SELECTOR SWITCH menu to assign control to User Programmable Pushbutton 1 and Contact Inputs 1 through 3:
SELECTOR 1 FUNCTION: Enabled SELECTOR 1 FULL-RANGE: 4 SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP MODE: Time-out SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT: 5.0 s SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP: PUSHBUTTON 1 SELECTOR 1 ACK: Off SELECTOR 1 3BIT A0: CONT IP 1 ON SELECTOR 1 3BIT A1: CONT IP 2 ON SELECTOR 1 3BIT A2: CONT IP 3 ON SELECTOR 1 3BIT MODE: Time-out SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK: Off SELECTOR 1 POWER-UP MODE: Synchronize

ON

Now, assign the contact output operation (assume the H6E module) to the Selector Switch element by making the following changes in the SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS CONTACT OUTPUTS menu:
OUTPUT H1 OPERATE: OUTPUT H2 OPERATE: OUTPUT H3 OPERATE:

SELECTOR 1 BIT 0" SELECTOR 1 BIT 1" SELECTOR 1 BIT 2"


PRODUCT

Finally, assign configure User-Programmable Pushbutton 1 by making the following changes in the SETTINGS USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS USER PUSHBUTTON 1 menu: SETUP
PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION: Self-reset PUSHBUTTON 1 DROP-OUT TIME: 0.10 s

The logic for the selector switch is shown below:


SETTINGS SELECTOR 1 FULL RANGE: SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP MODE: SELECTOR 1 3BIT MODE: SETTINGS SELECTOR 1 FUNCTION: Enabled = 1 SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP: Off SELECTOR 1 ACK: Off SELECTOR 1 3BIT A0:
3-bit control in
acknowledge step up

SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT: SELECTOR 1 POWER-UP MODE: RUN

ACTUAL VALUE SELECTOR 1 POSITION

FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS 1 2 3 4
on

SELECTOR 1 POS 1 SELECTOR 1 POS 2 SELECTOR 1 POS 3 SELECTOR 1 POS 4 SELECTOR 1 POS 5 5 SELECTOR 1 POS 6 SELECTOR 1 POS 7 FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS

Off SELECTOR 1 3BIT A1: Off SELECTOR 1 3BIT A2: Off SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK: Off

7 6

3-bit acknowledge

SELECTOR 1 STP ALARM


3-bit position out

SELECTOR 1 BIT ALARM OR SELECTOR 1 ALARM SELECTOR 1 PWR ALARM SELECTOR 1 BIT 0 SELECTOR 1 BIT 1 SELECTOR 1 BIT 2
842012A1.CDR

Figure 596: SELECTOR SWITCH LOGIC

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-155

5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS

5 SETTINGS 5.6.4 UNDERFREQUENCY

PATH: SETTINGS

CONTROL ELEMENTS

UNDERFREQUENCY

UNDERFREQUENCY 1(6) Range: Disabled, Enabled

UNDERFREQUENCY 1

UNDFREQ 1 FUNCTION: Disabled UNDERFREQ 1 BLOCK: Off UNDERFREQ 1 SOURCE: SRC 1 UNDERFREQ 1 MIN VOLT/AMP: 0.10 pu UNDERFREQ 1 PICKUP: 59.50 Hz UNDERFREQ 1 PICKUP DELAY: 2.000 s UNDERFREQ 1 RESET DELAY : 2.000 s UNDERFREQ 1 TARGET: Self-reset UNDERFREQ 1 EVENTS: Disabled

MESSAGE

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4

MESSAGE

Range: 0.10 to 1.25 pu in steps of 0.01

MESSAGE

Range: 20.00 to 65.00 Hz in steps of 0.01

MESSAGE

Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE

Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE

Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled

MESSAGE

Range: Disabled, Enabled

There are six identical underfrequency elements, numbered from 1 through 6 inclusive. The steady-state frequency of a power system is a certain indicator of the existing balance between the generated power and the load. Whenever this balance is disrupted through the loss of an important generating unit or the isolation of part of the system from the rest of the system, the effect will be a reduction in frequency. If the control systems of the system generators do not respond fast enough, the system may collapse. A reliable method to quickly restore the balance between load and generation is to automatically disconnect selected loads, based on the actual system frequency. This technique, called "load-shedding", maintains system integrity and minimize widespread outages. After the frequency returns to normal, the load may be automatically or manually restored. The UNDERFREQ 1 SOURCE setting is used to select the source for the signal to be measured. The element first checks for a live phase voltage available from the selected Source. If voltage is not available, the element attempts to use a phase current. If neither voltage nor current is available, the element will not operate, as it will not measure a parameter above the minimum voltage/current setting. The UNDERFREQ 1 MIN VOLT/AMP setting selects the minimum per unit voltage or current level required to allow the underfrequency element to operate. This threshold is used to prevent an incorrect operation because there is no signal to measure. This UNDERFREQ 1 PICKUP setting is used to select the level at which the underfrequency element is to pickup. For example, if the system frequency is 60 Hz and the load shedding is required at 59.5 Hz, the setting will be 59.50 Hz.
SETTING
UNDERFREQ 1 FUNCTION:

Disabled=0 Enabled=1 SETTING


UNDERFREQ 1 BLOCK:

SETTING UNDERFREQ 1 PICKUP :


AND

SETTING UNDERFREQ 1 PICKUP DELAY : UNDERFREQ 1 RESET DELAY :

Off SETTING
UNDERFREQ 1 SOURCE:

RUN

FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS UNDERFREQ 1 PKP UNDERFREQ 1 DPO tRST UNDERFREQ 1 OP

SETTING ACTUAL VALUES Level Frequency


UNDERFREQ 1 MIN VOLT / AMP:

0 < f < PICKUP1

tPKP

VOLT / AMP

< Min
827079A6.CDR

Figure 597: UNDERFREQUENCY SCHEME LOGIC

5-156

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS 5.6.5 OVERFREQUENCY

PATH: SETTINGS

CONTROL ELEMENTS

OVERFREQUENCY

OVERFREQUENCY 1(4) Range: Disabled, Enabled

OVERFREQUENCY 1

OVERFREQ 1 FUNCTION: Disabled OVERFREQ 1 BLOCK: Off OVERFREQ 1 SOURCE: SRC 1 OVERFREQ 1 PICKUP: 60.50 Hz OVERFREQ 1 PICKUP DELAY: 0.500 s OVERFREQ 1 RESET DELAY : 0.500 s OVERFREQ 1 TARGET: Self-reset OVERFREQ 1 EVENTS: Disabled

MESSAGE

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4

MESSAGE

Range: 20.00 to 65.00 Hz in steps of 0.01

MESSAGE

Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE

Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE

Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled

MESSAGE

Range: Disabled, Enabled

There are four overfrequency elements, numbered 1 through 4. A frequency calculation for a given source is made on the input of a voltage or current channel, depending on which is available. The channels are searched for the signal input in the following order: voltage channel A, auxiliary voltage channel, current channel A, ground current channel. The first available signal is used for frequency calculation. The steady-state frequency of a power system is an indicator of the existing balance between the generated power and the load. Whenever this balance is disrupted through the disconnection of significant load or the isolation of a part of the system that has a surplus of generation, the effect will be an increase in frequency. If the control systems of the generators do not respond fast enough, to quickly ramp the turbine speed back to normal, the overspeed can lead to the turbine trip. The overfrequency element can be used to control the turbine frequency ramp down at a generating location. This element can also be used for feeder reclosing as part of the "after load shedding restoration". The OVERFREQ 1 SOURCE setting selects the source for the signal to be measured. The OVERFREQ 1 PICKUP setting selects the level at which the overfrequency element is to pickup.
SETTING
OVERFREQ 1 FUNCTION:

Disabled=0 Enabled=1 SETTING


OVERFREQ 1 BLOCK:

SETTING OVERFREQ 1 PICKUP : AND RUN SETTING OVERFREQ 1 PICKUP DELAY : OVERFREQ 1 RESET DELAY : tPKP f < PICKUP tRST

FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS OVERFREQ 1 PKP OVERFREQ 1 DPO OVERFREQ 1 OP

Off SETTING
OVERFREQ 1 SOURCE:

SRC1 Frequency
827832A3.CDR

Figure 598: OVERFREQUENCY SCHEME LOGIC

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-157

5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS

5 SETTINGS 5.6.6 FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE

PATH: SETTINGS

CONTROL ELEMENTS

FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE

FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE 1(4)

FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE 1


MESSAGE

FREQ RATE 1 FUNCTION: Disabled FREQ RATE 1 SOURCE: SRC 1 FREQ RATE 1 TREND: Decreasing FREQ RATE 1 PICKUP: 0.50 Hz/sec FREQ RATE 1 OV SUPV PICKUP: 0.700 pu FREQ RATE 1 OC SUPV PICKUP: 0.200 pu FREQ RATE 1 MIN FREQUENCY: 45.00 Hz FREQ RATE 1 MAX FREQUENCY: 65.00 Hz FREQ RATE 1 PICKUP DELAY: 0.000 s FREQ RATE 1 RESET DELAY: 0.000 s FREQ RATE 1 BLOCK: Off FREQ RATE 1 TARGET: Self-Reset FREQ RATE 1 EVENTS: Disabled

Range: Disabled, Enabled

Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4

MESSAGE

Range: Increasing, Decreasing, Bi-directional

MESSAGE

Range: 0.10 to 15.00 Hz/sec in steps of 0.01

MESSAGE

Range: 0.100 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE

Range: 0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE

Range: 20.00 to 80.00 Hz in steps of 0.01

MESSAGE

Range: 20.00 to 80.00 Hz in steps of 0.01

MESSAGE

Range: 0 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE

Range: 0 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

Range: Self-Reset, Latched, Disabled

MESSAGE

Range: Disabled, Enabled

Four (4) independent Rate of Change of Frequency elements are available. The element responds to rate of change of frequency with voltage, current and frequency supervision. FREQ RATE 1 TREND: This setting allows configuring the element to respond to increasing or decreasing frequency, or to frequency change in either direction. FREQ RATE 1 PICKUP: This setting specifies an intended df dt pickup threshold. For applications monitoring a decreasing trend, set FREQ RATE 1 TREND to Decreasing and specify the pickup threshold accordingly. The operating condition is: df dt > Pickup . For applications monitoring an increasing trend, set FREQ RATE 1 TREND to Increasing and specify the pickup threshold accordingly. The operating condition is: df dt > Pickup . For applications monitoring rate of change of frequency in any direction set FREQ RATE 1 TREND to Bi-Directional and specify the pickup threshold accordingly. The operating condition is: abs ( df dt ) > Pickup FREQ RATE 1 OV SUPV PICKUP: This setting defines minimum voltage level required for operation of the element. The supervising function responds to the positive-sequence voltage. Overvoltage supervision should be used to prevent operation under specific system conditions such as faults. FREQ RATE 1 OC SUPV PICKUP: This setting defines minimum current level required for operation of the element. The supervising function responds to the positive-sequence current. Typical application includes load shedding. Set the pickup threshold to zero if no overcurrent supervision is required.

5-158

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS

FREQ RATE 1 MIN FREQUENCY: This setting defines minimum frequency level required for operation of the element. The setting may be used to effectively block the feature based on frequency. For example, if the intent is to monitor an increasing trend but only if the frequency is already above certain level, this setting should be set to the required frequency level. FREQ RATE 1 MAX FREQUENCY: This setting defines maximum frequency level required for operation of the element. The setting may be used to effectively block the feature based on frequency. For example, if the intent is to monitor a decreasing trend but only if the frequency is already below certain level (such as for load shedding), this setting should be set to the required frequency level.
SETTINGS FREQ RATE 1 FUNCTION: Enabled = 1 FREQ RATE 1 BLOCK: Off

SETTING FREQ RATE 1 OV SUPV PICKUP:

AND

RUN | V_1 | > PICKUP SETTINGS SETTING SETTINGS FREQ RATE 1 TREND: FREQ RATE 1 PICKUP: FREQ RATE 1 PICKUP DELAY: FREQ RATE 1 RESET DELAY: tPKP tRST FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS FREQ RATE 1 OP df/dt > PICKUP SETTINGS FREQ RATE 1 PKP FREQ RATE 1 MIN FREQUENCY: FREQ RATE 1 MAX FREQUENCY: RUN F > MIN & F < MAX FREQ RATE 1 DPO

SETTING FREQ RATE 1 SOURCE: Pos seq voltage (V_1) Pos seq current (I_1) Frequency (F)

FREQ RATE 1 OC SUPV PICKUP:

AND

RUN | I_1 | >PICKUP

RUN

5
832023A2.CDR

RUN Calculate df/dt

Figure 599: FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE SCHEME LOGIC

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-159

5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS

5 SETTINGS 5.6.7 SYNCHROCHECK

PATH: SETTINGS

CONTROL ELEMENTS

SYNCHROCHECK

SYNCHROCHECK 1(2) Range: Disabled, Enabled

SYNCHROCHECK 1

SYNCHK1 FUNCTION: Disabled


MESSAGE

SYNCHK1 BLOCK: Off SYNCHK1 V1 SOURCE: SRC 1 SYNCHK1 V2 SOURCE: SRC 2 SYNCHK1 MAX VOLT DIFF: 10000 V SYNCHK1 MAX ANGLE DIFF: 30 SYNCHK1 MAX FREQ DIFF: 1.00 Hz SYNCHK1 MAX FREQ HYSTERESIS: 0.06 Hz SYNCHK1 DEAD SOURCE SELECT: LV1 and DV2 SYNCHK1 DEAD V1 MAX VOLT: 0.30 pu SYNCHK1 DEAD V2 MAX VOLT: 0.30 pu SYNCHK1 LIVE V1 MIN VOLT: 0.70 pu SYNCHK1 LIVE V2 MIN VOLT: 0.70 pu SYNCHK1 TARGET: Self-reset SYNCHK1 EVENTS: Disabled

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4

MESSAGE

Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4

MESSAGE

Range: 0 to 400000 V in steps of 1

MESSAGE

Range: 0 to 100 in steps of 1

MESSAGE

Range: 0.00 to 2.00 Hz in steps of 0.01

MESSAGE

Range: 0.00 to 0.10 Hz in steps of 0.01

MESSAGE

Range: None, LV1 and DV2, DV1 and LV2, DV1 or DV2, DV1 Xor DV2, DV1 and DV2 Range: 0.00 to 1.25 pu in steps of 0.01

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

Range: 0.00 to 1.25 pu in steps of 0.01

MESSAGE

Range: 0.00 to 1.25 pu in steps of 0.01

MESSAGE

Range: 0.00 to 1.25 pu in steps of 0.01

MESSAGE

Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled

MESSAGE

Range: Disabled, Enabled

The are two identical synchrocheck elements available, numbered 1 and 2. The synchronism check function is intended for supervising the paralleling of two parts of a system which are to be joined by the closure of a circuit breaker. The synchrocheck elements are typically used at locations where the two parts of the system are interconnected through at least one other point in the system. Synchrocheck verifies that the voltages (V1 and V2) on the two sides of the supervised circuit breaker are within set limits of magnitude, angle and frequency differences. The time that the two voltages remain within the admissible angle difference is determined by the setting of the phase angle difference and the frequency difference F (slip frequency). It can be defined as the time it would take the voltage phasor V1 or V2 to traverse an angle equal to 2 at a frequency equal to the frequency difference F. This time can be calculated by: 1 T = ------------------------------360 ----------------- F 2 where: = phase angle difference in degrees; F = frequency difference in Hz.
(EQ 5.41)

5-160

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS

As an example; for the default values ( = 30, F = 0.1 Hz), the time while the angle between the two voltages will be less than the set value is: 1 1 T = ------------------------------- = ------------------------------------------ = 1.66 sec. 360 360 ----------------- F ------------------ 0.1 Hz 2 2 30
(EQ 5.42)

If one or both sources are de-energized, the synchrocheck programming can allow for closing of the circuit breaker using undervoltage control to by-pass the synchrocheck measurements (Dead Source function). SYNCHK1 V1 SOURCE: This setting selects the source for voltage V1 (see NOTES below). SYNCHK1 V2 SOURCE: This setting selects the source for voltage V2, which must not be the same as used for the V1 (see NOTES below). SYNCHK1 MAX VOLT DIFF: This setting selects the maximum primary voltage difference in kV between the two sources. A primary voltage magnitude difference between the two input voltages below this value is within the permissible limit for synchronism. SYNCHK1 MAX ANGLE DIFF: This setting selects the maximum angular difference in degrees between the two sources. An angular difference between the two input voltage phasors below this value is within the permissible limit for synchronism. SYNCHK1 MAX FREQ DIFF: This setting selects the maximum frequency difference in Hz between the two sources. A frequency difference between the two input voltage systems below this value is within the permissible limit for synchronism. SYNCHK1 MAX FREQ HYSTERESIS: This setting specifies the required hysteresis for the maximum frequency difference condition. The condition becomes satisfied when the frequency difference becomes lower than SYNCHK1 MAX FREQ DIFF. Once the Synchrocheck element has operated, the frequency difference must increase above the SYNCHK1 MAX FREQ DIFF + SYNCHK1 MAX FREQ HYSTERESIS sum to drop out (assuming the other two conditions, voltage and angle, remain satisfied). SYNCHK1 DEAD SOURCE SELECT: This setting selects the combination of dead and live sources that will by-pass synchronism check function and permit the breaker to be closed when one or both of the two voltages (V1 or/and V2) are below the maximum voltage threshold. A dead or live source is declared by monitoring the voltage level. Six options are available: None: LV1 and DV2: DV1 and LV2: DV1 or DV2: DV1 Xor DV2: DV1 and DV2: Dead Source function is disabled Live V1 and Dead V2 Dead V1 and Live V2 Dead V1 or Dead V2 Dead V1 exclusive-or Dead V2 (one source is Dead and the other is Live) Dead V1 and Dead V2

SYNCHK1 DEAD V1 MAX VOLT: This setting establishes a maximum voltage magnitude for V1 in 1 pu. Below this magnitude, the V1 voltage input used for synchrocheck will be considered Dead or de-energized. SYNCHK1 DEAD V2 MAX VOLT: This setting establishes a maximum voltage magnitude for V2 in pu. Below this magnitude, the V2 voltage input used for synchrocheck will be considered Dead or de-energized. SYNCHK1 LIVE V1 MIN VOLT: This setting establishes a minimum voltage magnitude for V1 in pu. Above this magnitude, the V1 voltage input used for synchrocheck will be considered Live or energized. SYNCHK1 LIVE V2 MIN VOLT: This setting establishes a minimum voltage magnitude for V2 in pu. Above this magnitude, the V2 voltage input used for synchrocheck will be considered Live or energized.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-161

5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS NOTES ON THE SYNCHROCHECK FUNCTION: 1.

5 SETTINGS

The selected sources for synchrocheck inputs V1 and V2 (which must not be the same source) may include both a three-phase and an auxiliary voltage. The relay will automatically select the specific voltages to be used by the synchrocheck element in accordance with the following table.
NO. V1 OR V2 (SOURCE Y) Phase VTs and Auxiliary VT Phase VTs and Auxiliary VT Phase VT Phase VT and Auxiliary VT Auxiliary VT V2 OR V1 (SOURCE Z) Phase VTs and Auxiliary VT Phase VT Phase VT Auxiliary VT Auxiliary VT AUTO-SELECTED COMBINATION SOURCE Y 1 2 3 4 5 Phase Phase Phase Phase Auxiliary SOURCE Z Phase Phase Phase Auxiliary Auxiliary VAB VAB VAB V auxiliary (as set for Source z) V auxiliary (as set for selected sources) AUTO-SELECTED VOLTAGE

The voltages V1 and V2 will be matched automatically so that the corresponding voltages from the two sources will be used to measure conditions. A phase to phase voltage will be used if available in both sources; if one or both of the Sources have only an auxiliary voltage, this voltage will be used. For example, if an auxiliary voltage is programmed to VAG, the synchrocheck element will automatically select VAG from the other source. If the comparison is required on a specific voltage, the user can externally connect that specific voltage to auxiliary voltage terminals and then use this "Auxiliary Voltage" to check the synchronism conditions. If using a single CT/VT module with both phase voltages and an auxiliary voltage, ensure that only the auxiliary voltage is programmed in one of the sources to be used for synchrocheck. Exception: Synchronism cannot be checked between Delta connected phase VTs and a Wye connected auxiliary voltage.
NOTE

2.

The relay measures frequency and Volts/Hz from an input on a given source with priorities as established by the configuration of input channels to the source. The relay will use the phase channel of a three-phase set of voltages if programmed as part of that source. The relay will use the auxiliary voltage channel only if that channel is programmed as part of the Source and a three-phase set is not.

5-162

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS

SETTING SYNCHK1 FUNCTION: Enable=1 Disable=0 SETTING SYNCHK1 BLOCK: Off=0


AND

FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS SYNC1 V2 ABOVE MIN SYNC1 V1 ABOVE MIN SYNC1 V1 BELOW MAX SYNC1 V2 BELOW MAX

SETTING SYNCHK1 DEAD SOURCE SELECT: None LV1 and DV2 DV1 and LV2 DV1 or DV2 DV1 Xor DV2 DV1 and DV2
AND AND AND AND AND OR AND

FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS SYNC1 DEAD S OP SYNC1 DEAD S DPO

SETTING SYNCHK1 DEAD V1 MAX VOLT: V1 Max


XOR

SETTING SYNCHK1 DEAD V2 MAX VOLT: V2 Max FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS


OR

OR

SYNC1 CLS OP SYNC1 CLS DPO

SETTING SYNCHK1 LIVE V1 MIN VOLT: V1 Min

AND

SETTING SYNCHK1 LIVE V2 MIN VOLT: V2 Min

AND

5
SETTING
SYNCHK1 MAX VOLT DIFF:

SETTING SYNCHK1 V1 SIGNAL SOURCE: SRC 1

CALCULATE
Magnitude V1 Angle 1

Calculate I V1-V2 I=

V ACTUAL VALUE
SYNC1: V

Max
AND

Frequency F1

SETTING
SYNCHK1 MAX ANGLE DIFF:

Calculate I 1- 2 I= ACTUAL VALUE


SYNC1:

Max SETTING
SYNCHK1 MAX FREQ DIFF: SYNCHK1 MAX FREQ HYSTERESIS:
IN SYNCH 1

FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS SYNC1 SYNC OP SYNC1 SYNC DPO

SETTING SYNCHK1 V2 SIGNAL SOURCE: SRC 2

CALCULATE
Magnitude V2 Angle 2

Frequency F2

Calculate I F1-F2 I=

F ACTUAL VALUE
SYNC1: F

Max

827076AA.CDR

Figure 5100: SYNCHROCHECK SCHEME LOGIC

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-163

5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS

5 SETTINGS 5.6.8 DIGITAL ELEMENTS

PATH: SETTINGS

CONTROL ELEMENTS

DIGITAL ELEMENTS

DIGITAL ELEMENT 1(48) Range: Disabled, Enabled

DIGITAL ELEMENT 1

DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 FUNCTION: Disabled DIG ELEM 1 NAME: Dig Element 1 DIG ELEM Off DIG ELEM DELAY: DIG ELEM DELAY: 1 INPUT: 1 PICKUP 0.000 s 1 RESET 0.000 s

MESSAGE

Range: 16 alphanumeric characters Range: FlexLogic operand


Range: 0.000 to 999999.999 s in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

Range: 0.000 to 999999.999 s in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE

DIG ELEMENT 1 PICKUP LED: Enabled DIG ELEM Off 1 BLOCK:

Range: Disabled, Enabled

MESSAGE

Range: FlexLogic operand


Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled

MESSAGE

DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 TARGET: Self-reset DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 EVENTS: Disabled

MESSAGE

Range: Disabled, Enabled

There are 48 identical digital elements available, numbered 1 to 48. A digital element can monitor any FlexLogic operand and present a target message and/or enable events recording depending on the output operand state. The digital element settings include a name which will be referenced in any target message, a blocking input from any selected FlexLogic operand, and a timer for pickup and reset delays for the output operand. DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 INPUT: Selects a FlexLogic operand to be monitored by the digital element. DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 PICKUP DELAY: Sets the time delay to pickup. If a pickup delay is not required, set to "0". DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 RESET DELAY: Sets the time delay to reset. If a reset delay is not required, set to 0. DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 PICKUP LED: This setting enables or disabled the digital element pickup LED. When set to Disabled, the operation of the pickup LED is blocked.
SETTING DIGITAL ELEMENT 01 FUNCTION: Disabled = 0 Enabled = 1 SETTING DIGITAL ELEMENT 01 INPUT: Off = 0 SETTING DIGITAL ELEMENT 01 BLOCK: Off = 0

AND

SETTING DIGITAL ELEMENT 01 NAME: RUN INPUT = 1

SETTINGS DIGITAL ELEMENT 01 PICKUP DELAY: DIGITAL ELEMENT 01 RESET DELAY: tPKP tRST

FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS DIG ELEM 01 DPO DIG ELEM 01 PKP DIG ELEM 01 OP

827042A1.VSD

Figure 5101: DIGITAL ELEMENT SCHEME LOGIC CIRCUIT MONITORING APPLICATIONS: Some versions of the digital input modules include an active voltage monitor circuit connected across Form-A contacts. The voltage monitor circuit limits the trickle current through the output circuit (see technical specifications for Form-A).

5-164

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS

As long as the current through the Voltage Monitor is above a threshold (see technical specifications for Form-A), the FlexLogic operand "Cont Op # VOn" will be set (# represents the output contact number). If the output circuit has a high resistance or the DC current is interrupted, the trickle current will drop below the threshold and the FlexLogic operand "Cont Op # VOff" will be set. Consequently, the state of these operands can be used as indicators of the integrity of the circuits in which Form-A contacts are inserted. EXAMPLE 1: BREAKER TRIP CIRCUIT INTEGRITY MONITORING In many applications it is desired to monitor the breaker trip circuit integrity so problems can be detected before a trip operation is required. The circuit is considered to be healthy when the voltage monitor connected across the trip output contact detects a low level of current, well below the operating current of the breaker trip coil. If the circuit presents a high resistance, the trickle current will fall below the monitor threshold and an alarm would be declared. In most breaker control circuits, the trip coil is connected in series with a breaker auxiliary contact which is open when the breaker is open (see diagram below). To prevent unwanted alarms in this situation, the trip circuit monitoring logic must include the breaker position.
DC+ UR Relay - Form-A H1a
I = Current Monitor

I H1b V

V = Voltage Monitor

H1c 52a

5
Trip Coil DC

827073A1.vsd

Figure 5102: TRIP CIRCUIT EXAMPLE 1 Assume the output contact H1 is a trip contact. Using the contact output settings, this output will be given an ID name, e.g. Cont Op 1". Assume a 52a breaker auxiliary contact is connected to contact input H7a to monitor breaker status. Using the contact input settings, this input will be given an ID name, e.g. Cont Ip 1" and will be set On when the breaker is closed. Using Digital Element 1 to monitor the breaker trip circuit, the settings will be: DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 FUNCTION: Enabled DIG ELEM 1 NAME: Bkr Trip Cct Out DIG ELEM 1 INPUT: Cont Op 1 VOff DIG ELEM DELAY: DIG ELEM DELAY: 1 PICKUP 0.200 s 1 RESET 0.100 s

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

DIG ELEM 1 BLOCK: Cont Ip 1 Off DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 TARGET: Self-reset DIGITAL ELEMENT EVENTS: Enabled 1

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-165

5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS

5 SETTINGS

The PICKUP DELAY setting should be greater than the operating time of the breaker to avoid nuisance alarms.
NOTE

EXAMPLE 2: BREAKER TRIP CIRCUIT INTEGRITY MONITORING If it is required to monitor the trip circuit continuously, independent of the breaker position (open or closed), a method to maintain the monitoring current flow through the trip circuit when the breaker is open must be provided (as shown in the figure below). This can be achieved by connecting a suitable resistor (see figure below) across the auxiliary contact in the trip circuit. In this case, it is not required to supervise the monitoring circuit with the breaker position the BLOCK setting is selected to Off. In this case, the settings will be: DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 FUNCTION: Enabled DIG ELEM 1 NAME: Bkr Trip Cct Out DIG ELEM 1 INPUT: Cont Op 1 VOff DIG ELEM DELAY: DIG ELEM DELAY: DIG ELEM Off 1 PICKUP 0.200 s 1 RESET 0.100 s 1 BLOCK:

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 TARGET: Self-reset DIGITAL ELEMENT EVENTS: Enabled 1

MESSAGE

DC+ UR Relay - Form-A H1a


I = Current Monitor

Table 520: VALUES OF RESISTOR R


POWER SUPPLY (V DC) 24 30 48 110 125 250 RESISTANCE (OHMS) 1000 5000 10000 25000 25000 50000 POWER (WATTS) 2 2 2 5 5 5

I H1c V

V = Voltage Monitor

H1b 52a
R

By-pass Resistor

Trip Coil
827074A2.VSD

DC

Figure 5103: TRIP CIRCUIT EXAMPLE 2

5-166

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS 5.6.9 DIGITAL COUNTERS

PATH: SETTINGS

CONTROL ELEMENTS

DIGITAL COUNTERS

COUNTER 1(8) Range: Disabled, Enabled

COUNTER 1

COUNTER 1 FUNCTION: Disabled


MESSAGE

COUNTER 1 NAME: Counter 1 COUNTER 1 UNITS: COUNTER 1 PRESET: 0 COUNTER 1 COMPARE: 0 COUNTER 1 UP: Off COUNTER 1 DOWN: Off COUNTER 1 BLOCK: Off CNT1 SET TO PRESET: Off COUNTER 1 RESET: Off COUNT1 FREEZE/RESET: Off COUNT1 FREEZE/COUNT: Off

Range: 12 alphanumeric characters

MESSAGE

Range: 6 alphanumeric characters

MESSAGE

Range: 2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647

MESSAGE

Range: 2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647

MESSAGE

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

Range: FlexLogic operand

There are 8 identical digital counters, numbered from 1 to 8. A digital counter counts the number of state transitions from Logic 0 to Logic 1. The counter is used to count operations such as the pickups of an element, the changes of state of an external contact (e.g. breaker auxiliary switch), or pulses from a watt-hour meter. COUNTER 1 UNITS: Assigns a label to identify the unit of measure pertaining to the digital transitions to be counted. The units label will appear in the corresponding actual values status. COUNTER 1 PRESET: Sets the count to a required preset value before counting operations begin, as in the case where a substitute relay is to be installed in place of an in-service relay, or while the counter is running. COUNTER 1 COMPARE: Sets the value to which the accumulated count value is compared. Three FlexLogic output operands are provided to indicate if the present value is more than (HI), equal to (EQL), or less than (LO) the set value. COUNTER 1 UP: Selects the FlexLogic operand for incrementing the counter. If an enabled UP input is received when the accumulated value is at the limit of +2,147,483,647 counts, the counter will rollover to 2,147,483,648. COUNTER 1 DOWN: Selects the FlexLogic operand for decrementing the counter. If an enabled DOWN input is received when the accumulated value is at the limit of 2,147,483,648 counts, the counter will rollover to +2,147,483,647. COUNTER 1 BLOCK: Selects the FlexLogic operand for blocking the counting operation. All counter operands are blocked.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-167

5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS

5 SETTINGS

CNT1 SET TO PRESET: Selects the FlexLogic operand used to set the count to the preset value. The counter will be set to the preset value in the following situations: 1. 2. 3. When the counter is enabled and the CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand has the value 1 (when the counter is enabled and CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand is 0, the counter will be set to 0).
PRESET

When the counter is running and the CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand changes the state from 0 to 1 (CNT1 SET TO changing from 1 to 0 while the counter is running has no effect on the count).

When a reset or reset/freeze command is sent to the counter and the CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand has the value 1 (when a reset or reset/freeze command is sent to the counter and the CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand has the value 0, the counter will be set to 0).

COUNTER 1 RESET: Selects the FlexLogic operand for setting the count to either 0 or the preset value depending on the state of the CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand. COUNTER 1 FREEZE/RESET: Selects the FlexLogic operand for capturing (freezing) the accumulated count value into a separate register with the date and time of the operation, and resetting the count to 0. COUNTER 1 FREEZE/COUNT: Selects the FlexLogic operand for capturing (freezing) the accumulated count value into a separate register with the date and time of the operation, and continuing counting. The present accumulated value and captured frozen value with the associated date/time stamp are available as actual values. If control power is interrupted, the accumulated and frozen values are saved into non-volatile memory during the power down operation.

SETTING
COUNTER 1 FUNCTION: Disabled = 0 Enabled = 1

SETTING
COUNTER 1 UP: Off = 0

AND

SETTINGS COUNTER 1 NAME: COUNTER 1 UNITS: COUNTER 1 PRESET: RUN

SETTING
COUNTER 1 COMPARE: Count more than Comp. Count equal to Comp. Count less than Comp.

SETTING
COUNTER 1 DOWN: Off = 0 CALCULATE VALUE

FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS COUNTER 1 HI COUNTER 1 EQL COUNTER 1 LO

SETTING
COUNTER 1 BLOCK: Off = 0 SET TO PRESET VALUE SET TO ZERO

SETTING
CNT 1 SET TO PRESET: Off = 0

ACTUAL VALUE
COUNTER 1 ACCUM:

AND AND OR
ACTUAL VALUES
COUNTER 1 FROZEN: STORE DATE & TIME Date & Time

SETTING
COUNTER 1 RESET: Off = 0

SETTING
COUNT1 FREEZE/RESET: Off = 0

OR
827065A1.VSD

SETTING
COUNT1 FREEZE/COUNT: Off = 0

Figure 5104: DIGITAL COUNTER SCHEME LOGIC

5-168

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS 5.6.10 MONITORING ELEMENTS

a) VT FUSE FAILURE
PATH: SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS MONITORING ELEMENTS VT FUSE FAILURE 1(4) Range: Disabled, Enabled

VT FUSE FAILURE 1

VT FUSE FAILURE 1 FUNCTION: Disabled

Every signal source includes a fuse failure scheme. The VT fuse failure detector can be used to raise an alarm and/or block elements that may operate incorrectly for a full or partial loss of AC potential caused by one or more blown fuses. Some elements that might be blocked (via the BLOCK input) are distance, voltage restrained overcurrent, and directional current. There are two classes of fuse failure that may occur: Class A: Loss of one or two phases. Class B: Loss of all three phases. Different means of detection are required for each class. An indication of Class A failures is a significant level of negative sequence voltage, whereas an indication of Class B failures is when positive sequence current is present and there is an insignificant amount of positive sequence voltage. These noted indications of fuse failure could also be present when faults are present on the system, so a means of detecting faults and inhibiting fuse failure declarations during these events is provided. Once the fuse failure condition is declared, it will be sealed-in until the cause that generated it disappears. An additional condition is introduced to inhibit a fuse failure declaration when the monitored circuit is de-energized; positive sequence voltage and current are both below threshold levels. The VT FUSE FAILURE 1(4) FUNCTION setting enables/disables the fuse failure feature for each source.

AND OR SETTING VT FUSE FAILURE FUNCTION: Disabled=0 Enabled=1 SOURCE 1 V_2 RUN V_1 RUN I_1 RUN V_1 < 0.7 p.u. RUN FLEXLOGIC OPERAND SRC1 50DD OP FLEXLOGIC OPERAND OPEN POLE OP D60, L60 only AND OR AND I_1 < 0.05 p.u. AND 2 CYCLES 20 CYCLES AND I_1 > 0.075 p.u. V_1 < 0.05 p.u. AND COMPARATORS RUN V_2 > 0.15 p.u. OR OR AND AND

Reset-dominant SET LATCH RESET FAULT

FUSE FAIL

SET

FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS LATCH SRC1 VT FUSE FAIL OP SRC1 VT FUSE FAIL DPO

RESET Reset-dominant FLEXLOGIC OPERAND

AND

SRC1 VT FUSE FAIL VOL LOSS


827093AH.CDR

Figure 5105: VT FUSE FAIL SCHEME LOGIC

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-169

5.7 INPUTS/OUTPUTS 5.7INPUTS/OUTPUTS


PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS CONTACT INPUTS

5 SETTINGS 5.7.1 CONTACT INPUTS

CONTACT INPUTS CONTACT INPUT H5a CONTACT INPUT H5a ID: Cont Ip 1 CONTACT INPUT H5a DEBNCE TIME: 2.0 ms CONTACT INPUT H5a EVENTS: Disabled

Range: up to 12 alphanumeric characters

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

Range: 0.0 to 16.0 ms in steps of 0.5

MESSAGE

Range: Disabled, Enabled

CONTACT INPUT xxx CONTACT INPUT THRESHOLDS

MESSAGE

Ips H5a,H5c,H6a,H6c THRESHOLD: 33 Vdc Ips H7a,H7c,H8a,H8c THRESHOLD: 33 Vdc

Range: 17, 33, 84, 166 Vdc

MESSAGE

Range: 17, 33, 84, 166 Vdc

MESSAGE

Ips xxx,xxx,xxx,xxx THRESHOLD: 33 Vdc

Range: 17, 33, 84, 166 Vdc

The contact inputs menu contains configuration settings for each contact input as well as voltage thresholds for each group of four contact inputs. Upon startup, the relay processor determines (from an assessment of the installed modules) which contact inputs are available and then display settings for only those inputs. An alphanumeric ID may be assigned to a contact input for diagnostic, setting, and event recording purposes. The CONTACT IP X On (Logic 1) FlexLogic operand corresponds to contact input X being closed, while CONTACT IP X Off corresponds to contact input X being open. The CONTACT INPUT DEBNCE TIME defines the time required for the contact to overcome contact bouncing conditions. As this time differs for different contact types and manufacturers, set it as a maximum contact debounce time (per manufacturer specifications) plus some margin to ensure proper operation. If CONTACT INPUT EVENTS is set to Enabled, every change in the contact input state will trigger an event. A raw status is scanned for all Contact Inputs synchronously at the constant rate of 0.5 ms as shown in the figure below. The DC input voltage is compared to a user-settable threshold. A new contact input state must be maintained for a usersettable debounce time in order for the G60 to validate the new contact state. In the figure below, the debounce time is set at 2.5 ms; thus the 6th sample in a row validates the change of state (mark no. 1 in the diagram). Once validated (debounced), the contact input asserts a corresponding FlexLogic operand and logs an event as per user setting. A time stamp of the first sample in the sequence that validates the new state is used when logging the change of the contact input into the Event Recorder (mark no. 2 in the diagram). Protection and control elements, as well as FlexLogic equations and timers, are executed eight times in a power system cycle. The protection pass duration is controlled by the frequency tracking mechanism. The FlexLogic operand reflecting the debounced state of the contact is updated at the protection pass following the validation (marks no. 3 and 4 on the figure below). The update is performed at the beginning of the protection pass so all protection and control functions, as well as FlexLogic equations, are fed with the updated states of the contact inputs.

5-170

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.7 INPUTS/OUTPUTS

The FlexLogic operand response time to the contact input change is equal to the debounce time setting plus up to one protection pass (variable and depending on system frequency if frequency tracking enabled). If the change of state occurs just after a protection pass, the recognition is delayed until the subsequent protection pass; that is, by the entire duration of the protection pass. If the change occurs just prior to a protection pass, the state is recognized immediately. Statistically a delay of half the protection pass is expected. Owing to the 0.5 ms scan rate, the time resolution for the input contact is below 1msec. For example, 8 protection passes per cycle on a 60 Hz system correspond to a protection pass every 2.1 ms. With a contact debounce time setting of 3.0 ms, the FlexLogic operand-assert time limits are: 3.0 + 0.0 = 3.0 ms and 3.0 + 2.1 = 5.1 ms. These time limits depend on how soon the protection pass runs after the debouncing time. Regardless of the contact debounce time setting, the contact input event is time-stamped with a 1 s accuracy using the time of the first scan corresponding to the new state (mark no. 2 below). Therefore, the time stamp reflects a change in the DC voltage across the contact input terminals that was not accidental as it was subsequently validated using the debounce timer. Keep in mind that the associated FlexLogic operand is asserted/de-asserted later, after validating the change. The debounce algorithm is symmetrical: the same procedure and debounce time are used to filter the LOW-HIGH (marks no.1, 2, 3, and 4 in the figure below) and HIGH-LOW (marks no. 5, 6, 7, and 8 below) transitions.

INPUT VOLTAGE

USER-PROGRAMMABLE THRESHOLD

2
Time stamp of the first scan corresponding to the new validated state is logged in the SOE record

1
At this time, the new (HIGH) contact state is validated

3
The FlexLogic operand is going to be asserted at this protection pass
TM

6
Time stamp of the first scan corresponding to the new validated state is logged in the SOE record

5
At this time, the new (LOW) contact state is validated

5
7

RAW CONTACT STATE

DEBOUNCE TIME (user setting)

The FlexLogicTM operand is going to be de-asserted at this protection pass

4
FLEXLOGICTM OPERAND

SCAN TIME (0.5 msec)

The FlexLogicTM operand changes reflecting the validated contact state

DEBOUNCE TIME (user setting)

The FlexLogicTM operand changes reflecting the validated contact state

PROTECTION PASS (8 times a cycle controlled by the frequency tracking mechanism)

842709A1.cdr

Figure 5106: INPUT CONTACT DEBOUNCING MECHANISM AND TIME-STAMPING SAMPLE TIMING Contact inputs are isolated in groups of four to allow connection of wet contacts from different voltage sources for each group. The CONTACT INPUT THRESHOLDS determine the minimum voltage required to detect a closed contact input. This value should be selected according to the following criteria: 17 for 24 V sources, 33 for 48 V sources, 84 for 110 to 125 V sources and 166 for 250 V sources. For example, to use contact input H5a as a status input from the breaker 52b contact to seal-in the trip relay and record it in the Event Records menu, make the following settings changes:
CONTACT INPUT H5A ID: "Breaker Closed CONTACT INPUT H5A EVENTS: "Enabled"

(52b)"

Note that the 52b contact is closed when the breaker is open and open when the breaker is closed.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-171

5.7 INPUTS/OUTPUTS

5 SETTINGS 5.7.2 VIRTUAL INPUTS

PATH: SETTINGS

INPUTS/OUTPUTS

VIRTUAL INPUTS

VIRTUAL INPUT 1(64) Range: Disabled, Enabled

VIRTUAL INPUT

VIRTUAL INPUT 1 FUNCTION: Disabled VIRTUAL INPUT Virt Ip 1 VIRTUAL INPUT TYPE: Latched 1 ID: 1

MESSAGE

Range: Up to 12 alphanumeric characters

MESSAGE

Range: Self-Reset, Latched

MESSAGE

VIRTUAL INPUT 1 EVENTS: Disabled

Range: Disabled, Enabled

There are 64 virtual inputs that can be individually programmed to respond to input signals from the keypad (Commands menu) and communications protocols. All virtual input operands are defaulted to OFF = 0 unless the appropriate input signal is received. Virtual input states are preserved through a control power loss. If the VIRTUAL INPUT x FUNCTION is to Disabled, the input will be forced to 'Off' (Logic 0) regardless of any attempt to alter the input. If set to Enabled, the input operates as shown on the logic diagram and generates output FlexLogic operands in response to received input signals and the applied settings. There are two types of operation: Self-Reset and Latched. If VIRTUAL INPUT x TYPE is Self-Reset, when the input signal transits from OFF = 0 to ON = 1, the output operand will be set to ON = 1 for only one evaluation of the FlexLogic equations and then return to OFF = 0. If set to Latched, the virtual input sets the state of the output operand to the same state as the most recent received input, ON =1 or OFF = 0. The Self-Reset operating mode generates the output operand for a single evaluation of the FlexLogic equations. If the operand is to be used anywhere other than internally in a FlexLogic equation, it will likely have to be lengthened in time. A FlexLogic timer with a delayed reset can perform this function.
SETTING
VIRTUAL INPUT 1 FUNCTION:

NOTE

Disabled=0 Enabled=1
AND

S Latch SETTING
AND

Virtual Input 1 to ON = 1 Virtual Input 1 to OFF = 0

R
OR

VIRTUAL INPUT 1 ID:

SETTING VIRTUAL INPUT 1 TYPE: Latched Self - Reset

(Flexlogic Operand) Virt Ip 1

AND
827080A2.CDR

Figure 5107: VIRTUAL INPUTS SCHEME LOGIC

5-172

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.7 INPUTS/OUTPUTS 5.7.3 CONTACT OUTPUTS

a) DIGITAL OUTPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS CONTACT OUTPUTS CONTACT OUTPUT H1 Range: Up to 12 alphanumeric characters

CONTACT OUTPUT H1

CONTACT OUTPUT H1 ID Cont Op 1 OUTPUT H1 OPERATE: Off OUTPUT H1 SEAL-IN: Off CONTACT OUTPUT H1 EVENTS: Enabled

MESSAGE

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

Range: Disabled, Enabled

Upon startup of the relay, the main processor will determine from an assessment of the modules installed in the chassis which contact outputs are available and present the settings for only these outputs. An ID may be assigned to each contact output. The signal that can OPERATE a contact output may be any FlexLogic operand (virtual output, element state, contact input, or virtual input). An additional FlexLogic operand may be used to SEAL-IN the relay. Any change of state of a contact output can be logged as an Event if programmed to do so. For example, the trip circuit current is monitored by providing a current threshold detector in series with some Form-A contacts (see the trip circuit example in the Digital Elements section). The monitor will set a flag (see the specifications for Form-A). The name of the FlexLogic operand set by the monitor, consists of the output relay designation, followed by the name of the flag; e.g. Cont Op 1 IOn or Cont Op 1 IOff. In most breaker control circuits, the trip coil is connected in series with a breaker auxiliary contact used to interrupt current flow after the breaker has tripped, to prevent damage to the less robust initiating contact. This can be done by monitoring an auxiliary contact on the breaker which opens when the breaker has tripped, but this scheme is subject to incorrect operation caused by differences in timing between breaker auxiliary contact change-of-state and interruption of current in the trip circuit. The most dependable protection of the initiating contact is provided by directly measuring current in the tripping circuit, and using this parameter to control resetting of the initiating relay. This scheme is often called trip seal-in. This can be realized in the G60 using the Cont Op 1 IOn FlexLogic operand to seal-in the contact output as follows:
CONTACT OUTPUT H1 ID: Cont Op 1" OUTPUT H1 OPERATE: any suitable FlexLogic OUTPUT H1 SEAL-IN: Cont Op 1 IOn CONTACT OUTPUT H1 EVENTS: Enabled

operand

b) LATCHING OUTPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS CONTACT OUTPUTS CONTACT OUTPUT H1a Range: Up to 12 alphanumeric characters

CONTACT OUTPUT H1a

OUTPUT H1a ID L-Cont Op 1 OUTPUT H1a OPERATE: Off OUTPUT H1a RESET: Off OUTPUT H1a TYPE: Operate-dominant OUTPUT H1a EVENTS: Disabled

MESSAGE

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

Range: Operate-dominant, Reset-dominant

MESSAGE

Range: Disabled, Enabled

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-173

5.7 INPUTS/OUTPUTS

5 SETTINGS

The G60 latching output contacts are mechanically bi-stable and controlled by two separate (open and close) coils. As such they retain their position even if the relay is not powered up. The relay recognizes all latching output contact cards and populates the setting menu accordingly. On power up, the relay reads positions of the latching contacts from the hardware before executing any other functions of the relay (such as protection and control features or FlexLogic). The latching output modules, either as a part of the relay or as individual modules, are shipped from the factory with all latching contacts opened. It is highly recommended to double-check the programming and positions of the latching contacts when replacing a module. Since the relay asserts the output contact and reads back its position, it is possible to incorporate self-monitoring capabilities for the latching outputs. If any latching outputs exhibits a discrepancy, the LATCHING OUTPUT ERROR self-test error is declared. The error is signaled by the LATCHING OUT ERROR FlexLogic operand, event, and target message. OUTPUT H1a OPERATE: This setting specifies a FlexLogic operand to operate the close coil of the contact. The relay will seal-in this input to safely close the contact. Once the contact is closed and the RESET input is logic 0 (off), any activity of the OPERATE input, such as subsequent chattering, will not have any effect. With both the OPERATE and RESET inputs active (logic 1), the response of the latching contact is specified by the OUTPUT H1A TYPE setting. OUTPUT H1a RESET: This setting specifies a FlexLogic operand to operate the trip coil of the contact. The relay will seal-in this input to safely open the contact. Once the contact is opened and the OPERATE input is logic 0 (off), any activity of the RESET input, such as subsequent chattering, will not have any effect. With both the OPERATE and RESET inputs active (logic 1), the response of the latching contact is specified by the OUTPUT H1A TYPE setting. OUTPUT H1a TYPE: This setting specifies the contact response under conflicting control inputs; that is, when both the OPERATE and RESET signals are applied. With both control inputs applied simultaneously, the contact will close if set to Operate-dominant and will open if set to Reset-dominant.

Application Example 1: A latching output contact H1a is to be controlled from two user-programmable pushbuttons (buttons number 1 and 2). The following settings should be applied. Program the Latching Outputs by making the following changes in the SETTINGS CONTACT OUTPUT H1a menu (assuming an H4L module): PUTS
OUTPUT H1a OPERATE: PUSHBUTTON 1 ON OUTPUT H1a RESET: PUSHBUTTON 2 ON INPUTS/OUTPUTS CONTACT OUT-

Program the pushbuttons by making the following changes in the PRODUCT SETUP USER PUSHBUTTON 1 and USER PUSHBUTTON 2 menus: TONS
PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION: Self-reset PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME: 0.00 s

USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUT-

PUSHBUTTON 2 FUNCTION: Self-reset PUSHBTN 2 DROP-OUT TIME: 0.00 s

Application Example 2: A relay, having two latching contacts H1a and H1c, is to be programmed. The H1a contact is to be a Type-a contact, while the H1c contact is to be a Type-b contact (Type-a means closed after exercising the operate input; Type-b means closed after exercising the reset input). The relay is to be controlled from virtual outputs: VO1 to operate and VO2 to reset.
INPUTS/OUTPUTS Program the Latching Outputs by making the following changes in the SETTINGS PUTS CONTACT OUTPUT H1a and CONTACT OUTPUT H1c menus (assuming an H4L module): OUTPUT H1a OPERATE: VO1 OUTPUT H1a RESET: VO2 OUTPUT H1c OPERATE: VO2 OUTPUT H1c RESET: VO1 CONTACT OUT-

Since the two physical contacts in this example are mechanically separated and have individual control inputs, they will not operate at exactly the same time. A discrepancy in the range of a fraction of a maximum operating time may occur. Therefore, a pair of contacts programmed to be a multi-contact relay will not guarantee any specific sequence of operation (such as make before break). If required, the sequence of operation must be programmed explicitly by delaying some of the control inputs as shown in the next application example. Application Example 3: A make before break functionality must be added to the preceding example. An overlap of 20 ms is required to implement this functionality as described below:

5-174

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS Write the following FlexLogic equation (EnerVista UR Setup example shown):

5.7 INPUTS/OUTPUTS

Both timers (Timer 1 and Timer 2) should be set to 20 ms pickup and 0 ms dropout.
PUTS INPUTS/OUTPUTS Program the Latching Outputs by making the following changes in the SETTINGS CONTACT OUTPUT H1a and CONTACT OUTPUT H1c menus (assuming an H4L module): OUTPUT H1a OPERATE: VO1 OUTPUT H1a RESET: VO4 OUTPUT H1c OPERATE: VO2 OUTPUT H1c RESET: VO3 CONTACT OUT-

Application Example 4: A latching contact H1a is to be controlled from a single virtual output VO1. The contact should stay closed as long as VO1 is high, and should stay opened when VO1 is low. Program the relay as follows. Write the following FlexLogic equation (EnerVista UR Setup example shown):

PUTS

Program the Latching Outputs by making the following changes in the SETTINGS CONTACT OUTPUT H1a menu (assuming an H4L module):
OUTPUT H1a OPERATE: VO1 OUTPUT H1a RESET: VO2

INPUTS/OUTPUTS

CONTACT OUT-

5.7.4 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS


PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS VIRTUAL OUTPUTS VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1(96)

VIRTUAL OUTPUT

VIRTUAL OUTPUT Virt Op 1

1 ID

Range: Up to 12 alphanumeric characters

MESSAGE

VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 EVENTS: Disabled

Range: Disabled, Enabled

There are 96 virtual outputs that may be assigned via FlexLogic. If not assigned, the output will be forced to OFF (Logic 0). An ID may be assigned to each virtual output. Virtual outputs are resolved in each pass through the evaluation of the FlexLogic equations. Any change of state of a virtual output can be logged as an event if programmed to do so. For example, if Virtual Output 1 is the trip signal from FlexLogic and the trip relay is used to signal events, the settings would be programmed as follows:
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 ID: "Trip" VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 EVENTS: "Disabled"

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-175

5.7 INPUTS/OUTPUTS

5 SETTINGS 5.7.5 REMOTE DEVICES

a) REMOTE INPUTS/OUTPUTS OVERVIEW Remote inputs and outputs provide a means of exchanging digital state information between Ethernet-networked devices. The IEC 61850 GSSE (Generic Substation State Event) and GOOSE (Generic Object Oriented Substation Event) standards are used. The IEC 61850 specification requires that communications between devices be implemented on Ethernet. For UR-series relays, Ethernet communications is provided only all CPU modules except type 9E.
NOTE

The sharing of digital point state information between GSSE/GOOSE equipped relays is essentially an extension to FlexLogic, allowing distributed FlexLogic by making operands available to/from devices on a common communications network. In addition to digital point states, GSSE/GOOSE messages identify the originator of the message and provide other information required by the communication specification. All devices listen to network messages and capture data only from messages that have originated in selected devices. IEC 61850 GSSE messages are compatible with UCA GOOSE messages and contain a fixed set of digital points. IEC 61850 GOOSE messages can, in general, contain any configurable data items. When used by the remote input/output feature, IEC 61850 GOOSE messages contain the same data as GSSE messages. Both GSSE and GOOSE messages are designed to be short, reliable, and high priority. GOOSE messages have additional advantages over GSSE messages due to their support of VLAN (virtual LAN) and Ethernet priority tagging functionality. The GSSE message structure contains space for 128 bit pairs representing digital point state information. The IEC 61850 specification provides 32 DNA bit pairs that represent the state of two pre-defined events and 30 user-defined events. All remaining bit pairs are UserSt bit pairs, which are status bits representing user-definable events. The G60 implementation provides 32 of the 96 available UserSt bit pairs. The IEC 61850 specification includes features that are used to cope with the loss of communication between transmitting and receiving devices. Each transmitting device will send a GSSE/GOOSE message upon a successful power-up, when the state of any included point changes, or after a specified interval (the default update time) if a change-of-state has not occurred. The transmitting device also sends a hold time which is set greater than three times the programmed default time required by the receiving device. Receiving devices are constantly monitoring the communications network for messages they require, as recognized by the identification of the originating device carried in the message. Messages received from remote devices include the message time allowed to live. The receiving relay sets a timer assigned to the originating device to this time interval, and if it has not received another message from this device at time-out, the remote device is declared to be non-communicating, so it will use the programmed default state for all points from that specific remote device. If a message is received from a remote device before the time allowed to live expires, all points for that device are updated to the states contained in the message and the hold timer is restarted. The status of a remote device, where Offline indicates non-communicating, can be displayed. The remote input/output facility provides for 32 remote inputs and 64 remote outputs. b) LOCAL DEVICES: ID OF DEVICE FOR TRANSMITTING GSSE MESSAGES In a G60 relay, the device ID that identifies the originator of the message is programmed in the SETTINGS INSTALLATION RELAY NAME setting. c) REMOTE DEVICES: ID OF DEVICE FOR RECEIVING GSSE MESSAGES
PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS REMOTE DEVICES REMOTE DEVICE 1(16) Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters PRODUCT SETUP

REMOTE DEVICE

REMOTE DEVICE 1 ID: Remote Device 1 REMOTE DEVICE VLAN ID: 0 1

MESSAGE

Range: 0 to 4095 in steps of 1

MESSAGE

REMOTE DEVICE 1 ETYPE APPID: 0

Range: 0 to 16383 in steps of 1

5-176

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.7 INPUTS/OUTPUTS

Sixteen remote devices, numbered from 1 to 16, can be selected for setting purposes. A receiving relay must be programmed to capture messages from only those originating remote devices of interest. This setting is used to select specific remote devices by entering (bottom row) the exact identification (ID) assigned to those devices. The REMOTE DEVICE 1(16) VLAN ID and REMOTE DEVICE 1(16) ETYPE APPID settings are only used with GOOSE messages; they are not applicable to GSSE messages. The REMOTE DEVICE 1(16) VLAN ID setting identifies the virtual LAN on which the remote device is sending the GOOSE message. The REMOTE DEVICE 1(16) ETYPE APPID setting identifies the Ethernet application identification in the GOOSE message. These settings should match the corresponding settings on the sending device. 5.7.6 REMOTE INPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS REMOTE INPUTS REMOTE INPUT 1(32)

REMOTE INPUT 1

REMOTE INPUT Remote Ip 1


MESSAGE

1 ID:

Range: up to 12 alphanumeric characters

REMOTE IN 1 DEVICE: Remote Device 1 REMOTE IN 1 BIT PAIR: None REMOTE IN 1 DEFAULT STATE: Off REMOTE IN 1 EVENTS: Disabled

Range: 1 to 16 inclusive

MESSAGE

Range: None, DNA-1 to DNA-32, UserSt-1 to UserSt-32

MESSAGE

Range: On, Off, Latest/On, Latest/Off

MESSAGE

Range: Disabled, Enabled

Remote Inputs which create FlexLogic operands at the receiving relay, are extracted from GSSE/GOOSE messages originating in remote devices. The relay provides 32 remote inputs, each of which can be selected from a list consisting of 64 selections: DNA-1 through DNA-32 and UserSt-1 through UserSt-32. The function of DNA inputs is defined in the IEC 61850 specification and is presented in the IEC 61850 DNA Assignments table in the Remote Outputs section. The function of UserSt inputs is defined by the user selection of the FlexLogic operand whose state is represented in the GSSE/ GOOSE message. A user must program a DNA point from the appropriate FlexLogic operand. Remote Input 1 must be programmed to replicate the logic state of a specific signal from a specific remote device for local use. This programming is performed via the three settings shown above. The REMOTE INPUT 1 ID setting allows the user to assign descriptive text to the remote input. The REMOTE IN 1 DEVICE setting selects the number (1 to 16) of the remote device which originates the required signal, as previously assigned to the remote device via the setting REMOTE DEVICE NN ID (see the Remote Devices section). REMOTE IN 1 BIT PAIR selects the specific bits of the GSSE/GOOSE message required. The REMOTE IN 1 DEFAULT STATE setting selects the logic state for this point if the local relay has just completed startup or the remote device sending the point is declared to be non-communicating. The following choices are available: Setting REMOTE IN 1 DEFAULT STATE to On value defaults the input to Logic 1. Setting REMOTE IN 1 DEFAULT STATE to Off value defaults the input to Logic 0. Setting REMOTE IN 1 DEFAULT STATE to Latest/On freezes the input in case of lost communications. If the latest state is not known, such as after relay power-up but before the first communication exchange, the input will default to Logic 1. When communication resumes, the input becomes fully operational. Setting REMOTE IN 1 DEFAULT STATE to Latest/Off freezes the input in case of lost communications. If the latest state is not known, such as after relay power-up but before the first communication exchange, the input will default to Logic 0. When communication resumes, the input becomes fully operational. For additional information on GSSE/GOOOSE messaging, refer to the Remote Devices section in this chapter.
NOTE

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-177

5.7 INPUTS/OUTPUTS

5 SETTINGS 5.7.7 REMOTE OUTPUTS

a) DNA BIT PAIRS


PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS REMOTE OUTPUTS DNA BIT PAIRS REMOTE OUPUTS DNA- 1(32) BIT PAIR Range: FlexLogic operand

REMOTE OUTPUTS DNA- 1 BIT PAIR


MESSAGE

DNA- 1 OPERAND: Off DNA- 1 EVENTS: Disabled

Range: Disabled, Enabled

Remote outputs (1 to 32) are FlexLogic operands inserted into GSSE/GOOSE messages that are transmitted to remote devices on a LAN. Each digital point in the message must be programmed to carry the state of a specific FlexLogic operand. The above operand setting represents a specific DNA function (as shown in the following table) to be transmitted. Table 521: IEC 61850 DNA ASSIGNMENTS
DNA 1 2 IEC 61850 DEFINITION Test ConfRev FLEXLOGIC OPERAND IEC 61850 TEST MODE IEC 61850 CONF REV

b) USERST BIT PAIRS


PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS REMOTE OUTPUTS UserSt BIT PAIRS REMOTE OUTPUTS UserSt- 1(32) BIT PAIR Range: FlexLogic operand

REMOTE OUTPUTS UserSt- 1 BIT PAIR


MESSAGE

UserSt- 1 OPERAND: Off UserSt- 1 EVENTS: Disabled

Range: Disabled, Enabled

Remote outputs 1 to 32 originate as GSSE/GOOSE messages to be transmitted to remote devices. Each digital point in the message must be programmed to carry the state of a specific FlexLogic operand. The setting above is used to select the operand which represents a specific UserSt function (as selected by the user) to be transmitted. The following setting represents the time between sending GSSE/GOOSE messages when there has been no change of state of any selected digital point. This setting is located in the PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATIONS IEC 61850 PROTOCOL GSSE/GOOSE CONFIGURATION settings menu. DEFAULT GSSE/GOOSE UPDATE TIME: 60 s
Range: 1 to 60 s in steps of 1

The following setting determines whether remote input/output data is transported using IEC 61850 GSSE or IEC 61850 GOOSE messages. If GOOSE is selected, the VLAN and APPID settings should be set accordingly. If GSSE is selected, COMMUNICATIONS IEC the VLAN and APPID settings are not relevant. This setting is located in the PRODUCT SETUP GSSE/GOOSE CONFIGURATION menu. 61850 PROTOCOL REMOTE I/O TRANSFER METHOD: GSSE
Range: GOOSE, GSSE, None

For more information on GSSE/GOOSE messaging, refer to Remote Inputs/Outputs Overview in the Remote Devices section.
NOTE

5-178

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.7 INPUTS/OUTPUTS 5.7.8 RESETTING

PATH: SETTINGS

INPUTS/OUTPUTS

RESETTING

RESETTING

RESET OPERAND: Off

Range: FlexLogic operand

Some events can be programmed to latch the faceplate LED event indicators and the target message on the display. Once set, the latching mechanism will hold all of the latched indicators or messages in the set state after the initiating condition has cleared until a RESET command is received to return these latches (not including FlexLogic latches) to the reset state. The RESET command can be sent from the faceplate Reset button, a remote device via a communications channel, or any programmed operand. When the RESET command is received by the relay, two FlexLogic operands are created. These operands, which are stored as events, reset the latches if the initiating condition has cleared. The three sources of RESET commands each create the RESET OP FlexLogic operand. Each individual source of a RESET command also creates its individual operand RESET OP (PUSHBUTTON), RESET OP (COMMS) or RESET OP (OPERAND) to identify the source of the command. The setting shown above selects the operand that will create the RESET OP (OPERAND) operand. 5.7.9 DIRECT INPUTS/OUTPUTS a) DIRECT INPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS DIRECT INPUTS DIRECT INPUT 1(32) Range: up to 12 alphanumeric characters

DIRECT INPUT

DIRECT INPUT 1 NAME: Dir Ip 1 DIRECT INPUT DEVICE ID: 1 1

MESSAGE

Range: 1 to 16

MESSAGE

DIRECT INPUT 1 BIT NUMBER: 1 DIRECT INPUT 1 DEFAULT STATE: Off DIRECT INPUT 1 EVENTS: Disabled

Range: 1 to 32

MESSAGE

Range: On, Off, Latest/On, Latest/Off

MESSAGE

Range: Enabled, Disabled

These settings specify how the direct input information is processed. The DIRECT INPUT 1 NAME setting allows the user to assign a descriptive name to the direct input. The DIRECT INPUT DEVICE ID represents the source of this direct input. The specified direct input is driven by the device identified here. The DIRECT INPUT 1 BIT NUMBER is the bit number to extract the state for this direct input. Direct Input x is driven by the bit identified here as DIRECT INPUT 1 BIT NUMBER. This corresponds to the direct output number of the sending device. The DIRECT INPUT 1 DEFAULT STATE represents the state of the direct input when the associated direct device is offline. The following choices are available: Setting DIRECT INPUT 1 DEFAULT STATE to On value defaults the input to Logic 1. Setting DIRECT INPUT 1 DEFAULT STATE to Off value defaults the input to Logic 0. Setting DIRECT INPUT 1 DEFAULT STATE to Latest/On freezes the input in case of lost communications. If the latest state is not known, such as after relay power-up but before the first communication exchange, the input will default to Logic 1. When communication resumes, the input becomes fully operational. Setting DIRECT INPUT 1 DEFAULT STATE to Latest/Off freezes the input in case of lost communications. If the latest state is not known, such as after relay power-up but before the first communication exchange, the input will default to Logic 0. When communication resumes, the input becomes fully operational.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-179

5.7 INPUTS/OUTPUTS b) DIRECT OUTPUTS


PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS DIRECT OUTPUTS DIRECT OUTPUT 1(32)

5 SETTINGS

DIRECT OUTPUT

DIRECT OUT Dir Out 1 DIRECT OUT Off

1 NAME: 1 OPERAND:

Range: up to 12 alphanumeric characters

MESSAGE

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

DIRECT OUTPUT 1 EVENTS: Disabled

Range: Enabled, Disabled

The DIRECT OUT 1 NAME setting allows the user to assign a descriptive name to the direct output. The DIR OUT 1 OPERAND is the FlexLogic operand that determines the state of this direct output. c) APPLICATION EXAMPLES The examples introduced in the earlier Direct Inputs/Outputs section (part of the Product Setup section) direct inputs/outputs are continued below to illustrate usage of the direct inputs and outputs. EXAMPLE 1: EXTENDING INPUT/OUTPUT CAPABILITIES OF A G60 RELAY Consider an application that requires additional quantities of digital inputs and/or output contacts and/or lines of programmable logic that exceed the capabilities of a single UR-series chassis. The problem is solved by adding an extra UR-series IED, such as the C30, to satisfy the additional inputs/outputs and programmable logic requirements. The two IEDs are connected via single-channel digital communication cards as shown below.

TX1

UR IED 1
RX1

TX1

UR IED 2
RX1

Figure 5108: INPUT/OUTPUT EXTENSION VIA DIRECT INPUTS/OUTPUTS Assume Contact Input 1 from UR IED 2 is to be used by UR IED 1. The following settings should be applied (Direct Input 5 and bit number 12 are used, as an example): UR IED 1:
DIRECT INPUT 5 DEVICE ID = 2 DIRECT INPUT 5 BIT NUMBER = 12

UR IED 2:

DIRECT OUT 12 OPERAND

= Cont Ip 1 On

The Cont Ip 1 On operand of UR IED 2 is now available in UR IED 1 as DIRECT INPUT 5 ON. EXAMPLE 2: INTERLOCKING BUSBAR PROTECTION A simple interlocking busbar protection scheme can be accomplished by sending a blocking signal from downstream devices, say 2, 3 and 4, to the upstream device that monitors a single incomer of the busbar, as shown in the figure below.

UR IED 1

BLOCK

UR IED 2

UR IED 3

UR IED 4

842712A1.CDR

Figure 5109: SAMPLE INTERLOCKING BUSBAR PROTECTION SCHEME

5-180

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.7 INPUTS/OUTPUTS

Assume that Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 is used by Devices 2, 3, and 4 to block Device 1. If not blocked, Device 1 would trip the bus upon detecting a fault and applying a short coordination time delay. The following settings should be applied (assume Bit 3 is used by all 3 devices to sent the blocking signal and Direct Inputs 7, 8, and 9 are used by the receiving device to monitor the three blocking signals): UR IED 2: UR IED 3: UR IED 4: UR IED 1:
DIRECT OUT 3 OPERAND: "PHASE IOC1 OP" DIRECT OUT 3 OPERAND: "PHASE IOC1 OP" DIRECT OUT 3 OPERAND: "PHASE IOC1 OP" DIRECT INPUT 7 DEVICE ID: "2" DIRECT INPUT 7 BIT NUMBER: "3" DIRECT INPUT 7 DEFAULT STATE: select DIRECT INPUT 8 DEVICE ID: "3" DIRECT INPUT 8 BIT NUMBER: "3" DIRECT INPUT 8 DEFAULT STATE: select DIRECT INPUT 9 DEVICE ID: "4" DIRECT INPUT 9 BIT NUMBER: "3" DIRECT INPUT 9 DEFAULT STATE: select

"On" for security, select "Off" for dependability

"On" for security, select "Off" for dependability

"On" for security, select "Off" for dependability

Now the three blocking signals are available in UR IED 1 as DIRECT INPUT 7 ON, DIRECT INPUT 8 ON, and DIRECT INPUT 9 ON. Upon losing communications or a device, the scheme is inclined to block (if any default state is set to On), or to trip the bus on any overcurrent condition (all default states set to Off). EXAMPLE 2: PILOT-AIDED SCHEMES Consider a three-terminal line protection application shown in the figure below.
UR IED 1 UR IED 2

UR IED 3

842713A1.CDR

Figure 5110: THREE-TERMINAL LINE APPLICATION Assume the Hybrid Permissive Overreaching Transfer Trip (Hybrid POTT) scheme is applied using the architecture shown below. The scheme output operand HYB POTT TX1 is used to key the permission.

TX1

RX1

RX2

UR IED 1
RX1 TX1

UR IED 2
TX2

RX1

UR IED 3
TX1
842714A1.CDR

Figure 5111: SINGLE-CHANNEL OPEN-LOOP CONFIGURATION

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-181

5.7 INPUTS/OUTPUTS

5 SETTINGS

In the above architecture, Devices 1 and 3 do not communicate directly. Therefore, Device 2 must act as a bridge. The following settings should be applied: UR IED 1:
DIRECT OUT 2 OPERAND: "HYB POTT TX1" DIRECT INPUT 5 DEVICE ID: "2" DIRECT INPUT 5 BIT NUMBER: "2" (this is a message from IED 2) DIRECT INPUT 6 DEVICE ID: "2" DIRECT INPUT 6 BIT NUMBER: "4" (effectively, this is a message from DIRECT OUT 2 OPERAND: "HYB POTT TX1" DIRECT INPUT 5 DEVICE ID: "2" DIRECT INPUT 5 BIT NUMBER: "2" (this is a message from IED 2) DIRECT INPUT 6 DEVICE ID: "2" DIRECT INPUT 6 BIT NUMBER: "3" (effectively, this is a message from DIRECT INPUT 5 DEVICE ID: "1" DIRECT INPUT 5 BIT NUMBER: "2" DIRECT INPUT 6 DEVICE ID: "3" DIRECT INPUT 6 BIT NUMBER: "2" DIRECT OUT 2 OPERAND: "HYB POTT TX1" DIRECT OUT 3 OPERAND: "DIRECT INPUT 5" DIRECT OUT 4 OPERAND: "DIRECT INPUT 6"

IED 3)

UR IED 3:

IED 1)

UR IED 2:

(forward a message from 1 to 3) (forward a message from 3 to 1)

Signal flow between the three IEDs is shown in the figure below:

UR IED 1

UR IED 2
DIRECT INPUT 5 DIRECT OUT 2 = HYB POTT TX1 DIRECT OUT 4 = DIRECT INPUT 6 DIRECT OUT 3 = DIRECT INPUT 5 DIRECT INPUT 6 DIRECT INPUT 5 DIRECT INPUT 6

DIRECT OUT 2 = HYB POTT TX1

UR IED 3

DIRECT INPUT 5 DIRECT INPUT 6

DIRECT OUT 2 = HYB POTT TX1


842717A1.CDR

Figure 5112: SIGNAL FLOW FOR DIRECT INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLE 3 In three-terminal applications, both the remote terminals must grant permission to trip. Therefore, at each terminal, Direct Inputs 5 and 6 should be ANDed in FlexLogic and the resulting operand configured as the permission to trip (HYB POTT RX1 setting).

5-182

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.7 INPUTS/OUTPUTS 5.7.10 TELEPROTECTION INPUTS/OUTPUTS

a) OVERVIEW The relay provides sixteen teleprotection inputs on communications channel 1 (numbered 1-1 through 1-16) and sixteen teleprotection inputs on communications channel 2 (on two-terminals two-channel and three-terminal systems only, numbered 2-1 through 2-16). The remote relay connected to channels 1 and 2 of the local relay is programmed by assigning FlexLogic operands to be sent via the selected communications channel. This allows the user to create distributed protection and control schemes via dedicated communications channels. Some examples are directional comparison pilot schemes and direct transfer tripping. It should be noted that failures of communications channels will affect teleprotection functionality. The teleprotection function must be enabled to utilize the inputs. b) TELEPROTECTION INPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS TELEPROTECTION TELEPROT INPUTS Range: Off, On, Latest/Off, Latest/On

TELEPROT INPUTS

TELEPROT INPUT 1-1 DEFAULT: Off TELEPROT INPUT 1-2 DEFAULT: Off

MESSAGE

Range: Off, On, Latest/Off, Latest/On

MESSAGE

TELEPROT INPUT 1-16 DEFAULT: Off TELEPROT INPUT 2-1 DEFAULT: Off TELEPROT INPUT 2-2 DEFAULT: Off

Range: Off, On, Latest/Off, Latest/On

MESSAGE

Range: Off, On, Latest/Off, Latest/On

MESSAGE

Range: Off, On, Latest/Off, Latest/On

MESSAGE

TELEPROT INPUT 2-16 DEFAULT: Off

Range: Off, On, Latest/Off, Latest/On

Setting the TELEPROT INPUT ~~ DEFAULT setting to On defaults the input to logic 1 when the channel fails. A value of Off defaults the input to logic 0 when the channel fails. The Latest/On and Latest/Off values freeze the input in case of lost communications. If the latest state is not known, such as after relay power-up but before the first communication exchange, then the input defaults to logic 1 for Latest/On and logic 0 for Latest/Off.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-183

5.7 INPUTS/OUTPUTS c) TELEPROTECTION OUTPUTS


PATH: SETTINGS INPUTS/OUTPUTS TELEPROTECTION TELEPROT OUTPUTS Range: FlexLogic operand

5 SETTINGS

TELEPROT OUTPUTS

TELEPROT OUTPUT 1-1: Off TELEPROT OUTPUT 1-2: Off

MESSAGE

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

TELEPROT OUTPUT 1-16: Off TELEPROT OUTPUT 2-1: Off TELEPROT OUTPUT 2-2: Off

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

Range: FlexLogic operand

MESSAGE

TELEPROT OUTPUT 2-16: Off

Range: FlexLogic operand

As the following figure demonstrates, processing of the teleprotection inputs/outputs is dependent on the number of communication channels and terminals. On two-terminal two-channel systems, they are processed continuously on each channel and mapped separately per channel. Therefore, to achieve redundancy, the user must assign the same operand on both channels (teleprotection outputs at the sending end or corresponding teleprotection inputs at the receiving end). On three-terminal two-channel systems, redundancy is achieved by programming signal re-transmittal in the case of channel failure between any pair of relays.
UR-1
ACTUAL VALUES CHANNEL 1 STATUS: SETTING TELEPROT OUTPUT 1-1: (same for 1-2...1-16) Off (Flexlogic Operand) SETTING TELEPROT INPUT 1-1 DEFAULT: (same for 1-2...1-16) FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
TELEPRO INPUT 1-1 On

UR-2
SETTING TELEPROT INPUT 1-1 DEFAULT: (same for 1-2...1-16) On Off OR FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
TELEPRO INPUT 1-1 On

Fail OK ACTUAL VALUES CHANNEL 1 STATUS:

(same for 1-2...1-16)

Communication channel #1
(Teleprotection I/O Enabled)
SETTING
TELEPROT OUTPUT 1-1:

On OR Off

Fail OK

(same for 1-2...1-16)

(same for 1-2...1-16)

Off (Flexlogic Operand)

ACTUAL VALUES CHANNEL 2 STATUS: SETTING TELEPROT OUTPUT 2-1: (same for 1-2...1-16) Off (Flexlogic Operand) SETTING TELEPROT INPUT 2-1 DEFAULT: (same for 1-2...1-16) FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
TELEPRO INPUT 2-1 On

SETTING TELEPROT INPUT 2-1 DEFAULT: (same for 2-2...2-16) On Off

UR-2 or UR-3

Fail OK ACTUAL VALUES CHANNEL 2 STATUS:

FLEXLOGIC OPERAND OR
TELEPRO INPUT 2-1 On

(same for 2-2...2-16)

Communication channel #2
(On 3-terminal system or 2-terminal with redundant channel)
SETTING
TELEPROT OUTPUT 2-1:

On OR Off

Fail OK

(same for 2-2...2-16)

(same for 1-2...1-16)

Off (Flexlogic Operand)

842750A2.CDR

Figure 5113: TELEPROTECTION INPUT/OUTPUT PROCESSING

5-184

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS 5.8TRANSDUCER INPUTS/OUTPUTS


PATH: SETTINGS TRANSDUCER I/O DCMA INPUTS DCMA INPUT H1(W8)

5.8 TRANSDUCER INPUTS/OUTPUTS 5.8.1 DCMA INPUTS

DCMA INPUT H1

DCMA INPUT H1 FUNCTION: Disabled


MESSAGE

Range: Disabled, Enabled

DCMA INPUT H1 ID: DCMA Ip 1 DCMA INPUT H1 UNITS: A DCMA INPUT H1 RANGE: 0 to -1 mA DCMA INPUT H1 MIN VALUE: 0.000 DCMA INPUT H1 MAX VALUE: 0.000

Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters

MESSAGE

Range: 6 alphanumeric characters

MESSAGE

Range: 0 to 1 mA, 0 to +1 mA, 1 to +1 mA, 0 to 5 mA, 0 to 10mA, 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA Range: 9999.999 to +9999.999 in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

Range: 9999.999 to +9999.999 in steps of 0.001

Hardware and software is provided to receive signals from external transducers and convert these signals into a digital format for use as required. The relay will accept inputs in the range of 1 to +20 mA DC, suitable for use with most common transducer output ranges; all inputs are assumed to be linear over the complete range. Specific hardware details are contained in Chapter 3. Before the dcmA input signal can be used, the value of the signal measured by the relay must be converted to the range and quantity of the external transducer primary input parameter, such as DC voltage or temperature. The relay simplifies this process by internally scaling the output from the external transducer and displaying the actual primary parameter. dcmA input channels are arranged in a manner similar to CT and VT channels. The user configures individual channels with the settings shown here. The channels are arranged in sub-modules of two channels, numbered from 1 through 8 from top to bottom. On power-up, the relay will automatically generate configuration settings for every channel, based on the order code, in the same general manner that is used for CTs and VTs. Each channel is assigned a slot letter followed by the row number, 1 through 8 inclusive, which is used as the channel number. The relay generates an actual value for each available input channel. Settings are automatically generated for every channel available in the specific relay as shown above for the first channel of a type 5F transducer module installed in slot H. The function of the channel may be either Enabled or Disabled. If Disabled, no actual values are created for the channel. An alphanumeric ID is assigned to each channel; this ID will be included in the channel actual value, along with the programmed units associated with the parameter measured by the transducer, such as volts, C, megawatts, etc. This ID is also used to reference the channel as the input parameter to features designed to measure this type of parameter. The DCMA INPUT H1 RANGE setting specifies the mA DC range of the transducer connected to the input channel. The DCMA INPUT H1 MIN VALUE and DCMA INPUT H1 MAX VALUE settings are used to program the span of the transducer in primary units. For example, a temperature transducer might have a span from 0 to 250C; in this case the DCMA INPUT H1 MIN VALUE value is 0 and the DCMA INPUT H1 MAX VALUE value is 250. Another example would be a watts transducer with a span from 20 to +180 MW; in this case the DCMA INPUT H1 MIN VALUE value would be 20 and the DCMA INPUT H1 MAX VALUE value 180. Intermediate values between the min and max values are scaled linearly.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-185

5.8 TRANSDUCER INPUTS/OUTPUTS

5 SETTINGS 5.8.2 RTD INPUTS

PATH: SETTINGS

TRANSDUCER I/O

RTD INPUTS

RTD INPUT H1(W8) Range: Disabled, Enabled

RTD INPUT H1

RTD INPUT H1 FUNCTION: Disabled


MESSAGE

RTD INPUT H1 ID: RTD Ip 1 RTD INPUT H1 TYPE: 100 Nickel

Range: Up to 20 alphanumeric characters

MESSAGE

Range: 100 Nickel, 10 Copper, 100 Platinum, 120 Nickel

Hardware and software is provided to receive signals from external resistance temperature detectors and convert these signals into a digital format for use as required. These channels are intended to be connected to any of the RTD types in common use. Specific hardware details are contained in Chapter 3. RTD input channels are arranged in a manner similar to CT and VT channels. The user configures individual channels with the settings shown here. The channels are arranged in sub-modules of two channels, numbered from 1 through 8 from top to bottom. On power-up, the relay will automatically generate configuration settings for every channel, based on the order code, in the same general manner that is used for CTs and VTs. Each channel is assigned a slot letter followed by the row number, 1 through 8 inclusive, which is used as the channel number. The relay generates an actual value for each available input channel. Settings are automatically generated for every channel available in the specific relay as shown above for the first channel of a type 5C transducer module installed in slot H.

The function of the channel may be either Enabled or Disabled. If Disabled, there will not be an actual value created for the channel. An alphanumeric ID is assigned to the channel; this ID will be included in the channel actual values. It is also used to reference the channel as the input parameter to features designed to measure this type of parameter. Selecting the type of RTD connected to the channel configures the channel. Actions based on RTD overtemperature, such as trips or alarms, are done in conjunction with the FlexElements feature. In FlexElements, the operate level is scaled to a base of 100C. For example, a trip level of 150C is achieved by setting the operate level at 1.5 pu. FlexElement operands are available to FlexLogic for further interlocking or to operate an output contact directly. 5.8.3 DCMA OUTPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS TRANSDUCER I/O DCMA OUTPUTS DCMA OUTPUT H1(W8) Range: Off, any analog actual value parameter

DCMA OUTPUT H1

DCMA OUTPUT H1 SOURCE: Off


MESSAGE

DCMA OUTPUT H1 RANGE: 1 to 1 mA DCMA OUTPUT H1 MIN VAL: 0.000 pu DCMA OUTPUT H1 MAX VAL: 1.000 pu

Range: 1 to 1 mA, 0 to 1 mA, 4 to 20 mA

MESSAGE

Range: 90.000 to 90.000 pu in steps of 0.001

MESSAGE

Range: 90.000 to 90.000 pu in steps of 0.001

Hardware and software is provided to generate dcmA signals that allow interfacing with external equipment. Specific hardware details are contained in Chapter 3. The dcmA output channels are arranged in a manner similar to transducer input or CT and VT channels. The user configures individual channels with the settings shown below. The channels are arranged in sub-modules of two channels, numbered 1 through 8 from top to bottom. On power-up, the relay automatically generates configuration settings for every channel, based on the order code, in the same manner used for CTs and VTs. Each channel is assigned a slot letter followed by the row number, 1 through 8 inclusive, which is used as the channel number. Both the output range and a signal driving a given output are user-programmable via the following settings menu (an example for channel M5 is shown).

5-186

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.8 TRANSDUCER INPUTS/OUTPUTS

The relay checks the driving signal (x in equations below) for the minimum and maximum limits, and subsequently rescales so the limits defined as MIN VAL and MAX VAL match the output range of the hardware defined as RANGE. The following equation is applied: I min if x < MIN VAL = I max if x > MAX VAL k ( x MIN VAL ) + I min otherwise

I out

(EQ 5.43)

where:

x is a driving signal specified by the SOURCE setting Imin and Imax are defined by the RANGE setting k is a scaling constant calculated as: I max I min k = -----------------------------------------------MAX VAL MIN VAL
(EQ 5.44)

VAL

The feature is intentionally inhibited if the MAX VAL and MIN VAL settings are entered incorrectly, e.g. when MAX VAL MIN < 0.1 pu. The resulting characteristic is illustrated in the following figure.

Imax
OUTPUT CURRENT

5
DRIVING SIGNAL MIN VAL MAX VAL
842739A1.CDR

Imin

Figure 5114: DCMA OUTPUT CHARACTERISTIC The dcmA output settings are described below. DCMA OUTPUT H1 SOURCE: This setting specifies an internal analog value to drive the analog output. Actual values (FlexAnalog parameters) such as power, current amplitude, voltage amplitude, power factor, etc. can be configured as sources driving dcmA outputs. Refer to Appendix A for a complete list of FlexAnalog parameters. DCMA OUTPUT H1 RANGE: This setting allows selection of the output range. Each dcmA channel may be set independently to work with different ranges. The three most commonly used output ranges are available. DCMA OUTPUT H1 MIN VAL: This setting allows setting the minimum limit for the signal that drives the output. This setting is used to control the mapping between an internal analog value and the output current (see the following examples). The setting is entered in per-unit values. The base units are defined in the same manner as the FlexElement base units. DCMA OUTPUT H1 MAX VAL: This setting allows setting the maximum limit for the signal that drives the output. This setting is used to control the mapping between an internal analog value and the output current (see the following examples). The setting is entered in per-unit values. The base units are defined in the same manner as the FlexElement base units. The DCMA OUTPUT H1 MIN VAL and DCMA OUTPUT H1 MAX VAL settings are ignored for power factor base units (i.e. if the DCMA OUTPUT H1 SOURCE is set to FlexAnalog value based on power factor measurement).
NOTE

Three application examples are described below.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-187

5.8 TRANSDUCER INPUTS/OUTPUTS EXAMPLE 1:

5 SETTINGS

A three phase active power on a 13.8 kV system measured via UR-series relay source 1 is to be monitored by the dcmA H1 output of the range of 1 to 1 mA. The following settings are applied on the relay: CT ratio = 1200:5, VT secondary 115, VT connection is delta, and VT ratio = 120. The nominal current is 800 A primary and the nominal power factor is 0.90. The power is to be monitored in both importing and exporting directions and allow for 20% overload compared to the nominal. The nominal three-phase power is: P = 3 13.8 kV 0.8 kA 0.9 = 17.21 MW
(EQ 5.45)

The three-phase power with 20% overload margin is: P max = 1.2 17.21 MW = 20.65 MW The base unit for power (refer to the FlexElements section in this chapter for additional details) is: P BASE = 115 V 120 1.2 kA = 16.56 MW The minimum and maximum power values to be monitored (in pu) are: minimum power = 20.65 MW = 1.247 pu, -----------------------------16.56 MW The following settings should be entered:
DCMA OUTPUT H1 SOURCE: SRC 1 P DCMA OUTPUT H1 RANGE: 1 to 1 mA DCMA OUTPUT H1 MIN VAL: 1.247 pu DCMA OUTPUT H1 MAX VAL: 1.247 pu

(EQ 5.46)

(EQ 5.47)

maximum power = 20.65 MW = 1.247 pu -------------------------16.56 MW

(EQ 5.48)

With the above settings, the output will represent the power with the scale of 1 mA per 20.65 MW. The worst-case error for this application can be calculated by superimposing the following two sources of error: 0.5% of the full scale for the analog output module, or 0.005 ( 1 ( 1 ) ) 20.65 MW = 0.207 MW 1% of reading error for the active power at power factor of 0.9

For example at the reading of 20 MW, the worst-case error is 0.01 20 MW + 0.207 MW = 0.407 MW. EXAMPLE 2: The phase A current (true RMS value) is to be monitored via the H2 current output working with the range from 4 to 20 mA. The CT ratio is 5000:5 and the maximum load current is 4200 A. The current should be monitored from 0 A upwards, allowing for 50% overload. The phase current with the 50% overload margin is: I max = 1.5 4.2 kA = 6.3 kA The base unit for current (refer to the FlexElements section in this chapter for additional details) is: I BASE = 5 kA The minimum and maximum power values to be monitored (in pu) are: minimum current = 0 kA = 0 pu, ----------5 kA The following settings should be entered:
DCMA OUTPUT H2 SOURCE: SRC 1 Ia RMS DCMA OUTPUT H2 RANGE: 4 to 20 mA DCMA OUTPUT H2 MIN VAL: 0.000 pu DCMA OUTPUT H2 MAX VAL: 1.260 pu

(EQ 5.49)

(EQ 5.50)

maximum current = 6.3 kA = 1.26 pu ---------------5 kA

(EQ 5.51)

The worst-case error for this application could be calculated by superimposing the following two sources of error: 0.5% of the full scale for the analog output module, or 0.005 ( 20 4 ) 6.3 kA = 0.504 kA 0.25% of reading or 0.1% of rated (whichever is greater) for currents between 0.1 and 2.0 of nominal

5-188

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.8 TRANSDUCER INPUTS/OUTPUTS

For example, at the reading of 4.2 kA, the worst-case error is max(0.0025 4.2 kA, 0.001 5 kA) + 0.504 kA = 0.515 kA. EXAMPLE 3: A positive-sequence voltage on a 400 kV system measured via Source 2 is to be monitored by the dcmA H3 output with a range of 0 to 1 mA. The VT secondary setting is 66.4 V, the VT ratio setting is 6024, and the VT connection setting is Delta. The voltage should be monitored in the range from 70% to 110% of nominal. The minimum and maximum positive-sequence voltages to be monitored are: 400 kV V min = 0.7 ------------------ = 161.66 kV, 3 400 kV V max = 1.1 ------------------ = 254.03 kV 3
(EQ 5.52)

The base unit for voltage (refer to the FlexElements section in this chapter for additional details) is: V BASE = 0.0664 kV 6024 = 400 kV The minimum and maximum voltage values to be monitored (in pu) are: minimum voltage = 161.66 kV = 0.404 pu, -------------------------400 kV The following settings should be entered:
DCMA OUTPUT H3 SOURCE: SRC 2 V_1 DCMA OUTPUT H3 RANGE: 0 to 1 mA DCMA OUTPUT H3 MIN VAL: 0.404 pu DCMA OUTPUT H3 MAX VAL: 0.635 pu

(EQ 5.53)

maximum voltage = 254.03 kV = 0.635 pu -------------------------400 kV

(EQ 5.54)

mag

The limit settings differ from the expected 0.7 pu and 1.1 pu because the relay calculates the positive-sequence quantities scaled to the phase-to-ground voltages, even if the VTs are connected in Delta (refer to the Metering Conventions section in Chapter 6), while at the same time the VT nominal voltage is 1 pu for the settings. Consequently the settings required in this example differ from naturally expected by the factor of 3 . The worst-case error for this application could be calculated by superimposing the following two sources of error: 0.5% of the full scale for the analog output module, or 0.005 ( 1 0 ) 254.03 kV = 1.27 kV 0.5% of reading

For example, under nominal conditions, the positive-sequence reads 230.94 kV and the worst-case error is 0.005 x 230.94 kV + 1.27 kV = 2.42 kV.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-189

5.9 TESTING 5.9TESTING


PATH: SETTINGS TESTING TEST MODE

5 SETTINGS 5.9.1 TEST MODE

SETTINGS TESTING
MESSAGE

TEST MODE FUNCTION: Disabled TEST MODE INITIATE: On

Range: Disabled, Enabled

Range: FlexLogic operand

The relay provides test settings to verify that functionality using simulated conditions for contact inputs and outputs. The Test Mode is indicated on the relay faceplate by a flashing Test Mode LED indicator. To initiate the Test mode, the TEST MODE FUNCTION setting must be Enabled and the TEST MODE INITIATE setting must be set to Logic 1. In particular: To initiate Test Mode through relay settings, set TEST MODE INITIATE to On. The Test Mode starts when the TEST MODE FUNCTION setting is changed from Disabled to Enabled. To initiate Test Mode through a user-programmable condition, such as FlexLogic operand (pushbutton, digital input, communication-based input, or a combination of these), set TEST MODE FUNCTION to Enabled and set TEST MODE INITIATE to the desired operand. The Test Mode starts when the selected operand assumes a Logic 1 state.

When in Test Mode, the G60 remains fully operational, allowing for various testing procedures. In particular, the protection and control elements, FlexLogic, and communication-based inputs and outputs function normally. The only difference between the normal operation and the Test Mode is the behavior of the input and output contacts. The former can be forced to report as open or closed or remain fully operational; the latter can be forced to open, close, freeze, or remain fully operational. The response of the digital input and output contacts to the Test Mode is programmed individually for each input and output using the Force Contact Inputs and Force Contact Outputs test functions described in the following sections. 5.9.2 FORCE CONTACT INPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS TESTING FORCE CONTACT INPUTS

FORCE CONTACT INPUTS


MESSAGE

FORCE Cont Ip 1 :Disabled FORCE Cont Ip 2 :Disabled

MESSAGE

Range: Disabled, Open, Closed

Range: Disabled, Open, Closed

FORCE Cont Ip xx :Disabled

Range: Disabled, Open, Closed

The relay digital inputs (contact inputs) could be pre-programmed to respond to the Test Mode in the following ways: If set to Disabled, the input remains fully operational. It is controlled by the voltage across its input terminals and can be turned on and off by external circuitry. This value should be selected if a given input must be operational during the test. This includes, for example, an input initiating the test, or being a part of a user pre-programmed test sequence. If set to Open, the input is forced to report as opened (Logic 0) for the entire duration of the Test Mode regardless of the voltage across the input terminals. If set to Closed, the input is forced to report as closed (Logic 1) for the entire duration of the Test Mode regardless of the voltage across the input terminals.

The Force Contact Inputs feature provides a method of performing checks on the function of all contact inputs. Once enabled, the relay is placed into Test Mode, allowing this feature to override the normal function of contact inputs. The Test Mode LED will be On, indicating that the relay is in Test Mode. The state of each contact input may be programmed as Disabled, Open, or Closed. All contact input operations return to normal when all settings for this feature are disabled.

5-190

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

5 SETTINGS

5.9 TESTING 5.9.3 FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS

PATH: SETTINGS

TESTING

FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS

FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS


MESSAGE

FORCE Cont Op 1 :Disabled FORCE Cont Op 2 :Disabled

MESSAGE

Range: Disabled, Energized, De-energized, Freeze

Range: Disabled, Energized, De-energized, Freeze

FORCE Cont Op xx :Disabled

Range: Disabled, Energized, De-energized, Freeze

The relay contact outputs can be pre-programmed to respond to the Test Mode. If set to Disabled, the contact output remains fully operational. If operates when its control operand is Logic 1 and will resets when its control operand is Logic 0. If set to Energize, the output will close and remain closed for the entire duration of the Test Mode, regardless of the status of the operand configured to control the output contact. If set to De-energize, the output will open and remain opened for the entire duration of the Test Mode regardless of the status of the operand configured to control the output contact. If set to Freeze, the output retains its position from before entering the Test Mode, regardless of the status of the operand configured to control the output contact. These settings are applied two ways. First, external circuits may be tested by energizing or de-energizing contacts. Second, by controlling the output contact state, relay logic may be tested and undesirable effects on external circuits avoided. Example 1: Initiating a Test from User-Programmable Pushbutton 1 The Test Mode should be initiated from User-Programmable Pushbutton 1. The pushbutton will be programmed as Latched (pushbutton pressed to initiate the test, and pressed again to terminate the test). During the test, Digital Input 1 should remain operational, Digital Inputs 2 and 3 should open, and Digital Input 4 should close. Also, Contact Output 1 should freeze, Contact Output 2 should open, Contact Output 3 should close, and Contact Output 4 should remain fully operational. The required settings are shown below.
TESTING

To enable User-Programmable Pushbutton 1 to initiate the Test mode, make the following changes in the SETTINGS TEST MODE menu:
TEST MODE FUNCTION:

Enabled and TEST MODE INITIATE: PUSHBUTTON 1 ON


TESTING FORCE CONTACT INPUTS

Make the following changes to configure the Contact I/Os. In the SETTINGS FORCE CONTACT INPUTS menus, set:

and

FORCE Cont Ip 1: Disabled, FORCE Cont Ip 2: Open, FORCE Cont Ip 3: Open, and FORCE Cont Ip 4: Closed FORCE Cont Op 1: Freeze, FORCE Cont Op 2: De-energized, FORCE Cont Op 3: Open, and FORCE Cont Op 4: Disabled

Example 2: Initiating a Test from User-Programmable Pushbutton 1 or through Remote Input 1 The Test should be initiated locally from User-Programmable Pushbutton 1 or remotely through Remote Input 1. Both the pushbutton and the remote input will be programmed as Latched. The required settings are shown below. Write the following FlexLogic equation (EnerVista UR Setup example shown):

USER-PROGRAMMABLE Set the User Programmable Pushbutton as latching by changing SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP USER PUSHBUTTON 1 PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION to Latched. To enable either Pushbutton 1 or Remote Input 1 to initiate the Test mode, make the following changes in the SETTINGS TESTING TEST MODE menu: PUSHBUTTONS TEST MODE FUNCTION:

Enabled and TEST MODE INITIATE: VO1

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

5-191

5.9 TESTING

5 SETTINGS

5-192

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

6 ACTUAL VALUES 6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.1OVERVIEW

6.1 OVERVIEW 6.1.1 ACTUAL VALUES MAIN MENU

ACTUAL VALUES STATUS

CONTACT INPUTS VIRTUAL INPUTS REMOTE INPUTS TELEPROTECTION INPUTS CONTACT OUTPUTS VIRTUAL OUTPUTS REMOTE DEVICES STATUS REMOTE DEVICES STATISTICS DIGITAL COUNTERS SELECTOR SWITCHES FLEX STATES ETHERNET DIRECT INPUTS DIRECT DEVICES STATUS EGD PROTOCOL STATUS TELEPROT CH TESTS

See page 6-3. See page 6-3. See page 6-3. See page 6-4. See page 6-4. See page 6-4. See page 6-5. See page 6-5. See page 6-5. See page 6-6. See page 6-6. See page 6-6. See page 6-7. See page 6-7. See page 6-8. See page 6-8.

ACTUAL VALUES METERING

STATOR DIFFERENTIAL SOURCE SRC 1 SOURCE SRC 2 SOURCE SRC 3 SOURCE SRC 4

See page 6-12. See page 6-12.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

6-1

6.1 OVERVIEW SYNCHROCHECK TRACKING FREQUENCY FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE FLEXELEMENTS SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER STATOR GROUND VOLTS PER HERTZ 1 VOLTS PER HERTZ 2 RESTRICTED GROUND FAULT CURRENTS TRANSDUCER I/O DCMA INPUTS TRANSDUCER I/O RTD INPUTS

6 ACTUAL VALUES

See page 6-15. See page 6-15. See page 6-15. See page 6-16. See page 6-16. See page 6-17. See page 6-17. See page 6-17. See page 6-17. See page 6-17. See page 6-17.

ACTUAL VALUES RECORDS

USER-PROGRAMMABLE FAULT REPORTS EVENT RECORDS OSCILLOGRAPHY DATA LOGGER

See page 6-18. See page 6-18. See page 6-18. See page 6-19.

ACTUAL VALUES PRODUCT INFO

MODEL INFORMATION FIRMWARE REVISIONS

See page 6-20. See page 6-20.

6-2

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.2STATUS For status reporting, On represents Logic 1 and Off represents Logic 0.
NOTE

6.2 STATUS

6.2.1 CONTACT INPUTS


PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS CONTACT INPUTS

CONTACT INPUTS

Cont Ip 1 Off

MESSAGE

Cont Ip xx Off

The present status of the contact inputs is shown here. The first line of a message display indicates the ID of the contact input. For example, Cont Ip 1 refers to the contact input in terms of the default name-array index. The second line of the display indicates the logic state of the contact input. 6.2.2 VIRTUAL INPUTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS VIRTUAL INPUTS

VIRTUAL INPUTS

Virt Ip 1 Off

MESSAGE

Virt Ip 64 Off

The present status of the 64 virtual inputs is shown here. The first line of a message display indicates the ID of the virtual input. For example, Virt Ip 1 refers to the virtual input in terms of the default name. The second line of the display indicates the logic state of the virtual input. 6.2.3 REMOTE INPUTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS REMOTE INPUTS

REMOTE INPUTS

REMOTE INPUT STATUS: Off



MESSAGE

Range: On, Off

REMOTE INPUT 32 STATUS: Off

Range: On, Off

The present state of the 32 remote inputs is shown here. The state displayed will be that of the remote point unless the remote device has been established to be Offline in which case the value shown is the programmed default state for the remote input.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

6-3

6.2 STATUS

6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.2.4 TELEPROTECTION INPUTS

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES

STATUS

TELEPROTECTION INPUTS

TELEPROTECTION INPUTS
MESSAGE

TELEPROTECTION INPUT 1-1: Off TELEPROTECTION INPUT 1-2: Off

MESSAGE

Range: Off, On

Range: Off, On

TELEPROTECTION INPUT 1-16: Off TELEPROTECTION INPUT 2-1: Off TELEPROTECTION INPUT 2-2: Off

Range: Off, On

MESSAGE

Range: Off, On

MESSAGE

Range: Off, On

MESSAGE

TELEPROTECTION INPUT 2-16: Off

Range: Off, On

The present state of teleprotection inputs from communication channels 1 and 2 are shown here. The state displayed will be that of corresponding remote output unless the channel is declared failed. 6.2.5 CONTACT OUTPUTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS CONTACT OUTPUTS

CONTACT OUTPUTS

6
MESSAGE

Cont Op 1 Off

Cont Op xx Off

The present state of the contact outputs is shown here. The first line of a message display indicates the ID of the contact output. For example, Cont Op 1 refers to the contact output in terms of the default name-array index. The second line of the display indicates the logic state of the contact output. For Form-A outputs, the state of the voltage(V) and/or current(I) detectors will show as: Off, VOff, IOff, On, VOn, and/or IOn. For Form-C outputs, the state will show as Off or On.
NOTE

6.2.6 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS


PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS VIRTUAL OUTPUTS

VIRTUAL OUTPUTS

Virt Op 1 Off

MESSAGE

Virt Op 96 Off

The present state of up to 96 virtual outputs is shown here. The first line of a message display indicates the ID of the virtual output. For example, Virt Op 1 refers to the virtual output in terms of the default name-array index. The second line of the display indicates the logic state of the virtual output, as calculated by the FlexLogic equation for that output.

6-4

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

6 ACTUAL VALUES

6.2 STATUS 6.2.7 REMOTE DEVICES

a) STATUS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS REMOTE DEVICES STATUS Range: Yes, No

REMOTE DEVICES STATUS


MESSAGE

All REMOTE DEVICES ONLINE: No REMOTE DEVICE 1 STATUS: Offline

MESSAGE

Range: Online, Offline

REMOTE DEVICE 16 STATUS: Offline

Range: Online, Offline

The present state of up to 16 programmed Remote Devices is shown here. The ALL REMOTE DEVICES ONLINE message indicates whether or not all programmed Remote Devices are online. If the corresponding state is "No", then at least one required Remote Device is not online. b) STATISTICS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS REMOTE DEVICES STATISTICS REMOTE DEVICE 1(16)

REMOTE DEVICE

REMOTE DEVICE StNum: REMOTE DEVICE SqNum:

1 0 1 0

MESSAGE

Statistical data (2 types) for up to 16 programmed Remote Devices is shown here. The StNum number is obtained from the indicated Remote Device and is incremented whenever a change of state of at least one DNA or UserSt bit occurs. The SqNum number is obtained from the indicated Remote Device and is incremented whenever a GSSE message is sent. This number will rollover to zero when a count of 4,294,967,295 is incremented. 6.2.8 DIGITAL COUNTERS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS DIGITAL COUNTERS DIGITAL COUNTERS Counter 1(8)

DIGITAL COUNTERS Counter 1


MESSAGE

Counter 1 0 Counter 1 0

ACCUM: FROZEN:

MESSAGE

Counter 1 FROZEN: YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS Counter 1 0 MICROS:

MESSAGE

The present status of the 8 digital counters is shown here. The status of each counter, with the user-defined counter name, includes the accumulated and frozen counts (the count units label will also appear). Also included, is the date/time stamp for the frozen count. The Counter n MICROS value refers to the microsecond portion of the time stamp.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

6-5

6.2 STATUS

6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.2.9 SELECTOR SWITCHES

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES

STATUS

SELECTOR SWITCHES

SELECTOR SWITCHES

SELECTOR SWITCH 1 POSITION: 0/7 SELECTOR SWITCH 2 POSITION: 0/7

Range: Current Position / 7

MESSAGE

Range: Current Position / 7

The display shows both the current position and the full range. The current position only (an integer from 0 through 7) is the actual value. 6.2.10 FLEX STATES
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS FLEX STATES

FLEX STATES

PARAM Off

1: Off

Range: Off, On

MESSAGE

PARAM 256: Off Off

Range: Off, On

There are 256 FlexState bits available. The second line value indicates the state of the given FlexState bit. 6.2.11 ETHERNET
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS ETHERNET

ETHERNET

ETHERNET PRI LINK STATUS: OK


MESSAGE

Range: Fail, OK

ETHERNET SEC LINK STATUS: OK

Range: Fail, OK

These values indicate the status of the primary and secondary Ethernet links.

6-6

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

6 ACTUAL VALUES

6.2 STATUS 6.2.12 DIRECT INPUTS

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES

STATUS

DIRECT INPUTS

DIRECT INPUTS

AVG MSG RETURN TIME CH1: 0 ms


MESSAGE

UNRETURNED MSG COUNT CH1: 0 CRC FAIL COUNT CH1: 0 AVG MSG RETURN TIME CH2: 0 ms UNRETURNED MSG COUNT CH2: 0 CRC FAIL COUNT CH2: 0 DIRECT INPUT 1: On

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

DIRECT INPUT 32: On

The AVERAGE MSG RETURN TIME is the time taken for direct output messages to return to the sender in a direct input/output ring configuration (this value is not applicable for non-ring configurations). This is a rolling average calculated for the last 10 messages. There are two return times for dual-channel communications modules. The UNRETURNED MSG COUNT values (one per communications channel) count the direct output messages that do not make the trip around the communications ring. The CRC FAIL COUNT values (one per communications channel) count the direct output messages that have been received but fail the CRC check. High values for either of these counts may indicate on a problem with wiring, the communication channel, or the relay(s). The UNRETURNED MSG COUNT and CRC FAIL COUNT values can be cleared using the CLEAR DIRECT I/O COUNTERS command. The DIRECT INPUT x values represent the state of the x-th direct input. 6.2.13 DIRECT DEVICES STATUS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS DIRECT DEVICES STATUS

DIRECT DEVICES STATUS


MESSAGE

DIRECT DEVICE 1 STATUS: Offline DIRECT DEVICE 2 STATUS: Offline

MESSAGE

DIRECT DEVICE 16 STATUS: Offline

These actual values represent the state of direct devices 1 through 16.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

6-7

6.2 STATUS

6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.2.14 EGD PROTOCOL STATUS

a) FAST EXCHANGE
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS EGD PROTOCOL STATUS PRODUCER STATUS FAST EXCHANGE 1

FAST EXCHANGE 1

FAST EXCHANGE 1 SIGNATURE: 0 FAST EXCHANGE 1 DATA LENGTH: 0

MESSAGE

These values provide information that may be useful for debugging an EGD network. The EGD signature and packet size for the fast EGD exchange is displayed. b) SLOW EXCHANGE
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS EGD PROTOCOL STATUS PRODUCER STATUS SLOW EXCHANGE 1(2)

SLOW EXCHANGE 1

SLOW EXCHANGE 1 SIGNATURE: 0 SLOW EXCHANGE 1 DATA LENGTH: 0

MESSAGE

These values provide information that may be useful for debugging an EGD network. The EGD signature and packet size for the slow EGD exchanges are displayed. 6.2.15 TELEPROTECTION CHANNEL TESTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES STATUS TELEPROT CH TESTS

TELEPROT CH TESTS

CHANNEL 1 STATUS: n/a CHANNEL 1 LOST PACKETS: 1 CHANNEL 2 STATUS: n/a CHANNEL 2 LOST PACKETS: 1 VALIDITY OF CHANNEL CONFIGURATION: FAIL

Range: n/a, FAIL, OK

MESSAGE

Range: 1 to 65535 in steps of 1

MESSAGE

Range: n/a, FAIL, OK

MESSAGE

Range: 1 to 65535 in steps of 1

MESSAGE

Range: n/a, FAIL, OK

The status information for two channels is shown here. CHANNEL 1(2) STATUS: This represents the receiver status of each channel. If the value is OK, teleprotection is enabled and data is being received from the remote terminal; If the value is FAIL, teleprotection enabled and data is not being received from the remote terminal. If n/a, teleprotection is disabled. CHANNEL 1(2) LOST PACKETS: Data is transmitted to the remote terminals in data packets at a rate of 2 packets per cycle. The number of lost packets represents data packets lost in transmission; this count can be reset to 0 through the COMMANDS CLEAR RECORDS menu. VALIDITY OF CHANNEL CONFIGURATION: This value displays the current state of the communications channel identification check, and hence validity. If a remote relay ID does not match the programmed ID at the local relay, the FAIL message will be displayed. The N/A value appears if the local relay ID is set to a default value of 0, the channel is failed, or if the teleprotection inputs/outputs are not enabled.

6-8

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.3METERING a) UR CONVENTION FOR MEASURING POWER AND ENERGY The following figure illustrates the conventions established for use in UR-series relays.

6.3 METERING 6.3.1 METERING CONVENTIONS

Generator

PER IEEE CONVENTIONS


PARAMETERS AS SEEN BY THE UR RELAY
Voltage WATTS = Positive VARS = Positive PF = Lag VAG Current UR RELAY IB IA VCG IC

+Q PF = Lead -P PF = Lag PF = Lag


IA

+P PF = Lead -Q

M
Inductive Generator

VBG LOAD Resistive

S=VI

G
Voltage WATTS = Positive VARS = Negative PF = Lead Current IB UR RELAY VBG IC VCG

+Q
PF = Lead
IA VAG

PF = Lag

-P
IA

+P PF = Lag
-Q

PF = Lead

LOAD Resistive Inductive Resistive LOAD VCG Voltage WATTS = Negative VARS = Negative PF = Lag Current VBG UR RELAY IC IA IB VAG

S=VI
2

6
+Q PF = Lead -P
IA

PF = Lag +P

PF = Lag -Q

PF = Lead

G
Generator Resistive LOAD

S=VI
3

VCG Voltage WATTS = Negative VARS = Positive PF = Lead IA Current UR RELAY VBG IC VAG IB

+Q PF = Lead
IA

PF = Lag
+P

-P PF = Lag

PF = Lead

-Q
4

G
Generator

827239AC.CDR

S=VI

Figure 61: FLOW DIRECTION OF SIGNED VALUES FOR WATTS AND VARS

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

6-9

6.3 METERING b) UR CONVENTION FOR MEASURING PHASE ANGLES

6 ACTUAL VALUES

All phasors calculated by UR-series relays and used for protection, control and metering functions are rotating phasors that maintain the correct phase angle relationships with each other at all times. For display and oscillography purposes, all phasor angles in a given relay are referred to an AC input channel pre-selected by the SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP POWER SYSTEM FREQUENCY AND PHASE REFERENCE setting. This setting defines a particular source to be used as the reference. The relay will first determine if any Phase VT bank is indicated in the Source. If it is, voltage channel VA of that bank is used as the angle reference. Otherwise, the relay determines if any Aux VT bank is indicated; if it is, the auxiliary voltage channel of that bank is used as the angle reference. If neither of the two conditions is satisfied, then two more steps of this hierarchical procedure to determine the reference signal include Phase CT bank and Ground CT bank. If the AC signal pre-selected by the relay upon configuration is not measurable, the phase angles are not referenced. The phase angles are assigned as positive in the leading direction, and are presented as negative in the lagging direction, to more closely align with power system metering conventions. This is illustrated below.
-270o

-225o

-315o positive angle direction

-180o

UR phase angle reference

0o

-135o

-45o

-90o

827845A1.CDR

Figure 62: UR PHASE ANGLE MEASUREMENT CONVENTION c) UR CONVENTION FOR MEASURING SYMMETRICAL COMPONENTS The UR-series of relays calculate voltage symmetrical components for the power system phase A line-to-neutral voltage, and symmetrical components of the currents for the power system phase A current. Owing to the above definition, phase angle relations between the symmetrical currents and voltages stay the same irrespective of the connection of instrument transformers. This is important for setting directional protection elements that use symmetrical voltages. For display and oscillography purposes the phase angles of symmetrical components are referenced to a common reference as described in the previous sub-section. WYE-CONNECTED INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS: ABC phase rotation: 1 V_0 = -- ( V AG + V BG + V CG ) 3 1 2 V_1 = -- ( V AG + aV BG + a V CG ) 3 1 2 V_2 = -- ( V AG + a V BG + aV CG ) 3 The above equations apply to currents as well. ACB phase rotation: 1 V_0 = -- ( V AG + V BG + V CG ) 3 1 2 V_1 = -- ( V AG + a V BG + aV CG ) 3 1 2 V_2 = -- ( V AG + aV BG + a V CG ) 3

6-10

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

6 ACTUAL VALUES DELTA-CONNECTED INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS: ABC phase rotation: V_0 = N/A 1 30 2 V_1 = -------------------- ( V AB + aV BC + a V CA ) 3 3 1 30 2 V_2 = ---------------- ( V AB + a V BC + aV CA ) 3 3 ACB phase rotation:

6.3 METERING

V_0 = N/A 1 30 2 V_1 = ---------------- ( V AB + a V BC + aV CA ) 3 3 1 30 2 V_2 = -------------------- ( V AB + aV BC + a V CA ) 3 3

The zero-sequence voltage is not measurable under the Delta connection of instrument transformers and is defaulted to zero. The table below shows an example of symmetrical components calculations for the ABC phase rotation. Table 61: SYMMETRICAL COMPONENTS CALCULATION EXAMPLE
SYSTEM VOLTAGES, SEC. V * VAG 13.9 0 VBG 76.2 125 VCG 79.7 250 VAB 84.9 313 84.9 0 VBC 138.3 97 138.3 144 VCA 85.4 241 85.4 288 VT CONN. WYE DELTA RELAY INPUTS, SEC. V F5AC 13.9 0 84.9 0 F6AC 76.2 125 138.3 144 F7AC 79.7 250 85.4 288 SYMM. COMP, SEC. V V0 19.5 192 N/A V1 56.5 7 56.5 54 V2 23.3 187 23.3 234

UNKNOWN (only V1 and V2 can be determined)

The power system voltages are phase-referenced for simplicity to VAG and VAB, respectively. This, however, is a relative matter. It is important to remember that the G60 displays are always referenced as specified under SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP POWER SYSTEM FREQUENCY AND PHASE REFERENCE.

The example above is illustrated in the following figure.

SYSTEM VOLTAGES

SYMMETRICAL COMPONENTS

UR phase angle reference

WYE VTs

C B 2
U re R ph fe a re se nc a e ng

UR phase angle reference

le

A
DELTA VTs

U re R ph fe a re se nc a e ng

1
le

C B 2
827844A1.CDR

Figure 63: MEASUREMENT CONVENTION FOR SYMMETRICAL COMPONENTS

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

6-11

6.3 METERING

6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.3.2 STATOR DIFFERENTIAL

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES

METERING

STATOR DIFFERENTIAL

STATOR DIFFERENTIAL

STATOR DIFFERENTIAL
MESSAGE

STATOR DIFF OPERATE Iad: 0.00 A STATOR DIFF RESTRAIN Iar: 0.00 A STATOR DIFF OPERATE Ibd: 0.00 A STATOR DIFF RESTRAIN Iar: 0.00 A STATOR DIFF OPERATE Icd: 0.00 A STATOR DIFF RESTRAIN Icr: 0.00 A

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

The phasors of differential and restraint currents are displayed in primary amperes. 6.3.3 SOURCES
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES METERING SOURCE SRC 1

Because energy values are accumulated, these values should be recorded and then reset immediately prior to changing CT or VT characteristics.
NOTE

PHASE CURRENT SRC 1


MESSAGE

SRC 1 RMS Ia: 0.000 b: 0.000 c: 0.000 A SRC 1 RMS Ia: 0.000 A SRC 1 RMS Ib: 0.000 A SRC 1 RMS Ic: 0.000 A SRC 1 RMS In: 0.000 A SRC 1 PHASOR Ia: 0.000 A 0.0 SRC 1 PHASOR Ib: 0.000 A 0.0 SRC 1 PHASOR Ic: 0.000 A 0.0 SRC 1 PHASOR In: 0.000 A 0.0 SRC 1 ZERO SEQ I0: 0.000 A 0.0 SRC 1 POS SEQ I1: 0.000 A 0.0

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

6-12

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

6 ACTUAL VALUES SRC 1 NEG SEQ I2: 0.000 A 0.0

6.3 METERING

MESSAGE

GROUND CURRENT SRC 1


MESSAGE

SRC 1 RMS Ig: 0.000 A SRC 1 PHASOR Ig: 0.000 A 0.0 SRC 1 PHASOR Igd: 0.000 A 0.0

MESSAGE

PHASE VOLTAGE SRC 1


MESSAGE

SRC 1 0.00 SRC 1 0.00 SRC 1 0.00

RMS Vag: V RMS Vbg: V RMS Vcg: V

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

SRC 1 PHASOR Vag: 0.000 V 0.0 SRC 1 PHASOR Vbg: 0.000 V 0.0 SRC 1 PHASOR Vcg: 0.000 V 0.0 SRC 1 0.00 SRC 1 0.00 SRC 1 0.00 RMS Vab: V RMS Vbc: V RMS Vca: V

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

SRC 1 PHASOR Vab: 0.000 V 0.0 SRC 1 PHASOR Vbc: 0.000 V 0.0 SRC 1 PHASOR Vca: 0.000 V 0.0 SRC 1 ZERO SEQ V0: 0.000 V 0.0 SRC 1 POS SEQ V1: 0.000 V 0.0 SRC 1 NEG SEQ V2: 0.000 V 0.0

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

AUXILIARY VOLTAGE SRC 1


MESSAGE

SRC 1 0.00

RMS Vx: V

SRC 1 PHASOR Vx: 0.000 V 0.0

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

6-13

6.3 METERING

6 ACTUAL VALUES

POWER SRC 1
MESSAGE

SRC 1 REAL POWER 3: 0.000 W SRC 1 REAL POWER a: 0.000 W SRC 1 REAL POWER b: 0.000 W SRC 1 REAL POWER c: 0.000 W SRC 1 REACTIVE PWR 3: 0.000 var SRC 1 REACTIVE PWR a: 0.000 var SRC 1 REACTIVE PWR b: 0.000 var SRC 1 REACTIVE PWR c: 0.000 var SRC 1 APPARENT PWR 3: 0.000 VA SRC 1 APPARENT PWR a: 0.000 VA SRC 1 APPARENT PWR b: 0.000 VA SRC 1 APPARENT PWR c: 0.000 VA SRC 1 3: SRC 1 a: SRC 1 b: SRC 1 c: POWER FACTOR 1.000 POWER FACTOR 1.000 POWER FACTOR 1.000 POWER FACTOR 1.000

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

ENERGY SRC 1
MESSAGE

SRC 1 POS WATTHOUR: 0.000 Wh SRC 1 NEG WATTHOUR: 0.000 Wh SRC 1 POS VARHOUR: 0.000 varh SRC 1 NEG VARHOUR: 0.000 varh

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

FREQUENCY SRC 1

SRC 1 FREQUENCY: 0.00 Hz

6-14

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

6 ACTUAL VALUES

6.3 METERING

Four identical Source menus are available. The "SRC 1" text will be replaced by whatever name was programmed by the user for the associated source (see SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP SIGNAL SOURCES). is measured via software-implemented zero-crossing detection of an AC signal. The signal is either a Clarke transformation of three-phase voltages or currents, auxiliary voltage, or ground current as per source configuration (see the SYSTEM SETUP POWER SYSTEM settings). The signal used for frequency estimation is low-pass filtered. The final frequency measurement is passed through a validation filter that eliminates false readings due to signal distortions and transients.
SOURCE FREQUENCY

6.3.4 SYNCHROCHECK
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES METERING SYNCHROCHECK SYNCHROCHECK 1(2)

SYNCHROCHECK 1

SYNCHROCHECK 1 DELTA VOLT: 0.000 V


MESSAGE

SYNCHROCHECK 1 DELTA PHASE: 0.0 SYNCHROCHECK 1 DELTA FREQ: 0.00 Hz

MESSAGE

The Actual Values menu for Synchrocheck 2 is identical to that of Synchrocheck 1. If a synchrocheck function setting is "Disabled", the corresponding actual values menu item will not be displayed. 6.3.5 TRACKING FREQUENCY
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES METERING TRACKING FREQUENCY

TRACKING FREQUENCY

TRACKING FREQUENCY: 60.00 Hz

The tracking frequency is displayed here. The frequency is tracked based on configuration of the reference source. The TRACKING FREQUENCY is based upon positive sequence current phasors from all line terminals and is synchronously adjusted at all terminals. If currents are below 0.125 pu, then the NOMINAL FREQUENCY is used. 6.3.6 FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES METERING FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE

FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE

FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE 1: 0.00 Hz/s

MESSAGE

FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE 4: 0.00 Hz/s

The metered frequency rate of change for the four elements is shown here.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

6-15

6.3 METERING

6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.3.7 FLEXELEMENTS

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES

METERING

FLEXELEMENTS

FLEXELEMENT 1(16)

FLEXELEMENT 1

FLEXELEMENT 1 OpSig: 0.000 pu

The operating signals for the FlexElements are displayed in pu values using the following definitions of the base units. Table 62: FLEXELEMENT BASE UNITS
dcmA FREQUENCY FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE PHASE ANGLE POWER FACTOR RTDs SENSITIVE DIR POWER (Sns Dir Power) SOURCE CURRENT SOURCE ENERGY (SRC X Positive and Negative Watthours); (SRC X Positive and Negative Varhours) SOURCE POWER SOURCE VOLTAGE STATOR DIFFERENTIAL CURRENT (Stator Diff Iar, Ibr, and Icr) BASE = maximum value of the DCMA INPUT MAX setting for the two transducers configured under the +IN and IN inputs. fBASE = 1 Hz df/dtBASE = 1 Hz/s BASE = 360 degrees (see the UR angle referencing convention) PFBASE = 1.00 BASE = 100C PBASE = maximum value of 3 VBASE IBASE for the +IN and IN inputs of the sources configured for the sensitive power directional element(s). IBASE = maximum nominal primary RMS value of the +IN and IN inputs EBASE = 10000 MWh or MVAh, respectively

PBASE = maximum value of VBASE IBASE for the +IN and IN inputs VBASE = maximum nominal primary RMS value of the +IN and IN inputs IBASE = maximum primary RMS value of the +IN and IN inputs (CT primary for source currents, and bus reference primary current for bus differential currents) VBASE = Primary phase voltage of the STATOR GROUND SOURCE IBASE = maximum primary RMS value of the +IN and IN inputs (CT primary for source currents, and bus reference primary current for bus differential currents) VBASE = maximum primary RMS value of all the sources related to the +IN and IN inputs BASE = 1.00 pu

STATOR GROUND 3RD HARMONIC VOLTAGES (Stator Gnd Vn/V0 3rd) STATOR RESTRAINING CURRENT (Stator Diff Iad, Ibd, and Icd) SYNCHROCHECK (Max Delta Volts) VOLTS PER HERTZ

6.3.8 SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER


PATH: ACTUAL VALUES METERING SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER

SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER


MESSAGE

DIRECTIONAL POWER 1 3: 0.000 W DIRECTIONAL POWER 2 3: 0.000 W

The effective operating quantities of the sensitive directional power elements are displayed here. The display may be useful to calibrate the feature by compensating the angular errors of the CTs and VTs with the use of the RCA and CALIBRATION settings.

6-16

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

6 ACTUAL VALUES

6.3 METERING 6.3.9 STATOR GROUND

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES

METERING

STATOR GROUND

STATOR GROUND

STATOR GND 3RD HARM VN: 0.000 V


MESSAGE

STATOR GND 3RD HARM VN+V0: 0.000 V

Magnitudes of the 3rd harmonic components in the neutral voltage at the machine neutral point (VN) and in the vector sum of the voltage at the machine neutral point and the zero-sequence voltage at the machine terminals (VN + V0) are available for display. The values are calculated for a signal source specified under Stator Ground settings menu. These readings may be useful when selecting a pickup and supervision setting for the 100% Stator Ground and Third Harmonic Neutral Undervoltage protection elements.

6.3.10 VOLTS PER HERTZ


PATH: ACTUAL VALUES METERING VOLTS PER HERTZ 1(2)

VOLTS PER HERTZ 1

VOLTS PER HERTZ 1: 0.000 pu

The V/Hz actual values are displayed in this menu. 6.3.11 RESTRICTED GROUND FAULT
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES METERING RESTRICTED GROUND FAULT CURRENTS RESTRICTED GROUND FAULT 1(4)

RESTRICTED GROUND FAULT 1


MESSAGE

RGF 1 DIFF 0.000 A

Igd:

RGF 1 RESTR Igr: 0.000 A

The differential and restraint current values for the Restricted Ground Fault Element are displayed in this menu. 6.3.12 TRANSDUCER INPUTS/OUTPUTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES METERING TRANSDUCER I/O DCMA INPUTS DCMA INPUT xx

DCMA INPUT xx

DCMA INPUT xx 0.000 mA

Actual values for each dcmA input channel that is enabled are displayed with the top line as the programmed Channel ID and the bottom line as the value followed by the programmed units.
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES METERING TRANSDUCER I/O RTD INPUTS RTD INPUT xx

RTD INPUT xx

RTD INPUT xx -50 C

Actual values for each RTD input channel that is enabled are displayed with the top line as the programmed Channel ID and the bottom line as the value.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

6-17

6.4 RECORDS 6.4RECORDS


PATH: ACTUAL VALUES RECORDS

6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.4.1 USER-PROGRAMMABLE FAULT REPORTS


USER-PROGRAMMABLE FAULT REPORT

USER-PROGRAMMABLE FAULT REPORT


MESSAGE

NEWEST RECORD NUMBER: 0 LAST CLEARED DATE: 2002/8/11 14:23:57 LAST REPORT DATE: 2002/10/09 08:25:27

MESSAGE

This menu displays the User-Programmable Fault Report actual values. See the User-Programmable Fault Report section in Chapter 5 for additional information on this feature. 6.4.2 EVENT RECORDS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES RECORDS EVENT RECORDS

EVENT RECORDS

EVENT: XXXX RESET OP(PUSHBUTTON)

MESSAGE

EVENT: 3 POWER ON EVENT: 2 POWER OFF EVENT: 1 EVENTS CLEARED

EVENT 3 DATE: 2000/07/14 EVENT 3 TIME: 14:53:00.03405 Date and Time Stamps

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

The Event Records menu shows the contextual data associated with up to the last 1024 events, listed in chronological order from most recent to oldest. If all 1024 event records have been filled, the oldest record will be removed as a new record is added. Each event record shows the event identifier/sequence number, cause, and date/time stamp associated with the event trigger. Refer to the COMMANDS CLEAR RECORDS menu for clearing event records. 6.4.3 OSCILLOGRAPHY
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES RECORDS OSCILLOGRAPHY

OSCILLOGRAPHY

FORCE TRIGGER? No
MESSAGE

Range: No, Yes

NUMBER OF TRIGGERS: 0 AVAILABLE RECORDS: 0 CYCLES PER RECORD: 0.0 LAST CLEARED DATE: 2000/07/14 15:40:16

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

This menu allows the user to view the number of triggers involved and number of oscillography traces available. The cycles per record value is calculated to account for the fixed amount of data storage for oscillography. See the Oscillography section of Chapter 5 for further details. A trigger can be forced here at any time by setting "Yes" to the FORCE TRIGGER? command. Refer to the COMMANDS CLEAR RECORDS menu for clearing the oscillography records.

6-18

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

6 ACTUAL VALUES

6.4 RECORDS 6.4.4 DATA LOGGER

PATH: ACTUAL VALUES

RECORDS

DATA LOGGER

DATA LOGGER

OLDEST SAMPLE TIME: 2000/01/14 13:45:51


MESSAGE

NEWEST SAMPLE TIME: 2000/01/14 15:21:19

The OLDEST SAMPLE TIME is the time at which the oldest available samples were taken. It will be static until the log gets full, at which time it will start counting at the defined sampling rate. The NEWEST SAMPLE TIME is the time the most recent samples were taken. It counts up at the defined sampling rate. If Data Logger channels are defined, then both values are static. Refer to the COMMANDS
CLEAR RECORDS

menu for clearing data logger records.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

6-19

6.5 PRODUCT INFORMATION 6.5PRODUCT INFORMATION


PATH: ACTUAL VALUES PRODUCT INFO MODEL INFORMATION

6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.5.1 MODEL INFORMATION

MODEL INFORMATION

ORDER CODE LINE 1: G60-E00-HCH-F8G-H6B ORDER CODE LINE 2: ORDER CODE LINE 3: ORDER CODE LINE 4: SERIAL NUMBER: ETHERNET MAC ADDRESS 000000000000 MANUFACTURING DATE: 0 OPERATING TIME: 0:00:00

Example code shown

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

Range: YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS

MESSAGE

The product order code, serial number, Ethernet MAC address, date/time of manufacture, and operating time are shown here. 6.5.2 FIRMWARE REVISIONS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES PRODUCT INFO FIRMWARE REVISIONS

FIRMWARE REVISIONS

G60 Relay REVISION:

4.40

Range: 0.00 to 655.35 Revision number of the application firmware. Range: 0 to 65535 (ID of the MOD FILE) Value is 0 for each standard firmware release. Range: 0.00 to 655.35 Revision number of the boot program firmware. Range: 0.00 to 655.35 Revision number of faceplate program firmware. Range: Any valid date and time. Date and time when product firmware was built. Range: Any valid date and time. Date and time when the boot program was built.

MESSAGE

MODIFICATION FILE NUMBER: 0 BOOT PROGRAM REVISION: 1.13 FRONT PANEL PROGRAM REVISION: 0.08 COMPILE DATE: 2004/09/15 04:55:16 BOOT DATE: 2004/09/15 16:41:32

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

The shown data is illustrative only. A modification file number of 0 indicates that, currently, no modifications have been installed.

6-20

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

7 COMMANDS AND TARGETS 7 COMMANDS AND TARGETS 7.1COMMANDS

7.1 COMMANDS 7.1.1 COMMANDS MENU

COMMANDS

MESSAGE

COMMANDS VIRTUAL INPUTS COMMANDS CLEAR RECORDS COMMANDS SET DATE AND TIME COMMANDS RELAY MAINTENANCE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

MESSAGE

The commands menu contains relay directives intended for operations personnel. All commands can be protected from unauthorized access via the command password; see the Password Security section of Chapter 5 for details. The following flash message appears after successfully command entry: COMMAND EXECUTED 7.1.2 VIRTUAL INPUTS
PATH: COMMANDS VIRTUAL INPUTS

COMMANDS VIRTUAL INPUTS

Virt Ip 1 Off

Range: Off, On

MESSAGE

Virt Ip 64 Off

Range: Off, On

The states of up to 64 virtual inputs are changed here. The first line of the display indicates the ID of the virtual input. The second line indicates the current or selected status of the virtual input. This status will be a logical state Off (0) or On (1).

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

7-1

7.1 COMMANDS

7 COMMANDS AND TARGETS 7.1.3 CLEAR RECORDS

PATH: COMMANDS

CLEAR RECORDS

COMMANDS CLEAR RECORDS

CLEAR USER FAULT REPORTS? No CLEAR EVENT RECORDS? No CLEAR OSCILLOGRAPHY? No CLEAR DATA LOGGER? No CLEAR ENERGY? No CLEAR UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS? No CLEAR DIRECT I/O COUNTERS? No CLEAR TELEPROTECT COUNTERS? No CLEAR ALL RELAY RECORDS? No

Range: No, Yes

Range: No, Yes

Range: No, Yes

Range: No, Yes

Range: No, Yes

Range: No, Yes

Range: No, Yes. Valid only for units with Direct Input/ Output module. Range: No, Yes

Range: No, Yes

This menu contains commands for clearing historical data such as the Event Records. Data is cleared by changing a command setting to Yes and pressing the key. After clearing data, the command setting automatically reverts to No. 7.1.4 SET DATE AND TIME
PATH: COMMANDS SET DATE AND TIME

COMMANDS SET DATE AND TIME

SET DATE AND TIME: 2000/01/14 13:47:03

(YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS)

The date and time can be entered here via the faceplate keypad only if the IRIG-B or SNTP signal is not in use. The time setting is based on the 24-hour clock. The complete date, as a minimum, must be entered to allow execution of this command. The new time will take effect at the moment the key is clicked. 7.1.5 RELAY MAINTENANCE
PATH: COMMANDS RELAY MAINTENANCE

COMMANDS RELAY MAINTENANCE

PERFORM LAMPTEST? No UPDATE ORDER CODE? No

Range: No, Yes

Range: No, Yes

This menu contains commands for relay maintenance purposes. Commands are activated by changing a command setting to Yes and pressing the key. The command setting will then automatically revert to No.

7-2

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

7 COMMANDS AND TARGETS

7.1 COMMANDS

The PERFORM LAMPTEST command turns on all faceplate LEDs and display pixels for a short duration. The UPDATE ORDER CODE command causes the relay to scan the backplane for the hardware modules and update the order code to match. If an update occurs, the following message is shown. UPDATING... PLEASE WAIT There is no impact if there have been no changes to the hardware modules. When an update does not occur, the ORDER CODE NOT UPDATED message will be shown.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

7-3

7.2 TARGETS 7.2TARGETS

7 COMMANDS AND TARGETS 7.2.1 TARGETS MENU

TARGETS

MESSAGE

DIGITAL ELEMENT LATCHED

1:

Displayed only if targets for this element are active. Example shown. Displayed only if targets for this element are active. Example shown.

MESSAGE

DIGITAL ELEMENT 48: LATCHED


MESSAGE

The status of any active targets will be displayed in the Targets menu. If no targets are active, the display will read No Active Targets: 7.2.2 TARGET MESSAGES When there are no active targets, the first target to become active will cause the display to immediately default to that message. If there are active targets and the user is navigating through other messages, and when the default message timer times out (i.e. the keypad has not been used for a determined period of time), the display will again default back to the target message. The range of variables for the target messages is described below. Phase information will be included if applicable. If a target message status changes, the status with the highest priority will be displayed. Table 71: TARGET MESSAGE PRIORITY STATUS
PRIORITY 1 2 3 ACTIVE STATUS OP PKP LATCHED DESCRIPTION element operated and still picked up element picked up and timed out element had operated but has dropped out

If a self test error is detected, a message appears indicating the cause of the error. For example UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED indicates that the minimal relay settings have not been programmed. 7.2.3 RELAY SELF-TESTS The relay performs a number of self-test diagnostic checks to ensure device integrity. The two types of self-tests (major and minor) are listed in the tables below. When either type of self-test error occurs, the Trouble LED Indicator will turn on and a target message displayed. All errors record an event in the event recorder. Latched errors can be cleared by pressing the RESET key, providing the condition is no longer present. Major self-test errors also result in the following: the critical fail relay on the power supply module is de-energized all other output relays are de-energized and are prevented from further operation the faceplate In Service LED indicator is turned off a RELAY OUT OF SERVICE event is recorded

Most of the minor self-test errors can be disabled. Refer to the settings in the User-Programmable Self-Tests section in Chapter 5 for additional details.

7-4

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

7 COMMANDS AND TARGETS


Table 72: MAJOR SELF-TEST ERROR MESSAGES
SELF-TEST ERROR MESSAGE LATCHED TARGET MESSAGE? DESCRIPTION OF PROBLEM HOW OFTEN THE TEST IS PERFORMED Every 1/8th of a cycle. WHAT TO DO

7.2 TARGETS

Yes DSP ERRORS: A/D Calibration, A/D Interrupt, A/D Reset, Inter DSP Rx, Sample Int, Rx Interrupt, Tx Interrupt, Rx Sample Index, Invalid Settings, Rx Checksum DSP ERROR: INVALID REVISION EQUIPMENT MISMATCH with 2nd-line detail Yes

CT/VT module with digital signal processor may have a problem.

Cycle the control power (if the problem recurs, contact the factory).

One or more DSP modules in a multiple DSP unit has Rev. C hardware

Rev. C DSP needs to be replaced with a Rev. D DSP.

Contact the factory

No

Configuration of modules does not On power up; thereafter, the match the order code stored in the backplane is checked for missing CPU. cards every 5 seconds. FlexLogic equations do not compile properly. Event driven; whenever FlexLogic equations are modified.

Check all modules against the order code, ensure they are inserted properly, and cycle control power (if problem persists, contact factory). Finish all equation editing and use self test to debug any errors. The latching output module failed. Replace the Module. Contact the factory. Contact the factory. Program all settings (especially those under PRODUCT SETUP INSTALLATION).

FLEXLOGIC ERR TOKEN with 2nd-line detail LATCHING OUTPUT ERROR PROGRAM MEMORY Test Failed UNIT NOT CALIBRATED

No No

Discrepancy in the position of a Every 1/8th of a cycle. latching contact between firmware and hardware has been detected. Error was found while checking Flash memory. Settings indicate the unit is not calibrated. Once flash is uploaded with new firmware. On power up.

Yes No

UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED No

PRODUCT SETUP On power up and whenever the INSTALLATION setting indicates RELAY PROGRAMMED setting is relay is not in a programmed state. altered.

Table 73: MINOR SELF-TEST ERROR MESSAGES


SELF-TEST ERROR MESSAGE BATTERY FAIL DIRECT RING BREAK LATCHED TARGET MESSAGE Yes No DESCRIPTION OF PROBLEM HOW OFTEN THE TEST IS PERFORMED WHAT TO DO

Battery is not functioning. Direct input/output settings configured for a ring, but the connection is not in a ring. A direct device is configured but not connected.

Monitored every 5 seconds. Reported Replace the battery located in the after 1 minute if problem persists. power supply module (1H or 1L). Every second. Check direct input/output configuration and/or wiring. Check direct input/output configuration and/or wiring. If this message appears after an order code update is preformed, press the RESET key to clear target message. In other cases, contact the factory.

DIRECT DEVICE OFF EEPROM DATA ERROR

No Yes

Every second.

The non-volatile memory has been On power up only. corrupted.

IRIG-B FAILURE

No

A bad IRIG-B input signal has been Monitored whenever an IRIG-B signal Ensure the IRIG-B cable is connected, detected is received. check cable functionality (i.e. look for physical damage or perform continuity test), ensure IRIG-B receiver is functioning, and check input signal level (it may be less than specification). If none of these apply, contact the factory. Latching output failure. Event driven. Contact the factory. Contact the factory. Check connections. Contact the factory.

LATCHING OUT ERROR LOW ON MEMORY PRI ETHERNET FAIL PROTOTYPE FIRMWARE REMOTE DEVICE OFF

Yes Yes Yes Yes No

Memory is close to 100% capacity. Monitored every 5 seconds. Primary Ethernet connection failed. Monitored every 2 seconds A prototype version of the firmware On power up only. is loaded. One or more GOOSE devices are not responding.

Event driven occurs when a device Check GOOSE setup. programmed to receive GOOSE messages stops receiving. Every 1 to 60 s, depending on GOOSE packets. Monitored every 2 seconds 10 to 60 seconds. Event driven. Check connections. Check SNTP configuration and/or network connections. Contact the factory.

SEC ETHERNET FAIL SNTP FAILURE SYSTEM EXCEPTION

Yes No Yes

Sec. Ethernet connection failed. SNTP server not responding. Abnormal restart from modules being removed/inserted when powered-up, abnormal DC supply, or internal relay failure. Some tasks are behind schedule.

WATCHDOG ERROR

No

Event driven.

Contact the factory.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

7-5

7.2 TARGETS

7 COMMANDS AND TARGETS

7-6

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

8 THEORY OF OPERATION

8.1 PHASE DISTANCE THROUGH POWER TRANSFORMERS 8.1.1 DESCRIPTION

8 THEORY OF OPERATION 8.1PHASE DISTANCE THROUGH POWER TRANSFORMERS

As a Wye-Delta transformer introduces discontinuity for the zero-sequence circuit, the ground distance protection cannot be applied, except special circumstances, to respond to faults behind the transformer. The phase distance elements, however, could be developed so that both accurate reach and correct fault phase identification is retained for faults behind the power transformer as seen from the relaying point. Without appropriate compensation, the relay's reach would depend on a type of fault, creating considerable difficulties in applying the relay. The G60 provides for any location of the VTs and CTs with respect to the involved power transformer and the direction of any given zone. In the following equations, the VT and CT locations are referenced as None if the transformer is not present between the CT/VT and the intended reach point. Otherwise, the location is to be selected as a type of a transformer as seen from the VT/CT position towards the intended reach point. The following figure explains the adopted rules.
(a) (b)

delta

wye, 330o lag

delta

wye, 330o lag

Z3 Z3 XFRM VOL CONNECTION = None Z3 XFRM CUR CONNECTION = None

Z3 Z3 XFRM VOL CONNECTION = Yd1 Z3 XFRM CUR CONNECTION = None

Z1 Z1 XFRM VOL CONNECTION = Dy11 Z1 XFRM CUR CONNECTION = Dy11

Z1 Z1 XFRM VOL CONNECTION = None Z1 XFRM CUR CONNECTION = Dy11

(c)

delta

wye, 330o lag

(e)
L1 L2

Z3 Z3 XFRM VOL CONNECTION = None Z3 XFRM CUR CONNECTION = Yd1

Zone 3 Zone 1 ZL1 ZT ZL2

Z1 Z1 XFRM VOL CONNECTION = Dy11 Z1 XFRM CUR CONNECTION = None


830717A1.CDR

Figure 81: APPLICATIONS OF THE PHS DIST XFMR VOL/CUR CONNECTION SETTINGS

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

8-1

8.1 PHASE DISTANCE THROUGH POWER TRANSFORMERS

8 THEORY OF OPERATION

Table 81: PHASE DISTANCE INPUT SIGNALS FOR DELTA-WYE TRANSFORMERS


TRANSFORMER CONNECTION None LOOP AB BC CA Dy1 AB CURRENT TRANSFORMATION VOLTAGE TRANSFORMATION

IA IB IB IC IC IA 3I A 3I B 3I C I AB_21P = 3I C I BC_21P = 3I A I CA_21P = 3I B I AB_21P = 3I B I BC_21P = 3I C I CA_21P = 3I A I AB_21P = 3I A I BC_21P = 3I B I CA_21P = 3I C I AB_21P = 3I C I BC_21P = 3I A I CA_21P = 3I B I AB_21P = 3I B I BC_21P = 3I C I CA_21P = 3I A

V AB V BC V CA 1------ ( V AB V CA ) 3 1------ ( V BC V AB ) 3 1------ ( V CA V BC ) 3 1V AB_21P = ------ ( V BC V CA ) 3 1V BC_21P = ------ ( V CA V AB ) 3 1V CA_21P = ------ ( V AB V BC ) 3 1V AB_21P = ------ ( V BC V AB ) 3 1V BC_21P = ------ ( V CA V BC ) 3 1V CA_21P = ------ ( V AB V CA ) 3 1V AB_21P = ------ ( V CA V AB ) 3 1V BC_21P = ------ ( V AB V BC ) 3 1V CA_21P = ------ ( V BC V CA ) 3 1V AB_21P = ------ ( V CA V BC ) 3 1V BC_21P = ------ ( V AB V CA ) 3 1V CA_21P = ------ ( V BC V AB ) 3 1V AB_21P = ------ ( V AB V BC ) 3 1V BC_21P = ------ ( V BC V CA ) 3 1V CA_21P = ------ ( V CA V AB ) 3

BC

CA

Dy3

AB

BC

CA

Dy5

AB

BC

CA

Dy7

AB

BC

CA

Dy9

AB

BC

CA

Dy11

AB

BC

CA

8-2

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

8 THEORY OF OPERATION

8.1 PHASE DISTANCE THROUGH POWER TRANSFORMERS

Table 82: PHASE DISTANCE INPUT SIGNALS FOR WYE-DELTA TRANSFORMERS


TRANSFORMER CONNECTION Yd1 LOOP AB CURRENT TRANSFORMATION VOLTAGE TRANSFORMATION

1I AB_21P = ------ ( 2I A I B I C ) 3 1I BC_21P = ------ ( 2I B I A I C ) 3 1I CA_21P = ------ ( 2I C I A I B ) 3 1I AB_21P = ------ ( I A + I B 2I C ) 3 1I BC_21P = ------ ( I B + I C 2I A ) 3 1I CA_21P = ------ ( I A + I C 2I B ) 3 1I AB_21P = ------ ( 2I B I A I C ) 3 1I BC_21P = ------ ( 2I C I A I B ) 3 1I CA_21P = ------ ( 2I A I B I C ) 3 1I AB_21P = ------ ( I B + I C 2I A ) 3 1I BC_21P = ------ ( I A + I C 2I B ) 3 1I CA_21P = ------ ( I A + I B 2I C ) 3 1I AB_21P = ------ ( 2I C I A I B ) 3 1I BC_21P = ------ ( 2I A I B I C ) 3 1 I CA_21P = ------ ( 2I B I A I C ) 3 1I AB_21P = ------ ( I A + I C 2I B ) 3 1I BC_21P = ------ ( I A + I B 2I C ) 3 1I CA_21P = ------ ( I B + I C 2I A ) 3

V AB_21P = V BC_21P = V CA_21P =

3V A 3V B 3V C

BC

CA

Yd3

AB

V AB_21P = 3V C V BC_21P = 3V A V CA_21P = 3V B V AB_21P = V BC_21P = V CA_21P = 3V B 3V C 3V A

BC

CA

Yd5

AB

BC

CA

Yd7

AB

V AB_21P = 3V A V BC_21P = 3V B V CA_21P = 3V C V AB_21P = V BC_21P = V CA_21P = 3V C 3V A 3V B

BC

CA

Yd9

AB

BC

CA

Yd11

AB

V AB_21P = 3V B V BC_21P = 3V C V CA_21P = 3V A

BC

CA

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

8-3

8.1 PHASE DISTANCE THROUGH POWER TRANSFORMERS

8 THEORY OF OPERATION

Equations from the Current Transformation and Voltage Transformation columns are used to derive inputs to the three (AB, BC, and CA) phase distance elements. For example, if the CTs are located at the delta side of the Delta-Wye 11 transformer, and a given zone is set to look through the transformer into the system connected to the Wye winding, the CT location setting for that zone shall be set to Dy11 and the relay would use 3I B instead of a traditional I A I B for the AB phase distance element. The current supervision pickup setting applies to the currents specified in the Current Transformation columns. A distance zone originates at the location of the VTs (regardless of the location of the CTs). For more information on settings please refer to Chapter 9: Application of Settings. 8.1.2 EXAMPLE Consider the system shown below:
150 MVA, 10% 13.8kV/315kV delta wye, 330 lag ZL = 30.1185 AB

H VT = 13.8kV/120V CT = 8000:5

X VT = 315kV/120V CT = 300:5 0.68885 2.5788.4

837727A2.CDR

Figure 82: SAMPLE SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Normally, in order to respond to the fault shown in the figure, a distance relay shall be applied at the relaying point X. The relay input signals at this location are shown in the following table.
INPUT VA VB VC IA IB IC PRIMARY 100.4 kV 7.32 97.23 kV 53.4 181.8 kV 150.0 1.288 kA 27.6 1.288 kA 152.4 0 SECONDARY 38.25 V 7.32 37.04 V 53.4 69.26 V 150.0 21.47 A 27.6 21.47 A 152.4 0

If installed at the location X, the relay would use the following input signals for its phase AB distance element: V = VAB = 77.402 kV 57.5 primary or 29.49 V 57.5 secondary I = IA IB = 2.576 kA 27.6 primary or 42.93 A 27.6 secondary And consequently it would see an apparent impedance of: Zapp = V / I = 30.05 85 primary or 0.687 85 secondary

8-4

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

8 THEORY OF OPERATION

8.1 PHASE DISTANCE THROUGH POWER TRANSFORMERS

If applied at location H, the relay sees the following input signals:


INPUT VA VB VC IA IB IC PRIMARY 7.584 kV 5.59 6.269 kV 120.1 7.751 kV 125.5 16.976 kA 27.6 33.952 kA 152.4 16.976 kA 27.6 SECONDARY 69.95 V 5.59 54.52 V 120.1 65.84 V 125.5 10.61 A 27.6 21.22 A 152.4 10.61 A 27.6

The relay is set as follows:


XFMR VOL CONNECTION = Dy11 XFMR CUR CONNECTION = Dy11

Consequently, the following signals are applied to the phase AB distance element: 1V = ------ V AB V BC = 10.861 kV 59.9 primary or 94.45 V 59.9 secondary 3 I = 3I B = 58.860 kA 27.6 primary or 36.75 A 27.6 secondary This results in the following apparent impedance: 94.45 kV 59.9Z app = V = --------------------------------------------- = 2.570 87.5 secondary --I 36.75 kA 27.6
(EQ 8.3) (EQ 8.1) (EQ 8.2)

The above value is a correct measure of the distance from the VT location to the fault. For relay location 2, this certainly includes the positive-sequence impedance of the transformer: 10- ( 13.8 kV ) Z T ( at 13.8 kV ) = --------- --------------------------- = 0.127 90 100 150 MVA 13.8 2 Z L ( at 13.8 kV ) = 30.11 ---------- = 0.05779 85 315 Thus, 0.127 90 + 0.05779 85 = 0.1847 88.4 primary side or 2.569 88.4 on the secondary side. The above example illustrates how the relay maintains correct reach for fault behind power transformers. When installed at X, the relay shall be set to 0.687 85 secondary in order to reach to the fault shown in the figure. When installed at H, the relay shall be set to 2.569 88.4 to ensure exactly same coverage. See Chapter 9: Application of Settings for more information on setting calculations.
2

(EQ 8.4)

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

8-5

8.1 PHASE DISTANCE THROUGH POWER TRANSFORMERS

8 THEORY OF OPERATION

8-6

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

9 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS 9 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS 9.1SETTING EXAMPLE

9.1 SETTING EXAMPLE 9.1.1 DESCRIPTION

This section provides an example of the settings required for an example system configuration. Consider the generator protection system shown below:
GENERATOR 212 MVA, 18 kV, ABC xd = 0.216 pu xd = 1.967 pu 2 I2T capability = 10 I2 capability = 8% Motoring Power = 22000 kW
X1 H1 H3

GSU 200 MVA 18 : 138 kV X1 = 10%


X2 H2 H0

TX LINE 138 kV Z1 = 15 + j75 ohm

8000 : 5 A

A B C

8000 : 5 A

X1 X2 X3

X3

H1 H2 H3 H0

52G

52

A Power B System C

18900 : 120 V 12000 : 240 V


R

Yd1

F 5a

F 4b
IG

F 3b

F 2b

F 1b

F 8a

F 7a

F 6a

F 4a

F 3a

F 2a

F 1a

F 2c

F 6c

F 8c

F 3c

F 7c

F 5c

F 1c

M 3b

M 1b

M 2b

M 4b

M 3a

M 2a

M 1a

M 4a

M 1c

M 2c

M 3c

M 4c

VC

VB

VX

VC

VB

VX

VA

IG5

IG5

IG1

IA5

IA1

IA5

IA1

IC5

CURRENT INPUTS 8E / 8F

IC1

IB5

IB1

VOLTAGE INPUTS 8A / 8B

CURRENT INPUTS

Inlet Valve

52b

H1

V I

H2

V I

H4

H 8b

SURGE

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay


830712A4.CDR

Figure 91: G60 SAMPLE SYSTEM 9.1.2 SYSTEM SETUP Ideally, the CTs should be selected so the generator nominal current is 80 to 85% of CT primary. The following settings are entered for the example system. The M5 bank and the ground CT input on each of the groups are unused in this example.
6 S nom 212 10 VA The nominal current is given by: I nom = -------------------- = ----------------------------------------- = 6800 A 3 3V nom 3 18 10 V

Make the following settings changes in EnerVista UR Setup (or alternately, via the front panel through the SYSTEM SETUP AC INPUTS CURRENT BANK F1 and the SYSTEM SETUP AC INPUTS CURRENT BANK M1 menus).

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

H 7a H 7c H 8a H 8c H 7b

CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN COMMON

H 7a H 7c H 8a H 8c H7b

H3

H 5a H 5c H 6a H 6c H 5b

CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN CONTACT IN COMMON

H 5a H 5c H 6a H 6c H 5b

DIGITAL I/O

6G

H1a H1b H1c H2a H2b H2c H3a H3b H3c H4a H4b H4c

IG1

VA

IG

IA

IB

IC5

IC1

IB5

IB1

IA

IB

IC

IC

F 4c

Trip Generator Breaker Trip Field Breaker Trip Turbine Alarm

(EQ 9.1)

9-1

9.1 SETTING EXAMPLE For the example system, the voltage settings are calculated as follows:
PHASE VT SECONDARY =

9 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS

18000 V ----------------------------------------- 120 V - = 66 V 18900 V 3

PHASE VT RATIO =

18900 V = 157.5 --------------------120 V 12000 V = 50 --------------------240 V


SYSTEM SETUP

NEUTRAL VT RATIO =

Enter the following values through EnerVista UR Setup (or alternately, through the front panel SETTINGS AC INPUTS VOLTAGE BANK F5 menu):

9.1.3 POWER SYSTEM Frequency tracking should always be enabled for generator applications. Make the following power system parameters SYSTEM SETUP POWER SYSTEM VOLTAGE BANK F5 changes via EnerVista UR Setup or through the SETTINGS menu:

9.1.4 SIGNAL SOURCES Two sources are required for this application example. The LINE source uses the Phase and Auxiliary VT inputs and the CT input wired to the generator output CT. The NEUTRL source uses the Phase VT inputs and the CT input wired to the generator neutral CT. Including the phase VT inputs for both sources allows the user to choose the location of elements that use both voltage and current. Elements using the Auxiliary VT input are assigned to the NEUTRL source. Make the following changes through EnerVista UR Setup or through the SETTINGS the SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP SOURCE 2 menus:
SYSTEM SETUP SOURCE 1

and

9-2

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

9 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS

9.1 SETTING EXAMPLE 9.1.5 STATOR DIFFERENTIAL

The LINE and NEUTRL sources are both required for the Stator Differential element. The minimum pickup can usually be set as low as 0.05 pu (corresponding to 0.25 A secondary or 400 A primary in this example). Set the STATOR DIFF SLOPE 1 setting to accommodate for CT errors; a setting of 10% is adequate in most instances. Set the STATOR DIFF SLOPE 2 setting to accommodate for errors due to CT saturation; a setting of 80% is recommended for most applications. The STATOR DIFF BREAK 1 setting must be greater than the maximum load expected for the machine. The STATOR DIFF BREAK 2 setting should be set at the level where CT saturation is expected to occur. Make the following parameter changes in EnerVista UR Setup or through the SETTINGS TING GROUP 1 STATOR DIFFERENTIAL menu:
GROUPED ELEMENTS SET-

9.1.6 GENERATOR UNBALANCE Stage 1 of the generator unbalance element is typically used to trip the generator. In this example, the I2 capability of the machine is 8% and the I22T capability is 10. The generator nominal current is: I nom primary I nom ( pu ) = -------------------------------- = 6800 A = 0.85 pu -----------------8000 A CT primary
(EQ 9.2)

The minimum operate time of Stage 1 will be set to 0.25 seconds, the maximum operating time will be 10 minutes, and the reset time will be set to 4 minutes. Stage 2 is typically set lower than Stage 1 with a time delay to prevent nuisance alarms for external faults that are normally cleared by system protection. For the application example, the pickup setting is: Pickup = 70% I 2 capability = 0.70 8% = 5.6% The NEUTRL source will be chosen for this element. The settings are as follows:
(EQ 9.3)

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

9-3

9.1 SETTING EXAMPLE

9 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS 9.1.7 LOSS OF EXCITATION

For the example system, we have the following values: ( 18 kV ) - 1600base kV - CT ratio Z b ( sec ) = -------------------------- -------------------- = ----------------------------------- -------------- = 15.54 base MVA VT ratio 211.765 MVA 157.5 X d (sec) = X d Z b (sec) = 0.216 15.54 = 3.36 X d ( sec ) = X d Z b ( sec ) = 1.967 15.54 = 30.57 Z b ( sec ) + X d (sec) CENTER 1 = ------------------------------------------------ = 15.54 + 3.36 = 9.45 -----------------------------------------2 2 Z b ( sec ) 15.54 RADIUS 1 = -------------------- = --------------------- = 7.77 2 2 PICKUP DELAY 1 = 0.06 seconds X d ( sec ) + X d (sec) 30.57 + 3.36 CENTER 2 = ------------------------------------------------- = ------------------------------------------ = 16.97 2 2 X d ( sec ) --------------------RADIUS 2 = -------------------- = 30.57 = 15.28 2 2
2 2

(EQ 9.4) (EQ 9.5) (EQ 9.6) (EQ 9.7)

(EQ 9.8) (EQ 9.9) (EQ 9.10)

(EQ 9.11)

The voltage supervision setting will be determined by a system study and may be disabled on either element if required. VT fuse failure should supervise this element. The choice of source is not critical for this application. The NEUTRL source is chosen for the following setting changes. GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP Make the following changes in EnerVista UR Setup or through the SETTINGS 1 LOSS OF EXCITATION menu:

9.1.8 REVERSE POWER

The reverse power element should be set at the rated motoring power. The pickup is calculated as follows: 1 Rated Motoring Power (primary watts) S min = -- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2 3 Phase CT Primary Phase VT Ratio Phase VT Secondary 1 22 10 W For the example system: S min = -- -------------------------------------------------------------------- = 0.044 pu 2 3 8000 A 157.5 66 V
6

(EQ 9.12)

9-4

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

9 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS

9.1 SETTING EXAMPLE

To prevent maloperation for power swings the element is typically time delayed by 20 to 30 seconds. For sequential tripping applications the time delay will be 2 to 3 seconds. The element may be blocked when the generator is offline. The Line Source will be used for this application. Make the following changes in EnerVista UR Setup or through the SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1 SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER DIRECTIONAL POWER 1 menu:

Sequential tripping logic can be implemented in FlexLogic as follows:


65 66 67 68
DIR POWER 1 STG2 OP AND(2) INLET VALVE OFF(H8A) AND(2) = SEQ TRIP (VO10) = SEQ TRIP (VO10)

Figure 92: SEQUENTIAL TRIPPING FLEXLOGIC 9.1.9 SYSTEM BACKUP OVERCURRENT System backup protection is implemented using a Phase TOC element with voltage restraint enabled. The NEUTRL source will be chosen for this element. The pickup of this element should be set at a safe margin above the maximum load expected on the machine. Generator Nominal Current 6800 PICKUP = 1.5 ----------------------------------------------------------------------- = 1.5 ------------ = 1.275 pu CT Primary 8000
(EQ 9.13)

The selection of all standard curves (and FlexCurves) is allowed for easy coordination with system relaying. For the example system, an IEEE extremely inverse curve will be used and a setting will be chosen such that the operate time for a three phase fault on the high side of the transformer is 0.75 seconds. For simplicity, the power system contribution is not considered. 211.765 Transformer Impedance = 0.10 -------------------- = 0.106 pu on machine base 200 Impedance to Fault = 0.216 + 0.106 = 0.322 pu 1 - 6800 Fault Current = V = -------------- ------------ = 2.64 pu --0.322 8000 X Transformer Impedance 10.6 Fault Voltage = Nominal Voltage --------------------------------------------------------------- = 18 kV ---------- = 5.93 kV Total Impedance 32.2 Fault Voltage Pickup Reduction = ----------------------------------------------------------------------- = 5.93 kV = 0.329 ------------------Generator Nominal Voltage 18 kV The equation for an IEEE extremely inverse curve is as follows:
(EQ 9.14) (EQ 9.15) (EQ 9.16)

(EQ 9.17) (EQ 9.18)

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

9-5

9.1 SETTING EXAMPLE A -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + B I T = TDM -------------------------------------------------------------------- p 1 I pickup Pickup Reduction where A = 28.2, B = 0.1217, and p = 2. Solving for TDM, we have: 0.75 TDM = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ = 0.88 28.2 ----------------------------------------------------- + 0.1217 2 2.64 ----------------------------------- 1 1.275 0.329

9 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS

(EQ 9.19)

(EQ 9.20)

Since this element will coordinate with system protections a timed reset is chosen. The element must be blocked for a VT fuse failure. The neutral source will be chosen. Make the following changes in EnerVista UR Setup or through the SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1 PHASE CURRENT PHASE TOC1 menu:

9.1.10 BACKUP DISTANCE This function provides time-delayed protection for system faults that have not been cleared by system protections and to provide backup protection for stator faults. The Line source will be used in this example to permit the application of a forward and reverse zone. The memory duration will be left at the default setting (10 cycles). Zone 1 will look forward and cover the GSU and the transmission line leaving the station. Zone 3 will look in the reverse direction and cover the stator winding. Zone 2 will not be used in this example. A mho shape will be chosen for both elements. Both the VTs and the CTs are located on the low voltage side of the GSU. The transformer vector diagram shows this transformer to be Dy1 (referenced from the LV side). Consequently Dy1 is chosen form both the XFMR VOL CONNECTION setting and the XFMR CUR CONNECTION setting. There are no transformers in the reverse direction. Therefore None is chosen for both of the Zone 3 transformer connection settings. The reach of the Zone 1 element will be set at 120% of impedance of the GSU and the transmission line. In the instance that there are multiple lines and/or multiple generators, the Zone 1 reach must be increased to compensate for the infeed effect.

2 VL ( 18 ) Transformer Impedance = X T --------------- = j0.1 ------------- = j0.162 primary ohms MVA T 200 2 VL ( 18 ) Line Impedance = X L ------ = ( 15 + j75 ) ---------------- = 0.255 + j1.276 primary ohms 2 ( 138 ) 2 VH 2

(EQ 9.21)

(EQ 9.22)

9-6

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

9 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS

9.1 SETTING EXAMPLE

CT Ratio Zone 1 Reach = 1.2 ( Transformer Impedance + Line Impedance ) ---------------------VT Ratio 1600= 1.2 ( j0.162 + 0.255 + j1.276 ) -------------- = 17.8 80 secondary ohms 157.5

(EQ 9.23)

The Zone 3 reach will be set at 120% of the generator transient reactance. The time delay of this element should be compared to the generator decrement curve to verify the adequacy of this setting.
2 VL ( 18 ) Generator Impedance = X d --------------- = j1.967 ------------- = j3.01 primary ohms MVA G 211 2

(EQ 9.24)

CT Ratio Zone 3 Reach = 1.2 Generator Impedance ---------------------VT Ratio 1600= 1.2 j3.01 -------------- = j36.68 secondary ohms 157.5

(EQ 9.25)

An Mho shape has been chosen for this example. Therefore, the Quad settings are left at their default values. Make the folGROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1 DISlowing changes in EnerVista UR Setup or through the SETTINGS PHASE DISTANCE Z1(3) menus: TANCE

9.1.11 STATOR GROUND FAULT a) AUXILIARY OVERVOLTAGE Stator ground fault protection is implemented with an overvoltage element connected at the generator neutral resistor. The Auxiliary Overvoltage element will be used in this example. The Aux. voltage input has previously been assigned to the NEUTRL source. In this example the element will be set to protect 97% of the stator against ground faults. Nominal Phase Ground Voltage 18000 3 PICKUP = 0.03 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- = 0.03 --------------------------- = 0.026 pu Ground VT Primary 12000
(EQ 9.26)

The time delay should be longer than the longest normal clearing time for faults outside the generator zone. If the phase VTs are WYE connected then this element should also be coordinated with VT secondary fuses to prevent false operations for VT secondary ground faults. For the sample system a time delay of 1 second will be used. Make the following changes GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS in EnerVista UR Setup or through the SETTINGS AUXILIARY OV1 menu:

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

9-7

9.1 SETTING EXAMPLE

9 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS

b) 100% STATOR GROUND The Aux voltage input is required for both the 100% stator ground and the third harmonic neutral undervoltage elements. Therefore the NEUTRL source will be assigned for these elements. Make the following changes in the SETTINGS GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1 STATOR GROUND menu
STATOR GROUND SOURCE: "SRC

2" (the "NEUTRL" source)

This 100% Stator Ground element provides ground fault protection for the neutral end of the stator winding. The element has two stages. In this application, Stage 1 is used to trip the machine and Stage 2 is used for alarm purposes. Set the pickup to 0.15 for both stages to provide adequate overlap with the Auxiliary Overvoltage element. Set Stage 1 to 0.375 V secondary (this value may be increased for security in particularly noisy environments). Stage 2 is typically set at 0.3 V secondary. The supervision settings are expressed in per unit of the Nominal Phase VT Secondary setting. The time delay settings are 5 seconds and 1 second for the Stage 1 and Stage 2 elements respectively. STG1 SUPV = 0.375 V = 0.0057 pu , -------------------66 V STG2 SUPV = 0.300 V = 0.0045 pu -------------------66 V
GROUPED ELEMENTS

(EQ 9.27)
SETTING GROUP

Make the following changes in EnerVista UR Setup or through the SETTINGS 1 STATOR GROUND 100% STATOR GROUND menu:

9-8

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

9 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS c) THIRD HARMONIC NEUTRAL UNDERVOLTAGE

9.1 SETTING EXAMPLE

If the Phase VTs are delta connected then third harmonic voltage cannot be measured and the 100% Stator Ground element cannot be used. In this case the third harmonic neutral undervoltage element can be used. Field measurements should be taken over the entire operating range of the machine to determine the variation of the third harmonic voltage as shown below:
2 1.8 1.6 1.4 1.2 1 0.8 0.6 0.4 0.2 0 0 20 40 60 80 100
Megawatts

3rd Harmonic Neut. Voltage

120

140

160

180

200

PF=1

PF=0.95

PF=0.9

PF= 0.9

PF= 0.95

Figure 93: THIRD HARMONIC NEUTRAL UNDERVOLTAGE FIELD MEASUREMENTS The element is accurate for levels as low as 0.25 volts, secondary. In this case, the pickup setting will be: PICKUP = 0.25 V = 0.001 pu ---------------240 V
(EQ 9.28)

The third harmonic will dip below the pickup setting between 85 and 105 megawatts. The element should be blocked over this range. A margin of 5% should be added to the relay settings. The values for max power and min power will be: 105 10 Max Power = 1.05 -------------------------------------------------------- = 0.441 pu 3 8000 157.5 66 85 10 Min Power = 0.95 -------------------------------------------------------- = 0.323 pu 3 8000 157.5 66
6 6

(EQ 9.29)

(EQ 9.30)

Volt supervision will be given a setting of 0.8 pu in order to prevent maloperation during a sustained undervoltage condition. A time delay of 5 seconds will be applied. If required, the element may be blocked when the machine is offline. Make the GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1 STAfollowing changes in EnerVista UR Setup or through the SETTINGS TOR GROUND 3RD HARM NTRL UNDERVOLTAGE menu:

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

9-9

9.1 SETTING EXAMPLE

9 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS 9.1.12 OVEREXCITATION

This protection should be set to coordinate with the manufacturers excitation capability curves. For example system, the combined Generator/GSU limit curve is shown below:
1000

100 Time (seconds) 10 1 1 1.05 1.1 1.15 1.2 1.25 Volts/Hz (p.u.)
Combined Gen./GSU Limit Curve Volts/Hz 1 Volts/Hz 2

1.3

1.35

1.4

1.45

1.5

Figure 94: GENERATOR/GSU LIMIT CURVE Program the Volts/Hz 1 element with an inverse characteristic (curve A), a pickup of 1.05, and a TDM of 40. Program the Volts/Hz 2 element with a definite time characteristic, a pickup of 1.23, and a time delay of 2 seconds. Both elements will issue a trip. The Volts/Hz 1 pickup will be used to generate an alarm. Either source may be assigned in this example. Make GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP 1 the following changes in EnerVista UR Setup or through the SETTINGS VOLTAGE ELEMENTS VOLTS/HZ 1(2) menus:

9-10

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

9 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS

9.1 SETTING EXAMPLE 9.1.13 FREQUENCY

The pickup and delay settings are dependent on operating practices and system characteristics. In this example, two overfrequency and two underfrequency elements will be used. The elements will be blocked when offline. Underfrequency will initiate a trip. Overfrequency will alarm only. Either source may be assigned.
QUENCY CONTROL ELEMENTS UNDERFREMake the following changes in EnerVista UR Setup or through the SETTINGS UNDERFREQUENCY 1(2) and the SETTINGS CONTROL ELEMENTS OVERFREQUENCY OVERFREQUENCY 1(2) menus:

9.1.14 ACCIDENTAL ENERGIZATION In this example, the ACCDNT ENRG ARMING MODE is selected as UV and Offline. The ACCDNT ENRG OC PICKUP setting should be set at the minimum expected fault current. In this case, 1.0 pu (8000 A primary) is selected. In cases where it is possible to re-energize the machine through its auxiliary transformer, a lower setting may be required. The UV pickup setting must be set above the maximum expected fault voltage. Make the following changes in EnerVista UR Setup or through the SETTINGS ACCIDENTAL ENERGIZATION menu: 1
GROUPED ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

9-11

9.1 SETTING EXAMPLE

9 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS 9.1.15 INPUTS/OUTPUTS

The following inputs and outputs will be used in this example. Make the following changes in EnerVista UR Setup or INPUTS/OUTPUTS CONTACT INPUTS CONTACT INPUT H7a(H7c) menus: through the SETTINGS

Make the following changes in EnerVista UR Setup or through the SETTINGS CONTACT OUTPUT H1(H4) menus:

INPUTS/OUTPUTS

CONTACT OUTPUTS

9-12

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

9 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS

9.1 SETTING EXAMPLE 9.1.16 FLEXLOGIC

The following logic as given as an example only. The logic for each specific application will be dependant on system design, protection philosophies, and operating practices.
5 sec. 0 sec.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

SEQ TRIP ON (VO9) STATOR DIFF OP PHASE TOC1 OP GEN UNBAL STG1 OP LOSS EXCIT OP DIR POWER 1 STG 1 OP OVEREXCIT ON (VO7) UNDERFREQ ON (VO5) AUX OV1 OP STATOR GND STG1 OP ACCDNT ENRG OP OR(11) = GEN BKR TRIP (VO1) OR(11) = GEN BKR TRIP (VO1)

33 34 35 36 37 38 39

VOLTS PER HERTZ 1 PKP TIMER 1 GEN UNBAL STG2 OP OVERFREQ ON (VO6) STATOR GND STG2 OP OR(4) = ALARM (VO4)

OR(4)

= ALARM (VO4)

40 41 42 43

UNDERFREQ 1 OP OR(2) UNDERFREQ 2 OP OR(2) = UNDERFREQ (VO5) = UNDERFREQ (VO5)

44 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
SEQ TRIP ON (VO9) STATOR DIFF OP LOSS EXCIT OP DIR POWER STG1 OP OVEREXCIT ON (VO7) OR(7) = FLD BKR TRIP (VO2)

OVERFREQ 1 OP OR(2) = OVERFREQ (VO6) OVERFREQ 2 OP OR(2) = OVERFREQ (VO6)

45 46 47

48
AUX OV1 OP

VOLTS PER HERTZ 1 OP OR(2) = OVEREXCIT (VO7) VOLTS PER HERTZ 2 OP OR(2) = OVEREXCIT (VO7)

49
STATOR GND STG1 OP

50
OR(7)

51
= FLD BKR TRIP (VO2)

52 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
STATOR DIFF OP LOSS EXCIT OP DIR POWER 1 STG1 OP

OFFLINE OFF(H7C) = ONLINE (VO8)

= ONLINE (VO8)

53

54
ONLINE ON (VO8) AND(2) OVEREXCIT ON (VO7) OR(6) = TURBINE TRIP (VO3)

DIR POWER 1 STG2 OP AND(2) = SEQ TRIP (VO9) INLET VALVE OFF(H8A) AND(2) = SEQ TRIP (VO9)

55 56

AND(2)

57
AUX OV1 OP STATOR GND STG1 OP

58
OR(6) = TURBINE TRIP (VO3)

END
830716A1.CDR

Figure 95: APPLICATION EXAMPLE FLEXLOGIC

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

9-13

9.2 PHASE DISTANCE THROUGH POWER TRANSFORMERS 9.2PHASE DISTANCE THROUGH POWER TRANSFORMERS a) APPLICATION DESCRIPTION

9 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS 9.2.1 OVERVIEW

Phase distance elements of the G60 could be set to respond to faults beyond any three-phase power transformer. The relay guarantees accurate reach and targeting for any phase fault. Moreover, the current and voltage transformers may be located independently on different sides of the transformer. The following setting rules apply to this feature: 1. 2. 3. A given distance zone is terminated by location of the VTs, not the CTs. Consequently, the positive-sequence impedance of a transformer must be included in the reach setting only if the transformer is located between the potential source and the intended reach point. The current signals require compensation if the transformer is located between the CTs and the intended reach point. If this is the case the CT connection setting shall be set to transformer connection and vector group as seen from the CTs toward the reach point. Otherwise, the CT connection setting shall be set to "None". The voltage signals require compensation if the transformer is located between the VTs and the intended reach point. If this is the case the VT connection setting shall be set to transformer connection and vector group as seen from the VTs toward the reach point. Otherwise, the VT connection setting shall be set to "None". The reach setting is entered in secondary ohms and as such must take into account location and ratios of VTs and CTs as well as voltage ratio of the involved power transformer.

4.

5.

The following equations explain the setting rules. Consider two applications as shown in the figure below:
(a) ZH ZT ZX

Z3

Z1

(b) ZH ZT ZX

Z3

Z1
830718A1.CDR

Figure 96: PHASE DISTANCE PROTECTION LOOKING THROUGH A POWER TRANSFORMER

where:

ZX = intended reach impedance for Zone 1 (primary ohms) ZH = intended reach impedance for Zone 3 (primary ohms) ZT = positive-sequence impedance of the transformer VX, VH = transformer rated voltages nCT = transformation ratio of the CTs nVT = transformation ratio of the VTs Z1: Z1 reach setting (secondary ohms) Z3: Zone 3 reach setting (secondary ohms)

9-14

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

9 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS b) ZONE 1 SETTING IN APPLICATION (A)

9.2 PHASE DISTANCE THROUGH POWER TRANSFORMERS

As the transformer is located between the potential source and the reach point for Zone 1, the reach impedance must include the positive-sequence impedance of the transformer. In addition, the primary impedance must be re-calculated for the voltage level of the VTs and CTs, and eventually, re-calculated to secondary quantities: V H 2 n CT Z 1 = ( Z T ( at X ) + Z x ) ------ -------- V X n VT c) ZONE 3 SETTING IN APPLICATION (A) As the transformer is not located between the potential source and the reach point for Zone 3, the reach impedance must not include the positive-sequence impedance of the transformer. Because both VTs and CTs are located on the same side as the intended reach point, no correction for the transformer ratio is required. The primary impedance must be only re-calculated to secondary quantities: n CT Z 3 = Z H --------n VT d) ZONE 1 SETTING IN APPLICATION (B) As the transformer is not located between the potential source and the reach point for Z1, the reach impedance must not include the positive-sequence impedance of the transformer. The CTs are located on the other side of the transformer, thus transformer ratio must be included: VH n CT Z 1 = Z X ------ -------- V X n VT e) ZONE 3 SETTING IN APPLICATION (B) As the transformer is located between the potential source and the reach point for Zone 3, the reach impedance must include the positive-sequence impedance of the transformer. The VTs are located on the other side of the transformer, thus transformer ratio must be included: n CT VX Z 3 = ( Z T ( at H ) + Z H ) ------ -------- V H n VT
(EQ 9.34) (EQ 9.33) (EQ 9.32) (EQ 9.31)

9.2.2 EXAMPLE Given the following for the system shown in the previous section: ZX = 30 85 (intended reach of Zone 1) ZH = 0.06 88 (intended reach of Zone 3) nCT = 8000:5 = 1600 (located at H) nVT = 315000:120 = 2625 (located at X) Transformer: 13.8/315 kV, 150 MVA, 10%, delta/wye, 315 kV side lagging 30 Transformer impedance: 10- ( 13.8 ) Z T ( at H ) = --------- ------------------ = 0.127 90 150 100 The Zone 1 settings are: 13.8 1600 Z 1 = 30 ---------- ------------ = 0.8011 85 315 2625
PHS DIST Z1 REACH: "0.80" PHS DIST Z1 RCA: "85" PHS DIST Z1 XMFR VOL CONNECTION: "None" PHS DIST Z1 XMFR CUR CONNECTION: "Dy1"
2

(EQ 9.35)

9
(EQ 9.36)

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

9-15

9.2 PHASE DISTANCE THROUGH POWER TRANSFORMERS The Zone 3 settings are:

9 APPLICATION OF SETTINGS

315- 1600 Z 3 = ( 0.127 90 + 0.006 88 ) ---------- ------------ = 2.601 89.4 13.8 2625
PHS DIST Z3 REACH: "2.60" PHS DIST Z3 RCA: "89" PHS DIST Z3 XMFR VOL CONNECTION: "Yd11" PHS DIST Z3 XMFR CUR CONNECTION: "None"

(EQ 9.37)

9-16

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

Appendices

APPENDIX A APPENDIX A FLEXANALOG PARAMETERSA.1PARAMETER LIST


Table A1: FLEXANALOG DATA ITEMS (Sheet 1 of 9)
ADDR 5728 5730 5732 5734 5736 5738 5744 5746 5760 5762 5792 5794 5796 5798 5800 5802 5804 5806 5808 5810 5812 5814 5856 5860 5864 5868 6144 6146 6148 6150 6152 6154 6155 6157 6158 6160 6161 6163 6164 6166 6168 6169 6171 6172 6174 6175 6177 6178 6180 DATA ITEM Stator Differential Iad Stator Restraint Iar Stator Differential Ibd Stator Restraint Ibr Stator Differential Icd Stator Restraint Icr Stator Ground Vn 3rd Stator Ground Vn V0 3rd Sens Dir Power 1 Actual Sens Dir Power 2 Actual RGF 1 Differential Gnd Current Mag. RGF 1 Restricted Gnd Current Mag. RGF 2 Differential Gnd Current Mag. RGF 2 Restricted Gnd Current Mag. RGF 3 Differential Gnd Current Mag. RGF 3 Restricted Gnd Current Mag. RGF 4 Differential Gnd Current Mag. RGF 4 Restricted Gnd Current Mag. RGF 5 Differential Gnd Current Mag. RGF 5 Restricted Gnd Current Mag. RGF 6 Differential Gnd Current Mag. RGF 6 Restricted Gnd Current Mag. Frequency Rate of Change 1 Actual Frequency Rate of Change 2 Actual Frequency Rate of Change 3 Actual Frequency Rate of Change 4 Actual SRC 1 Phase A Current RMS SRC 1 Phase B Current RMS SRC 1 Phase C Current RMS SRC 1 Neutral Current RMS SRC 1 Phase A Current Magnitude SRC 1 Phase A Current Angle SRC 1 Phase B Current Magnitude SRC 1 Phase B Current Angle SRC 1 Phase C Current Magnitude SRC 1 Phase C Current Angle SRC 1 Neutral Current Magnitude SRC 1 Neutral Current Angle SRC 1 Ground Current RMS SRC 1 Ground Current Magnitude SRC 1 Ground Current Angle SRC 1 Zero Seq. Current Magnitude SRC 1 Zero Sequence Current Angle SRC 1 Pos. Seq. Current Magnitude SRC 1 Pos. Seq. Current Angle SRC 1 Neg. Seq. Current Magnitude SRC 1 Neg. Seq. Current Angle SRC 1 Differential Gnd Current Mag. SRC 1 Diff. Gnd. Current Angle FLEXANALOG NAME Stator Diff Iad Stator Rest Iar Stator Diff Ibd Stator Rest Ibr Stator Diff Icd Stator Rest Icr Stator Gnd Vn 3rd Stator Gnd Vn+V0 3rd Sns Dir Power 1 Sns Dir Power 2 RGF 1 Igd Mag RGF 1 Igr Mag RGF 2 Igd Mag RGF 2 Igr Mag RGF 3 Igd Mag RGF 3 Igr Mag RGF 4 Igd Mag RGF 4 Igr Mag RGF 5 Igd Mag RGF 5 Igr Mag RGF 6 Igd Mag RGF 6 Igr Mag Freq Rate 1 Value Freq Rate 2 Value Freq Rate 3 Value Freq Rate 4 Value SRC 1 Ia RMS SRC 1 Ib RMS SRC 1 Ic RMS SRC 1 In RMS SRC 1 Ia Mag SRC 1 Ia Angle SRC 1 Ib Mag SRC 1 Ib Angle SRC 1 Ic Mag SRC 1 Ic Angle SRC 1 In Mag SRC 1 In Angle SRC 1 Ig RMS SRC 1 Ig Mag SRC 1 Ig Angle SRC 1 I_0 Mag SRC 1 I_0 Angle SRC 1 I_1 Mag SRC 1 I_1 Angle SRC 1 I_2 Mag SRC 1 I_2 Angle SRC 1 Igd Mag SRC 1 Igd Angle

A.1 PARAMETER LIST

Table A1: FLEXANALOG DATA ITEMS (Sheet 2 of 9)


ADDR 6208 6210 6212 6214 6216 6218 6219 6221 6222 6224 6225 6227 6228 6230 6232 6233 6235 6236 6238 6239 6241 6242 6244 6272 6274 6276 6278 6280 6282 6283 6285 6286 6288 6289 6291 6292 6294 6296 6297 6299 6300 6302 6303 6305 6306 6308 6336 6338 6340 DATA ITEM SRC 2 Phase A Current RMS SRC 2 Phase B Current RMS SRC 2 Phase C Current RMS SRC 2 Neutral Current RMS SRC 2 Phase A Current Magnitude SRC 2 Phase A Current Angle SRC 2 Phase B Current Magnitude SRC 2 Phase B Current Angle SRC 2 Phase C Current Magnitude SRC 2 Phase C Current Angle SRC 2 Neutral Current Magnitude SRC 2 Neutral Current Angle SRC 2 Ground Current RMS SRC 2 Ground Current Magnitude SRC 2 Ground Current Angle SRC 2 Zero Seq. Current Magnitude SRC 2 Zero Sequence Current Angle SRC 2 Pos. Seq. Current Magnitude SRC 2 Positive Seq. Current Angle SRC 2 Neg. Seq. Current Magnitude SRC 2 Negative Seq. Current Angle SRC 2 Differential Gnd Current Mag. SRC 2 Diff. Gnd Current Angle SRC 3 Phase A Current RMS SRC 3 Phase B Current RMS SRC 3 Phase C Current RMS SRC 3 Neutral Current RMS SRC 3 Phase A Current Magnitude SRC 3 Phase A Current Angle SRC 3 Phase B Current Magnitude SRC 3 Phase B Current Angle SRC 3 Phase C Current Magnitude SRC 3 Phase C Current Angle SRC 3 Neutral Current Magnitude SRC 3 Neutral Current Angle SRC 3 Ground Current RMS SRC 3 Ground Current Magnitude SRC 3 Ground Current Angle SRC 3 Zero Seq. Current Magnitude SRC 3 Zero Sequence Current Angle SRC 3 Pos. Seq. Current Magnitude SRC 3 Positive Seq. Current Angle SRC 3 Neg. Seq. Current Magnitude SRC 3 Negative Seq. Current Angle SRC 3 Differential Gnd Current Mag. SRC 4 Phase A Current RMS SRC 4 Phase B Current RMS SRC 4 Phase C Current RMS FLEXANALOG NAME SRC 2 Ia RMS SRC 2 Ib RMS SRC 2 Ic RMS SRC 2 In RMS SRC 2 Ia Mag SRC 2 Ia Angle SRC 2 Ib Mag SRC 2 Ib Angle SRC 2 Ic Mag SRC 2 Ic Angle SRC 2 In Mag SRC 2 In Angle SRC 2 Ig RMS SRC 2 Ig Mag SRC 2 Ig Angle SRC 2 I_0 Mag SRC 2 I_0 Angle SRC 2 I_1 Mag SRC 2 I_1 Angle SRC 2 I_2 Mag SRC 2 I_2 Angle SRC 2 Igd Mag SRC 2 Igd Angle SRC 3 Ia RMS SRC 3 Ib RMS SRC 3 Ic RMS SRC 3 In RMS SRC 3 Ia Mag SRC 3 Ia Angle SRC 3 Ib Mag SRC 3 Ib Angle SRC 3 Ic Mag SRC 3 Ic Angle SRC 3 In Mag SRC 3 In Angle SRC 3 Ig RMS SRC 3 Ig Mag SRC 3 Ig Angle SRC 3 I_0 Mag SRC 3 I_0 Angle SRC 3 I_1 Mag SRC 3 I_1 Angle SRC 3 I_2 Mag SRC 3 I_2 Angle SRC 3 Igd Mag SRC 4 Ia RMS SRC 4 Ib RMS SRC 4 Ic RMS

SRC 3 Differential Gnd Current Angle SRC 3 Igd Angle

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

A-1

A.1 PARAMETER LIST


Table A1: FLEXANALOG DATA ITEMS (Sheet 3 of 9)

APPENDIX A
Table A1: FLEXANALOG DATA ITEMS (Sheet 4 of 9)
ADDR 6729 6731 6732 6734 6735 6737 6739 6741 6743 6744 6746 6747 6749 6750 6752 6754 6755 6757 6758 6760 6761 6763 6784 6786 6788 6790 6792 6793 6795 6796 6798 6799 6801 6803 6805 6807 6808 6810 6811 6813 6814 6816 6818 6819 6821 6822 6824 6825 6827 6848 6850 6852 DATA ITEM SRC 2 Phase BG Voltage Magnitude SRC 2 Phase BG Voltage Angle SRC 2 Phase CG Voltage Magnitude SRC 2 Phase CG Voltage Angle SRC 2 Phase AB Voltage RMS SRC 2 Phase BC Voltage RMS SRC 2 Phase CA Voltage RMS SRC 2 Phase AB Voltage Magnitude SRC 2 Phase AB Voltage Angle SRC 2 Phase BC Voltage Magnitude SRC 2 Phase BC Voltage Angle SRC 2 Phase CA Voltage Magnitude SRC 2 Phase CA Voltage Angle SRC 2 Auxiliary Voltage RMS SRC 2 Auxiliary Voltage Magnitude SRC 2 Auxiliary Voltage Angle SRC 2 Zero Seq. Voltage Magnitude SRC 2 Zero Sequence Voltage Angle SRC 2 Positive Seq. Voltage Mag. SRC 2 Positive Seq. Voltage Angle SRC 2 Negative Seq. Voltage Mag. SRC 2 Negative Seq. Voltage Angle SRC 3 Phase AG Voltage RMS SRC 3 Phase BG Voltage RMS SRC 3 Phase CG Voltage RMS SRC 3 Phase AG Voltage Magnitude SRC 3 Phase AG Voltage Angle SRC 3 Phase BG Voltage Magnitude SRC 3 Phase BG Voltage Angle SRC 3 Phase CG Voltage Magnitude SRC 3 Phase CG Voltage Angle SRC 3 Phase AB Voltage RMS SRC 3 Phase BC Voltage RMS SRC 3 Phase CA Voltage RMS SRC 3 Phase AB Voltage Magnitude SRC 3 Phase AB Voltage Angle SRC 3 Phase BC Voltage Magnitude SRC 3 Phase BC Voltage Angle SRC 3 Phase CA Voltage Magnitude SRC 3 Phase CA Voltage Angle SRC 3 Auxiliary Voltage RMS SRC 3 Auxiliary Voltage Magnitude SRC 3 Auxiliary Voltage Angle SRC 3 Zero Seq. Voltage Magnitude SRC 3 Zero Sequence Voltage Angle SRC 3 Positive Seq. Voltage Mag. SRC 3 Positive Seq. Voltage Angle SRC 3 Negative Seq. Voltage Mag. SRC 3 Negative Seq. Voltage Angle SRC 4 Phase AG Voltage RMS SRC 4 Phase BG Voltage RMS SRC 4 Phase CG Voltage RMS FLEXANALOG NAME SRC 2 Vbg Mag SRC 2 Vbg Angle SRC 2 Vcg Mag SRC 2 Vcg Angle SRC 2 Vab RMS SRC 2 Vbc RMS SRC 2 Vca RMS SRC 2 Vab Mag SRC 2 Vab Angle SRC 2 Vbc Mag SRC 2 Vbc Angle SRC 2 Vca Mag SRC 2 Vca Angle SRC 2 Vx RMS SRC 2 Vx Mag SRC 2 Vx Angle SRC 2 V_0 Mag SRC 2 V_0 Angle SRC 2 V_1 Mag SRC 2 V_1 Angle SRC 2 V_2 Mag SRC 2 V_2 Angle SRC 3 Vag RMS SRC 3 Vbg RMS SRC 3 Vcg RMS SRC 3 Vag Mag SRC 3 Vag Angle SRC 3 Vbg Mag SRC 3 Vbg Angle SRC 3 Vcg Mag SRC 3 Vcg Angle SRC 3 Vab RMS SRC 3 Vbc RMS SRC 3 Vca RMS SRC 3 Vab Mag SRC 3 Vab Angle SRC 3 Vbc Mag SRC 3 Vbc Angle SRC 3 Vca Mag SRC 3 Vca Angle SRC 3 Vx RMS SRC 3 Vx Mag SRC 3 Vx Angle SRC 3 V_0 Mag SRC 3 V_0 Angle SRC 3 V_1 Mag SRC 3 V_1 Angle SRC 3 V_2 Mag SRC 3 V_2 Angle SRC 4 Vag RMS SRC 4 Vbg RMS SRC 4 Vcg RMS

ADDR 6342 6344 6346 6347 6349 6350 6352 6353 6355 6356 6358 6360 6361 6363 6364 6366 6367 6369 6370 6372 6656 6658 6660 6662 6664 6665 6667 6668 6670 6671 6673 6675 6677 6679 6680 6682 6683 6685 6686 6688 6690 6691 6693 6694 6696 6697 6699 6720 6722 6724 6726 6728

DATA ITEM SRC 4 Neutral Current RMS SRC 4 Phase A Current Magnitude SRC 4 Phase A Current Angle SRC 4 Phase B Current Magnitude SRC 4 Phase B Current Angle SRC 4 Phase C Current Magnitude SRC 4 Phase C Current Angle SRC 4 Neutral Current Magnitude SRC 4 Neutral Current Angle SRC 4 Ground Current RMS SRC 4 Ground Current Magnitude SRC 4 Ground Current Angle SRC 4 Zero Seq. Current Magnitude SRC 4 Zero Seq. Current Angle SRC 4 Positive Seq. Current Mag. SRC 4 Positive Seq. Current Angle SRC 4 Negative Seq. Current Mag. SRC 4 Negative Seq. Current Angle SRC 4 Differential Gnd Current Mag. SRC 1 Phase AG Voltage RMS SRC 1 Phase BG Voltage RMS SRC 1 Phase CG Voltage RMS SRC 1 Phase AG Voltage Magnitude SRC 1 Phase AG Voltage Angle SRC 1 Phase BG Voltage Magnitude SRC 1 Phase BG Voltage Angle SRC 1 Phase CG Voltage Magnitude SRC 1 Phase CG Voltage Angle SRC 1 Phase AB Voltage RMS SRC 1 Phase BC Voltage RMS SRC 1 Phase CA Voltage RMS SRC 1 Phase AB Voltage Magnitude SRC 1 Phase AB Voltage Angle SRC 1 Phase BC Voltage Magnitude SRC 1 Phase BC Voltage Angle SRC 1 Phase CA Voltage Magnitude SRC 1 Phase CA Voltage Angle SRC 1 Auxiliary Voltage RMS SRC 1 Auxiliary Voltage Magnitude SRC 1 Auxiliary Voltage Angle SRC 1 Zero Sequence Voltage Mag. SRC 1 Zero Sequence Voltage Angle SRC 1 Positive Seq. Voltage Mag. SRC 1 Positive Seq. Voltage Angle SRC 1 Negative Seq. Voltage Mag. SRC 1 Negative Seq. Voltage Angle SRC 2 Phase AG Voltage RMS SRC 2 Phase BG Voltage RMS SRC 2 Phase CG Voltage RMS SRC 2 Phase AG Voltage Magnitude SRC 2 Phase AG Voltage Angle

FLEXANALOG NAME SRC 4 In RMS SRC 4 Ia Mag SRC 4 Ia Angle SRC 4 Ib Mag SRC 4 Ib Angle SRC 4 Ic Mag SRC 4 Ic Angle SRC 4 In Mag SRC 4 In Angle SRC 4 Ig RMS SRC 4 Ig Mag SRC 4 Ig Angle SRC 4 I_0 Mag SRC 4 I_0 Angle SRC 4 I_1 Mag SRC 4 I_1 Angle SRC 4 I_2 Mag SRC 4 I_2 Angle SRC 4 Igd Mag SRC 1 Vag RMS SRC 1 Vbg RMS SRC 1 Vcg RMS SRC 1 Vag Mag SRC 1 Vag Angle SRC 1 Vbg Mag SRC 1 Vbg Angle SRC 1 Vcg Mag SRC 1 Vcg Angle SRC 1 Vab RMS SRC 1 Vbc RMS SRC 1 Vca RMS SRC 1 Vab Mag SRC 1 Vab Angle SRC 1 Vbc Mag SRC 1 Vbc Angle SRC 1 Vca Mag SRC 1 Vca Angle SRC 1 Vx RMS SRC 1 Vx Mag SRC 1 Vx Angle SRC 1 V_0 Mag SRC 1 V_0 Angle SRC 1 V_1 Mag SRC 1 V_1 Angle SRC 1 V_2 Mag SRC 1 V_2 Angle SRC 2 Vag RMS SRC 2 Vbg RMS SRC 2 Vcg RMS SRC 2 Vag Mag SRC 2 Vag Angle

SRC 4 Differential Gnd Current Angle SRC 4 Igd Angle

A-2

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

APPENDIX A
Table A1: FLEXANALOG DATA ITEMS (Sheet 5 of 9)
ADDR 6854 6856 6857 6859 6860 6862 6863 6865 6867 6869 6871 6872 6874 6875 6877 6878 6880 6882 6883 6885 6886 6888 6889 6891 7168 7170 7172 7174 7176 7178 7180 7182 7184 7186 7188 7190 7192 7193 7194 7195 7200 7202 7204 7206 7208 7210 7212 7214 7216 7218 7220 7222 DATA ITEM SRC 4 Phase AG Voltage Magnitude SRC 4 Phase AG Voltage Angle SRC 4 Phase BG Voltage Magnitude SRC 4 Phase BG Voltage Angle SRC 4 Phase CG Voltage Magnitude SRC 4 Phase CG Voltage Angle SRC 4 Phase AB Voltage RMS SRC 4 Phase BC Voltage RMS SRC 4 Phase CA Voltage RMS SRC 4 Phase AB Voltage Magnitude SRC 4 Phase AB Voltage Angle SRC 4 Phase BC Voltage Magnitude SRC 4 Phase BC Voltage Angle SRC 4 Phase CA Voltage Magnitude SRC 4 Phase CA Voltage Angle SRC 4 Auxiliary Voltage RMS SRC 4 Auxiliary Voltage Magnitude SRC 4 Auxiliary Voltage Angle SRC 4 Zero Seq. Voltage Magnitude SRC 4 Zero Sequence Voltage Angle SRC 4 Positive Seq. Voltage Mag. SRC 4 Positive Seq. Voltage Angle SRC 4 Negative Seq. Voltage Mag. SRC 4 Negative Seq. Voltage Angle SRC 1 Three Phase Real Power SRC 1 Phase A Real Power SRC 1 Phase B Real Power SRC 1 Phase C Real Power SRC 1 Three Phase Reactive Power SRC 1 Phase A Reactive Power SRC 1 Phase B Reactive Power SRC 1 Phase C Reactive Power SRC 1 Three Phase Apparent Power SRC 1 Phase A Apparent Power SRC 1 Phase B Apparent Power SRC 1 Phase C Apparent Power SRC 1 Three Phase Power Factor SRC 1 Phase A Power Factor SRC 1 Phase B Power Factor SRC 1 Phase C Power Factor SRC 2 Three Phase Real Power SRC 2 Phase A Real Power SRC 2 Phase B Real Power SRC 2 Phase C Real Power SRC 2 Three Phase Reactive Power SRC 2 Phase A Reactive Power SRC 2 Phase B Reactive Power SRC 2 Phase C Reactive Power SRC 2 Three Phase Apparent Power SRC 2 Phase A Apparent Power SRC 2 Phase B Apparent Power SRC 2 Phase C Apparent Power FLEXANALOG NAME SRC 4 Vag Mag SRC 4 Vag Angle SRC 4 Vbg Mag SRC 4 Vbg Angle SRC 4 Vcg Mag SRC 4 Vcg Angle SRC 4 Vab RMS SRC 4 Vbc RMS SRC 4 Vca RMS SRC 4 Vab Mag SRC 4 Vab Angle SRC 4 Vbc Mag SRC 4 Vbc Angle SRC 4 Vca Mag SRC 4 Vca Angle SRC 4 Vx RMS SRC 4 Vx Mag SRC 4 Vx Angle SRC 4 V_0 Mag SRC 4 V_0 Angle SRC 4 V_1 Mag SRC 4 V_1 Angle SRC 4 V_2 Mag SRC 4 V_2 Angle SRC 1 P SRC 1 Pa SRC 1 Pb SRC 1 Pc SRC 1 Q SRC 1 Qa SRC 1 Qb SRC 1 Qc SRC 1 S SRC 1 Sa SRC 1 Sb SRC 1 Sc SRC 1 PF SRC 1 Phase A PF SRC 1 Phase B PF SRC 1 Phase C PF SRC 2 P SRC 2 Pa SRC 2 Pb SRC 2 Pc SRC 2 Q SRC 2 Qa SRC 2 Qb SRC 2 Qc SRC 2 S SRC 2 Sa SRC 2 Sb SRC 2 Sc

A.1 PARAMETER LIST


Table A1: FLEXANALOG DATA ITEMS (Sheet 6 of 9)
ADDR 7224 7225 7226 7227 7232 7234 7236 7238 7240 7242 7244 7246 7248 7250 7252 7254 7256 7257 7258 7259 7264 7266 7268 7270 7272 7274 7276 7278 7280 7282 7284 7286 7288 7289 7290 7291 7552 7553 7554 7555 7680 7682 7684 7686 7688 7690 7696 7698 7700 7702 7704 7706 DATA ITEM SRC 2 Three Phase Power Factor SRC 2 Phase A Power Factor SRC 2 Phase B Power Factor SRC 2 Phase C Power Factor SRC 3 Three Phase Real Power SRC 3 Phase A Real Power SRC 3 Phase B Real Power SRC 3 Phase C Real Power SRC 3 Three Phase Reactive Power SRC 3 Phase A Reactive Power SRC 3 Phase B Reactive Power SRC 3 Phase C Reactive Power SRC 3 Three Phase Apparent Power SRC 3 Phase A Apparent Power SRC 3 Phase B Apparent Power SRC 3 Phase C Apparent Power SRC 3 Three Phase Power Factor SRC 3 Phase A Power Factor SRC 3 Phase B Power Factor SRC 3 Phase C Power Factor SRC 4 Three Phase Real Power SRC 4 Phase A Real Power SRC 4 Phase B Real Power SRC 4 Phase C Real Power SRC 4 Three Phase Reactive Power SRC 4 Phase A Reactive Power SRC 4 Phase B Reactive Power SRC 4 Phase C Reactive Power SRC 4 Three Phase Apparent Power SRC 4 Phase A Apparent Power SRC 4 Phase B Apparent Power SRC 4 Phase C Apparent Power SRC 4 Three Phase Power Factor SRC 4 Phase A Power Factor SRC 4 Phase B Power Factor SRC 4 Phase C Power Factor SRC 1 Frequency SRC 2 Frequency SRC 3 Frequency SRC 4 Frequency SRC 1 Demand Ia SRC 1 Demand Ib SRC 1 Demand Ic SRC 1 Demand Watt SRC 1 Demand Var SRC 1 Demand Va SRC 2 Demand Ia SRC 2 Demand Ib SRC 2 Demand Ic SRC 2 Demand Watt SRC 2 Demand Var SRC 2 Demand Va FLEXANALOG NAME SRC 2 PF SRC 2 Phase A PF SRC 2 Phase B PF SRC 2 Phase C PF SRC 3 P SRC 3 Pa SRC 3 Pb SRC 3 Pc SRC 3 Q SRC 3 Qa SRC 3 Qb SRC 3 Qc SRC 3 S SRC 3 Sa SRC 3 Sb SRC 3 Sc SRC 3 PF SRC 3 Phase A PF SRC 3 Phase B PF SRC 3 Phase C PF SRC 4 P SRC 4 Pa SRC 4 Pb SRC 4 Pc SRC 4 Q SRC 4 Qa SRC 4 Qb SRC 4 Qc SRC 4 S SRC 4 Sa SRC 4 Sb SRC 4 Sc SRC 4 PF SRC 4 Phase A PF SRC 4 Phase B PF SRC 4 Phase C PF SRC 1 Frequency SRC 2 Frequency SRC 3 Frequency SRC 4 Frequency SRC 1 Demand Ia SRC 1 Demand Ib SRC 1 Demand Ic SRC 1 Demand Watt SRC 1 Demand var SRC 1 Demand Va SRC 2 Demand Ia SRC 2 Demand Ib SRC 2 Demand Ic SRC 2 Demand Watt SRC 2 Demand var SRC 2 Demand Va

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

A-3

A.1 PARAMETER LIST


Table A1: FLEXANALOG DATA ITEMS (Sheet 7 of 9)

APPENDIX A
Table A1: FLEXANALOG DATA ITEMS (Sheet 8 of 9)
ADDR 13562 13563 13564 13565 13566 13567 13568 13569 13570 13571 13572 13573 13574 13575 13576 13577 13578 13579 13580 13581 13582 13583 13584 13585 13586 13587 13588 13589 13590 13591 13592 13593 13594 13595 13596 13597 13598 13599 32768 39425 39427 39429 39431 39433 39435 39437 39439 39441 39443 39445 39447 39449 DATA ITEM RTD Inputs 11 Value RTD Inputs 12 Value RTD Inputs 13 Value RTD Inputs 14 Value RTD Inputs 15 Value RTD Inputs 16 Value RTD Inputs 17 Value RTD Inputs 18 Value RTD Inputs 19 Value RTD Inputs 20 Value RTD Inputs 21 Value RTD Inputs 22 Value RTD Inputs 23 Value RTD Inputs 24 Value RTD Inputs 25 Value RTD Inputs 26 Value RTD Inputs 27 Value RTD Inputs 28 Value RTD Inputs 29 Value RTD Inputs 30 Value RTD Inputs 31 Value RTD Inputs 32 Value RTD Inputs 33 Value RTD Inputs 34 Value RTD Inputs 35 Value RTD Inputs 36 Value RTD Inputs 37 Value RTD Inputs 38 Value RTD Inputs 39 Value RTD Inputs 40 Value RTD Inputs 41 Value RTD Inputs 42 Value RTD Inputs 43 Value RTD Inputs 44 Value RTD Inputs 45 Value RTD Inputs 46 Value RTD Inputs 47 Value RTD Inputs 48 Value Tracking Frequency FlexElement 1 Actual FlexElement 2 Actual FlexElement 3 Actual FlexElement 4 Actual FlexElement 5 Actual FlexElement 6 Actual FlexElement 7 Actual FlexElement 8 Actual FlexElement 9 Actual FlexElement 10 Actual FlexElement 11 Actual FlexElement 12 Actual FlexElement 13 Actual FLEXANALOG NAME RTD Inputs 11 Value RTD Inputs 12 Value RTD Inputs 13 Value RTD Inputs 14 Value RTD Inputs 15 Value RTD Inputs 16 Value RTD Inputs 17 Value RTD Inputs 18 Value RTD Inputs 19 Value RTD Inputs 20 Value RTD Inputs 21 Value RTD Inputs 22 Value RTD Inputs 23 Value RTD Inputs 24 Value RTD Inputs 25 Value RTD Inputs 26 Value RTD Inputs 27 Value RTD Inputs 28 Value RTD Inputs 29 Value RTD Inputs 30 Value RTD Inputs 31 Value RTD Inputs 32 Value RTD Inputs 33 Value RTD Inputs 34 Value RTD Inputs 35 Value RTD Inputs 36 Value RTD Inputs 37 Value RTD Inputs 38 Value RTD Inputs 39 Value RTD Inputs 40 Value RTD Inputs 41 Value RTD Inputs 42 Value RTD Inputs 43 Value RTD Inputs 44 Value RTD Inputs 45 Value RTD Inputs 46 Value RTD Inputs 47 Value RTD Inputs 48 Value Tracking Frequency FlexElement 1 Value FlexElement 2 Value FlexElement 3 Value FlexElement 4 Value FlexElement 5 Value FlexElement 6 Value FlexElement 7 Value FlexElement 8 Value FlexElement 9 Value FlexElement 10 Value FlexElement 11 Value FlexElement 12 Value FlexElement 13 Value

ADDR 7712 7714 7716 7718 7720 7722 7728 7730 7732 7734 7736 7738 9216 9218 9219 9220 9222 9223 13504 13506 13508 13510 13512 13514 13516 13518 13520 13522 13524 13526 13528 13530 13532 13534 13536 13538 13540 13542 13544 13546 13548 13550 13552 13553 13554 13555 13556 13557 13558 13559 13560 13561

DATA ITEM SRC 3 Demand Ia SRC 3 Demand Ib SRC 3 Demand Ic SRC 3 Demand Watt SRC 3 Demand Var SRC 3 Demand Va SRC 4 Demand Ia SRC 4 Demand Ib SRC 4 Demand Ic SRC 4 Demand Watt SRC 4 Demand Var SRC 4 Demand Va Synchrocheck 1 Delta Voltage Synchrocheck 1 Delta Frequency Synchrocheck 1 Delta Phase Synchrocheck 2 Delta Voltage Synchrocheck 2 Delta Frequency Synchrocheck 2 Delta Phase DCMA Inputs 1 Value DCMA Inputs 2 Value DCMA Inputs 3 Value DCMA Inputs 4 Value DCMA Inputs 5 Value DCMA Inputs 6 Value DCMA Inputs 7 Value DCMA Inputs 8 Value DCMA Inputs 9 Value DCMA Inputs 10 Value DCMA Inputs 11 Value DCMA Inputs 12 Value DCMA Inputs 13 Value DCMA Inputs 14 Value DCMA Inputs 15 Value DCMA Inputs 16 Value DCMA Inputs 17 Value DCMA Inputs 18 Value DCMA Inputs 19 Value DCMA Inputs 20 Value DCMA Inputs 21 Value DCMA Inputs 22 Value DCMA Inputs 23 Value DCMA Inputs 24 Value RTD Inputs 1 Value RTD Inputs 2 Value RTD Inputs 3 Value RTD Inputs 4 Value RTD Inputs 5 Value RTD Inputs 6 Value RTD Inputs 7 Value RTD Inputs 8 Value RTD Inputs 9 Value RTD Inputs 10 Value

FLEXANALOG NAME SRC 3 Demand Ia SRC 3 Demand Ib SRC 3 Demand Ic SRC 3 Demand Watt SRC 3 Demand var SRC 3 Demand Va SRC 4 Demand Ia SRC 4 Demand Ib SRC 4 Demand Ic SRC 4 Demand Watt SRC 4 Demand var SRC 4 Demand Va Synchchk 1 Delta V Synchchk 1 Delta F Synchchk 1 Delta Phs Synchchk 2 Delta V Synchchk 2 Delta F Synchchk 2 Delta Phs DCMA Inputs 1 Value DCMA Inputs 2 Value DCMA Inputs 3 Value DCMA Inputs 4 Value DCMA Inputs 5 Value DCMA Inputs 6 Value DCMA Inputs 7 Value DCMA Inputs 8 Value DCMA Inputs 9 Value DCMA Inputs 10 Value DCMA Inputs 11 Value DCMA Inputs 12 Value DCMA Inputs 13 Value DCMA Inputs 14 Value DCMA Inputs 15 Value DCMA Inputs 16 Value DCMA Inputs 17 Value DCMA Inputs 18 Value DCMA Inputs 19 Value DCMA Inputs 20 Value DCMA Inputs 21 Value DCMA Inputs 22 Value DCMA Inputs 23 Value DCMA Inputs 24 Value RTD Inputs 1 Value RTD Inputs 2 Value RTD Inputs 3 Value RTD Inputs 4 Value RTD Inputs 5 Value RTD Inputs 6 Value RTD Inputs 7 Value RTD Inputs 8 Value RTD Inputs 9 Value RTD Inputs 10 Value

A-4

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

APPENDIX A
Table A1: FLEXANALOG DATA ITEMS (Sheet 9 of 9)
ADDR 39451 39453 39455 40971 43808 43809 DATA ITEM FlexElement 14 Actual FlexElement 15 Actual FlexElement 16 Actual Current Setting Group VHZ 1 Actual VHZ 2 Actual FLEXANALOG NAME FlexElement 14 Value FlexElement 15 Value FlexElement 16 Value Active Setting Group Volts Per Hertz 1 Volts Per Hertz 2

A.1 PARAMETER LIST

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

A-5

A.1 PARAMETER LIST

APPENDIX A

A-6

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

APPENDIX B APPENDIX B MODBUS COMMUNICATIONSB.1MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL

B.1 MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL B.1.1 INTRODUCTION

The UR-series relays support a number of communications protocols to allow connection to equipment such as personal computers, RTUs, SCADA masters, and programmable logic controllers. The Modicon Modbus RTU protocol is the most basic protocol supported by the UR. Modbus is available via RS232 or RS485 serial links or via ethernet (using the Modbus/TCP specification). The following description is intended primarily for users who wish to develop their own master communication drivers and applies to the serial Modbus RTU protocol. Note that: The UR always acts as a slave device, meaning that it never initiates communications; it only listens and responds to requests issued by a master computer. For Modbus, a subset of the Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) protocol format is supported that allows extensive monitoring, programming, and control functions using read and write register commands. B.1.2 PHYSICAL LAYER The Modbus RTU protocol is hardware-independent so that the physical layer can be any of a variety of standard hardware configurations including RS232 and RS485. The relay includes a faceplate (front panel) RS232 port and two rear terminal communications ports that may be configured as RS485, fiber optic, 10BaseT, or 10BaseF. Data flow is half-duplex in all configurations. See Chapter 3 for details on wiring. Each data byte is transmitted in an asynchronous format consisting of 1 start bit, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, and possibly 1 parity bit. This produces a 10 or 11 bit data frame. This can be important for transmission through modems at high bit rates (11 bit data frames are not supported by many modems at baud rates greater than 300). The baud rate and parity are independently programmable for each communications port. Baud rates of 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 14400, 19200, 28800, 33600, 38400, 57600, or 115200 bps are available. Even, odd, and no parity are available. Refer to the Communications section of Chapter 5 for further details. The master device in any system must know the address of the slave device with which it is to communicate. The relay will not act on a request from a master if the address in the request does not match the relays slave address (unless the address is the broadcast address see below). A single setting selects the slave address used for all ports, with the exception that for the faceplate port, the relay will accept any address when the Modbus RTU protocol is used. B.1.3 DATA LINK LAYER Communications takes place in packets which are groups of asynchronously framed byte data. The master transmits a packet to the slave and the slave responds with a packet. The end of a packet is marked by dead-time on the communications line. The following describes general format for both transmit and receive packets. For exact details on packet formatting, refer to subsequent sections describing each function code. Table B1: MODBUS PACKET FORMAT
DESCRIPTION SLAVE ADDRESS FUNCTION CODE DATA CRC DEAD TIME SIZE 1 byte 1 byte N bytes 2 bytes 3.5 bytes transmission time

SLAVE ADDRESS: This is the address of the slave device that is intended to receive the packet sent by the master and to perform the desired action. Each slave device on a communications bus must have a unique address to prevent bus contention. All of the relays ports have the same address which is programmable from 1 to 254; see Chapter 5 for details. Only the addressed slave will respond to a packet that starts with its address. Note that the faceplate port is an exception to this rule; it will act on a message containing any slave address. A master transmit packet with slave address 0 indicates a broadcast command. All slaves on the communication link take action based on the packet, but none respond to the master. Broadcast mode is only recognized when associated with Function Code 05h. For any other function code, a packet with broadcast mode slave address 0 will be ignored.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

B-1

B.1 MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL

APPENDIX B

FUNCTION CODE: This is one of the supported functions codes of the unit which tells the slave what action to perform. See the Supported Function Codes section for complete details. An exception response from the slave is indicated by setting the high order bit of the function code in the response packet. See the Exception Responses section for further details. DATA: This will be a variable number of bytes depending on the function code. This may include actual values, settings, or addresses sent by the master to the slave or by the slave to the master. CRC: This is a two byte error checking code. The RTU version of Modbus includes a 16-bit cyclic redundancy check (CRC-16) with every packet which is an industry standard method used for error detection. If a Modbus slave device receives a packet in which an error is indicated by the CRC, the slave device will not act upon or respond to the packet thus preventing any erroneous operations. See the CRC-16 Algorithm section for details on calculating the CRC. DEAD TIME: A packet is terminated when no data is received for a period of 3.5 byte transmission times (about 15 ms at 2400 bps, 2 ms at 19200 bps, and 300 s at 115200 bps). Consequently, the transmitting device must not allow gaps between bytes longer than this interval. Once the dead time has expired without a new byte transmission, all slaves start listening for a new packet from the master except for the addressed slave. B.1.4 CRC-16 ALGORITHM

The CRC-16 algorithm essentially treats the entire data stream (data bits only; start, stop and parity ignored) as one continuous binary number. This number is first shifted left 16 bits and then divided by a characteristic polynomial (11000000000000101B). The 16 bit remainder of the division is appended to the end of the packet, MSByte first. The resulting packet including CRC, when divided by the same polynomial at the receiver will give a zero remainder if no transmission errors have occurred. This algorithm requires the characteristic polynomial to be reverse bit ordered. The most significant bit of the characteristic polynomial is dropped, since it does not affect the value of the remainder. A C programming language implementation of the CRC algorithm will be provided upon request. Table B2: CRC-16 ALGORITHM
SYMBOLS: --> A Alow Ahigh CRC i,j (+) N Di G shr (x) ALGORITHM: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. data transfer 16 bit working register low order byte of A high order byte of A 16 bit CRC-16 result loop counters logical EXCLUSIVE-OR operator total number of data bytes i-th data byte (i = 0 to N-1) 16 bit characteristic polynomial = 1010000000000001 (binary) with MSbit dropped and bit order reversed right shift operator (th LSbit of x is shifted into a carry flag, a '0' is shifted into the MSbit of x, all other bits are shifted right one location) FFFF (hex) --> A 0 --> i 0 --> j Di (+) Alow --> Alow j + 1 --> j shr (A) Is there a carry? Is j = 8? i + 1 --> i Is i = N? A --> CRC No: go to 3; Yes: continue No: go to 8; Yes: G (+) A --> A and continue. No: go to 5; Yes: continue

B-2

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

APPENDIX B B.2MODBUS FUNCTION CODES

B.2 MODBUS FUNCTION CODES B.2.1 SUPPORTED FUNCTION CODES

Modbus officially defines function codes from 1 to 127 though only a small subset is generally needed. The relay supports some of these functions, as summarized in the following table. Subsequent sections describe each function code in detail.
FUNCTION CODE HEX 03 04 05 06 10 DEC 3 4 5 6 16 Read Holding Registers Read Holding Registers Force Single Coil Preset Single Register Preset Multiple Registers Read Actual Values or Settings Read Actual Values or Settings Execute Operation Store Single Setting Store Multiple Settings MODBUS DEFINITION GE MULTILIN DEFINITION

B.2.2 READ ACTUAL VALUES OR SETTINGS (FUNCTION CODE 03/04H) This function code allows the master to read one or more consecutive data registers (actual values or settings) from a relay. Data registers are always 16 bit (two byte) values transmitted with high order byte first. The maximum number of registers that can be read in a single packet is 125. See the Modbus Memory Map table for exact details on the data registers. Since some PLC implementations of Modbus only support one of function codes 03h and 04h, the relay interpretation allows either function code to be used for reading one or more consecutive data registers. The data starting address will determine the type of data being read. Function codes 03h and 04h are therefore identical. The following table shows the format of the master and slave packets. The example shows a master device requesting 3 register values starting at address 4050h from slave device 11h (17 decimal); the slave device responds with the values 40, 300, and 0 from registers 4050h, 4051h, and 4052h, respectively. Table B3: MASTER AND SLAVE DEVICE PACKET TRANSMISSION EXAMPLE
MASTER TRANSMISSION PACKET FORMAT SLAVE ADDRESS FUNCTION CODE DATA STARTING ADDRESS - high DATA STARTING ADDRESS - low NUMBER OF REGISTERS - high NUMBER OF REGISTERS - low CRC - low CRC - high EXAMPLE (HEX) 11 04 40 50 00 03 A7 4A SLAVE RESPONSE PACKET FORMAT SLAVE ADDRESS FUNCTION CODE BYTE COUNT DATA #1 - high DATA #1 - low DATA #2 - high DATA #2 - low DATA #3 - high DATA #3 - low CRC - low CRC - high EXAMPLE (HEX) 11 04 06 00 28 01 2C 00 00 0D 60

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

B-3

B.2 MODBUS FUNCTION CODES

APPENDIX B B.2.3 EXECUTE OPERATION (FUNCTION CODE 05H)

This function code allows the master to perform various operations in the relay. Available operations are shown in the Summary of Operation Codes table below. The following table shows the format of the master and slave packets. The example shows a master device requesting the slave device 11h (17 decimal) to perform a reset. The high and low code value bytes always have the values FF and 00 respectively and are a remnant of the original Modbus definition of this function code. Table B4: MASTER AND SLAVE DEVICE PACKET TRANSMISSION EXAMPLE
MASTER TRANSMISSION PACKET FORMAT SLAVE ADDRESS FUNCTION CODE OPERATION CODE - high OPERATION CODE - low CODE VALUE - high CODE VALUE - low CRC - low CRC - high EXAMPLE (HEX) 11 05 00 01 FF 00 DF 6A SLAVE RESPONSE PACKET FORMAT SLAVE ADDRESS FUNCTION CODE OPERATION CODE - high OPERATION CODE - low CODE VALUE - high CODE VALUE - low CRC - low CRC - high EXAMPLE (HEX) 11 05 00 01 FF 00 DF 6A

Table B5: SUMMARY OF OPERATION CODES FOR FUNCTION 05H


OPERATION CODE (HEX) 0000 0001 0005 0006 1000 to 103F DEFINITION NO OPERATION RESET CLEAR EVENT RECORDS CLEAR OSCILLOGRAPHY VIRTUAL IN 1 to 64 ON/OFF DESCRIPTION Does not do anything. Performs the same function as the faceplate RESET key. Performs the same function as the faceplate CLEAR EVENT RECORDS menu

command.

Clears all oscillography records. Sets the states of Virtual Inputs 1 to 64 either ON or OFF.

B.2.4 STORE SINGLE SETTING (FUNCTION CODE 06H) This function code allows the master to modify the contents of a single setting register in an relay. Setting registers are always 16 bit (two byte) values transmitted high order byte first. The following table shows the format of the master and slave packets. The example shows a master device storing the value 200 at memory map address 4051h to slave device 11h (17 dec). Table B6: MASTER AND SLAVE DEVICE PACKET TRANSMISSION EXAMPLE
MASTER TRANSMISSION PACKET FORMAT SLAVE ADDRESS FUNCTION CODE DATA STARTING ADDRESS - high DATA STARTING ADDRESS - low DATA - high DATA - low CRC - low CRC - high EXAMPLE (HEX) 11 06 40 51 00 C8 CE DD SLAVE RESPONSE PACKET FORMAT SLAVE ADDRESS FUNCTION CODE DATA STARTING ADDRESS - high DATA STARTING ADDRESS - low DATA - high DATA - low CRC - low CRC - high EXAMPLE (HEX) 11 06 40 51 00 C8 CE DD

B-4

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

APPENDIX B

B.2 MODBUS FUNCTION CODES B.2.5 STORE MULTIPLE SETTINGS (FUNCTION CODE 10H)

This function code allows the master to modify the contents of a one or more consecutive setting registers in a relay. Setting registers are 16-bit (two byte) values transmitted high order byte first. The maximum number of setting registers that can be stored in a single packet is 60. The following table shows the format of the master and slave packets. The example shows a master device storing the value 200 at memory map address 4051h, and the value 1 at memory map address 4052h to slave device 11h (17 decimal). Table B7: MASTER AND SLAVE DEVICE PACKET TRANSMISSION EXAMPLE
MASTER TRANSMISSION PACKET FORMAT SLAVE ADDRESS FUNCTION CODE DATA STARTING ADDRESS - hi DATA STARTING ADDRESS - lo NUMBER OF SETTINGS - hi NUMBER OF SETTINGS - lo BYTE COUNT DATA #1 - high order byte DATA #1 - low order byte DATA #2 - high order byte DATA #2 - low order byte CRC - low order byte CRC - high order byte EXAMPLE (HEX) 11 10 40 51 00 02 04 00 C8 00 01 12 62 SLAVE RESPONSE PACKET FORMAT SLAVE ADDRESS FUNCTION CODE DATA STARTING ADDRESS - hi DATA STARTING ADDRESS - lo NUMBER OF SETTINGS - hi NUMBER OF SETTINGS - lo CRC - lo CRC - hi EXMAPLE (HEX) 11 10 40 51 00 02 07 64

B.2.6 EXCEPTION RESPONSES Programming or operation errors usually happen because of illegal data in a packet. These errors result in an exception response from the slave. The slave detecting one of these errors sends a response packet to the master with the high order bit of the function code set to 1. The following table shows the format of the master and slave packets. The example shows a master device sending the unsupported function code 39h to slave device 11. Table B8: MASTER AND SLAVE DEVICE PACKET TRANSMISSION EXAMPLE
MASTER TRANSMISSION PACKET FORMAT SLAVE ADDRESS FUNCTION CODE CRC - low order byte CRC - high order byte EXAMPLE (HEX) 11 39 CD F2 SLAVE RESPONSE PACKET FORMAT SLAVE ADDRESS FUNCTION CODE ERROR CODE CRC - low order byte CRC - high order byte EXAMPLE (HEX) 11 B9 01 93 95

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

B-5

B.3 FILE TRANSFERS B.3FILE TRANSFERS a) DESCRIPTION

APPENDIX B B.3.1 OBTAINING RELAY FILES VIA MODBUS

The UR relay has a generic file transfer facility, meaning that you use the same method to obtain all of the different types of files from the unit. The Modbus registers that implement file transfer are found in the "Modbus File Transfer (Read/Write)" and "Modbus File Transfer (Read Only)" modules, starting at address 3100 in the Modbus Memory Map. To read a file from the UR relay, use the following steps: 1. Write the filename to the "Name of file to read" register using a write multiple registers command. If the name is shorter than 80 characters, you may write only enough registers to include all the text of the filename. Filenames are not case sensitive. Repeatedly read all the registers in "Modbus File Transfer (Read Only)" using a read multiple registers command. It is not necessary to read the entire data block, since the UR relay will remember which was the last register you read. The "position" register is initially zero and thereafter indicates how many bytes (2 times the number of registers) you have read so far. The "size of..." register indicates the number of bytes of data remaining to read, to a maximum of 244. Keep reading until the "size of..." register is smaller than the number of bytes you are transferring. This condition indicates end of file. Discard any bytes you have read beyond the indicated block size. If you need to re-try a block, read only the "size of.." and "block of data", without reading the position. The file pointer is only incremented when you read the position register, so the same data block will be returned as was read in the previous operation. On the next read, check to see if the position is where you expect it to be, and discard the previous block if it is not (this condition would indicate that the UR relay did not process your original read request).

2.

3. 4.

The UR relay retains connection-specific file transfer information, so files may be read simultaneously on multiple Modbus connections. b) OTHER PROTOCOLS All the files available via Modbus may also be retrieved using the standard file transfer mechanisms in other protocols (for example, TFTP or MMS). c) COMTRADE, OSCILLOGRAPHY, AND DATA LOGGER FILES Oscillography and data logger files are formatted using the COMTRADE file format per IEEE PC37.111 Draft 7c (02 September 1997). The files may be obtained in either text or binary COMTRADE format. d) READING OSCILLOGRAPHY FILES Familiarity with the oscillography feature is required to understand the following description. Refer to the Oscillography section in Chapter 5 for additional details. The Oscillography Number of Triggers register is incremented by one every time a new oscillography file is triggered (captured) and cleared to zero when oscillography data is cleared. When a new trigger occurs, the associated oscillography file is assigned a file identifier number equal to the incremented value of this register; the newest file number is equal to the Oscillography_Number_of_Triggers register. This register can be used to determine if any new data has been captured by periodically reading it to see if the value has changed; if the number has increased then new data is available. The Oscillography Number of Records register specifies the maximum number of files (and the number of cycles of data per file) that can be stored in memory of the relay. The Oscillography Available Records register specifies the actual number of files that are stored and still available to be read out of the relay. Writing Yes (i.e. the value 1) to the Oscillography Clear Data register clears oscillography data files, clears both the Oscillography Number of Triggers and Oscillography Available Records registers to zero, and sets the Oscillography Last Cleared Date to the present date and time. To read binary COMTRADE oscillography files, read the following filenames: OSCnnnn.CFG and OSCnnn.DAT Replace nnn with the desired oscillography trigger number. For ASCII format, use the following file names OSCAnnnn.CFG and OSCAnnn.DAT

B-6

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

APPENDIX B e) READING DATA LOGGER FILES

B.3 FILE TRANSFERS

Familiarity with the data logger feature is required to understand this description. Refer to the Data Logger section of Chapter 5 for details. To read the entire data logger in binary COMTRADE format, read the following files. datalog.cfg and datalog.dat To read the entire data logger in ASCII COMTRADE format, read the following files. dataloga.cfg and dataloga.dat To limit the range of records to be returned in the COMTRADE files, append the following to the filename before writing it: To read from a specific time to the end of the log: <space> startTime To read a specific range of records: <space> startTime <space> endTime Replace <startTime> and <endTime> with Julian dates (seconds since Jan. 1 1970) as numeric text.

f) READING EVENT RECORDER FILES To read the entire event recorder contents in ASCII format (the only available format), use the following filename: EVT.TXT To read from a specific record to the end of the log, use the following filename: EVTnnn.TXT (replace nnn with the desired starting record number) To read from a specific record to another specific record, use the following filename: EVT.TXT xxxxx yyyyy (replace xxxxx with the starting record number and yyyyy with the ending record number) B.3.2 MODBUS PASSWORD OPERATION The COMMAND password is set up at memory location 4000. Storing a value of 0 removes COMMAND password protection. When reading the password setting, the encrypted value (zero if no password is set) is returned. COMMAND security is required to change the COMMAND password. Similarly, the SETTING password is set up at memory location 4002. PRODUCT SETUP PASSWORD SECURITY These are the same settings and encrypted values found in the SETTINGS menu via the keypad. Enabling password security for the faceplate display will also enable it for Modbus, and vice-versa. To gain COMMAND level security access, the COMMAND password must be entered at memory location 4008. To gain SETTING level security access, the SETTING password must be entered at memory location 400A. The entered SETTING password must match the current SETTING password setting, or must be zero, to change settings or download firmware. COMMAND and SETTING passwords each have a 30-minute timer. Each timer starts when you enter the particular password, and is re-started whenever you use it. For example, writing a setting re-starts the SETTING password timer and writing a command register or forcing a coil re-starts the COMMAND password timer. The value read at memory location 4010 can be used to confirm whether a COMMAND password is enabled or disabled (0 for Disabled). The value read at memory location 4011 can be used to confirm whether a SETTING password is enabled or disabled. COMMAND or SETTING password security access is restricted to the particular port or particular TCP/IP connection on which the entry was made. Passwords must be entered when accessing the relay through other ports or connections, and the passwords must be re-entered after disconnecting and re-connecting on TCP/IP.

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

B-7

B.4 MEMORY MAPPING B.4MEMORY MAPPING

APPENDIX B B.4.1 MODBUS MEMORY MAP

Table B9: MODBUS MEMORY MAP (Sheet 1 of 45)


ADDR REGISTER NAME UR Product Type Product Version Serial Number Manufacturing Date Modification Number Order Code Ethernet MAC Address Reserved (13 items) CPU Module Serial Number CPU Supplier Serial Number Ethernet Sub Module Serial Number (8 items) Self Test States (2 items) LED Column n State, n = 1 to 10 (10 items) Display Message Last Key Pressed Simulated keypress -- write zero before each keystroke RANGE 0 to 65535 0 to 655.35 --0 to 4294967295 0 to 65535 ------------0 to 4294967295 0 to 65535 --0 to 47 0 to 42 UNITS ----------------------0 --------STEP 1 0.01 --1 1 ------------1 1 --1 1 FORMAT F001 F001 F203 F050 F001 F204 F072 F001 F203 F203 F203 F143 F501 F204 F530 F190 DEFAULT 0 1 0 0 0 Order Code x 0 0 (none) (none) (none) 0 0 (none) 0 (None) 0 (No key -- use between real keys) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) Product Information (Read Only)

0000 0002 0010 0020 0022 0040 0090 0093 00A0 00B0 00C0 0200 0204 0220 0248 0280

Product Information (Read Only -- Written by Factory)

Self Test Targets (Read Only) Front Panel (Read Only)

Keypress Emulation (Read/Write)

Virtual Input Commands (Read/Write Command) (64 modules) 0400 0401 0402 0403 0404 0405 0406 0407 0408 0409 040A 040B 040C 040D 040E 040F 0410 0411 0412 0413 0414 0415 0416 0417 0418 0419 041A 041B Virtual Input 1 State Virtual Input 2 State Virtual Input 3 State Virtual Input 4 State Virtual Input 5 State Virtual Input 6 State Virtual Input 7 State Virtual Input 8 State Virtual Input 9 State Virtual Input 10 State Virtual Input 11 State Virtual Input 12 State Virtual Input 13 State Virtual Input 14 State Virtual Input 15 State Virtual Input 16 State Virtual Input 17 State Virtual Input 18 State Virtual Input 19 State Virtual Input 20 State Virtual Input 21 State Virtual Input 22 State Virtual Input 23 State Virtual Input 24 State Virtual Input 25 State Virtual Input 26 State Virtual Input 27 State Virtual Input 28 State 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 --------------------------------------------------------1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108

B-8

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

APPENDIX B Table B9: MODBUS MEMORY MAP (Sheet 2 of 45)


ADDR 041C 041D 041E 041F 0420 0421 0422 0423 0424 0425 0426 0427 0428 0429 042A 042B 042C 042D 042E 042F 0430 0431 0432 0433 0434 0435 0436 0437 0438 0439 043A 043B 043C 043D 043E 043F 0800 0802 0804 0806 0808 0810 0818 0820 0828 0830 0838 0900 1000 REGISTER NAME Virtual Input 29 State Virtual Input 30 State Virtual Input 31 State Virtual Input 32 State Virtual Input 33 State Virtual Input 34 State Virtual Input 35 State Virtual Input 36 State Virtual Input 37 State Virtual Input 38 State Virtual Input 39 State Virtual Input 40 State Virtual Input 41 State Virtual Input 42 State Virtual Input 43 State Virtual Input 44 State Virtual Input 45 State Virtual Input 46 State Virtual Input 47 State Virtual Input 48 State Virtual Input 49 State Virtual Input 50 State Virtual Input 51 State Virtual Input 52 State Virtual Input 53 State Virtual Input 54 State Virtual Input 55 State Virtual Input 56 State Virtual Input 57 State Virtual Input 58 State Virtual Input 59 State Virtual Input 60 State Virtual Input 61 State Virtual Input 62 State Virtual Input 63 State Virtual Input 64 State Digital Counter 1 Value Digital Counter 1 Frozen Digital Counter 1 Frozen Time Stamp Digital Counter 1 Frozen Time Stamp us ...Repeated for Digital Counter 2 ...Repeated for Digital Counter 3 ...Repeated for Digital Counter 4 ...Repeated for Digital Counter 5 ...Repeated for Digital Counter 6 ...Repeated for Digital Counter 7 ...Repeated for Digital Counter 8 FlexState Bits (16 items) Element Operate States (64 items) 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 ----1 1 RANGE 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 -2147483647 to 2147483647 -2147483647 to 2147483647 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295 UNITS --------------------------------------------------------------------------------STEP 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

FORMAT F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F108 F004 F004 F050 F003

DEFAULT 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 (Off) 0 0 0 0

Digital Counter States (Read Only Non-Volatile) (8 modules)

FlexStates (Read Only) F001 F502 0 0 Element States (Read Only)

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

B-9

B.4 MEMORY MAPPING Table B9: MODBUS MEMORY MAP (Sheet 3 of 45)
ADDR 1080 1200 REGISTER NAME Formatted user-definable displays (16 items) User Map Values (256 items) Target Sequence Number of Targets Target to Read Target Message Contact Input States (6 items) Virtual Input States (8 items) Contact Output States (4 items) Contact Output Current States (4 items) Contact Output Voltage States (4 items) Virtual Output States (6 items) Contact Output Detectors (4 items) Remote Device 1 States Remote Input States (4 items) Remote Devices Online Remote Device 1 StNum Remote Device 1 SqNum ...Repeated for Remote Device 2 ...Repeated for Remote Device 3 ...Repeated for Remote Device 4 ...Repeated for Remote Device 5 ...Repeated for Remote Device 6 ...Repeated for Remote Device 7 ...Repeated for Remote Device 8 ...Repeated for Remote Device 9 ...Repeated for Remote Device 10 ...Repeated for Remote Device 11 ...Repeated for Remote Device 12 ...Repeated for Remote Device 13 ...Repeated for Remote Device 14 ...Repeated for Remote Device 15 ...Repeated for Remote Device 16 Direct input states (6 items) Direct outputs average message return time 1 Direct outputs average message return time 2 Direct inputs/outputs unreturned message count - Ch. 1 Direct inputs/outputs unreturned message count - Ch. 2 Direct device states Reserved Direct inputs/outputs CRC fail count 1 Direct inputs/outputs CRC fail count 2 Ethernet primary fibre channel status Ethernet secondary fibre channel status 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 2 0 to 2 --ms ms ----------------1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 F500 F001 F001 F001 F001 F500 F001 F001 F001 F134 F134 RANGE --0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 --0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 0 to 1 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295 UNITS ------------------------------------STEP --1 1 1 1 --1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 FORMAT F200 F001 F001 F001 F001 F200 F500 F500 F500 F500 F500 F500 F500 F500 F500 F126 F003 F003

APPENDIX B

DEFAULT (none) 0 0 0 0 . 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (No) 0 0

User Displays Actuals (Read Only) Modbus User Map Actuals (Read Only) Element Targets (Read Only) 14C0 14C1 14C2 14C3 1500 1508 1510 1518 1520 1528 1530 1540 1542 1550 1551 1553 1555 1559 155D 1561 1565 1569 156D 1571 1575 1579 157D 1581 1585 1589 158D 15C0 15C8 15C9 15CA 15CB 15D0 15D1 15D2 15D3 1610 1611

Element Targets (Read/Write) Element Targets (Read Only) Digital Input/Output States (Read Only)

Remote Input/Output States (Read Only)

Remote Device Status (Read Only) (16 modules)

Platform Direct Input/Output States (Read Only) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (Fail) 0 (Fail)

Ethernet Fibre Channel Status (Read/Write)

B-10

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

APPENDIX B Table B9: MODBUS MEMORY MAP (Sheet 4 of 45)


ADDR 1618 1619 161B 161D 1660 1662 1664 1666 1668 166A 1670 1672 1680 1682 16A0 16A2 16A4 16A8 16AC 16B0 16B4 16E0 16E1 16E4 16E8 16EC 1800 1802 1804 1806 1808 180A 180B 180D 180E 1810 1811 1813 1814 1816 1818 1819 181B 181C 181E 181F 1821 REGISTER NAME Data logger channel count Time of oldest available samples Time of newest available samples Data logger duration Generator Differential Iad Generator Restraint Iar Generator Differential Ibd Generator Restraint Ibr Generator Differential Icd Generator Restraint Icr Stator Ground Vn 3rd Stator Ground Vn V0 3rd Sensitive Directional Power 1 Power Sensitive Directional Power 2 Power Differential Ground Current Magnitude Restricted Ground Current Magnitude ...Repeated for Restricted Ground Fault 2 ...Repeated for Restricted Ground Fault 3 ...Repeated for Restricted Ground Fault 4 ...Repeated for Restricted Ground Fault 5 ...Repeated for Restricted Ground Fault 6 Frequency Rate of Change 1 Reserved (3 items) ...Repeated for Frequency Rate of Change 2 ...Repeated for Frequency Rate of Change 3 ...Repeated for Frequency Rate of Change 4 Source 1 Phase A Current RMS Source 1 Phase B Current RMS Source 1 Phase C Current RMS Source 1 Neutral Current RMS Source 1 Phase A Current Magnitude Source 1 Phase A Current Angle Source 1 Phase B Current Magnitude Source 1 Phase B Current Angle Source 1 Phase C Current Magnitude Source 1 Phase C Current Angle Source 1 Neutral Current Magnitude Source 1 Neutral Current Angle Source 1 Ground Current RMS Source 1 Ground Current Magnitude Source 1 Ground Current Angle Source 1 Zero Sequence Current Magnitude Source 1 Zero Sequence Current Angle Source 1 Positive Sequence Current Magnitude Source 1 Positive Sequence Current Angle Source 1 Negative Sequence Current Magnitude Source 1 Negative Sequence Current Angle 0 to 999999.999 0 to 999999.999 0 to 999999.999 0 to 999999.999 0 to 999999.999 -359.9 to 0 0 to 999999.999 -359.9 to 0 0 to 999999.999 -359.9 to 0 0 to 999999.999 -359.9 to 0 0 to 999999.999 0 to 999999.999 -359.9 to 0 0 to 999999.999 -359.9 to 0 0 to 999999.999 -359.9 to 0 0 to 999999.999 -359.9 to 0 A A A A A degrees A degrees A degrees A degrees A A degrees A degrees A degrees A degrees 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.1 0.001 0.1 0.001 0.1 0.001 0.1 0.001 0.001 0.1 0.001 0.1 0.001 0.1 0.001 0.1 -327.67 to 327.67 0 to 65535 Hz/s --0.01 1 RANGE 0 to 16 0 to 4294967295 0 to 4294967295 0 to 999.9 0 to 999999.999 0 to 999999.999 0 to 999999.999 0 to 999999.999 0 to 999999.999 0 to 999999.999 0 to 999999.999 0 to 999999.999
-2147483647 to 2147483647 -2147483647 to 2147483647

B.4 MEMORY MAPPING

UNITS channel seconds seconds days A A A A A A V V W W A A

STEP 1 1 1 0.1 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 1 1 0.001 0.001

FORMAT F001 F050 F050 F001 F060 F060 F060 F060 F060 F060 F060 F060 F060 F060 F060 F060

DEFAULT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Data Logger Actuals (Read Only)

Stator Differential Actuals (Read Only)

Stator Ground Actuals (Read Only)

Sensitive Directional Power Actuals (Read Only) (2 modules)

Restricted Ground Fault Currents (Read Only) (6 modules) 0 to 999999.999 0 to 999999.999

Frequency Rate of Change Actuals (Read Only) (4 modules) F002 F001 0 0

Source Current (Read Only) (6 modules) F060 F060 F060 F060 F060 F002 F060 F002 F060 F002 F060 F002 F060 F060 F002 F060 F002 F060 F002 F060 F002 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

GE Multilin

G60 Generator Management Relay

B-11

B.4 MEMORY MAPPING Table B9: MODBUS MEMORY MAP (Sheet 5 of 45)
ADDR 1822 1824 1825 1840 1880 18C0 1900 1940 1A00 1A02 1A04 1A06 1A08 1A09 1A0B 1A0C 1A0E 1A0F 1A11 1A13 1A15 1A17 1A18 1A1A 1A1B 1A1D 1A1E 1A20 1A22 1A23 1A25 1A26 1A28 1A29 1A2B 1A2C 1A40 1A80 1AC0 1B00 1B40 1C00 1C02 1C04 1C06 1C08 1C0A REGISTER NAME Source 1 Differential Ground Current Magnitude Source 1 Differential Ground Current Angle Reserved (27 items) ...Repeated for Source 2 ...Repeated for Source 3 ...Repeated for Source 4 ...Repeated for Source 5 ...Repeated for Source 6 Source 1 Phase AG Voltage RMS Source 1 Phase BG Voltage RMS Source 1 Phase CG Voltage RMS Source 1 Phase AG Voltage Magnitude Source 1 Phase AG Voltage Angle Source 1 Phase BG Voltage Magnitude Source 1 Phase BG Voltage Angle Source 1 Phase CG Voltage Magnitude Source 1 Phase CG Voltage Angle Source 1 Phase AB or AC Voltage RMS Source 1 Phase BC or BA Voltage RMS Source 1 Phase CA or CB Voltage RMS Source 1 Phase AB or AC Voltage Magnitude Source 1 Phase AB or AC Voltage Angle Source 1 Phase BC or BA Voltage Magnitude Source 1 Phase BC or BA Voltage Angle Source 1 Phase CA or CB Voltage Magnitude Source 1 Phase CA or CB Voltage Angle Source 1 Auxiliary Voltage RMS Source 1 Auxiliary Voltage Magnitude Source 1 Auxiliary Voltage Angle Source 1 Zero Sequence Voltage Magnitude Source 1 Zero Sequence Voltage Angle Source 1 Positive Sequence Voltage Magnitude Source 1 Positive Sequence Voltage Angle Source 1 Negative Sequence Voltage Magnitude Source 1 Negative Sequence Voltage Angle Reserved (20 items) ...Repeated for Source 2 ...Repeated for Source 3 ...Repeated for Source 4 ...Repeated for Source 5 ...Repeated for Source 6 Source 1 Three Phase Real Power Source 1 Phase A Real Power Source 1 Phase B Real Power Source 1 Phase C Real Power Source 1 Three Phase Reactive Power Source 1 Phase A Reactive Power -1000000000000 to 1000000000000 -1000000000000 to 1000000000000 -1000000000000 to 1000000000000 -1000000000000 to 1000000000000 -1000000000000 to 1000000000000 -1000000000000 to 1000000000000 W W W W var var 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 F060 F060 F060 F060 F060 F060 0 to 999999.999 0 to 999999.999 0 to 999999.999 0 to 999999.999 -359.9 to 0 0 to 999999.999 -359.9 to 0 0 to 999999.999 -359.9 to 0 0 to 999999.999 0 to 999999.999 0 to 999999.999 0 to 999999.999 -359.9 to 0 0 to 999999.999 -359.9 to 0 0 to 999999.999 -359.9 to 0 0 to 999999.999 0 to 999999.999 -359.9 to 0 0 to 999999.999 -359.9 to 0 0 to 999999.999 -359.9 to 0 0 to 999999.999 -359.9 to 0 --V V V V degrees V degrees V degrees V V V V degrees V degrees V degrees V V degrees V degrees V degrees V degrees --0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.1 0.001 0.1 0.001 0.1 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.1 0.001 0.1 0.001 0.1 0.001 0.001 0.1 0.001 0.1 0.001 0.1 0.001 0.1 --F060 F060 F060 F060 F002 F060 F002 F060 F002 F060 F060 F060 F060 F002 F060 F002 F060 F002 F060 F060 F002 F060 F002 F060 F002 F060 F002 F001 RANGE 0 to 999999.999 -359.9 to 0 --UNITS A degrees --STEP 0.001 0.1 --FORMAT F060 F002 F001

APPENDIX B

DEFAULT 0 0 0

Source Voltage (Read Only) (6 modules) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Source Power (Read Only) (6 modules) 0 0 0 0 0 0

B-12

G60 Generator Management Relay

GE Multilin

APPENDIX B Table B9: MODBUS MEMORY MAP (Sheet 6 of 45)


ADDR 1C0C 1C0E 1C10 1C12 1C14 1C16 1C18 1C19 1C1A 1C1B 1C1C 1C20 1C40 1C60 1C80 1CA0 1D00 1D02 1D04 1D06 1D08 1D10 1D20 1D30 1D40 1D50 1D60 1D80 1D81 1D82 1D83 1D84 1D85 2230 2400 2402 2403 2404 2B00 2D00 2D80 2E00 REGISTER NAME Source 1 Phase B Reactive Power Source 1 Phase C Reactive Power Source 1 Three Phase Apparent Power Source 1 Phase A Apparent Power Source 1 Phase B Apparent Power Source 1 Phase C Apparent Power Source 1 Three Phase Power Factor Source 1 Phase A Power Factor Source 1 Phase B Power Factor Source 1 Phase C Power Factor Reserved (4 items) ...Repeated for Source 2 ...Repeated for Source 3 ...Repeated for Source 4 ...Repeated for Source 5 ...Repeated for Source 6 Source 1 Positive Watthour Source 1 Negative Watthour Source 1 Positive Varhour Source 1 Negative Varhour Reserved (8 items) ...Repeated for Source 2 ...Repeated for Source 3 ...Repeated for Source 4 ...Repeated for Source 5 ...Repeated for Source 6 Energy Clear Command Frequency for Source 1 Frequency for Source 2 Frequency for Source 3 Frequency for Source 4 Frequency for Source 5 Frequency for Source 6 Reset Unauthorized Access Synchrocheck 1 Delta Voltage Synchrocheck 1 Delta Frequency Synchrocheck 1 Delta Phase ...Repeated for Synchrocheck 2 FlexStates, one per register (256 items) Contact Input States, one per register (96 items) Contact Output States, one per register (64 items) Virtual Output States, one per register (96 items) 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to